Home

Toshiba DK424 Telephone User Manual

image

Contents

1. uolje S 9 We sis 3 159 System amp Station Program 72 DNIS Number Network Table Assignments Program 72 Overview This program defines the external Network routing numbers that can be assigned DNIS Tie DID extension numbers in the Day Day2 or Night ringing mode This assignment will cause incoming DNIS Tie DID calls to route forward back out over a public or private telephone network to a pre assigned telephone number To assign a Tie DID line to Program 72 assignments The DNIS Tie DID extension number must be assigned to route to the appropriate Network routing number in Program 71 1 This program can also be used with non DNIS or ANI only Tie and or DID Lines to assign normal incoming Tie DID calls to route back out over the public or private telephone network to an external telephone number Important e Tie DID lines used for DNIS network routing must be enabled with tandem Two CO line connection with Program 15 Code 5 and Program 10 1 LED 20 e DNIS Network routing numbers will not be restricted by DK424 Toll Restriction assignments e Tie DID lines must have LED 05 On in Program 17 to use the DID Tie DNIS routing assignments in Program 71 and 72 e DNIS network calls are timed by the Program 12 disconnect timer which if set to default will disconnect the
2. Program Type Station Initialized Default See Program 38 1 2 3 Spkr 3 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Port Number on i Code Enter the port number s to which class of service must be assigned Press LED Button to be defined To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Port No 1 a EE Port No sy z So F Port No x a o 5 Port No Ms ce a Location Location Location Location Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code 10 20 10 20 10 20 09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19 08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18 07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17 06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16 05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15 04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14 03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 01 11 01 11 01 11 01 11 Port No s a a Port No K F Di F Port No ee a at F Port No R o a Location Location Location Location Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19 08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18 07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17 06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16 05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15 04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14 03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 01 11 01 11 01 11 01 11 Port No aa Wea alta E a aia E Pasig Location Location Location Location Button Code Butto
3. Program 66 7 Overview This program assigns Listed Directory Numbers LDNs to each ISDN trunk group 7 35 ISDN Program 67 1 Trunk Group Call Direction Program 67 1 Trunk Group Call Direction Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Both Way 1 2 3 Spkr 6 7 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 __ DIR Call Direction Enter the Trunk Group 1 Incoming 2 Outgoing 01 16 3 Both Way Value Tunis Groups Call Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Incoming 2 Outgoing 3 Both Way Program 67 1 Overview This program assigns the call direction for each ISDN trunk group 7 36 ISDN Program 67 2 Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported Program 67 2 Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Release 4 0 and 4 1 blank Release 4 15 and higher all LEDs On for Time Zone 1 1 2 3 Spkr 6 7
4. Program 27 Overview 3 68 This program sets the initial off hook volume level for each digital telephone handset and or headset This level can be changed with the digital telephone s volume control button while the handset or headset is off hook but it will return to the default level set in this program after the handset is placed on hook The volume level range for digital telephone handsets is 0 8 with 0 as the lowest volume Anytime a handset is off hook the station user can adjust the volume level anywhere between 0 8 The level setting established in this program however can only be from 1 4 System amp Station Program 28 DSS Console Attendant Telephone Assignments Program 28 DSS Console Attendant Telephone Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Assigns Console 1 to Attendant Telephone 1 Console 2 to Attendant Telephone 2 etc Deeja 2 Spxr 2 8 Hota Spxr _ _ Heta Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 8 DSS ATT 1 8 Enter the DSS console number Enter the attendant digital or electronic telephone Digital DSS consoles DDSS should number be assigned to digital telephones and electronic consoles HDSS should be assigned to electronic telephones Processor DSS Consoles HDSS Consoles DK
5. uole S 9 We sis 1 2 3 Spkr 2 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Digital Station Logical Port Standard Telephone Modem Port Number see notes below Number see notes below Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Logical Port No Modem Port No Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Assignment 4 Assignment 5 Assignment 6 Assignment 7 Assignment 8 Assignment 9 Assignment 10 Notes e Digital Ports include DK14 KSU DK40i Base KSU QCDU2 KCDU PDKU2 and RDSU digital ports e Standard telephone ports include QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU2 RDSU PSTU and PESU standard telephone ports 3 61 System amp Station Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments Program 21 Overview This program assigns modems to the system modem pool Program 21 identifies modems connected to standard telephone ports line side of modem and digital PDIU DS ports RS 232 side of modem With data security groups Program 20 LEDs 17 20 and the call the blocking feature Program 31 LED 04 modem access can be denied or allowed to data users Notes e PDIU DS must be installed on PDKUs in slots designated for DIU ope
6. Physical Port Display Change 02 T1 Assignments 41 42 Pooled CO Lines 16 39 Tandem CO Line Connections 10 1 15 Pooled Line Buttons 16 39 Tenant Service 15 36 39 77 3 74 Pooled Line LED No Flash 31 Tie Lines 03 04 15 17 30 37 71 72 Port Station Number 04 Toll Restriction 10 1 30 35 41 48 45 1 3 Assignment Toll Restriction Override 10 1 Privacy Non Privacy 31 30 39 Toll Restriction Override Code 30 Privacy Override 10 2 30 31 Revision RAM Test see Memory Test 00 Part 2 Toshiba Proprietary VM 03 10 2 13 32 Interface Redial Last Number 39 Transfer Privacy 10 1 Remote Administration and H Maintenance 007090917149 Traveling Class 44 1 8 Repeat Last Number Dialed 39 Traveling Class Code Revision 30 Ring Transfer 10 1 37 Verifiable Account Codes 15 30 39 60 69 70 Ringing Repeat 10 1 Verifiable Account Codes 30 Revision Ring Tones 80 Voice Mail Interface 10 2 31 33 39 Ring Flash Assignments 71 73 81 89 81 84 87 Voice or Tone Signaling 05 10 1 10 2 Ringing Line Preference 32 81 89 Volume Reset Digital 92 5 3 Teleph RS 232 Interface 03 41 42 1 20 76 77 1 elephones Volume Set Digital 27 Saved Number Redial 39 Telephones Security Code CF EXT 60 8 Voluntary Account Codes 39 Security Code DISA 05 30 60 6 Security Code R 00 Maintenance Slot Assignment 03 Software Version 00 Speakerphone Assignment 30
7. Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Seg aac oi a nme aay Pe uae cmeay rea eve ae ee 3 150 System amp Station Program 70 Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments Program 70 Overview A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned with this program to each of the 300 Verified Account Codes assigned in Program 69 This class of restriction overrides the normal station class of restriction assigned in Program 48 when a VAC is entered at the station The station resumes its Program 48 restriction after the call is disconnected When a Forced or Voluntary Verified Account Code is dialed at a station after accessing a CO line and before dialing a telephone number the station temporarily assumes the Toll Restriction Class assigned to the Verified Account Code When Program 70 is initialized all Verified Account Codes are assigned as not Toll Restricted data 00 Verified Account Code Toll Restriction class assignments are not user programmable so if the assignments are not known it is recommended to assign a number block of Verified Account Codes to each type of Toll Restriction class For example
8. Enter Line No that will be DID or Tie en Light LED Buttons 01 08 as noted in table below To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Line Numbers LED Button Xx LED On LED Off me he Not used at this time 08 DID Tie line DTMF digits with tones DID Tie line DTMF digits without tones 07 DID Tie line receives ANI and routes per Programs 71 and 72 Teen ady notireceives ANL DID F rogram 109 and 06 Telephone LCD priority is ANI Telephone LCD priority is DNIS 05 DID Tie line routes per DNIS assignments DID Tie line routes per Non DNIS assignments Programs 71 and 72 DID Program 09 and Tie Program 04 04 DID Tie no second dial tone DID Tie second dial tone oe 03 DID line Auto Camp on busy DID line no Camp on busy i 02 Wink Start for Tie or DID Immediate Start for Tie or DID Ro 01 Page and Voice Announce on incoming Tie line Page access for No Page and Voice Announce on incoming Tie line No g Tie DID DNIS lines Page access for Tie DID DNIS lines o 5 Program 17 Overview Program 17 assigns lines for Tie and DID operation Important When normal Tie DID lines are configured with Program 71 and 72 DNIS assignments turn LED 05 On and LED 06 07 and 08 Off for those lines then program the lines as required in Programs 71 and 72 Notes e Each REMU PEMU RDDU or TDDU PCB reduces the station port capacity by four station
9. DAY 82 12 second delay DAY 2 85 12 second delay NIGHT 88 12 second delay 83 24 second delay 86 24 second delay 89 24 second delay Station Port fi Station Port 4 Processor Range DH Port CO Line Processor Range DH Port CO Line DK14 000 009 900 909 001 004 B1CU 000 055 900 915 001 032 DK40i 000 027 900 915 001 012 B2CAU BU 000 111 900 915 001 120 RCTUA 000 031 900 915 001 016 B3CAU BU 000 191 900 915 001 120 RCTUBA BB 000 079 900 915 001 048 B5CAU BU 000 335 900 915 001 200 RCTUC D 000 239 900 915 001 144 RCTUE F 000 335 900 915 001 200 Station or DH Port CO Line LED 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 System amp Station Programs 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Ringing Program 81 89 Overview Programs 81 89 assign telephones or a Distributed Hunt group to each CO line that will ring Use Programs 81 84 and 87 to assign which PDN and or PhDN buttons flash when a call comes in on various CO lines Ifthe telephone has a specific CO Line button or Pooled Line Grp button do not use Programs 81 84 or 87 to assign DN LEDs to flash This will cause both the CO line and DN button to flash on the telephone when the CO line rings on an incoming call Programs 81 84 and 87 data should be blank for CO lines that ring Voice Mail VM ports Always check these programs because 81 and 87 default to port 00
10. Program 55 0 Overview Enter the quantity of digits that should be deleted from the front of the number dialed for each of the Table Numbers in the Delete Digits Table The maximum number is 10 Always make the entry two digits If the Delete Digits Table is activated refer to Programs 45 3 and 45 4 if special dialing codes such as Caller ID blocking etc will be used 5 20 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 55 1 and 2 Add Digits Before and or After the Dialed Number Initialized Default Leaves all tables blank except Delete Digits which are all 00 HK 1 2 3 Spkr 5 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Modified Digits Table 2 see Program 55 and 45 4 Add digits in front of number dialed F MDT Add digits at the end of number dialed E MDT Legend CODE Digits added up to 22 Enter the digits to be added Pauses may be coded as described in the pause entry reference table below Pause Entry Reference Programs 55 1 55 2 Key LED Pause Seconds Record Entry Special Functions Key LED 09 R4 15 ne ie Be ISDN Start Key LCD G Key LED 11 OF a ie Clear All 06 12 P6 Key LED 10 05 10 P5 Convert DP
11. Processor DISA Port jae gd fog special Processor PDN Port Range Initialized PDNs unctions RCTUA 039 032 039 RCTUA 000 031 200 231 RCTUBA BB B1CU 089 080 089 RCTUBA BB 000 079 200 279 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 249 240 249 RCTUC D 000 239 200 239 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 344 336 349 RCTUE F 000 335 100 435 B1CU 000 055 200 255 B2CAU BU 000 111 200 311 B3CAU BU 000 191 200 391 B5CAU BU 000 335 100 435 A Modular Jack i A Modular Jack r 3 Physical S Logical Cabinet and Slot Physical k Logical Cabinet and Slot Ports rocalicn Ports PDN Number Ports Lereeien Ports PDN Number Record Record Cabinet Cabinet Slot Slot Cabinet Cabinet Slot Slot Cabinet Cabinet Slot Slot Cabinet Cabinet Slot Slot uoleys 9 wWe sis 3 15 System amp Station Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment Program 04 Overview Program 04 assigns the Primary Directory Number PDN to each telephone logical port PDNs can be one to four digits PDNs must not conflict with Phantom Directory Numbers PhDNs or DK4 24 Distributed Hunt Directory Numbers set in Program 04 PDNs can be changed using Program 04 but door phone and modem numbering cannot e Door phone standard numbering is 151 159 and 161 163 the internal modem IMDU or RMDS is 19 DK40i and DK424 e _ PDNs cannot begin with the digits 41 49 because 44 i
12. SELECT Port Number Enter the number of the called Station Logical port that needs a Camp on Busy time assigned To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port CAMP On TIME AA Camp on Busy Time Enter the time in seconds 1 3 digits The range is 011 999 seconds 16 65 minutes Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 pot ae og ae nay See ea aS 3 66 System amp Station Program 26 Built in AA Camp on Busy Time Program 26 Overview Note This program only applies to Auto Attendant built in calls to busy or ringing stations it does not apply to ring transfer camp on time from stations or customer supplied Auto Attendant devices see Program 37 Ring Transfer Camp on recall time This program establishes the time it takes for unanswered Auto Attendant calls camped on to busy or ringing DNs to be routed to other destinations The time which is set f
13. Spkr 4 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 91 93 to set Emergency Number 1 3 DATA Emergency Telephone Number 1 4 digits To enter blanks press LED Button 01 ie iee Nli G DATA 1 4 Digit Telephone Number 91 911 default 92 93 If CO lines are behind PBX or Centrex program the PBX Centrex outside CO line access code Example 9 A pause is automatically inserted following the first 9 See Programs 45 2 to assign the CO line and access code for behind PBX Centrex operation Also if the system CO lines are behind Centrex PBX the Centrex PBX CO line access codes must be programmed in front of the emergency telephone number Example If the Centrex PBX access code is 9 then enter 9911 in Program 44 91 Program 44 91 93 Overview This program exempts as many as three special numbers each up to four digits such as the emergency 911 number from Verified Account Code dialing restrictions When dialed these numbers are sent out immediately bypassing any Verified Account Code dialing restrictions set in Programs 69 and 30 button LEDs 8 and 14 respectively If Verified Account Codes assigned in Program 69 conflict duplicate with emergency or other type telephone numbers set in Program 44 91 93 Program 44 91 93 has priority If lines are behind Centrex or PBX progr
14. System amp Station Program 35 Station Class of Service Program 35 Overview LED 19 Busy Station Transfer BST LED 20 Busy Station Ringing BSR BST and BSR operate together to ensure that a busy digital or electronic telephone station always receives transferred line calls along with LED and tone indications The station or Voice Mail VM auto attendant device that transfers the call must be programmed with BST LED 20 On and the station port that receives it must have BSR LED 19 On When a busy station with BSR receives a transfer from a station or VM auto attendant with BST there is a muted repetitive BOV tone see Program 31 LED 11 at the busy station if there is an idle DN its LED will flash at the ringing rate until the station transferring the call hangs up When it does hang up or if there is not an idle DN the line call then camps on to the busy station The busy station is alerted of the camp on by a camp on tone see Program 34 the CO line LED flashes at the exclusive hold rate and a message CAMP ON X X the line number appears on the LCD if equipped Among other applications a VM auto attendant device that transfers calls to a typically busy answering position station benefits from this program Some auto attendant devices cannot transfer a call to a busy station if BST and BSR are not activated Notes e ABST station receives ringback tone instead of bus
15. uOol e S 9 Wa shs 3 73 System amp Station Program 29 Add on Modules Button Assignments 3 74 Program 29 Add on Modules Button Assignments Processor Type Program Type Station DkK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default See Button Assignments on Page 3 75 1 2 3 Spkr 2 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Enter the station logical port of the telephone a CODE will have buttons assigned to its attached Add on See the Code Table below Enter the Add on Module which will have buttons LED 01 20 assigned to it 0 1 or 2 Enter 0 when removing Press the LED that is in the same position as ADMs the Add on Module button being assigned Processor Dial Bin Numbers Diei Bin Numbers COLneRange PSRange DK40i 10 49 60 99 001 012 000 027 RCTUA 10 49 60 99 001 016 000 031 B1iCU 10 49 600 699 001 032 000 055 RCTUBA BB 10 49 600 699 001 048 000 079 B2CAU BU 10 130 600 711 001 120 000 111 B3CAU BU 10 130 600 791 001 120 000 191 RCTUC D 10 49 600 699 001 144 000 239 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 100 139 200 999
16. Physical Modular Jack Logical PDNs Ports Location Record Ports Initialized KSU 1st QCDU2 2nd QCDU2 QSTU2 000 000 10 001 001 11 4 Digital Telephone 002 002 1 2 Ports 003 003 13 004 004 14 2 Digital Telephone 005 005 15 Ports 006 006 16 2 Digital Telephone 007 007 17 Ports 008 008 18 2 Standard Telephone 0092 0092 19 Ports 1 Supports a Digital Telephone or a DDCB Door Phone Control Box 2 Supports Alternate Background Music BGM uole s 9 We sis 3 13 System amp Station Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment DK40i Record Sheet gt 4 2 3 Spkr 0 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number s L PDN 1 4 digits oe see table below ons Initialized Refer to Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration before installing PCBs in slots 15 18 Expansion Slot Configuration Record Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Physical Modular Jack Logical Physical Modular Jack Logical Ports Location Record Ports onal Ports Location Record Ports ene 000 000 016 016 001 001 017 017 002 002 018 018 003 003 019 019 004 004 020 020 005 005 021 021 006 006 022 022 00
17. Spkr Spkr Spkr 3 2 Spkr L VM PORT Voice Mail Message Port Enter the Voice Mail Message Center Port number see ranges below that should be assigned to each station Enter the lowest KSTU2 QSTU2 or RSTU2 port number that is connected to the VM machine SELECT Station Logical Port Number T see ranges below Enter the port number having a Message Center assigned Enter all station ports using the same Voice Mail machine To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port If VM ports are assigned to a Distributed Hunt DH Group in Program 40 enter the port number of the first DH Group member not the DH Group port 900 915 See example following Program 31 record sheet Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port MW Center Port Port MW Center Port Port MW Center Port Port MW Center Port Program 32 Overview This program assigns which Voice Mail Message Center port number will be called when a station user presses the flashing Msg button When using SMDI or DTMF voice mail integration the Voice Mail Port Message Center must be assi
18. Slot Number 51 52 53 S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 Expansion Cabinet 6 Slot Number S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 S67 S68 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 Expansion Cabinet 7 Slot Number S71 72 73 74 S75 S76 77 78 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 and DK424i PCB Codes PCB Code Ports Type PCB Code Ports Type RCOU RGLU2 11 4 Gnd Loop Lines RDTU 71 8 T1 Channels REMU 13 4 Tie Lines 4 Stations RDTU 72 16 T1 Channels RDDU 16 4 DID Lines 4 Stations RDTU 73 24 T1 channels RCOU RCOS 17 8 Loop CO Lines RCTU 91 None RCTU or BCU with 4 CKT RCMU RCMS 19 E911 CAMA RRCS or BRCS 92 None RCTU or BCU with 8 CKT PEKU 21 8 Stations RRCS or BRCS 93 None f RRCTU or BCU with 12 CKT PEKU EOCU 22 8 Stations RRCS or BRCS 94 None PEKU w DSS 23 8 Stations NONE 00 00 PEKU DSS EOCU 24 8 Stations RATU 51 4 Stations PESU 25 6 Stations RSIU 49 I O Interface PESU OCA RCIU2 RCIS 81 8 CKT Caller ID RDSU RSTS Stratagy DK 31 8 VM Ports 2 U Interfaces RDSU RSTS OCA DIU RBUU without RBUS 75 4 stations 4 CO lines r 4 U Interfaces RSTU2 31 8 Stations RBUU with RBUS 76 8 stations 8 CO lines F 2 S T Interfaces PIOU PIOUS RSSU PEPU 41 Remote Maintenance TTY RBSU without RBSS 77 4 stations 4 CO lines PIOU PIOUS RS
19. Trunk Bearer Service Outgoing Pad Incoming Pad Number 61 1 Level 61 2 Level 61 3 Program 61 Overview When analog CO lines use ISDN facilities each analog CO Line needs to be assigned the type of service expected to be used when originating calls The choices are Speech or 3 1 kHz used for modem and fax connections Set the transmission level for outgoing and incoming paths for calls The default is set for 6 dB 7 22 ISDN Program 62 Non ISDN Station Bearer Service Program 62 Non ISDN Station Bearer Service Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI and BRI Initialized Default See below 1 2 3 Spkr 6 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 3 Se ee T DATA Bearer Service 0 or 1 1 Bearer Service 0 3 1 kHz Audio faxes 2 Outgoing Call 1 Speech 3 Incoming Call For options 2 and 3 enter the Station Logical Port Number Pad Level See legend below Enter the port number s being defined To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port G Data Pad Level db Data Pad Level db z 0 0 4 12 62 1 62 2 62 3 Bearer Outgoing
20. Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 4 Select the Auto Attendant device digital announcer AUTO ATT 1 NO Port Enter the standard station logical port number to which the device will be assigned Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 008 009 B1iCU 008 055 DK40i 008 027 B2CAU BU 008 111 RCTUA 008 031 B3CAU BU 008 191 RCTUBA BB 008 079 B5CAU BU 008 335 RCTUC D 008 239 RCTUE F 008 335 Announcement Device Port Number 1 2 3 4 Program 24 Built in AA Secondary Announcement Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default No ports assigned 1 2 4 3 Spkr 2 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 4 Select the Auto Attendant device digital announcer AUTO ATT 2 NO Port Enter the standard station logical port number to which the device will be assigned Note See Program 23 legend for port ranges Announcement Device Port Number 1 2 3 4 3 64 System amp Station Program 25 1 Built in AA Incoming Call Overflow Time Programs 23 and 24 Overview Programs 23 and 24 assign customer supplied Auto Attendant announce
21. Station Number Alert Signal Button No Code Button Number 01 20 Speed Dial Number Alert Signal Button Partner Station Number Ak 427 428 429 AJOJN 430 The Alert Signal is four short bursts of tone sent two times three seconds apart from one partner station when the other partner station when one of the partners presses the Alert Signal button on their telephone An Alert Signal can be sent to stations that are idle or busy or in Call Forward or Do Not Disturb mode No talk path will exist before or after the Alert Signal is activated Important e Both partner stations must have the same Alert Signal button number programmed in Program 39 and the appropriate Speed Dial Number programmed to allow the Alert Signal buttons to operate e Strata AirLink does not support this feature System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments Alert Signal Button Programming Example Station 200 Station 202 Code 427 3 SD 48 202 Signal 1 428 203 Code SD 47 Code SD 47 Code SD 45 430 204 4 2 Code 428 SD 47 200 SD 48 203 Code SD 47 428 202 Station 204 Station 201 an Code 427 D i Code SD 46 429 204 Strata DK Programming 5 00 uolje S 3 We sis 3 123 System amp Station Progra
22. 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 pae Light Button LEDs as defined by the table below If the X column is checked the LED should be On Button LED Xx LED On LED Off 20 Call Waiting LCD Display R4 15 No Call Waiting LCD Display R4 15 19 Tie line tandem 16 connection buffers R4 3 No Tie line tandem connection buffers R4 3 18 Tie line tandem 8 connection buffers R4 3 No Tie line tandem connection buffers R4 3 17 Tie line tandem 4 connection buffers R4 3 No Tie line tandem connection buffers R4 3 16 Not used Not used 15 Single Line Telephone SLT can retrieve held call SLT cannot retrieve held call ISDN Start access code is sent when the Speed Dial 14 SD button is pressed initialized R4 15 ISDN St r aceesscoderisnorsent Receive 3 1kHz audio calls as speech calls only if a 13 progress indicator is sent Always receives 3 1kHz calls 12 BRI T Wait On initialized BRI T Wait Off 11 PRI T Wait On PRI T Wait Off initialized 10 Not used Not Used 09 Listed Directory Numbers LDN Registration will route Unknown number or call type will not route and caller unknown number or call type in numbering plan will hear reorder tone Program 10 4 Overview This program enables various station and line features including Call Waiting Tie line tandem connections Single Line Telephone call retrieval
23. Program 60 8 Overview Changes a telephone s External Call Forward destination to PDNs but not PhDNs from outside the system The person that wishes to change the destination must call into a DISA CO line enter the telephone s PDN 670 and then enter a security code plus the destination telephone number CF EXT ID code must be assigned to a telephone to allow callers to change the Call Forward External destination of that telephone from a remote location by calling in on a DISA CO line The security code 1 15 digits for each telephone is set with this program Important To allow Call Forward External CO lines must be enabled for the following e Two CO line connection in Program 10 1 and Program 15 5 e Outgoing Access in Program 41 including DISA port numbers 3 147 System amp Station Program 69 Verified Account Codes Program 69 Verified Account Codes Processor Type Program Type System Initialized Default Blank DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs oT More Codes 3 Spkr 6 9 Hold Spkr coo Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Verified Account Code Number VACN c Verified Account Code 1 15 digits Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009
24. Spkr Hold Select Class from Legend below Turn LEDs 01 02 03 or 04 On to select restriction option Processor Toll Restriction Class Processor Toll Restriction Class DK14 1 4 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 DK40i 1 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 1 8 RCTUA 1 4 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 1 8 5 Button 01 LED Button 02 LED Button 03 LED Button 04 LED On Off On Off On Off On Off 3 z 2 555 Allowed or Restrict Allow g pao peim paor pao ACsseEcinan Deniedperavc Mme ee ij Restricted Allowed Restricted Allowed f Restriction RES na 4 O or all A Cs Table within the first within the first 4 digits 4 digits 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Programs 46 10 80 Overview This program defines parameters of each Toll Restriction class including dialing plan restrictions and exceptions to previous restrictions This program also relates to Program 47 See Program 47 for more explanation Run these programs for dial 0 01 restriction and long distance information 555 assignments Toll Restriction exceptions and dialing plan restrictions may be defined for each class Programs 46 10 and 46 11 assign Class 1 restriction exceptions and parameters Programs 46 20 and 46 21 assign Class 2 Programs 46 30 and 46 31 assign Class 3 etc LED 01 0 Restricted Mark an X next to LED 01 if operator or operator assisted
25. SLT is N talking on M PDN Y N Telephone May Receive Camp On Tone3 Telephone Receives Beep and Camp On Tone Telephone Does Not Ring Telephone Receives No Ring2 Telephone Receives Ring Tone L PDN belongs to Standard Telephone 2 Ifa digital electronic telephone has an SLT PDN on their telephone and if that telephone is currently using the SLT PDN the SLT will not receive camp on tone 3 See Program 34 Figure 3 2 Strata DK CO Line Button Directory Number DN Button Ringing Control Logic Diagram 3 186 System amp Station Programs 81 84 and 87 Ground Loop Start CO Line to DN LED Flash Assignments Ground Loop Start CO Line Incoming Call LED Control Program 81 and PDN or PhDN button DN on telephone Telephone DN LED 1 HZ Red Program 39 CO Line Button on Telephone Program 39 CO Line Button on Telephone Telephone CO Line Telephone DN No LED Button LED Button LED l Called Green l Called Green 1576 Figure 3 3 Strata DK CO Line Button Directory Number LED Flash Control Logic Diagram Program 81 CO Line to Station DN LED flashing Control Logic also applies to Programs 84 and 87 Program 81 CO Line to Station Ringing Control Logic also applies to Programs 82 89 Important System Record Sheets for Programs 90 91 and 92 appear in the beginning of this section because they must be executed prior to
26. Hold Hold Spkr SELECT Station Logical Port Number s Zp Light LEDs for the port specified in the last step All LEDs marked with an X in the table below should Enter the port numbers to which class of service must be assigned To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port be lit Processor Type Port Range DISA Port Processor Type Port Range DISA Port DK14 000 009 010 B1CU 000 055 089 DK40i 000 027 035 B2CAU BU 000 111 249 RCTUA 000 031 039 B3CAU BU 000 191 249 RCTUBA BB 000 079 089 B5CAU BU 000 335 344 RCTUC D 000 239 249 RCTUE F 000 335 344 Program 16 Port Number Line Group For R4 3 and higher If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Restriction and Number LCR on tandem calls assign a class of service in Programs 30 40 41 43 48 and 56 900 916 00 16 Program ports 900 916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 respectively Port Feature LED SLT ISDN Terminal Dial 20 Privacy Override 19 Executive Override 18 DND Override 17 Change TR Traveling Class Code 16 Change Verified Account Code 15 Verified Account Codes 14 13 SLT Hook Flash Anti Bounce Guard 12 Dial Pulse DTMF Off 11 Change DISA Security Code 10 Change TR Override Code 09 Forced Account Code 08 OCA Automatic originating OCA 07 ABR
27. Hold SELECT Slot Number 00 01 11 78 CARD PCB Code See Reference Table al DK424 Base Cabinet 1 Turn System Power Off 5 sec then On Or Run Program 91 2 Slot Number 00 oj R11 RCTU Si S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 Expansion Cabinet 2 Slot Number S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 Expansion Cabinet 3 Slot Number S31 32 33 S34 S35 S36 S37 S38 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 Expansion Cabinet 4 Slot Number S41 42 S43 44 S45 S46 S47 S48 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424 Expansion Cabinet 5 System amp Station Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments
28. uole s 9 We sis 3 51 System amp Station Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups or Dial 9 Program 16 Overview Use Program 16 to assign each CO line to a CO line group or a general dial 9 group A general group for outside calling is available with a dial 9 access code as the initialized state for all lines Lines can be accessed with a dialing code instead of with a CO Line button This is useful for WATS lines or other facilities and is heavily used in Least Cost Routing and Pooled Line Button assignments Do not attempt to assign a line to more than one group A line need not be assigned to a group If lines are not used they should be taken out of all groups including the dial 9 group Automatic Busy Redial ABR will not function if unconnected unused lines are assigned to a line group Tie Lines If you assign a Tie line for Toll Restriction and LCR on tandem calls Release 4 3 and higher assign a class of service in Programs 30 40 41 43 48 and 56 Program ports 900 916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 respectively 3 52 System amp Station Program 17 DID Tie Line Options Program 17 DID Tie Line Options Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default LED 01 02 Off LED 03 04 On 1 2 3 Spkr 1 7 Hold Spkr I Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold
29. Hold SELECT 3 Enter one of the following pad codes for the Enter the RDTU being transmission of path programmed 1 8 1 6 dB pad 2 3 dB pad 3 0 dB pad 4 3 dB pad RDTU No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 dB pad Initialized PAD_S 5 PAD Code 6 9 dB pad 7 12 dB pad 8 15 dB pad Program 41 3 Overview The transmission path of each RDTU can be set for one of several pad settings Code Decibel Level Code Decibel Level Enter 1 6 decibel dB padding Enter 5 6 dB initialized setting Enter 2 3 dB Enter 6 9 dB Enter 3 0 dB Enter 7 12 dB Enter 4 3 dB Enter 8 15 dB 3 128 System amp Station Program 41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 1 Program 41 4 T1 Span Receive Level Pad Assignments Initialized Default 4 3dB 1 2 3 Spkr 4 1 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 Enter the RDTU being programmed 1 8 RDTU No 1 2 3 PAD Code Enter one of the following pad codes for the transmission of path 6 dB pad 3 dB pad 0 dB pad 3 dB pad 6 dB pad Initialized PAD_R 4 9 dB pad Hou we wot al 12 dB pad 15 dB pad Il ONOoaRWN Note See Program 41 3 Overview on Page 3 128 above for decibel levels uolje S 9 Wa sis 3 129 System amp Station Program 42 1 Primary Timi
30. If you are installing all standard trunk groups skip Program 16 the default is for all standard TGs If you are installing BRI ISDN use Program 16 to assign BRI type and Program 16 to assign BRI CO lines into trunk groups If you are installing PRI use Program 16 to assign PRI types Do not use Program 16 Do not change settings in Program 16 for trunk groups marked for PRI Primary Rate Interface PRI Programming 1 10 11 12 Run Program 16 to define the ISDN trunk group type as non ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI or Basic Rate Interface BRI For BRI trunk groups run Program 16 to assign the trunk groups Then skip to Step 7 For PRI run Program 65 to assign B channels For PRI run Programs 66 1 66 3 to define trunk groups parameters and channels Program 16 will be assigned automatically To assign Call by call features PRI only run Programs 66 2 66 4 67 3 67 4 67 5 to assign Call by Call trunk groups codes and network ID For PRI run Program 67 to assign call direction for ISDN trunk groups and call type capabilities allowed for each trunk group For BRI and PRI run Program 68 to define the parameters for Calling Number to be presented for a call depending upon whether the ISDN trunk group uses DID private numbers or use default number programmed in 68 2 For BRI and PRI run Program 66 5 to assign Listed Directory Numbers LDNs to channel groups and index numbers
31. Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Port Number a Enter the port number of the station that needs a keystrip defined To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port BUTTOn MENU Code Enter the appropriate code Code 21 Code 31 Code 32 Code 33 10 button telephone 20 button A telephone 20 button B telephone 20 button C telephone Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port Button Menu Port Button Menu Button Menu Port Button Menu Port uole S 9 We sis 3 109 System amp Station Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type Program 38 Overview Four telephone button arrangements are provided see the Program 38 System Record Sheet It is best to start with one of these four and then move on to Program 39 where individual buttons may be programmed Initialized data treats all digital telephone ports as 20 button types with 17 CO Line buttons one PDN button one Do Not Disturb button and the Speed Dial button See the System Record Sheet for electronic telephone arrangements Important
32. System amp Station Program 30 Station Class of Service Action press buttons LED buttons LCD Response 6 LED buttons 01 20 LED buttons 01 20 activate features for each station port or port range Make the following selections by turning the appropriate button LED On or Off for each item 01 20 for each port as marked on the system record sheet LED 01 Speakerphone Enabled LED 02 Microphone Key Lock Enabled LED 03 Microphone On at Start of Call LED 04 Not Used LED 05 Speed Dial Allowed LED 06 Automatic Busy Redial Access Enabled LED 07 Automatic Off hook Call Announce LED 08 Forced Account Code Enabled LED 09 Toll Restriction Override Code Revision Authority LED 10 DISA Security Code Change Allowed LED 11 Dial Pulse DTMF Off for Standard Telephone LED 14 Account Codes Verified LED 15 Verified Account Code Revision Authority LED 16 Traveling Class of Service Code Revision Authority LED 17 Do Not Disturb Override Allowed LED 18 Executive Override Allowed LED 19 Privacy Override Allowed LED 20 Not Used If programming a port range the LED indications are as follows LED On all ports in range are enabled for that item LED Off all ports in range are disabled for that item _LED FLASHING some ports in range are enabled and some ports are disabled 7 Hold 30 Select Secure data in system programming Data Programmed 8 Spkr Speaker 30 Select Prepare system for another sele
33. Case 2 Provide the following sequence to callers Announcement 1 followed by Music 1 Announcement 2 and then continuous music until the call is answered by an Agent or until the call overflows refer to Flowchart 6 10 on Page 6 50 Overflow time is determined by the overall queue timer Program 11 1 one second to one hour or no overflow Assigns Announcements 1 and 2 to the appropriate digital announcer standard telephone port Programs 14 31 and 14 32 Assign Announcement 3 to any vacant PDKU or PEKU port Program 14 33 XX ACD Group number DATA Vacant Port Number ZZZ Assign music in Program 14 34 Notes In both Cases 1 and 2 above The vacant port is a digital or electronic telephone port It must not be connected to a telephone when assigned as an announcement port in Program 14 3 A station PCB does not have to be installed for the vacant announcement port Set overflow point to 0 and the destination to the desired Ring No Answer port XXX Program 14 5XX 0 XXX Set overall queue overflow time Program 11 1 and the overall queue overflow destination Program 14 4XX YYY as appropriate for overflow or no overflow Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 6 After Shift Service Destination Program 14 6 After Shift Service Destination Initialized Default Destination Incoming port 000 Ht 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spk
34. Data Button 01 blank Button 02 is wild card any digit from 1 9 uolje1S 9 We sis Credit Card Call Digit Length 01 30 digits see Program 43 Credit Number of digits required when 0 is the first digit dialed if this number of digits is not dialed the system will disconnect the call after 20 seconds 0 is counted as a digit Example 0 714 583 3700 11 digits 11 should be programmed as a minimum in this case 3 145 System amp Station Program 60 2 7 SMDR Output Account Code Digit Length 3 146 Program 60 2 7 Overview This program assigns the type of data to send to the Station Message Detail Report SMDR Item 2 SMDR Threshold Time The time that a call must be in progress before it will register with SMDR can be set to 1 or 10 seconds Item 3 SMDR Output System output to a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR device can include information for both incoming and outgoing calls or only for outgoing calls Local and long distance call data will be sent out Item 4 Forced Voluntary Account Code Digit Length The Account Code entered at a station can vary in length from 4 15 digits For Forced Account Code use a call will not be completed unless the specified number of digits is entered by a station user In the case of Voluntary Account Codes the Account Code will not be sent to the SMDR call record unless the specified number of digits is diale
35. Long Distance Prefix 1 in most areas must be the first digit dialed for long distance calling In such areas the area code is dialed right away The dial plan defines whether the prefix 1 is required for a particular installation s long distance calling Area Office Code Numbering Schemes In most places the middle digit of an area code is 0 or 1 and the middle digit of an office code is 2 9 Toll Restriction examines the first three digit sequence dialed and determines whether it is an area code or an office code Ifthe middle digit is 0 or 1 then the sequence is an area code Ifthe middle digit does not equal 0 or 1 then the sequence is an office code and the office code parameters of the selected dialing plan apply An exception to this rule exists In some places area and office codes are interchangeable The middle digit is always 0 or 1 see Code 3 selection In such a case the system only knows that three digits dialed are an area code if 1 is dialed before them If 1 is not dialed first the system knows the three digits are an office code The dial plan defines the numbering scheme applicable to the installation site Special Common Carrier Number and Digit Length for SPCC numbers of the form 950 XXXX this program can allow credit card calling but will restrict the maximum number of digits dialed to prevent defeat of Toll Restriction Older Strata DK Systems use Plan 1 for dialing plan AC NXX 1 NNX if the install
36. VACs 000 050 no restriction VACs 051 100 total restriction VACs 101 150 Class 1 etc When stations enter VACs they will be unrestricted Range programming is not available Ifdial 0 credit card dialing is allowed use Program 43 to allow designated stations CO lines credit card calling uolje S 9 We sis 3 151 System amp Station Program 71 DNIS Program 71 DNIS Processor Type Program Type DK40i all RCTUs System Initialized Default A Programs blank DNIS Addresses Processor Type DNIS Address Range DK40i 000 199 RCTUA 000 199 RCTUBA BB B1CU 000 349 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 000 499 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 000 499 Program 71 0 DID Tie DNIS ANI Lines kH 1 3 Spkr 7 1 Hold Spkr O Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold DNIS Address see legend hail DNIS Number 2 5 digits Press LED Button 01 to blank out data Program 71 1 3 DNIS Number and ANI Line Routing Assignments A 1k 3 Spkr 7 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold oa Enter 1 2 or 3 1 2 3 Day Ring Assignment Day2 Ring Assignment Night Ring Assignment DNIS ANI Routing De
37. Version D 2 October 1998 Update TBDK 0021 Version D 1 September 1998 Update TBDK 0019 Version D June 1998 Update TBDK 0009 Version C October 1997 Version B April 1997 Version A 1 February 1997 Update TB 16 0003 Version A December 1996 Contents Introduction Organizat OM ays cescictaaes celia sadests E E e ses cssaeds ts E A O Seda teodads gon sad EEO ESE OEE EE EES vil COMVENTIONS 2 2 tseccedtes teats o orones oieee lesbian E anuedat cadeverddeans ta sacs o eana ESAR Vili Relat d Doc ments Me did turnie eenei eden ee asides EEEE SEET EOE SOEN Biss e anasa ix General Desctiptions ze tineo See te cent AEN T A a AEN tne ix Installation and Programming srne een E e E E a E a a a s ix Feature Descriptions sitet eoriet ell ev ie hed EE Gn ane ell se eee ix Us r G de Simonne e e e e aE a O EAE EO EEE E E aS NEE Eea ix Omek Reference Guides oran AA T es ele A eR RN X ECD ROMS haerent aeien a eae E a E codecs ae Ea E ESSENER x Chapter 1 Overview Numerical Program Listin gideren raaa Gian Gator waa 1 1 Alphabetical Program Listing aerie onan ae teases des EA NTT E ERA aa 1 7 How to Program a Strata DK System mesnine oor osn E n E EEE EE Ea AEE a 1 10 Programming Section say Out seis tieeetiissesisiosa taasis clases etager EE i EEE AEE AEEA hA baeni 1 10 Program SEQUENCE riasc ie aa eaaa e a a o A Ea Orta Eer aaa a 1 11 Programming Data Variations cece esseessecsseeseceeceeeeecsaecsaeceseeceesenessaeesaecaecsa
38. e Assign the Message Center to the customer s main answering position a station or the lowest port in VM group of the customer s voice mail device see Program 31 for voice mail group port assignments whichever the customer specifies e When using RS 232 SMDI or DTMF voice mail interface all stations must also be assigned to the message center port in Program 32 and Program 13 This should be the lowest standard telephone port QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU2 connected to the VM device This is also the same lowest port assigned in the Program 31 VM group and the lowest standard telephone port assigned in the Program 40 VM Distributed Hunt Group Do not assign the VM DH Group port number 900 915 as the message center port 3 46 Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A LEDs are Off System amp Station Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options uO e S 9 Wa shs K 1 2 3 Spkr 1 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Program Code qT ie LED Buttons CO line Press Scroll to advance or Page to go Specify CO line by setting LEDs as defined by the back table below When you are finished
39. 1 RMDS requires RSIU and is available with DK424 only IMDU requires PIOU or PIOUS See Programs 77 1 LED 14 and Program 76 for RMDS Only one built in maintenance modem IMDU or RMDS will function at a time in DK424 2 If CO lines should ring telephones before the Auto Attendant answers use Program 81 89 to assign telephones to ring Do not assign telephones in Program 81 89 if the Auto Attendant should answer on the first ring uole S 3 We sis 3 173 System amp Station Program 78 CO Line Special Ringing Assignments 3 174 Program 78 Overview This program assigns ground loop start CO lines to ring over external page during night mode to be used with DISA features for direct access to IMDU RMDS modem for Auto Attendant operation gt gt o Feature 1 Ring Over External Page During Night Mode This program selects which ground loop start CO lines will activate ringing over external paging facilities during the NIGHT mode for Tenants 1 4 The NT Relay on the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU will also be activated if it is in the 1 second On 3 seconds Off mode Feature 2 DISA CO Line Assignment This program assigns ground loop start CO lines to be used with the Direct Inward System Access DISA features These lines may be set for DISA operation during the different system modes of DAY DAY2 and NIGHT A line will switch to normal ringing after ten seconds if the outside caller does not use the DISA feature Normal
40. BRI Service Profile Identifier SPID Parameters c ccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeneceeneeeeees 7 20 Program 60 BRI Line Station Operation Assignment cceceeceescesseceseceseceeeeseeeaeesaeeeseeeneens 7 21 Program 61 Analog Trunk Services for ISDN ou cee ceeeeceesecnseceseeeeeeeeeeseecaaecaaeseeeseceseeeaeesaeenaeens 7 22 Program 62 Non ISDN Station Bearer Service 0 ce eecesececeeeeeseeeeeeescecseceseceseseneeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeens 7 23 Program 63 ISDN Dialing Parameters ces cesceseeeseeeseesseceseceeeseeeeseecaeceaeceseceeeseaeesaeeeaeeaeen 7 24 Program 64 1 Direct Inward Dialing Parameters ce eeceeceseceseeeeeeseececeeceseeeeeeeneesaaecsaeens 7 25 Program 64 2 Number of DID DNIS Digits for Trunk Groups ee ee eeseeseceeeceeeeeseeeneeeaeenseens 7 26 Program 65 ISDN Channel Group Assignment cc eecesceseeeseesseceseceseeeeeseaeesaecsaeceeeseeeeseeenaees 7 27 Program 66 1 Channel Group Number Parameters 00 0 ce ceecceseeseecseceseceseeeeeeeaeeeaeceaeenseeeneeeaees 7 28 Programs 66 2 and 66 4 Call by Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID eee 7 29 Program 66 3 Channel Group Trunk Parameters 20 0 cceeceeeeeseeeseeeseceseceeeeeeeeaeesaeceaeceeeeeneeeaees 7 31 Program 66 5 Line Directory Number LDN Registration 00 0 eeeeeseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeens 7 33 Program 66 6 LDN Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignment eceeeeseeseceteceeee
41. Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies 102 cabinet installations A Toshiba supplied adapter An adapter that is used to connect an SMDR device ASCII maintenance terminal or remote maintenance external modem A Toshiba supplied adapter An adapter that is used to connect the modular SMDR SMDI MIS for ACD Open Architecture OA maintenance ports of the PIOU PIOUS RSSU RSIU or RSIS to the DB 9 PPTC 9 connector of a call accounting machine DK Admin DK Backup personal computer PC SMIS personal computer or Open Architecture personal computer Designed to connect directly to the DB9 connector of PC COM ports while PPTC connects directly to an ASCII terminal female DB25 not a PC COM port male DB25 Used to connect a Call Center Viewer PC or SMIS PC to the RS 232 Strata DK424 MIS port on the PIOU PIOUS RSIU or RSSU Primary Rate Interface Standard Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB an older version of RSTU2 with a built in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals voice mail devices Background Music source fax machines etc The PSTU2 has a square wave ring generator that can be set for 190V peak to peak or 130V peak to peak The PSTU2 is also used with older Strata systems Public Switched Telephone Network CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit DK14 Provides one CO line loop start circ
42. Default Off On DK sends Ringback Tone to Network Off No RBT to Network see above table Trunk Group Type see above table Trunk Group Type see above table A see above table 12 On DMS Custom CO switch 13 15 Sff NI2 CO switch Default is Off Program 66 3 Overview This program assigns ISDN CO switch type and special call treatment for the ISDN service Call treatment includes whether or not operator calls are allowed if carrier access is allowed etc The ISDN service is similar to trunk type such as POTS FX Tie outWATS and inWATS LEDs 11 13 14 15 Programming for ISDN CO Switch Type Determine which type of CO switch is providing the PRI service and set the following programs accordingly This is not necessary for Basic Rate Interface BRI service Most Northern Telecom DMS ISDN switches follow Northern Telecom s PRI custom protocol sometimes referred to as National ISDN Stardard 1 NI1 However some DMS ISDN switches are National ISDN Stardard 2 NI2 Most all ISDN switches manufactured by other companies follow the NI2 standard 7 31 NASI ISDN Program 66 3 Channel Group Trunk Parameters Program DMS 100 Custom Switch NI 2 Switches LED 11 Off LED 11 On LED 13 On Progress ID 81 LED 13 Off Progress ID 83 ane LED 14 On LED 14 Off LED15 On LED 15 Off Program 66 4
43. Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back LED Buttons CO Lines Light LEDs for the port s that are allowed access To turn all CO LEDs On or Off after the port number and is entered press VolA all LEDs On or Vol all LEDs Off To check a particular CO line after the port number is entered press Mode and enter the CO line number then press to display and advance Port Number Processor Type PDN Port Range DISA Port R3 X Processor Type PDN Port Range DISA Port R3 X DK14 000 009 010 B1CU 000 055 089 DK40i 000 027 035 B2CAU BU 000 011 249 RCTUA 000 031 039 B3CAU BU 000 191 249 RCTUBA BB 000 079 089 B5CAU BU 000 335 344 RCTUC D 000 239 249 RCTUE F 000 335 344 Program 16 Line Group Number 900 916 00 16 For R4 3 and higher If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Restriction and LCR on tandem calls assign a class of service in this program Program ports 900 916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 respectively CO Line LED Port 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Toll Restriction Program 40 Station CO Line Access Pro
44. Program 41 allows CO line access via LCR but denies all other outgoing access methods 7001 7200 801 816 Line button Toll Restricted standard telephones should be forced to dial outgoing calls via LCR This is to prevent Toll Restriction defeat when the QRCU3 K4RCU3 K5RCU or RRCS times out LED 01 Enable System LCR LED 01 On LCR software is enabled system wide For the Hospitality Management Information System HMIS this LED must always be set to On LED 01 Off LCR software is disabled None of the LCR programming referred to by this section is recognized Dial 9 access assigned in Program 16 is enabled LED 02 Not used LED 03 555 LDI Route Per Program 50 4 LED 03 On LCR routes long distance information LDI calls over the plan number specified in Program 50 4 LED 03 Off LCR routes LDI calls using area codes specified in route plans in the following table as it would for any other call 5 4 Processor Route Plans ERU Route Plans Supported Supported DK14 8 RCTUBA BB 8 DK40i 8 RCTUC D 16 RCTUA 8 RCTUE F 16 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code LED Button 04 Dial Tone After LCR Access LED 04 On Station users hear a simulated dial tone immediately after dialing the access LCR code typically 9 until the first digit of the phone number is dialed The dial tone is simulated to assure the user of the system s proper operation but it is not a
45. Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 6 DATA Time out Value Enter a time out value from 04 10 seconds long Program 50 6 Overview Enter the maximum number of seconds LCR waits for a user to dial additional digits after a 0 before it routes the call to an operator for assistance LCR waits this number of seconds to receive additional digits that indicate charge calls collect calls or other 0 calls The allowed range is 04 10 seconds Always enter two digits Dial 0 calls will be restricted when using 0 Credit Card calling Program 43 if a telephone number is not dialed after dialing 0 or if Dial 0 is restricted in Program 46 10 80 Overview for Programs 51 54 These programs provide the system with directions for routing all possible calls made by all possible users at all possible times of day Tables for Programs 51 54 appear on LCR Route Plan Numbers 1 16 The following instructions show how to fill in individual tables within the plans Each of the following program tables must be completed for all plans Programs 51 54 defines LCR route plans quantities given below Processor Era nons Processor ey Route DK14 8 RCTUBA BB B1CU 8 DK40i 8 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 16 RCTUA 8 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 16 These separate plans provide the customer flexibility enough to rout
46. 2 L DATA Supervisor ID Code 0000 9999 GROUP ACD Group Number Processor ACD Group Numbers DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 RCTUC D B2CAU CU B3CAU CU 01 16 RCTUE F B5CAU CU 01 16 ACD Group Number Supervisor ID Code Name Program 14 2 Overview Assigns a Supervisor ID code to each ACD Group Only one code is allowed per Group When a Supervisor ID code is logged into the system the telephone is assigned with all Supervisor features to the ACD Group with that Supervisor ID code If the telephone has an LCD it can be used to monitor Agent and Queue Status for all ACD Groups by using special access codes 404XX and 405XX where XX ACD Group number If a code is assigned to a non existing ACD Group the code can be used by a Manager for example to check the Agent and or Queue Status of any ACD Group 6 15 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 2 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line After Shift Overflow Substitution Destinations Program 14 2 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line After Shift Overflow Substitution Destinations Initialized Default Port 000 kH K 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2
47. Button 02 Button 02 as data in Programs 45 21 and 45 22 respectively Toll Restriction Program 45 2 1 6 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass This will allow Centrex station numbers 1200 1299 and 1300 1399 to de dialed overriding Toll Restriction The call will route out the local LCR route immediately after the is dialed Use this record sheet to assign area codes in 10 digit dialing areas If some non toll numbers require 10 digit dialing Area Code AC Office Code OC YYYY dialing no digit 1 before the area code enter the area code in this table if dialing through LCR Area codes entered in this table without the long distance 1 prefix will be routed over the LCR local call route when dialed with the AC OC YYYY format YYYY 4 digit CO extension number Example 10 digit Dialing If area code 817 is a local area code that must be dialed without the prefix digit 1 enter 8 1 7 Button 01 Button 01 in Program 45 2X With this entry LCR will route 817 calls over the local route immediately after dialing 817 XXX XXXxX 10 digits This table applies to all stations with Program 48 TR Codes 03 10 only TR classes 1 8 not to stations with Program 48 TR Codes 00 01 or 02 Notes e When editing the data field use Button LED 01 to end the digit string Button LED 02 to assign a wild card value 0 9 x e See Program 46 10 80 Button LED 04 should be Off when dialing codes co
48. Code 2 Ring Agent Timer The time period ranges from 000 seconds to 4 minutes and 15 seconds an ACD call will ring an idle Agent telephone When the time expires and the call is unanswered the system hunts and rings another idle Agent telephone from the same ACD Group for the same duration of time This process continues until all idle Agent telephones have been rung or the call is answered If the call remains unanswered after ringing the last idle Agent it is routed to the destination set in Program 14 5 If the destination set in Program 14 5 is a DN the ACD line if idle rings the DN If the DN is busy the ACD line rings the idle or busy DN or CO Line Pooled Line Grp button assigned to ring in Programs 81 84 and 87 and flash in 81 84 and 87 If a DID Tie DNIS ANI line is used the call camps on to the busy station set in Program 14 2 see Flowchart 6 7 on Page 6 46 Code 3 After Call Work Timer Immediately after an Agent disconnects from an ACD call the After Call Work Timer begins to count down ranges from 000 seconds to 4 minutes 15 seconds The wrap up count is updated to display the active condition on the Agent telephone LCD the wrap up time remaining counts down each second When an Agent telephone is in the After Call Work Time mode wrap up timer count down the telephone does not receive ACD calls but it can receive non ACD or PBX calls An Agent can cancel the wrap up mode anytime by pressing the En
49. Hold SEL 1 1 L DATA Press LED Buttons 01 03 for the desired Calling Number ID parameters Enter the Trunk Group See table below 01 16 Trunk Groups LED ller ID Setti Callen SONING 1 2 3 4 s5 6 7 s8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Outgoing Caller ID On Allowed Off Not Allowed 2 Outgoing Caller ID Status Change On Allowed Off Not Allowed 3 Incoming Caller ID Source On Network Provided Off Caller Provided Program 68 1 Overview This program assigns the Number Privacy feature which allows the caller to prevent the public network from delivering the Calling Number to the called party on a per call basis The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN may still provide a network based Caller ID even when the outgoing Caller ID is Off Only a subscription parameter can change that LED 01 Outgoing Caller ID Service subscribers can request from the public network that the number be presented or not as a default LED 02 Outgoing Caller ID Status Change If a public telco service allows changes to be made then a user can enter change a code to the setting for that call after selecting a trunk group LED 03 Incoming Caller ID Source When LED 03 is On the calling number with the call setup message is provided by the network Off indicates that this inform
50. Hybrid CJGMLA 74478 MF E DK424 Hybrid CJ69XA 10243 MF E Key system CJ69XA 10242 KF E PBX CUCHN 22757 PF E DK424i Key system CJ69XA 10242 KF E Hybrid CJ69XA 10243 MF E PBX CU6JPN 22758 PF E 3 Ringer equivalence number 0 3B The ringer equivalence number REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called In most areas but not all the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to one line should not Publication Information Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Telecommunication Systems Division reserves the right without prior notice to revise this information publication for any reason including but not limited to utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of this document Further Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Telecommunication Systems Division also reserves the right without prior notice to make such changes in equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant DKA MA PRGRM VF 4025071 Version F May 2000 DK424i Version E 2 March 2000 Version E 1 August 1999 Version E May 1999 Version D 3 December 1998 Format change exceed five 5 0B To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line as determined by the REN you should contact your local telephone company to as
51. Pro LEDs 13 and 14 Tol gram 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters on Page 6 6 LED 14 Restriction After Answer These two LEDs determine whether or not a toll restricted telephone user is allowed to use one touch speed dial buttons after answering an incoming CO line call LED 13 and 14 should be turned On for Toll Restricted Telephones that must answer incoming CO line calls and use SD speed dial buttons programmed to perform functions that Hold or Park calls and access the page system automatically LED 13 LED 14 Description Off Off Not allowed to use Speed Dial after answering a line call On Off Allowed to use Speed Dial buttons but subject to toll restriction tables Off On Allowed to use Speed Dial buttons and not subject to toll restriction Initialized data sets both LEDs 13 and 14 off for all telephone users not allowed to use Speed Dial buttons after answering incoming CO line calls LED 07 12 Not used at this time uolje1S 3 We sis 3 103 System amp Station Program 35 Station Class of Service 3 104 LED 06 Disable Hold Display Scrolling Release 3 2 If LED 06 is On Hold Display scrolling is disabled Also a telephone LCD cannot display which CO lines are on hold on a PDN if the Scroll button is pressed Hold Display causes the DN button LED of the line displayed on the LCD to flash at a fast rate If LED 06 is Off Hold Display Scrolling is enabled Prior
52. Program 91 9 Example Action press buttons LED Buttons LCD Response Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone See No N N Programming Examples on Page 1 16 Jan 20 Sun 06 43 KH1K2 3 Program Mode Enter programming mode Do not press DN button Spkr Speaker 91 Hold Program 91 Access Program 91 System beeps after Spkr Speaker is pressed Data Store to indicate program number may be entered Spkr Speaker 91 Select Prepare the system for a station port selection Press 9 System Initialization Press LED Buttons 01 03 05 07 and 09 LEDs turn On System Initialization Press Hold No N N The telephone will exit the programming mode and button LEDs 01 Month Day Time 03 05 07 and 09 will go out after a short delay Make sure all LEDs go out before proceeding to Step 8 No N N Repeat Steps 1 7 a second time S Month Day Time 1 N N is the Program Telephone DN SOL 9 U01ezZIJeNu 2 3 Initialization amp Test Program 90 Initialize Programs 00 99 2 4 Program 90 Initialize Programs 00 99 Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Initialization Initialized Default See individual programs 1 2 3 Spkr 9 0 Hold Spkr OA Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold T I l En
53. This program defines call handling so the route definition used by LCR is invisible to the station user The station user handles all calls the same way The goal is for LCR to remember the dialing peculiarities of each call route so the user does not need to know Processor Modified Add Delete Processor Modified Add Delete Digit Tables Digit Tables DK14 6 RCTUBA BB B1CU 6 DK40i 6 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 12 RCTUA 6 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 12 Each modified digits table assigns editing steps that include Deleting a pre defined quantity of digits from the front of the number dialed Program 55 0 Adding a pre defined number to the front of the number dialed Program 55 1 Adding a pre defined number to the end of the number dialed Program 55 2 Bunnoy Ss09 see7 5 19 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 55 0 Delete Number of Digits From the Front of Dialed Number Initialized Default A I tables blank 1 2 3 Spkr 5 5 Hold Spkr o Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Modified Digits Table FIGURE Quantity of Digits 00 10 to be deleted see Program 55 Legend Program 55 0 Delete Digits Table Table Number Quantity of Digits 01 10 max 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
54. e RPCI and PDIU DS units that mostly do data switching can be connected to ports associated with PDKU1 circuits 1 7 only All PDKU2 circuits 1 8 support RPCIs and PDIUs RDSU digital circuits 5 8 support RPCI and PDIUs e Each PDIU DS requires a separate digital port e Ifa PDIU DS Stand alone Data Interface Unit is connected to a modem refer to Modem Setup Recommendations in the PC Data Communication section of Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation of the Strata DK I amp M Manual Typical LED Settings for Program 20 RCPI DI PDIU DI Connected to a terminal or personal computer LEDs 01 02 05 and 17 On all other LEDs Off PDIU DS Connected to a Printer LEDs 01 04 and 17 On all other LEDs Off PDIU DS Connected to a Modem LEDs 01 02 03 04 and 17 On all other LEDs Off LEDs 17 20 Data Security Groups Data security groups can be set to block data calls between RPCI DIUs RPCI DIUs can only make data calls to RPCI DIUs in the same security group LEDs 17 20 assign the RPCI DIU to the appropriate security group light LED 17 for Group 1 LED 18 for Group 3 LED 19 for Group 2 and LED 20 for Group 4 If an RPCI DI is used in the Application Program Interface TAPI mode only and not the Data Switching mode this option is not applicable LEDs 12 16 Not used at this time LED 11 RPCI DI DNIS to PC Option DNIS Number or NAME tag information that is sent to a telephone can be sent or blocked from the telephon
55. g Code 33 20 Button C Keystrip not provided but can be assigned 1 The Speed Dial button is the same as the SDS or REP buttons in previous Strata systems Program 39 Code 97 Also if changing PEKU PCBs electronic telephone to PDKU PCBs digital telephone or vice versa always check that the Speed 3 110 Assignments for 1000 Series Digital Telephone Keystrips System amp Station Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type CO15 C016 CO17 DND SDS SD12 SD13 SD14 DND SDS PAU RDL SDS DND FLASH co010 C011 C012 C013 C014 C010 CO11 C012 SD10 SD11 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Cos CO6 CO7 cos cog Cos Co6 CO7 cos cog Cos CO6 CO7 cos cog PDN co1 co2 co3 co4 PDN co1 co2 co3 co4 PDN CO1 co2 co3 co4 Code 31 Default 20 Button A Code 32 20 Button B Assignments for Electronic Telephone Keystrips MW FL Do Not Disturb CO7 CO6 CO5 co4 co3 co2 co1 PDN Code 21 10 Button cos MW FL cos Do Not Disturb CO7 SD14 CO6 SD13 CO5 D12 co4 SD11 CO3 SD10 co2 C012 co1 co11 PDN C010 Code 32 20 Button B Code 33 20 Button C cog MW FL cos Do Not Disturb c07 C017 co6 CO16 CO5 CO15 co4 C014 co3 C013 co2 C012 col cO11 PDN C010 Cod
56. 241 Attd Call 000 SD10 10 SD11 11 Console 1 Left Right 10 11 12 10 11 12 07 08 09 07 08 09 04 05 06 04 05 06 01 02 03 01 02 03 Console 2 Left Right 10 11 12 10 11 12 07 08 09 07 08 09 04 05 06 04 05 06 01 02 03 01 02 03 Console 3 Left Right 10 11 12 10 11 12 07 08 09 07 08 09 04 05 06 04 05 06 01 02 03 01 02 03 Console 4 Left Right 10 11 12 10 11 12 07 08 09 07 08 09 04 05 06 04 05 06 01 02 03 01 02 03 3 140 Program 59 Overview Attendant Consoles have 24 flexible buttons 12 on left and 12 on the right side of the dial pad This program is used to assign each button to an available function or options Program 59 record sheets define the button options and codes available System amp Station Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes Table 3 4 Required PC Attendant Console Button Codes Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Conference Conf 297 Starts conference calls Hold Recall Hold RC 259 Held calls recall on this button Incoming Dial 0 In Dial 0 262 Dial 0 calls ring in on this button Incoming calls to the console DN ring on E this button The console DN is the Prog Incoming Directory Number In DN a 04 assignment of the Prog 04 console port number Incoming Ring Transfer In Trans 258 Receive call transfer Join Loop Join Loop
57. 3 135 Program 60 BRI Line station operation assignment 7 21 Program 61 analog trunk services for ISDN 7 22 Program 62 non ISDN station bearer service 7 23 Program 63 ISDN dialing parameters 7 24 Program 64 1 direct inward dialing parameters 7 25 Program 64 2 number of DID DNIS Digits for trunk groups 7 26 Program 65 ISDN channel group assignment 7 27 Program 66 1 channel group number parameters 7 28 Program 66 3 channel group trunk parameters 7 31 Program 66 5 line directory number LDN registrations 7 33 Program 66 6 LDN trunk group to channel group assignments 7 34 Program 66 7 LDN trunk group assignment 7 35 Program 67 1 trunk group call direction 7 36 Program 67 2 call types for ISDN trunk group supported 7 37 Program 67 3 call types for ISDN trunk groups 7 38 Program 67 4 ISDN trunk groups maximum channel reservation 7 39 Program 68 1 calling number ID presentation parameters 7 41 Program 68 2 outbound CNIS parameters 7 42 Program 69 1 CNIS presentation parameters 7 43 Program 69 2 special number assignment 7 44 Program 71 73 DN to DN tie to DN and DID to DN ringing assignments 3 157 Program 79 door phone to DN flashing assignments 3 177 Program 80 call forward station ring assignment 3 179 Program 00 part 1 software check 2 12 Program 00 part 2 RCTU RAM test 2 15 Program 01 station logical port display and or change 3 1 Program 02 station
58. 32 Automatic Preference X 32 RS 232 SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Voice Mail Message Center Port X 33 Station Intercom and Directory Number Hunting Voice Calls Only X 33 Phantom Directory Number PhDN Owner Telephone Assignments X Overview Numerical Program Listing 5 5 3 E w 5 3 c Program Title 2 3 f els s 4 eee e aa o Elin lole laja 2 34 Hold Recall Timing x 34 Station Class of Service Standard Telephone Camp on Busy and Busy x Override Tone Option 35 Station Class of Service X X 36 Fixed Call Forward Voice Calls Only X 36 System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment X 37 CO and Tie Line Ring Transfer Camp on Recall Time X 37 Park Recall Timing x 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type x 39 Flexible Button Assignment x x 40 Station CO Line Access xX 40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments x 41 Station Outgoing Call Restriction X 41 1 T1 Span Frame and Coding Assignments X X 41 2 T1 Channel Assignments X X 41 3 T1 Span Transmit Send Level Pad Assignments X 41 4 T1 Span Receive Level Pad Assignments X 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection X 42 1 8 PBX Centrex Access Code X 42 1 T1 Span Primary Reference Assignments X 42 2 T1 Span and Secondary Timing Backup Reference Assignments 43 0 Credit Card Dialing Option X 43 1 3 D Channel Con
59. 6 36 Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Initialized Default Logical port number physical port number Program 90 91 1 or 91 9 initializes Program 02 HK 1 2 43 Hold Spkr 3 9 Spkr di Hold Hold Hold Spkr Spkr SELECT Port Number or Range To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Press Button LED to be defined CODE Enter the appropriate feature code See the Feature Code Table below Processor PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range DK40i 000 027 500 527 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 079 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 B1CU 000 055 500 579 B2CAU CU 000 111 500 739 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 B5CAU BU 000 335 450 785 Toshiba highly recommends that you enter the button keystrip names exactly as shown in the left column since these button names are used in the ACD Agent and Supervisor Guides ACD Feature Button Frogram Program ak Desi Feature Code on Agent Supervisor Notes esignation Telephone Telephone Log In Used by Agents to Log In Out Log Out 451 x PhDN Log In Out ZZZZ Agent ZZZZ Agent ID code Log in Used by Supervisor to Log In Out Log Out 451 xX Log In Out YYYY Supervisor
60. 72 and 73 3 154 System amp Station Program 71 DNIS A DNIS and or Tie DID extension number and or ANI only line can be assigned to route one of the following destinations Primary Directory Number PDN secondary appearances of this PDN will also ring if Programmed to ring in Program 71 72 and or 73 Phantom Directory Number Distributed Hunt Group ACD Group Outside telephone number routed externally over the Public Telephone Network The system remote maintenance modem 5 gt gt gt o Night ringing over the external page The external voice paging system Private Network Tie lines only A DNIS number or ANI only line can be assigned to route to one destination only in each of the three system ringing modes Day Day2 and Night the destination can be unique or different in each ringing mode For each DNIS Tie DID extension number the routing destination can be a unique destination or it can be the same destination as that assigned to other DNIS numbers To assign lines that receive both ANI and DNIS with each call to Program 71 1 assignments Program 17 LED 05 07 and 08 must be turned On for lines that receive DNIS digits only LED 05 and 08 must be On This program can also be used with non DNIS or non ANI Tie and or DID lines to route calls In this case the normal Tie digit assignments in Program 04 and DID digit assignments in Program uolje1S 3 W3 S S 09 will not be a
61. Announcement Music Port and Queue Pattern Initialized Default a blanks 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 3 DATA Port number of Music or Announcement Code 1 5 Source ACD Group Number Enter blanks with Button LED 01 Processor ACD Group Numbers Port Numbers DK40i 01 08 008 027 RCTUA 01 08 008 031 RCTUBA BB 01 08 008 079 RCTUC D 01 16 008 239 B1CU 01 08 008 055 B2CAU BU 01 08 008 111 B3CAU BU 01 08 008 191 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 01 16 008 335 Code 1 Enter the RSTU or RSTU2 or equivalent port number of the first announcement Enter the RSTU or RSTU2 or equivalent port number of the second announcement if queue pattern has three Code 2 announcements Enter Code 2 assignment only if there are three announcements Skip to Code 3 if only two announcements are used for the ACD Group queue Code 3 Enter the second announcement port for two announcement queue patterns or enter the third announcement port for three announcement queue patterns Code 4 Enter the RSTU RSTU2 or PEKU Music Source port number or enter 999 if the music source is a Music on Hold MOH source Code 5 Enter the announcement number 1 3 of the first announcement that should repeat to calls in queue
62. Code 5 ACD Group A codsi godo codos Code 4 Repeat Number nnouncement Announcement Announcement Music Source Port Announcement 1 Port 2 Port 2 or 3 Port NRD 6 18 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 3 Announcement Music Port and Queue Pattern Program 14 3 Overview This program is used to make announcement music port and queue pattern assignments All announcement devices digital announcers must connect to standard telephone ports RSTU RSTU2 RDSU RSTS PSTU PESU The music source can be the MOH source connected to the RCTU RCA jack another source connected to a standard telephone port or an electronic telephone port voice pair Each ACD Group can have from one to three announcements and a separate music source Announcements and or music sources can also be shared in any combination between ACD Groups see Flowcharts 6 8 6 10 on Pages Page 6 47 Page 6 50 uonnq 4siq 2D dyewony Code 1 Announcement Port One Assigns the port that will be connected to the digital announcer that should be activated first when a CO line call enters the ACD Group queue Code 1 always assigns the first announcements in a queue pattern Skip Code 2 and Code 3 programming if only one announcement is used for the ACD Group queue Code 2 Announcement Port Two Assigns the port to which the second announcement device connects in a three announcement queue pattern If only two
63. DATA SELECT ACD Group Number DID Tie DNIS ANI Overflow Substitution Destination Processor ACD Group Numbers DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 RCTUC D B2CAU CU B3CAU CU 01 16 RCTUE F BSCAU CU 01 16 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB RCTUC D RCTUE F DID Tie DNIS ANI Overflow Substitution Destination 000 027 000 031 000 079 000 239 000 335 Station or Attendant Console PDN Program 04 Port Number 500 527 500 531 500 579 500 739 500 835 PhDN Program 04 Port Number 900 915 900 915 900 915 900 915 900 915 Distributed Hunt Group Program 04 Port Number BiCU B2CAU CU B3CAU BU B5CAU BU DID Tie DNIS ANI Overflow Substitution Destination 000 055 000 0111 000 191 000 335 Station or Attendant Console PDN Program 04 Port Number 500 579 500 739 500 739 450 785 PhDN Program 04 Port Number 900 915 900 915 900 915 900 915 Distributed Hunt Group Program 04 Port Number ACD Group Number Destination 6 16 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 2 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line After Shif Overflow Substitution Destinations Program 14 2 Overview Assigns a Normal Ringing or AA substitute destination for DID and or Tie lines If an ACD Group is assigned to overflow in Program 14 4 or 14 5 or route after shift service Program 14 6 to the DK built in AA or to Normal Ringing assignments code 320 or 321 these assignments only apply to loop ground start CO line calls DID Tie DNIS ANI line calls are
64. DKi Admin customer database on the PC and the WSIU TSIU or RSIU RSIS RMDS TTY RMDS port must all be set the same If the bps rate of these items are not the same uploading Program 76 will fail The sum of the transmission rates of equipped WSIU TSIU or RSIU RSIS RMDS ports cannot exceed 9600 bps Ports assigned no function code 0 in Program 76 2X Y will not be included in the transmission rate sum The RMDS will only function at 1200 or 2400 bps on the DK424 or DK424i see Program 77 1 LED 15 Program 76 2 does not require system power Off On to change the bps rate 3 163 System amp Station Program 77 1 Peripheral Options Door Phones Program 77 1 Peripheral Options Door Phones RSIU RSIS RMDS PIOU PIOUS IMDU PEPU Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default A LEDs are Off He 1 2 a 1 Spkr 7 7 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 z a Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below peel X LED On LED Off Button 20 Door Lock Time 6 seconds Door Lock Time 3 seconds 19 Port 028 DDCB 4 or HDCB 4 DK424 DK424i Port 028 Telephone DK424 18 Port 020 DDCB 3 or HDCB 3 DK40i DK424 Port 020 Telephone DK40i DK424 DK424i
65. E amp M Tie Line Unit An optional PCB an older version of REMU that provides the system with support for four E amp M Type tie lines The PEMU is also used with older Strata systems Aisesso 5 GL 5 Glossary PEPU QSTU2 GL 6 Term PEPU PESU PhDN PIOU PIOUS PORT PBTC1A 3M PPTC PPTC PPTC 9 PPTC 25F PRI PSTU2 PSTN QCcDU2 QKYS QSTU2 Definition External Page Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides support and or circuit interface mainly for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades associated with external paging functions Standard Electronic Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides the system with a combination of two standard and four electronic telephone circuits The standard telephone circuits can support standard telephones and optional hardware peripherals such as voice mail devices and fax machines Except for the electronic DSS console the PESU electronic telephone circuits can support the same stations and peripherals that the PEKU does The PESU is also used with older Strata systems Phantom Directory Number Option Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides support and or circuit interface for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades The same as the PIOU with some exceptions most notably the PIOUS has one external paging interface zone while the PIOU has four A term used to identify a station circuit or CO line circuit location
66. ISDN Stardard 2 NI2 Most all ISDN switches manufactured by other companies follow the NI2 standard Table 7 1 ISDN CO Switch Type Programming Program DMS Custom NI1 Switch NI2 Switches LED 11 Off LED 11 On eee LED 13 On Progress ID 81 LED 13 Off Progress ID 83 LED 14 On LED 14 Off Progress ID LED15 On LED 15 Off Programming for ISDN PRI DID Type Call The following table shows the minimum programming needed to make DID type ISDN PRI calls work in the Strata DK System with Release 4 15 and higher software Table 7 2 ISDN PRI DID Type Call Programming Program a Number Program Data Description 03 XX 79 XX equals the slot in the DK system where the RPTU PCB is placed 10 4 LED 9 On Listed Directory Number LDN registration will route the unknown number or call type in numbering plan 16 XX 2 This tells the system that trunk group XX is an ISDN PRI Trunk Group This tells the system to make the ISDN PRI span the primary clocking source 42 1 XX 1 for the DK System XX stands for the DK slot where the RPTU PCB is placed and the final 1 refers to circuit 1 43 4 1124 This tells the system that the D channel on the first ISDN PRI Span is the 24th channel on the PRI Span 63 2 04 This tells the system how long to wait to collect digits from station users making a ISDN PRI call before sending it to the network 64 4 LED 01 On This tells the system to accept the incoming
67. If a door phone button is pressed a ring tone can be enabled or disabled to external paging when the system is in the Night mode Activation of a Tenant 1 Night Transfer1 button is required to activate this feature The Tenant 2 4 Night Transfer2 4 buttons do not apply to door phones CO lines must be assigned to night ring over External Page Program 78 1 to allow the NT relay to operate when incoming CO lines ring See Programs 79 and 79 for door phone ringing assignments LED 07 Door Lock Relay External Page Relay A relay on the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU can be assigned to operate with the Door Lock function or with External Page for mute control The door lock button Unlock Door0 4 is assigned in Program 39 the door lock activation time is assigned in Program 77 1 This door lock function is not associated with the DDCB or HDCB door lock but is an addition to them This option applies to the PIOU PIOUS PEPU Door Lock Control 0 assigned to electronic or digital telephone buttons using Code 471 in Program 39 it does not apply to DDCB or HDCB Door Lock Control System amp Station Program 77 1 Peripheral Options Door Phones LED 06 NT Relay A relay located on the PIOU PIOUS PEPU DK14 KSU or DK40i KSU can be assigned to operate in one of two Night Transfer modes see next item MOH NT Relay DK14 Activate the NT Relay in the DK14 KSU before setting the specific Night Transfer mode with LED 06 DK40i Activate the NT
68. If the destination port assigned in this program is busy when After Shift or all Agents log out is set DID and Tie lines will camp on to the port while ground and loop start lines will busy override mute ring the port If the destination station has Call Forward or Hunt set these features will operate Notes e DID DNIS ANI and Tie lines cannot be directed to the Strata DK System AA or Normal ring assignments 321 if code 320 321 440 or 441 is assigned in Program 14 6 DID DNIS ANI and Tie line calls will be routed to the destination assigned in Program 14 2 e Assign all Groups even if not used to a destination This is in case a transferred call is sent to an unused ACD Group the call will be sent to the destination assigned in Program 14 6 e If itis required to route calls to a Voice Mail box during the After Shift mode you may designate a Group announcement A1 A3 port as the After Shift destination temporarily use a standard telephone to Call Forward All Calls from the announcement port to the Voice Mail device and set the VMID code of the announcement port 656 digits to the desired After Shift Mailbox e During normal operation the announcement port will play messages to callers in queue during the After Shift mode calls will forward from the announcement port to the After Shift Voice Mail box This operation is also allowed for Programs 14 4 and 14 5 assignments 6 28 Automatic Call Distribution Prog
69. Initialized default 120 seconds LED 16 Off LED 17 On 240 seconds LED 16 On LED 17 Off LED 15 Built in Auto Attendant MOH RBT for Transfer Callers can hear ring back tone RBT or Music on hold MOH after being transferred from the Built in Auto Attendant to a station depending on the selection made with LED 15 LED 14 RS 232 Voice Mail Signaling Method The DK provides two types of RS 232 signaling Bellcore Standard type TR TS Y 000283 TR NWT 000283 or Toshiba Proprietary Refer to the VM machine installation documentation and contact the Toshiba and or VM machine manufacturer for VM machine SMDI configuration Notes e Toshiba VP products require Release 7 software or above for Toshiba proprietary integration e Toshiba VP products require the SW X0042 feature package CO Centrex for SMDI but not for Toshiba Proprietary RS 232 Interface e Toshiba Stratagy products support SMDI only in the standard configuration not Toshiba proprietary RS 232 interface System amp Station Program 10 3 System Assignments Part 3 of 3 LEDs 13 10 SMDI Station Number Digit Length Set LED 10 13 On so that the hex values add up to the Voice Mail station digit length for SMDI VM interface Example For VP100 or Stratagy Stratagy DK SMDI interface set LEDs 10 11 and 12 on for 7 digits 1 2 4 7 Do not set LED 10 13 Off for Toshiba proprietary interface it is no longer supported by DK systems This refers to the stat
70. Ring idle agent ACD Call button Ring system DN DH or console port assigned in Program 14 5 If an agent answers talk on ACD call If no answer ring another idle agent or go to RNA destination of this group Loop ground start busy override ring Notes System DNs include If the RNA destination of this group is the system DN per Programs 81 84 87 M ie ss rl ee es aes Program 04 PDNs SDNs ACD group from which the call originated the aie i Program 04 PhDNs call will be sent to the line s normal ring DID Tie DNIS ANI line camp on busy to DH Distributed Hunt Group pattern in Programs 81 89 and 81 84 87 system DN DH or console port DN or if Tie DID DNIS ANI line to the assigned system DN assigned in Program 14 2 6 46 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 8 ACD Queue Pattern Configuration One Announcement Only Overflow after announcement music OF Repeat announcement music Or One announcement then continous music Start call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6 1 Note The call will attempt to exit queue Caller is connected to 1st announcement port when this port is assigned in Program 14 3 an Agent telephone goes idle uonnq 4siq I9 dyewony the queue timer in Program 11 1 expires the call reaches the overflow After the 1st announcement ends and hangs point up the caller is
71. Speed Dial 10 1 30 39 Speed Dial Clear 92 Speed Dial Entry Timeout 10 3 Standard Telephone Options 10 2 30 34 35 Station Class of Service 30 31 34 35 Station Hunting Data Calls 22 Station Hunting Voice Calls 33 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 03 60 1 60 7 76 97 Station to Station Volume 10 1 SMDI VM Interface 03 10 2 10 3 13 31 32 40 76 M LM AO 1 9 Overview How to Program a Strata DK System 1 10 How to Program a Strata DK System Fill out the record sheets that are provided then enter this data using a 20 button LCD digital DKT or electronic EKT telephone Strata DK enables you to enter data from an on site or off site PC with Toshiba DKi Admin software Toshiba highly recommends this easier method of programming DK14 DK40i the programming telephone must be any 20 button LCD DKT or EKT DK40i only The DKT must be connected to a Base KSU PDKU RDSU QCDU or KCDU digital port An EKT must be connected to a PEKU port DK424 and DK424i the programming telephone must be a 20 button LCD DKT or EKT connected to circuit 6 of a PDKU or PEKU installed in cabinet slot 11 and or slot 12 Note Telephones connected to an RDSU or PESU cannot be used to program DK424 or DK424i Programming Section Layout Each programming section within a chapter begins with the program s number and title followed by processor and program type initi
72. WSIU RSIU RSIS and RMDS Port Assignments 76 2 TSIU WSIU RSIU RSIS and RMDS Port Assignments 77 1 Peripheral Options RSIU RSIS RMDS IMDU PIOU PIOUS and PEPU 77 2 Door Phone Busy Signal Door Lock Assignments X 77 3 Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones X 77 4 RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI Data Output Assignments x Caller ID DNIS ANI Open Architecture Output Options 78 Ground and Loop Start co Line Special Ringing Assignments DISA x IMDU RMDS and Night Ringing Over External Page 79 Door Phone Ringing x 79 Door Phone to DN Flashing Assignments x 80 Electronic and Digital Telephone Ringing Tones CO Line Calls X M JM AO Overview Numerical Program Listing 2 f 3 3 s E z amp 5 0 gt E OR as Z Program Title 0 T 3 9 fie sl2 G S d 8 2 s 35 8 8 4 a El o H l Fl as a 2 80 Call Forward Station Ring Assignment Release 3 2 X S TRAT Ground Loop Start CO Line to Directory Number Button LED Flash 81 84 87 X Assignments 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Auto Attendant Attendant Console x and Distributed Hunt Group Ringing Assignments 90 Initializing Program 00 99 X 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition Port Renumber X 91 2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory xX 91 9 System Initialization X Initializing Speed Dial Numbers VM ID Codes Character Message 92 Memory Timed Reminders Digital Telephon
73. accessing another line e Toshiba recommends that the Release and Ans button be provided via Program 39 to telephones programmed for Auto Hold 3 101 System amp Station Program 35 Station Class of Service LED 17 Continuous DTMF Tones Off 2000 series digital telephones can send DTMF tones for as long as station users press their buttons 80 msec minimum This feature can be disabled LED 17 On If it is disabled DTMF tones sent by these telephones will be either 80 or 160 milliseconds depending on the selection made with Program 10 1 LED 04 and Program 10 2 LED 06 Note PDKU1 does not support continuous DTMF tones on 2000 series digital telephones LED 16 No Call Forward No Answer on Handsfree Answerback When enabled LED 16 On a Handsfree Answerback call to an idle station in the Call Forward No Answer or Call Forward Busy No Answer mode is not forwarded If the system is Programmed for Voice first Program 10 1 and 10 2 LED 01 Off Voice Announce calls do not Call Forward No Answer however calls will call forward busy This prevents the call from being forwarded 8 60 seconds after the called party has been talking in the Handsfree Answerback mode Outside calls and busy internal calls to the station continue to forward with this feature set If the system is set for Tone First calls will call forward on Busy and No Answer Notes e The caller can press the RING Soft Key on digital LCD telephones or press 1 on
74. directed to the port assigned in this Program 14 2 This is because only loop and ground start CO lines not Tie or DID lines can be routed to DK AA and or Normal Ringing assignments Notes e Ifthe assignments for an ACD Group Overflow Queue Timer Program 14 4 Overflow Queue Point Program 14 5 and or After Shift Program 14 6 destinations are programmed as Normal Ringing or AA DID Tie DNIS ANI lines will be routed to the destination DN assigned in this program This is because DID Tie DNIS ANI lines cannot be assigned to AA or Normal CO line ringing e Ifthe destination DN assigned in this program is busy when one of the following occurs Ring No Answer All Agents Unavailable End of ACD Shift the overflowing DID Tie DNIS ANI line will camp on to the DN Call Forward and or Hunt from the destination assigned will occur if set on the destination station e DID DNIS ANI and Tie line calls in queue do not overflow to busy ACD Groups Intercom numbers PDNs PhDNs or Distributed Hunt Groups they remain in queue until the destination becomes idle e Call Forward No Answer will occur if set on the destination assignment If the overflow destination is a Strata DK Attendant Console calls will exit queue and overflow to the Attendant Console when the console is idle or busy uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny 6 17 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 3 Announcement Music Port and Queue Pattern Program 14 3
75. e 1S 9 Wa shs To assign a TR LCR class of service to Tie lines receiving the incoming call the Tie lines must be placed in a CO line group in Program 16 Each Tie line can be assigned to different groups but an individual Tie line can only be assigned to one group Once a Tie line is assigned to a line group in Program 16 it must be assigned a class of service in the appropriate programs 30 40 41 43 48 and 56 In these programs ports 900 916 must match the appropriate Tie line group number 01 16 respectively Port Number Program 16 Line Group Number 900 00 901 01 916 16 Example Program 48 901 100 is the Program 48 assignment for all Tie lines in trunk group 01 3 41 System amp Station Program 10 Enhanced 911 Operation 3 42 Program 10 Enhanced 911 Operation Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs Program Type System Initialized Default See each program Program 10 provides two QSTU2 RSTU KSTU2 RDSU PSTU or PESU ports to be assigned to interface with central office E911 trunks E911 enhanced operation provides locator information to the responding agency to provide more complete name and address information including building floor etc This is done by sending the station number of the 911 caller to the E911 emergency center This locator information is then cross referenced with name number address data in the E911 central database and the E911 operator receives the
76. e Always complete Program 38 before proceeding to Program 39 e DKi Admin will program a Pause on buttons 11 20 on 10 key telephones Assignments for 2000 Series Digital Telephone Keystrips All Call Voice Page for DK40i only or Speed Dial Speed Dial Line 9 Do Not Disturb Line 8 Do Not Disturb Line 7 Line 7 Line 177 Line 6 Line 6 Line 16 Line 5 Line 5 Line 15 Line 4 Line 4 Line 14 Line 3 Line 3 Line 13 Line 2 Line 2 Line 12 Line 1 Line 1 Line 11 PDN PDN Line 10 Code 21 10 Button Code 31 Default 20 Button A Line 9 Speed Dial SD14 Speed Dial Line 8 Do Not Disturb D13 Do Not Disturb Line 7 SD 14 SD12 SD 22 Line 6 SD 13 SD11 SD 21 Line 5 SD 12 SD10 SD 20 Line 4 SD 11 Line 4 SD 19 Line 3 SD 10 Line 3 SD 18 Line 2 Line 12 Line 2 SD 17 Line 1 Line 11 Line 1 SD 16 PDN Line 10 PDN SD 15 DK424 and DK40i DK14 Code 32 20 Buitton B Code 32 20 Button B D10 Flash Line 9 Flash Line 8 Do Not Disturb Line 8 Do Not Disturb Line 7 Speed Dial Line 7 Speed Dial Line 6 Redial Line 6 Redial Line 5 Speed Dial Pause Line 5 Speed Dial Pause Line 4 SD 15 Line 4 Line 12 Line 3 SD 14 Line 3 Line 11 Line 2 SD 13 Line 2 Line 10 Line 1 SD 12 Line 1 PDN SD 11 PDN DK424 DK40i Code 33 20 Button C
77. individually configured for loop start or ground start CO line operation Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU RCIS circuits Feature Key Upgrade Subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features There are four versions of the RKYS the RKYS1 the RKYS2 the RKYS3 and the RKYS4 each of which provides a distinct set of features Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly A subassembly installed on the RSIU Optional Interface Unit that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration maintenance terminal or DK Admin DK Backup personal computer Computer Data Interface Unit Replaces the normal telephone base and provides all the functions of PDIU D12 In addition it can be switched to a second mode automatically and used with a Telephone Application Program Interface TAPI software application ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI Unit Provides 1 data control channel and 23 bearer channels All B channels appear and program as CO lines in the DK424 system and can be individually configured for local service FX WATS DID tie etc service operation Supported by the RCTUBA3 BB4 RCTUC3 D4 and RCTUE3 F4 Read Only Memory Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that comprises the mechanics of the features functions ROM is only revised by Toshiba software engineers Power Strip Interface between cabinet power supplies and the commercial AC power so
78. is entered in this table Use this program to allow correct Toll Restriction and Centrex PBX transfer operation Do not use this program when using LCR behind Centrex PBX use Program 45 2 instead Also do not use this program if installing CO lines behind assume 9 Centrex 4 10 Toll Restriction Program 43 0 Credit Card Dialing Option Program 43 0 Credit Card Dialing Option Processor Type Processor Type Initialized Default A I LEDS Off DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Toll Restriction HK HB 1 2 43 Spkr 4 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Numbers Sala Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back After programming press e VolA to turn all LEDs On e Vol to turn all LEDs Off e Mode CO line number then to display and advance Processor CO Line Range PDN Port Range iE LED Buttons CO lines Assigned to allow dial 0 calls with selected stations Processor CO Line Range PDN Port Range DK14 001 004 000 009 B1CU 001 032 000 055 DK40i 001 012 000 027 B2CAU BU 001 120 000 1114 RCTUA 001 016 000 031 B3CAU BU 001 120 000 191 RCTUBA BB 001 048 000 079 B5CAU BU 001 200 000 335 RCTUC D 001 144
79. repeat Step 2 to enter another program or continue with Step 5 to exit the programming mode entirely Exit the programming mode by pressing the same button sequence as in Step 4 This sequence also never changes and is always shaded Another Program More Data eeek Spkr Hotd Spkr eee Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Step 1 Enter Program Mode Do not press or DN button Step 2 Enter Program Number Step 3 J Enter Program Data Step 4 Exit Current Program Step 5 Exit Program Mode LIL Spkr and or Hold CE or HJ LED Buttons and or 1697 Figure 1 2 Programming Button Sequence Overview 1 11 M LM AO Overview How to Program a Strata DK System Programming Data Variations There are two different ways to enter data in Step 3 Figure 1 2 of a program pressing the buttons on the dial pad and pressing the LED buttons Many programs are multidimensional and involve both types of entry Simple Programs Simple programs such as Program 00 only require data to be specified through the dial pad Data entered from the dial pad displays on the programming digital or electronic telephone s LCD along with prompts and confirmations Multidimensional Programs Once a program number is entered
80. run Program 91 2 or cycle system power to transfer Program 03 data into working memory 3 9 System amp Station Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments RCIU RCIS or RCIU2 RCIS RWIU When installing RCIU2 RCIS enter the Caller ID circuit numbers on the record sheet in place of the CO line number Each RCIU2 RCIS slot uses eight Caller ID circuits RCIU2 RCIS circuit numbers are assigned automatically in numerical order 001 200 starting with the lowest slot number to the highest RCIU2 RCIS slot number in 8 circuit increments Important Jf more than four circuits are needed never install an RCIU without an RCIS On DK424 and DK424i RCIU2 RCIS can be installed in any universal slot except slot 11 or if RSIU is installed slot 12 they do not have to be installed adjacent to corresponding CO lines Refer to Program 50 to manually assign RCIU2 RCIS circuits to CO line circuits Code 61 must be set for all RWIU slots including slots that are vacant because they support RWIU channels 09 32 RCTU and BCU The table below gives you slot locations and PCB Code Assignments for all processor PCBs RSIU Processor R11 Slot ROIU Boi Slot Code RCE bode Cabinet 1 Assignment RCTUA No Yes 00 91 94 RCTUB No Yes 00 91 94 RCTUBA Yes No 00 91 94 RCTUBB No Yes 01 91 RCTUC Yes No 00 91 94 RCTUD No Yes 01 91 94 RCTUE Yes No 00 91 94 RCTUF No Yes 01
81. see Programs 55 1 and 55 2 station class of service see Program 30 system assignments BRI lines see Program 10 1 telephone feature buttons see Program 39 special number assignment see Program 69 2 trunk groups call direction see Program 67 1 maximum channel reservation see Program 67 4 trunk groups see Program 16 K keystrip assignments 2000 series digital telephone 3 110 template 1 13 types see Program 38 L LCR 4 28 area codes see Program 51 CO line programming reference table 5 3 conditions 5 2 dial 0 zero time out see Program 50 6 features 5 1 home area code see Program 50 2 local call plan number see Program 50 5 long distance information LDI plan number see Program 50 4 modified digits table see Program 55 0 modified digits table see Program 55 1 office code exceptions for specified area code see Program 52 parameters see Program 50 1 route definition tables see Program 54 schedule assignments for LCR plans see Program 53 special codes see Program 50 3 station group assignments see Program 56 LCR toll restriction bypass for special numbers see Program 45 2 1 6 see Program 45 3 1 9 Index K P dial plan see Program 45 1 special code dialing sequence with LCR see Program 45 4 least cost routing see LCR M message center defining see Program 13 minimum hardware requirements 1 14 modem pool port assignments see Program 21 N night rin
82. when being monitored display when being monitored 02 Not used Not used 01 ACD Mode Most idle Agent receives next call ACD Mode Next Available Agent receives next call Program 10 4 Overview This program provides three system options When enabled disabled these options apply to all ACD Groups and Agents ACD system options are set as follows LED 01 Set Next Available First or Most Idle First Routing Sets which algorithm the system follows to route ACD calls Next Available First Turn LED 01 Off The Agent list is searched sequentially starting from not including the last found Agent and ending with the first found available Agent This method of searching is similar to the circular distributed hunt method Most Idle First Turn LED 01 On The Agent with the most idle time since the last ACD call receives the next call If all Agents are busy and an Agent becomes available that Agent automatically receives the next call regardless of idle time If that should happen the Agent with the longest idle time may have to wait to receive a call As Agents go idle they are added to the end of the ACD Agent routing list Note During busy ACD call traffic conditions the algorithm routes calls that have been waiting in the ACD Group queue directly to the first Agent telephone that becomes available LED 02 Not Used LED 03 Supervisor Monitor Tone and Display If Tone LCD is enabled when a Supervisor monitors an Agent
83. 0 11 1 11 2 11 5 11 6 41 8 12 13 10 1 Features 10 25 95 399 Logical Port Display Change 01 RAM Memory Test 00 Part 2 Message Center 13 32 Executive Override 05 10 2 30 External Page Interface 10 2 77 1 77 3 78 Message Waiting Flash 05 10 2 12 35 39 Microphone Control 30 39 Modem Pool Port Assignment 20 21 Music on Hold 77 1 Night Pickup Code 05 Night Ringing over External 77 1 77 3 78 Page External Zone Paging 05 77 1 77 3 Fixed Call Forwarding 36 39 Flash Key Assignment 39 Flash Timing 12 Flexible Access Code a Numbering 08 008 Flexible Button Assignments 38 39 Flexible Directory Numbering 04 04 05 39 Flexible Line Ringing Assignment 9i 799 Flexible PCB Slot Configuration IEN 219S Forced and Voluntary Account Codes 15 30 60 39 Group Paging 05 30 Group Pickup 31 Night Transfer 29 39 59 77 1 78 Night Transfer Lock 36 39 59 74 Off hook Call Announce 03 30 31 39 On hook Dialing 32 Outgoing Call Restriction 41 Paging DKT EKT Also see Group Paging and External 31 39 Paging Passwords Remote 00 Programming Pause Timing 12 39 PBX Access Code 42 1 42 8 PBX Backup 42 0 Overview Alphabetical Program Listing Feature or Topic Program Number Feature or Topic Program Number
84. 0 or 1 as 1st digit To add a port range enter 02 7 ata Code Toll ee O or 1 as 1st digit XXX XXX low port high port senate Die ease 04 Class 2 08 Class 6 DATA 0 or 1 05 Class 3 09 Class 7 0 No digit restriction 06 Class 4 10 Class 8 1 Digit restriction TAES If dial O credit card calling must be allowed use Program 43 to assign designated stations CO lines to allow credit card calling Toll Restriction ae Toll Restriction heer Processor Port Range Ports for DISA fell pita Processor Port Range Ports for DISA Toll Bes erga R3 X R3 X DK14 000 009 010 1 4 B1CU1 000 055 089 1 4 DK40i 000 027 035 1 4 B2CAU BU 000 111 249 1 8 RCTUA 000 031 039 1 4 B3CAU BU 000 191 249 1 8 RCTUBA BB 000 079 089 1 4 B5CAU BU 000 335 344 1 8 RCTUC D 000 239 249 1 8 RCTUE F 000 335 344 1 8 Program 16 Line R4 3 and higher If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Restriction and LCR on Port Number i aE Group Number tandem calls assign a class of service in this program Program ports 900 916 to 900 916 00 16 match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 respectively Port No Digit Restriction Code Station Restriction Code Port No Digit Restriction Code Station Restriction Code UONOLIS9Y IIOL 4 39 Toll Restriction Program 48 Station Toll Restriction Class
85. 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Program 02 Overview Program 02 enables you to enter a logical port to display the associated physical port You then have the option to assign a new physical port to the logical port To return ports to their initialized settings see Programs 90 and 91 Notes e Record port locations on Program 04 record sheet e The system allows only like ports to be reassigned see below Allowed Not Allowed PDKU RDSU Ports Digital to Digital Ports KCDU QCDU PDKU Attendant Console DK424 DK424i only DSS BGM or Amplified Conference Ports should not be reassigned PESU Ports Electronic to Electronic Ports PEKU PEKU Door Phone Ports 004 012 020 028 should not be reassigned Standard Tel to Standard Tel Ports QSTU KSTU PSTU RSTU PESU RDSU RSTS Tie DID Line Ports should not be reassigned PDKU to PEKU cannot be exchanged PSTU to PDKU cannot be exchanged PEKU to PSTU cannot be exchanged e RCIU RCIS circuit assignments to CO lines are not affected by Program 01 and 02 3 2 Program 03 for DK14 Slot Assignments System amp Station Program 03 for DK14 Slot Assignments When DK14 is powered On Program 03 automatically assigns the correct codes for installed PCBs No record sheet is needed
86. 000 239 RCTUE F 001 200 Port Number Program 16 Line Group Number 900 916 00 16 000 335 For R4 3 and higher If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Restriction and LCR on tandem calls assign a class of service in this program Program ports 900 916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 respectively CO Line LED Port 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 UONILIS9Y IIOL 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 4 11 Toll Restriction Program 43 0 Credit Card Dialing Option Program 43 Overview This program enables selected station users to bypass their normal Toll Restriction assignments by dialing 0 immediately after seizing a CO line Both the station and the line must be enabled for this feature with this program After seizing the line the station user is required to dial a specific number of digits which includes the leading 0 This digit length requirement forces the user to dial a telephone number or a telephone number plus a credit card number As a result these calls are billed to the credit card and operator placed calls are not billed to the line The digit length 1 30 numbers is set in Program 60 7 This length is determined by the system s call routing method If the number of d
87. 02 DNIS Number will be sent from OAI port DNIS Number will not be sent from OAI port 01 Caller ID ANI will be sent from OAI port Caller ID ANI will not be sent from OAI port Program 77 4 Overview This program is used to enable Caller ID Automatic Number Identification ANI and or Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Numbers received to be sent from the RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI port The OAI port sends MIS data for ACD calls only along with ANI Caller ID and or DNIS Numbers received on ACD calls depending on LED 01 and LED 02 option settings ANI Caller ID and or DNIS numbers on non ACD calls will not be sent out the OAI port for non ACD calls 3 171 System amp Station Program 77 4 RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI Data Output Assignments LED 01 LED 02 RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI Data Output Assignments Caller ID DNIS ANI OAI Output Options Turn LED 01 On if the OAI port should send Caller ID and or ANI information for ACD calls and LED 02 On if the OAI port should send DNIS Number not DNIS NAME for ACD calls LED 01 and 02 may be On or Off in any combination RCTU PCB requires RK YS4 and RSIU to provide MIS Caller ID ANI and DN information via the system OAI port 3 172 System amp Station Program 78 CO Line Special Ringing Assignments Program 78 CO Line Special Ringing Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i Program Type Station Init
88. 027 4 B2CAU BU 000 111 8 RCTUA 000 031 4 B3CAU BU 000 191 8 RCTUBA BB 000 079 4 B5CAU BU 000 335 4 RCTUC D 000 239 8 RCTUE F 000 335 8 Port Feature LED Page Group H 08 Page Group G 07 Page Group F 06 Page Group E 05 Page Group D 04 Page Group C 03 Page Group B 02 Page Group A 01 Shaded groups apply to RCTUC D and RCTUE F only Program 30 Overview Digital and electronic telephones can be assigned to internal telephone speaker page groups with this program Each group can have as many as 120 stations Telephones can be a member of more than one group Station users can access each group separately by dialing access codes See Program 05 for access codes The above table shows four or eight page groups An additional group is the All Call Page Group set in Program 31 LED 10 Notes e A maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to a particular page group e Only 120 telephones can be paged simultaneously Example If Page Group A has 60 telephones Page Group B has 50 telephones and Page Group C has 70 telephones then Group A B 60 50 110 can be paged simultaneously but Group A C 60 70 130 cannot be paged simultaneously System amp Station Program 31 Station Class of Service Program 31 Station Class of Service DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default LED 10 On for Ports
89. 13 Table 13 Area Office Exception Not Selected 12 Table 12 Area Office Exception Not Selected 11 Table 11 Area Office Exception Not Selected 10 Table 10 Area Office Exception Not Selected 9 Table 09 Area Office Exception Not Selected 8 Table 08 Area Office Exception Not Selected 7 Table 07 Area Office Exception Not Selected 6 Table 06 Area Office Exception Not Selected 5 Table 05 Area Office Exception Not Selected 4 Table 04 Area Office Exception Not Selected 3 Table 03 Area Office Exception Not Selected 2 Table 02 Area Office Exception Not Selected 1 Table 01 Area Office Exception Not Selected Programs 46 11 46 81 Overview Run these programs for area office code exception table assignments Refer to the legend above the record sheet for exception tables and classes Exception tables for both area and office codes will be defined in Program 47 Each class can be assigned any or all of the available office code exception tables Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Assigns no office codes to tables AREA CODE Enter only one area code per exception table 4 2 4 3 Spkr 4 7 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Toll Restriction Program 47 Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes Tables 1 16 SELECT Exception Table from Legend A new exception table is needed for each area code with office codes that are exceptions to restriction Program 47 Toll Restriction
90. 130 88 108 128 98 118 138 146 166 186 147 167 187 148 168 188 149 169 189 150 170 190 148 168 188 158 178 198 01 21 41 61 02 22 42 62 03 23 43 63 04 24 44 64 05 25 45 65 81 101 121 82 102 122 83 103 123 84 104 124 85 105 125 27 47 67 37 57 77 141 161 181 142 162 182 143 163 183 144 164 184 145 165 185 87 107 127 97 117 137 147 167 187 157 177 197 26 46 66 36 56 76 1000 series digital telephone strip shows programming button LED i 10 Eee bie 116 Te assignment locations Shown as reference only not available as an 9 166 186 387176198 individual strip 25 45 65 35 55 75 85 105 125 95 115 135 145 165 185 155 175 195 24 44 64 3 34 54 74 LED Buttons and CO line numbers 01 20 84 104 124 94 114 134 144 164 184 154 174 194 23 43 63 33 53 73 Last digit of EK port number for 83 103 123 93 113 133 programs with a format like 71 72 and 73 143 163 183 153 173 193 22 42 62 1 32 52 72 82 102 122 92 112 132 CO line numbers 21 200 142 162 182 152 172 192 Bi oa i a Se 2000 series digital telephone strip supplied with each Strata DK 141 161 181 151 171 191 Programming Manual and each Documentation Package that ships with the system Can also be used with 6000 and 6500 series electronic telephones Note Button numbers 01 200 on electronic telephones 6000 650
91. 191 500 739 RCTUBA BB 001 048 000 079 500 579 B5CAU BU 001 200 000 335 500 835 RCTUC D 001 144 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 001 200 000 335 500 835 CO Line Day Ring Day 2 Ring Night Ring CO Line Day Ring Day 2 Ring Night Ring Number DN 81 DN 84 DN 87 Number DN 81 DN 84 DN 87 Important Blank out initialized default data if CO line should not ring and flash PDN assigned to port 000 and port 001 If this initialized data is programmed when other DNs or telephones should flash and ring Call Forward and Station Hunt may not operate properly 3 184 System amp Station Programs 81 84 and 87 Ground Loop Starl CO Line to DN LED Flash Assignments Programs 81 84 and 87 Overview Ground loop start CO lines can be assigned to ring and flash specific Directory Number buttons including PDNs SDNs or PhDNs These programs assign which DN will flash when a ground loop start CO line rings a direct incoming call to the DK system Programs 81 89 must be used in conjunction with Programs 81 84 and 87 to ring the telephone on which the flashing DN appears Refer to the CO Line DN button LED control logic diagrams that follow these record sheets for more information Each ground loop start CO line can be assigned to flash one DN but that DN button can be assigned to up to 120 telephones The assigned DN LED will flash as 1 Hz rate when CO line call rings into the DK424 If a specific CO Li
92. 20 Sun 06 43 2 HKHE1 2 3 Program Mode Enter programming mode Do not press DN button 3 Spkr Speaker 33 Hold Program 33 Access Program 33 System beeps after Spkr Speaker is pressed Data store to indicate program number may be entered 4 Spkr Speaker 33 Select Prepare the system for a station port selection 5 000 335 or 500 835 33 Select 000 335 Select the port number of the Hunt From station A range of ports can Hunt To be entered as specified on the record sheet After the Hunt From port is entered press the button Do not press when entering a range 6 000 335 or 500 835 33 Select 000 335 Enter the port number of the Hunt To point as recorded on the system tunt To 000 335 record sheet Press LED button 01 to delete a digit from Hunt To point ports 7 Hold 33 Select 000 335 Secure data in system programming Data Programmed 8 Spkr Speaker 33 Select Prepare system for another selection go back to Step 5 or exit Program 33 continue with Step 9 9 Hold 33 Select Secure Program 33 data in system memory Data Programmed 10 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 33 Enter another program number or exit programming mode go to Step 11 Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 33 11 Hold No N N Exit programming mode Jan 20 Sun 06 58 1 N N Program telephone PDN System amp Station Program 33 PhDN Owner Telephone Ass
93. 4 also allows a pause to be inserted into the dialing sequence Least Cost Routing Program 56 LCR Station Group Assignments Program 56 LCR Station Group Assignments Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Least Cost Routing Initialized Default Assigns all stations to Group 1 1 2 3 Spkr 5 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number s Enter port numbers of stations being assigned To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Enter LCR Station Group 1 8 Processor Port Range LCR Station Groups Processor Port Range LCR Station Groups DK14 000 009 1 4 B1CU 000 055 1 4 DK40i 000 027 1 4 B2CAU BU 000 111 1 8 RCTUA 000 031 1 4 B3CAU BU 000 191 1 8 RCTUBA BB 000 079 1 4 B5CAU BU 000 335 1 8 RCTUC D 000 239 1 8 RCTUE F 000 335 1 8 Program 16 Port Number Line Group For R4 3 and higher If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Number Restriction and LCR on tandem calls assign a class of service in this 900 916 00 16 program Program ports 900 916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 Port LCR Station Group Port LCR Station Group Port LCR Station Group Port LCR Station Group Number N
94. 527 RCTUA 01 078 000 031 500 531 RCTUBA BB 01 08 000 079 500 079 RCTUC D 01 16 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 01 16 000 335 500 835 B1CU 01 08 000 055 500 579 B2CAU CU 01 16 000 111 500 739 B3CAU BU 01 16 000 191 500 739 B5CAU BU 01 16 000 335 500 8355 Data Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination OPO OP1 OP2 OP3 Overflow Point OP Destination Incoming Port 000 Only one OP can be programmed For No Overflow select DATA 0 301 308 ACD Group DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 301 316 ACD Group RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 401 416 ACD Group RCTUE F BSCAU BU 320 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU B 420 RCTUE F BSCAU BU Auto Attendant DK Built in 421 RCTUE F BSCAU BU Normal CO line Ring assignments not including delayed ringing assignments 321 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU See PhDN Port Range PhDN Program 04 Port Number 900 915 Distributed Hunt Group Program 04 Port Number ACD Group RNA and Overflow ACD Group RNA and Overflow Number IAI Point Destination Number Oyerriowikoini Point Destination uonnq 4siq 12D 9ewony 6 23 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination 6 24 Program 14 5 Overview There are two basic options for call overflow Overflow Point Calls
95. 91 94 Processor B101 Slot Bios Sior Slot Code P cogs Cabinet 1 Assignment PCB Codes B1CU No Yes 00 91 94 91 No RRCS 92 4 circuit RRCS BLICAU Yes No 00 91 94 93 8 circuit RRCS 94 12 circuit RRCS BUCBU No Yes 01 91 94 2 3 or5 Note When using RCTUA Slot 15 and 16 does not support Speaker OCA or DIU Data Switching RCTUA does not support RS 232 Voice Mail Integration SMDD and attendant console features If an RSIU is installed in base cabinet slot 11 you must connect the programming station to circuit 6 in slot 12 In this case a PDKU or PEKU should be installed in slot 12 and Station Port Number 000 007 will be in slot 12 If an RSIU is not installed you must connect the programming station to circuit 6 in slot 11 Port 005 and or circuit 6 in slot 12 port 013 The station must be a 20 button digital LCD or electronic LCD telephone Also if an RSIU is not installed install a PDKU or PEKU in slot 11 Program 03 Example Action press buttons LED buttons System amp Station Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments LCD Response Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware Requirements on Page 1 14 No 205 Jan 20 Sun 06 43 2 HKH1 2 3 Program Mode Enter programming mode Do not press DN button 3 Spkr Speaker 03 Hold Program 03 Access Program 03 System beeps after Spkr Speaker is pressed Data Store to indicate progra
96. A RCTUE F System Speed Dial 200 999 Default PDNs and Park Orbits see Program 04 Executive Override Dial 3 N A All Call Voice Page 30 All Call Voice Page with External Spkrs 39 RCTUE F B5CAU BU Ext Page Zones 351 358 RCTUA C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU External Page Zones 1 4 35 38 Group Page Internal 311 318 Park Page Cnf 331 Park Pick Up DN 331 see Program 05 Park Hold Cnf 332 Default PDNs and Park Orbits see Program 04 Default PhDNs see Program 04 Automatic Callback Dial 4 N A CO Line Queuing Dial 4 N A Station Number Display 401 Port Number Display 402 Hold 41 Hold Pickup 42 Automatic Busy Redial Conf 44 Automatic Busy Redial Cancel Int 44 Message Waiting Answer 408 from INT PDN or PhDN Display PDN SDN or PADN on LCD 407 Emergency Call to Attendant Console 400 Standard telephone Redial 44 or dial for feature access code Flash Cnf 45 Account Code Input Cnf 46 T R Override T Class Code Input Cnf 47 BGM Over Stations On 481 BGM Over Stations Off 480 BGM Over External Speakers On 491 Station Port 000 only BGM Over External Speakers Off 490 Station Port 000 only Cancel Message Waiting at Station 409 from PDN or PhDN Retrieve Message Waiting 408 Access Code Speed Dial Prefix 44 or To store a CO line or feature access code in Speed Dia
97. AUTO ATT DIAL appears on the LCD 3 Enter the destination DH or station PDN not Port number number or 4 plus the ACD group per Note associated with the prompts and then the Hold button 4 Press Spkr and repeat Steps 2 and 3 for more prompt station entries gt To enter two digit dialing prompts along with their destination station numbers 1 Enter Program 09 and then see SELECT on the LCD 2 Press the desired leading digit then see AUTO ATT DIAL on the LCD 3 Press and then the Hold button The first digit will now be set and DATA PROGRAMED will again appear on the LCD 4 Press Spkr and press a second digit and then see AUTO ATT DIAL on the LCD Enter the destination station DN assigned to the two digit prompt and then the Hold button 6 To complete more prompt station entries repeat Steps 4 and 6 gt To assign a digit menu prompt to an ACD Group Enter 4XX in place of the DN at the AUTO ATT DIAL LCD programming prompt where XX is the ACD Group number 01 16 Note When transmission and DTMF levels are lower than normal or when the digital announcement voice frequencies match DTMF digital frequencies talk off Auto Attendant efficiency may be improved with two digit dialing options instead of one digit dialing options 3 24 System amp Station Program 09 PDN PhDN DH ACD or Modem DID Ext Assignments Program 09 PDN PhDN DH ACD or Modem DID
98. Applies to REMU TDDU PEMU and RDDU Tie DID lines only Select Wink Start or Immediate Start for the entered Tie or DID line See Program 41 2 for RDTU Tie DID Wink Immediate Start assignments or RDTU T1 Tie lines configured as DID lines in Program 42 1 LED 01 Page Handsfree Answerback Allows LED 01 On or denies LED 01 Off the following features when connecting the Strata DK to another Key PBX LED 01 applies to both Tie and DID lines when programmed with Program 71 assignments If using a private network then turn LED 01 On to allow Page access on Tie and DID lines programmed with DNIS assignments in Program 71 Code 039 Per FCC regulations public telephone network Tie DID or DNIS lines must always be restricted LED 01 Off from Page and Handsfree Answerback Callers on the far end Key PBX system can access the Strata DK system external and or Station All Call Page over DID and or Tie lines programmed with DNIS assignment Program 10 2 LED 15 and Program 71 1 Code 039 for DID Tie DNIS assignments Tie lines only that route per Program 04 can dial any Page Zone or Page Group access code Callers on the far end Key PBX system can make voice announce calls to stations on the near end Strata DK This option applies only Tie lines not DID lines that route per Program 04 or Program 71 You must program the Strata DK as Voice First in Program 10 1 LED 01 or the far end can dial 1 after dialing the DN on
99. B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Sas VACN Verified Account Code 1 15 digits 3 digit A 6 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 o N o 3 148 System amp Station Program 69 Verified Account Codes Program 69 Overview Verified Account Codes VACs may be added deleted or changed with Program 69 Each Verified Account Code can be 1 15 digits long but cannot exceed the Account Code length requirement set in Program 60 4 Account Codes may not conflict with be the same as emergency numbers in Program 44 91 93 The following programs and options should be considered when establishing Verified Account Codes Account Code Digit Length Program 60 4 sets the digit length that must be dialed for all Account Codes Forced Verified Nonverified and Voluntary Verified Nonverified Full and Partially Verified Account Codes Verified Account Codes can contain the same number of digits full Verified Account Code or less partially Verified Account Code than the length set in Program 60 4 If the quantity of digits in a VAC is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program 60 4 then all digits will be Verified if the quantity of digits is less then only those digits will be verified S
100. BU 001 120 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B5CAU BU 001 200 RCTUC D 001 144 RCTUE F 001 200 LED CO Line X LED CO Line X LED CO Line 20 20 20 19 19 19 18 18 18 17 17 17 16 16 16 15 15 15 14 14 14 13 13 13 12 12 12 11 11 11 10 10 10 09 09 09 08 08 08 07 07 07 06 06 06 05 05 05 04 04 04 03 03 03 02 02 02 01 01 01 uo01911 S94 IIOL 4 19 Toll Restriction Program 45 3 6 Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length 4 20 Program 45 3 6 Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Assigns blank data to Items 3 and 5 and 00 data to Items 4 and 6 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Item 3 6 e ee DATA Enter the Item number First five digits of the SPCC number or digit length 3 6 from the table below specified in the table below When editing e Press to move cursor e Press LED Button 01 to delete or leave a blank e Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work Item Description BA ast iiye digits SPCC Number or Digit Length 3 SPCC1 Telephone Number 4 Allowed Digit Length 00 99 5 SPCC2 Telephone Number 6 Allowed Digit Length 00 99 Program 45 3 6 Ov
101. CO line is programmed for normal operation guard time is 0 45 seconds See Program 10 1 Button LED 02 Do not use this program when using LCR behind Centrex PBX use Program 45 2 instead Also do not use this program if installing CO lines behind assume 9 Centrex UO HILIS9Y IIOL 4 9 Toll Restriction Program 42 1 8 PBX Centrex Access Codes Program 42 1 8 PBX Centrex Access Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Assigns no access codes to PBX groups 1 2 3 Spkr 4 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 8 PBX Access Code Group ACCESS CODE Enter a 2 digit access code for the group Enter the PBX Group Number 1 8 that needs as defined by the table below an access code assigned e If access code is single digit enter the first digit and press LED Button 01 as second digit e Press LED Button 01 to delete digit e Press LED Button 02 for Wild Card digit any digit 0 9 For example pressing 8 LED Button 02 allows 80 89 PBX Centrex Access Code PBX Centrex Outgoing CO Line Access Code s Number 1st Digit 2nd Digit OINI O oo A OJ NM Program 42 1 8 Overview The Centrex access code s used to make out of centrex calls usually 9
102. Call Park Orbits 05 37 39 58 4 59 DKi Admin 77 1 M JM AO 1 7 Overview Alphabetical Program Listing 1 8 Feature or Topic Program Number Feature or Topic Program Number DNIS 12 17 20 60 1 71 0 5 72 03 50 1 50 2 50 3 50 4 50 5 50 6 51 52 53 54 55 0 55 1 2 77 4 Do Not Disturb 39 Do Not Disturb Override 05 30 Door Lock Control 39 77 1 77 2 Door Phones 05 77 1 77 2 79 79 ae 56 60 2 60 3 76 1 Leal are HA i ia Magi ISDN 43 1 4 44 60 61 62 63 64 1 64 2 65 66 1 7 67 1 4 68 1 68 2 69 1 69 2 DSS Console Features 03 28 29 1 29 8 10 2 Handsfree Answerback 17 31 Hold Park Recall Timing 34 Hunting Station 10 2 22 33 Immediate Transfer with Soft 10 2 Key Initialization system 7 programs 91 9 91 1 90 Initialization system personal F memory 91 9 92 Keystrips 38 Least Cost Routing 45 2 45 3 45 4 50 56 DSS DKT EKT 28 DTMF and Dial Pulse Assignments 10 1 15 30 39 DTMF Receiver QRCU3 K5RCU RRCS Operation ie i a DTMF Signal Time CO lines 10 1 80 160 ms DTMF Signal Time VM Ports 10 2 80 160 ms DTMF Tone No Tone Padded 10 2 Tone Return DTMF Continuous Tone 35 2000 series DKT Emergency Numbers 44 91 93 Liquid Crystal Display Enhanced 911 E911 Exclusive Hold 41
103. Call Plan Number seiiscisiiennnin nnana n ied iai a a el ai 5 1 Tim omn aker O ZETO EE E E e E a AATE Aea 5 2 Area Code and Office Code Exceptions ssesssesssssssssessssesssessessessssesssessseessesstesstessessesseesseessees 5 2 Schedule Assignments Call Routing PlanSs eesseseeeseeseereesesressesrrsressesrssresrestssrnresressesteseesesreete 5 2 Route Definitions eane e a oeie e ai eE Kaa EEEE EE alain TS 5 2 ECR Modified Digit ASSIENMENTS 2 0 2 cceiec cee icsber tessa in E E A e a i EEA E aAa 5 2 LCR Station Access Priority Assignments eseeeessseeseseresrsresrrsserrrsesresrestesrestesrestrsreseeeresreeee 5 2 ECR CONdHUONS herirnir eener aie ate ee e Eeer Aia eera Aei eea EEA EEEE 5 2 LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table ee eeeessecssecsseeseeeseeeseeeseecaaecaeceseeeseceaeeeaaeeaaeaeen 5 3 Program 50 1 LCR Pataieters saccu anioni a i iieii a a iess 5 4 Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Codes unoinireei trete nia a E aE E e a a 5 5 Programs 50 3 1 5 LCR Special Codes oo eee escessecssecesessceeeseeaecaeceseeseeseneeesecsaecsaeseeeeseeeeneeaaes 5 6 Program 50 4 LCR Long Distance Information LDI Plan Numbet cc cee eee eseeeseeeneceseeeeeeenes 5 7 Program 50 5 LCR Local Call Plan Number ow cece ceceeeceseecseecsseceeceseeeseeeaeecaaecsaecneesseeeseeeeasenaes 5 8 Program 50 6 LCR Dial 0 Zero Time out ec ecccecceceenceceeeeeeeceeaeceaaeceeaeeceeeeeaeeeeaeseaaecseaeeeeeees 5 9
104. Codes programmed in this table will bypass Toll Restriction and will be sent to the CO local route if using LCR Calls subject to toll restriction are normally restricted if or is pressed during toll restriction digit analysis However in some special applications e g the Strata DK System is connected behind a PBX Centrex or assume_9 Centrex dialing and or may be required within the first four digits or the last digit If the digit string containing matches with any of the six programmed digit strings of this program toll restriction is applied after the matched digit string This program can also be used for special area code dialing plans where the digit 1 is not dialed before the area code See example on the Program 45 2 Examples Notes e Ifusing LCR behind Centrex enter the Centrex trunk access code such as 9 entered in the example below If 9 is entered in this table the user must dial 9 9 911 for an emergency call when using LCR e The record sheet above allows up to 5 digit numbers If the number to be entered is less than 5 digits enter Blanks Button 01 for all digits less than 5 digits Example Centrex assume 9 If using LCR behind assume 9 Centrex and restricted stations 1 AC not allowed must dial 12XX and 13XX as Centrex station numbers is the Centrex end of dialing code for extension numbers enter 1 2 Button 02 Button 02 and 1 3
105. Contents Automatic Call Distribution Program ST ECRArea Codes is icaes tone sine e A ish ne E cere 5 10 Program 52 LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code cee ceeeeeeseneeeecnseceeeeseens 5 12 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans ceeceeeeseeseeeseeeseceeeeseceseeeaeeeaeeeneees 5 14 Program 54 LCR Route Definition Tables eee cccccceseceeseceeeseceeseceeaeeceeeeeaeeeeaaeceaaecseneeceeeeesas 5 17 Program 55 LCR Modified Digits Table oo ee eecesceseeeseecnseeeeceseceseeeaeecsaesaecsseeseseaeeeaaeenaee 5 19 Program 55 0 Delete Number of Digits From the Front of Dialed Number ce eee eeeeeeeeeeees 5 20 Program 55 1 and 2 Add Digits Before and or After the Dialed Number eee eeeeeeeseeereeeneee 5 21 Program 56 LCR Station Group Assignments ccceesceesesseceseceseceseeeseesseeeseesseceseesseeeaeeeaaeeneees 5 23 Chapter 6 Automatic Call Distribution Program 03 RSIU RSSU PIOU PIOUS ACD MIS Slot Assignment cceeeceescceesteceeeeeenees 6 2 Program 09 Auto Attendant Prompt ACD Group Assignment eeeeseesecrseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesenees 6 3 Program 09 ACD Group DID Line Digit Assignments ee eeeseeseecseeeneceeeeeeeeeseeeaeenseesseenes 6 5 Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters cceseecceeseeeseesseceseceeeseeeseneesaecsaecsaesneeeseeesneesaes 6 6 Program 11 ACD Timing Assignment innsinn ii e a Sgi Eia 6 7 Program 14 0 Loop
106. DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default 000 FH 1 2 3 Spkr 3 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Tenant Number 1 4 iy DATA Station port designated as Night Transfer Lock Password Change Station for selected tenant Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Tenant Number NT Lock Station or Console Port Program 36 Overview Attendant Consoles and stations assigned in this program can change the System Night Transfer NT Lock password by dialing the sequence below PDN 6 2 2 Redial or Tenant Number 1 4 i Only one station or console can change the code System Tenant CO lines can be locked into the Day Day2 or Night ringing mode only after the NT Lock password is entered Locking the system into a particular ringing mode adds security to line call routing which prevents accidental or mischievous changing of the system ringing mode Night Transfer Lock Password Any telephone or an attendant console can lock the system into a ringing mode The telephone or console must have
107. DTMF test set The digits entered in this program for each station is normally a unique telephone number for each station or station location i e office room building etc The exact CESID digit format required 8 11 L164 E911 Program 12 CESID Station Information 8 12 will vary so you must get the format from the CAMA trunk provider in order to set the CESID information in this program Example formats in which the DK is expected to send digits out the CAMA trunk on E911 calls are as follows 1 When the CAMA trunk is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network CESID digits may be 0 NY Y XXXX Note The hyphens are for clarity do not try to program them in 12 3 0 Information code expected from a PBX on E911 calls This multi frequency MF 0 digit is sent automatically by the DK digits are entered for the calling port in Program 12 NYY Office Code XXXX Station Directory Number When the CAMA trunk is connected directly to the Public Safety Answering Point PSAP the CESID digits may be NXX NYY XXXX NXX Area Code or the PSAP serving multiple area codes will substitute a single digit representing an area code NYY Office Code XXXX Station Directory Number If no digits are entered for a port in Program 12 the DK sends an MF digit of 2 Program 13 Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment Processor Type Program Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Rele
108. Destination is After Shift Destination is After Shift Destination is system DN or DH or Normal CO line ringing another ACD group DK built in Auto Attendant attendant console port assignments Program Program 14 6 Program 14 6 number Program 14 6 14 6 Ground loop start connect to DK built in Auto Attendant and route call per AA programming DID Tie DNIS ANI line Ring or Camp on to station as programmed in Program 14 2 Is destination busy Is destination busy Is an agent ACD Call button idle in the group Ring system DN Ground loop start DH or console port ring system DN per assigned in Programs 81 89 and 3 81 84 87 If agent answers Program 145 Ring idle agent talk on ACD call if Tie DID ring system no answer ring DN per another idle agent Program 14 2 ACD Call button or go to RNA destination see ACD Flowchart 6 7 Ground loop start Busy Ground loop start Busy Override ring the system Override ringing all busy Are all DN or attendant console system DN assigned in agents Busy or in the port assigned Programs 81 89 and 81 After Call Work 84 87 Mode The group s shift is ended or all DID Tie DNIS ANI line DID Tie DNIS ANI line agents are not available Camp on Busy to the Camp on Busy to system iai system DN DH or DN assigned in Route call to the group S EOS or console port assigned Program 14 2 or console All agents unavailable port a
109. Directed Directed Pickup or PKUP 484 Picks up ringing or held intercom trunk calls and page Call Pickup Tenant 4 PKUP 4 435 Call Pickup Tenant 33 PKUP 3 436 Picks up tenant s ringing CO calls Call Pickup Tenant 2 PKUP 2 437 _ See Program 15 for Tenant Group assignments Call Pickup Tenant 1 PKUP 1 438 Call Pickup Group Group Pickup 480 up a call to any group to which station is assigned Unanswered Caller ID and Will Auto Dial a Caller ID and or Automatic Number or ANI Stored Number Auto ape AutoDial RS or 462 Identification ANI telephone number that was stored in Dial station Caller ID ANI memory CO Line Appearance ee 1 200 or CO 001 CO aa CO line access of appearing calls Data Data Call or DATA 456 Used to place data call Data Release Data Release or DRLS 454 Releases data call Direct Station Selection DSS eS Assigns DSS hotline keys to port number Directory Numbers see following pages Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb or DND 498 Prevents calls to station Unlock Door 0 or DRLK 0 471 Unlock Door 1 or DRLK 1 472 Momentarily unlocks door 3 or 6 seconds ADCS Deg DUCE Unlock Door 2 or DRLK 2 473 y Unlock Door 3 or DRLK 3 474 See Program 77 1 and 77 2 Unlock Door 4 or DRLK 4 475 Handset Off Hook Call 4 Activates 2 way voice path to Off Hook Call Announce Announce HS OCA 499 caller R3 Separates the called party s ISDN sub address from the ISDN Sub address Sub address 467 called party number The digit performs
110. Display and or Change 02 Station Physical Port Display and or Change 03 Flexible PCB Cabinet and Slot Assignments X 03 Cabinet Type Identification 04 Station Logical Port Primary Directory Number Assignment 04 PhDN and Distributed Hunt DN for Internal Tie Line Calls 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering 05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing 09 Built in Auto Attendant Prompt Station Assignments X 09 PDN PhDN DH ACD or Modem DID External Assignments X 10 1 3 System Assignments Basic Timing 10 4 ACD Parameters and ISDN PRI and BRI T wait Timers X 10 11 E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment 10 12 E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment 10 91 E911 Interdigital Timer 10 92 E911 Pause Before Send Timer 11 ACD Timing Assignments X 11 1 9 CAMA Trunk Assignments 12 System Assignments a2 ANI Station Information 13 Defining the Message Center 13 Station Group Information 14 0 Loop Ground Start CO Line Direct Ring to ACD Group Assignments xX 14 1 ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments X Overview Numerical Program Listing E w 5 3 c z Program Title 2 2l T tA fe g ce a 2 3 8 a E aA Hl F as ae 14 4 Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID X 14 2 ACD Supervisor Passwords X 14 2 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line After Shift and Overflow Substitution Destination xX 14 3 Announcement
111. Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes Tables 1 16 DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Toll Restriction Spx Hold Hold Spkr Spkr L Hoia SELECT Exception Table 01 16 masi mer DATA Enter 2 3 4 Enter or display office code s 2 add to the exception table 3 Delete from the exception table 4 Display the exception table s office codes Processor Exception Table DK14 01 08 DK40i 01 08 RCTUA 01 08 Exception Table To add a range enter XXX XXX low office code high office code Several ranges or individual office codes may be entered by separating them with the button Processor Exception Table RCTUBA BB 01 08 RCTUC D 01 16 RCTUE F 01 16 Area Code DATA Record of Exception Office Codes uo01911 S 4 IIOL 4 37 Toll Restriction Program 47 Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes Tables 1 16 4 38 Program 47 Overview This program defines exceptions to previously defined office code restrictions for up to 16 area codes allowing six digit Toll Restriction Office codes entered in Tables 01 16 are opposite of what is defined for the area code by Program 46 2 4 For instance if Program 46 denies area code 714 entering office codes 530 a
112. Ext Assignments Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default See legend below Station See legend below KH 1 2 3 Spkr x 0 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Port No see legend ees To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Do not press after entering a port range Then enter the lowest DID Ext number as the first Ext number in the range DIAL DID Extension Number 1 4 digits Press LED Button 01 to erase extension numbers Processor PDN Port Range PDN Ext Processor PDN Port Range PDN Ext DK14 000 009 10 19 B1CU 000 055 200 255 DK40i 000 027 10 37 B2CAU BU 000 111 200 311 RCTUA 000 031 200 231 B3CAU BU 000 191 200 391 RCTUBA BB 000 079 200 279 B5CAU CU 000 335 100 435 RCTUC D 000 239 200 439 RCTUE F 000 335 100 435 IRRDNI PhDN DH Group DH Ext ACD RMDS IMDU Modem Erocsscor fare Ext Ports Default Port ACD Ext Modem Port PhDN Ext DK14 500 509 50 59 900 915 Blank N A N A N A N A DK40i 500 527 50 77 900 915 Blank N A N A 031 41 RCTUA 500 531 500 531 900 915 Blank N A N A 035 235 RCTUBA BB B1CU 500 579 500 579 900 915 Blank 090 097 290 297 085 285
113. Ground Start Line Direct to ACD Group Assignment ceeeeeeseereees 6 11 Program 14 1 ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments ceccesseceseceseceeeceseeeseeeseeeneeeneens 6 12 Program 14 1 Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID oo ee ceeceeeeeneeereeereeeneens 6 12 Program 18 Agent Names for SMIS MIS Assignments 0 ceceecceeseesseceseceseceeeeeeeeneeeaeesaeenaeens 6 13 Program 14 2 ACD Supervisor Passwords csccesceseeeseesseeeseceseceseceseesaeeeseecsecsaeeeseeeeeeaeeesaesaeen 6 15 Program 14 2 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line After Shift Overflow Substitution Destinations 6 16 Program 14 3 Announcement Music Port and Queue Pattern ee eee eseecseceseceseceseeeaeeeseceaeens 6 18 Program 14 4 Queue Time Out Overflow Destination 0 ee eee eeseeseceeceseceseceeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeees 6 21 Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination 6 23 Program 14 6 After Shift Service Destination 0 0 0 ee eececeseceseceeeeeeeeeeeesecaecaeceseceeeseaeeeaeeeaaeeaeees 6 27 Program 14 71 Queue Size for Alarm Immediate Assignments ccescesceseceeeeereeeeeeeeeeaeees 6 29 Program 14 72 Queue Size for Alarm 1 oo eee ceceseceseceseeeseecaaeeseceseceaeesseecsaesaeeseeseeeeaeesnaesnaees 6 30 Program 14 73 Queue Size for Alarm 2 0 cece iip a aE EE EEA E 6 31 Program 14 8 Alarm Pattern Assignments 0 0 0 0 ceeeceescesseceecesee
114. Hold Door Box Number dal Door Box Circuit Number 1 3 L Enter a DN Port Reference Port Number of the DN that should flash when the door phone button is pressed DN PDN or PhDN port see Legend below Processor Type Port Range PhDN Port Range Processor Type Port Range PhDN Port Range DK14 000 009 500 509 B1CU 000 055 500 579 DK40i 000 027 500 527 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 579 B5CAU BU 000 335 500 835 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 Door Phone Number Locatlon Door Phone Box Door Box Circuit DN Port Reference Number Number Number 1 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 1 5 2 2 6 3 7 1 8 3 2 9 3 10 1 11 4 2 12 3 Program 79 Overview This program assigns door phones to ring Directory Number buttons PDNs SDNs PhDNs when pressed and flash the DN s LED Each door phone can be assigned to flash one DN s LED and the DN can be assigned to appear and ring on up to 120 telephones Program 79 must be used in conjunction with Program 79 to ring a telephone with a flashing DN when the door phone button is pressed See Program 77 1 for door phone control box port assignments Important To allow a door phone to flash and ring you must assign the DN to flash in Program 79 and t
115. Hold Spkr 2 a Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 2 al Turn on LEDs 01 04 to select the call type See table below Enter the Trunk Group 01 16 Enter the Time Zone 1 3 For Rel 4 0 enter 1 Trunk Groups Speech 3 1 kHz Audio 64 kbps Data 56 kbps Data mercone LED 01 LED 02 LED 03 LED 04 h OO iN o Oo A OIN 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Program 67 2 Overview This program defines the call type or Bearer Services allowed for each ISDN trunk group These settings will be set for three different time zones in an upcoming release All of the call types that will be used should be turned on Normally Speech and 3 1 kHz Audio non ISDN voice calls and fax calls should be turned on NASI 7 37 ISDN Program 67 3 ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel Reservation Program 67 3 ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel Reservation Processor Type All RCTUs Release 4 15 DK40i and all BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Default 00 A 1 2 3 Spkr 6 7 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Seia L_ MIN Minimum number of B channels reserved Enter the Trunk Group 01 16 Max 47 when sharing D channe
116. Hold SELECT 9 I we DATA Account Digits 01 15 SELECT ACD Group No Processor ACD Group Numbers DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU CU 01 16 RCTUE F BSCAU CU 01 16 ACD Group Number Number of Work Unit Digits Program 14 9 Overview This program selects the length of the Work Unit code for each ACD Group Agents talking on an ACD call can press the Work Unit button and enter a Work Unit code 1 15 digits for each call The outside caller cannot hear the code so conversation is not interrupted SMIS only records Peg one or two digit Work Unit codes SMDR can record 1 15 digit Work Unit codes If multiple work unit codes are entered on the same ACD call only the last code entered will be sent to SMDR however SMIS will register all Work Unit codes entered The Strata DK SMDR data will send up to 15 Work Unit digits in the Account Code data field of the standard DK SMDR output MIS TTY data will send only 1 or 2 digit Work Unit codes When the Work Unit button is pressed on the Agent telephone the LCD shows ENTER STRK DIAL The Agent must enter the number of digits assigned in this program to allow a work unit peg to be sent to SMIS Any number of digits entered even if less than assigned in this program will be sent to SMDR when the ACD call is ended 6 34 Automatic Call Distribution Program 15 Gr
117. ISDN PRI Span the Primary Clocking 42 1 XX 1 Source for the DK System XX equals the slot in the DK system where the RPTU PCB is placed and to look at circuit 1 43 4 124 This tells the system that the D Channel on the 1st ISDN PRI Span is the 24th channel on the PRI Span 63 2 04 This tells the system how long to wait to collect digits from station users making a ISDN PRI Call before sending it to the network 64 1 LED 01 Off This tells the system to except the incoming calls on the PRI Span as LDN type calls 65 1 CO LEDs 001 023 This tells the system that there are 23 bearer channels on the first Channel On Group and that they will appear on CO lines 001 023 66 1 011 This tells the system that Trunk Group 01 is assigned to PRI Channel Group 1 01 LEDs 01 02 11 12 This tells the system that Operator Calls Carrier Access 1 10 Digit Dialing On and Ring Back Tone to the outside caller are allowed 01 LED 13 On This tells the system when interfaced with DMS XXX to send the progress 66 3 descriptor 81 or 83 LED 14 On When connecting to a DMS XXX with NI1 protocol LED 15 On Set up message for outgoing call When connecting to a DMS XXX LED 11 must be Off in Program 66 3 when this LED is On XXX XXXxX tells the system what the LDN number is that the network will be SOR Sy IPT OT AAAA sending for the LDN Type Call for Trunk Group 01 1 01 CO LEDs This tells the system to ring CO appearances 001 023 for incoming LDN 66 6 calls that matc
118. ISDN and LDN routing uole s 9 We sis Important This program also covers ACD features See Chapter 6 of this document for Program 10 4 ACD functions LED 09 Listed Directory Number LDN Registration Release 4 15 On ISDN incoming calls LDN Registration routes unknown number or call type in numbering plan when LED 09 is On unknown number or call type will not route and caller hears reorder tone when LED 09 is Off LED 10 Not Used LED 11 PRI ISDN Timer The T Wait timer is an ISDN timer that is required to reduce the potential for a network overload condition due to a large number of ISDN terminals requesting initialization at the same time e g due to an area wide power failure This timer creates a random time interval and is called upon power up to set a value to delay the initialization process until the timer has expired This timer is seldom used for PRI interfaces 3 39 System amp Station Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters 3 40 LED 12 BRI ISDN Timer The T Wait timer for BRI and PRI terminals works the same way See LED 11 for a description This timer should be used for BRI terminals and only disabled if the local provider instructs disabling this timer LED 13 3 1kHz Audio Calls received from the non ISDN portion of the public network come in 3 1 kHz audio A progress indicator is not always provided for these types of calls Turning LED 13 Off allows all calls to be received Toshiba re
119. Important To identify Program 03 PCB slot codes run Program 91 1 after you install all PCBs Notes e You can run Program 91 1 after setting PCB option codes with Program 03 this does not erase option codes For example if Slot 00 is assigned code 92 Program 91 1 will not erase the codes previously assigned with Program 03 e Ifyou install PCBs before initializing the system with Program 91 9 it is not necessary to run Program 91 1 to assign the Program 03 PCB slot codes for the installed PCBs You must always run Program 03 to identify PCB options such as KSRCU QRCU3 and RRCS codes 92 93 and 94 and PDKU codes 61 62 and 64 etc Initialization amp Test Program 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber Program 91 1 Example Action press buttons LED Buttons Use the LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware Requirements on Page 1 14 LCD Response Jan 20 Sun No N Nt 06 43 KKH K2 3 Enter programming mode Do not press DN button Program Mode Spkr Speaker 91 Hold Access Program 91 System beeps after Spkr Speaker is pressed to indicate program number may be entered Program 91 Data Store Spkr Speaker Prepare the system for a station port selection 91 Select Press 1 91 Select 1 Renumber and Reset Press LED Buttons 01 and 02 LEDs turn On 91 Select 1 Renumber and Reset Press Hold The telephone will exit the programming mode
120. Line Range Processor CO Line Range DK14 NA RCTUBA BB 001 048 B1iCU 001 032 DK40i NA RCTUC D 001 144 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 RCTUE F 001 200 B3CAU BU 001 120 B5CAU BU 001 200 System Call Forward Station LED CO Lines Ring Mode Ring Assignment Delay 2 89 09 Night Delay 1 88 08 Immediate 87 07 Delay 2 86 06 Day 2 Delay 1 85 05 Immediate 84 04 Delay 2 83 03 Day Delay 1 82 02 Immediate 81 01 uolje S 9 We sis Program 80 Overview Sets the Call Forward CF ringing assignment for ground loop CO line calls The station that controls CF should be the only station programmed to ring in the appropriate Ringing Assignment Programs 81 89 This program does not apply to Tie DID DNIS or ANI lines Example application A CO line call rings a CO line button on multiple stations then Call Forwards CO line 001 is programmed to ring station 200 then after 12 secs it delay rings stations 201 and 202 12 secs Then CO line 001 will CF per station 203 s CF setting If station 203 has CF No Answer CO line 001 will ring station 203 and then CF If station 203 has CF All Calls CO line 001 will not ring station 203 but will forward immediately Programming for the above example Program 39 Put CO line 001 button on stations 200 203 Program 81 Set CO line 001 to ring station 200 immediately Program 82 Set CO line 001 to Delay Ring station 201 and 202 Program 83 Se
121. Message Center Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default No port assigned e 1 2 4 3 Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr 1 3 Hold Spkr 1 Hold SELECT 1 PORT Station Logical Port Number SELECT 6 9 are not used Enter the station logical port number of the station to be defined as the Message Center For RS 232 SMDI and In Band DTMF voice mail integration enter the lowest QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU2 standard telephone port connected to the VM device see notes below Port Number Program 13 Overview This program assigns a station as the Message Center Each digital electronic and standard telephone can receive a maximum of four message waiting indications per PDN and each PhDN owned by the station One of these four is reserved for the designated Message Center The Message Center should be the customer s main answering position Typically the Message Center is a voice mail device attendant console a digital or electronic telephone with a DSS console DDSS or HDSS or an add on module If incoming traffic to a DDSS or HDSS console attendant is heavy another station can be assigned as the Message Center Notes e The Message Center is allowed to perform Message Waiting even if disallowed on all other stations
122. Next run Program 66 6 to assign LDN channel groups to ISDN trunk ports Then run Program 66 7 to assign trunk groups to each LDN Run Program 68 2 to define whether or not the system presents a user Caller ID when calls are made using ISDN services This program also enables users to dial a code to send Caller ID or to block it For BRI and PRI run Program 69 to define the parameters for Calling Number to be presented Each phone can present a unique Caller ID number such as DID or a private number If neither is chosen the default is the Directory Number entered in Program 68 2 for outgoing calls Run Program 64 to assign each ISDN trunk group to use DID DNIS programming or to provide Direct in Line DIL ringing for incoming calls See ISDN Related Programs on Page 7 3 and make the appropriate programming assignments NASI 7 5 ISDN Guidelines for Programming ISDN Calling Features Guidelines for Programming ISDN Calling Features The following tables provide guidelines for programming various ISDN calling features Programming for ISDN CO Switch Type Determine which type of CO switch is providing the PRI service and set the following programs accordingly This is not necessary for Basic Rate Interface BRI service Most Northern Telecom DMS ISDN switches follow Northern Telecom s PRI custom protocol sometimes referred to as National ISDN Stardard 1 NI1 However some DMS ISDN switches are National
123. Night Transfer Lock Tenant 3 Night Lock3 or NT3 L3 433 B1CU B2CAU BU BSCAU BU and B5CAU BU Used to lock system ringing mode DAY DAY2 NIGHT Night Transfer Lock Tenant 4 Night Lock4 or NT4 L4 434 See Programs 74 and 36 for NT Lock Password assignments Pause Spd Dial Pause or PAU 495 Sets pause in Speed dial See Program 12 3 Pause Long Spd Dial Lng Pause or PAU L 493 Sets a 10 second pause in Speed Dial Pooled Line Pooled Line Grp or PL ie Multiple CO line may appear under one button Privacy Privacy On Line or PRIV 453 Prevents Privacy Override not Executive Override Privacy Release Privacy Release or PRV RLS 479 a station Privacy made te Non private forCO Redial Last Number Button Redial or RDL 496 Redials the last number Release to Idle Release Call or RLS 476 Releases current call and makes station idle Release and Answer Release and Ans or RLS ANS mag Simulates On Hook Off h ok p ration t relase an existing call and answer new incoming ringing call Save Last Dialed Number Save Last Number on SAVE 485 Saves last number dialed for future speed dial Speed Dial Select Button Speed Dial or SDS 497 Begins speed dial selection Reserves button for station speed dial Station Speed Dial code ranges vary per processor 10 49 10 RCTUBA BB RCTUC D B1CU B2CAU BU 49 B3CAU BU DK14 DK40i RCTUA Station Speed Dial Codes SD All DK systems 100 139 RCTU
124. Only one built in modem RMDS or IMDU can be used in the DK424 or DK4241 if both are installed RMDS will be accessed when a CO line direct rings the modem or is transferred to the modem by dialing Cnf Trn 19 DK40i Turn LED 14 On if the optional PIOU or PIOUS has Remote Maintenance from the IMDU modem subassembly If an IMDU is installed on a DK40i PIOU or PIOUS it can be accessed by dialing station 19 unless the access code prefix has been changed with Program 05 Other system Programs that are related to the system modem are Program 76 RMDS TTY assignments on RSIU PCB 51 53 system CO line to modem ringing assignments Program 71 1 DNIS line to modem ringing assignments Program 09 DID line to modem ringing assignments Program 77 1 LED 15 RMDS modem Protocol speed assignments If a modem unit RMDS IMDU is installed it can be accessed by dialing Station 19 and can be assigned a DID extension number in Program 09 or in Program 71 1 3 See Program 79 and Program 79 for door phone ringing assignments LED 10 DKi Admin Backup Enables the system to Upload Download the RCTU RAM data base using Toshiba DKi Admin and or DKi Backup software program DKi Admin Backup will automatically turn LED 10 On when the DKi Admin Backup PC communicates with the DK424 LED 10 should be Off if the maintenance PC is using standard communication software such as Procomm to program the DK424 LED 08 Door Phone Ring On External Page
125. Overflow Destination Initialized Default Port 000 HK HB 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 DATA Queue Timeout Overflow Destination SELECT ACD Group Number Processor ACD Group Numbers PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range DK40i 01 08 000 027 500 527 RCTUA 01 078 000 031 500 531 RCTUBA BB 01 08 000 079 500 079 RCTUC D 01 16 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 01 16 000 335 500 835 B1CU 01 08 000 055 500 579 B2CAU CU 01 16 000 111 500 739 B3CAU BU 01 16 000 191 500 739 B5CAU BU 01 16 000 335 450 785 DATA Queue Timeout Overflow Destination See PDN Port Range Station or Attendant Console PDN Program 04 Port Number 301 308 ACD Group DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB 301 316 ACD Group RCTUC D 401 416 ACD Group RCTUE F pee oven RCTUBA BB C D Auto Attendant DK Built in 321 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU Normal CO line Ring assignments not including delayed ringing 421 RCTUE F B5CAU BU assignments See PhDN Port Range PhDN Program 04 Port Number 900 915 Distributed Hunt Group Program 04 Port Number ACD Group Number Overall Queue Time Out Destination 6 21 uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo
126. Owner telephone it cannot receive calls caller will receive reorder tone but it can be used to originate calls If the PhDN owner telephone is unplugged the PhDN is busy vacant when called unless CF All Call is set in which case it will forward A telephone can be assigned as Owner of up to eight PhDNs PhDN Owner telephones have the following attributes for the PhDNs that it is assigned to own Set Call Forward for all PhDNs that the telephone owns Set Call Forward to a VM Mail Box and Message Retrieve ID codes 656 657 independent of the telephone s Voice Mail assignments This CF to VM Box can be the same as the Owner telephone s VM Box or any other VM Box including a dedicated VM Box for the PhDN Have up to four PhDN Message Waiting MW LEDs Program 39 flexible button This PhDN MW button indicates that the PhDN has a message waiting from voice mail or another DN again independent of the telephone s fixed Msg LED Store ANI and or Caller ID information for abandon calls directed to the PhDN The PhDN Owner telephone must be assigned Abandon Call Memory in Program 51 if the PhDN rings on more than one telephone Can receive OCA calls to the PhDN 3 96 System amp Station Program 34 Hold Recall Timing Program 34 Hold Recall Timing DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Initialized De
127. PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424i Expansion Cabinet 3 Slot Number S301 S302 S303 S304 S305 S306 S307 S308 S309 310 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers DK424i Expansion Cabinet 4 Slot Number 401 402 403 204 405 S406 407 408 409 410 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID SDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers System amp Station Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments DK424i Expansion Cabinet 5 Slot Number 501 502 503 504 305 306 307 308 309 310 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ISDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ISDN Line Numbers See the following text for specific installation rules on the above PCBs Program 03 for DK424i Overview Program 03 tells the system what type of optional PCBs are installed The Program 03 record sheet is the main record for the hardware configuration of the entire system It provides space to record station ports assigned to the station Tie and DID line PCBs and line numbers assigned to the ground loop start CO Tie and DID line PCBs See DK424 and DK424i PCB Codes on Page 3 7 to determine the proper option cod
128. PhDNs by entering the Program 04 port number assignment sequence shown below Refer to Program 04 for Station Logical Port Numbers Also refer to Program 33 to determine which Station Logical Port Number is the owner of the PhDN ZZZ where ZZZ is the Program 04 port number of the PhDN gt 4 2 3 Spkr 3 9 Hold Spkr x x x J Y Y Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Enter the logical port number of the YYY the Program 04 Port Number telephone that will be assigned a DN r 000 336 of the DN that should be button Si assigned If YYY XXX then the DN Press the telephone button to which the Z Z Z sithe PDN it YYY doss lichens uole S 3 We sis 3 119 System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments Button Type Button Labels Code Notes Primary Directory PDN NNNN 1 Highest button YYY Numbers PDNs PDN NNNN 2 next highest HYYY 4 Maximum of same PDN NNNN 3 next highest YYY PDN per telephone PDN NNNN 4 Lowest button YYY YYY the Program 04 station logical port number of the DN that should appear as a PDN YYY should be the same port number as the port number XXX of the telephone to which the PDN is assigned NNNN is the actual DN assignment for Port YYY in Program 04 Secondary Directory Numbers SDNs 4 Maximum of same SDN per telephone SDN NNNN 1 Highest button YYY 16 t
129. Port DID Line Number Number DID Line Number Nuber DID Line Number NEST Program 17 Overview DID and or DNIS calls in which callers have dialed a vacant or invalid port can be routed to intercept ports assigned with this program Each DID and or DNIS line can have its own intercept port In all cases Intercept does not apply to Tie lines 3 56 System amp Station Program 19 Alternate Background Music Source Slot Assignment Program 19 Alternate Background Music Source Slot Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs not used for DK14 See Program 10 2 LED 10 Program Type System Initialized Default Slot 11 y more codes 1x 2x 3 Spkr 1 9 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Turn System Power Off 5 sec then On Or SELECT 1 Run Program 91 2 Enter the Slot Number 11 78 Program 19 Overview The PCB connected to the alternate BGM source can be in any slot Use this program to designate that slot LEDs 09 and 10 in Program 10 2 should be Off if the source is connected to a QSTU2 KSTU2 PSTU RSTU RSTU2 or RDSU Only circuit 2 of these PCBs can support the BGM source The alternate BGM source sends BGM to the external speakers and telephone digital and electronic speakers If an alternate BGM s
130. Port 012 DDCB 2 or HDCB 2 DK424 F o Port 012 DDCB 2 or HDCB 2 DK40i Bos one aie DK40i Expansion Unit Expansion Unit Port 003 DDCB 2 DK14 Port 003 Telephone DK14 Port 004 DDCB 1 or HDCB 1 DK424 DK424i Port 004 Telephone DK40i DK424 DK424i 16 Port 004 DDCB 1 DK40i Port 002 DDCB 1 DK14 Port 002 Telephone DK14 15 RMDS Modem Protocol CCIT 2400 bps RMDS Modem Protocol Bell212A 1200 bps 14 RMDS IMDU Modem DN 19 Enabled RMDS IMDU Modem DN 19 Disabled 10 Enable DKi Admin DKi Backup ACK NAC Disable DKi Admin DKi Backup ACK NAC Protocol Protocol 08 oe Ring on Ext mal Pagen Night No Ring on External Page in Night Mode 07 Door Lock Relay Enabled External Page Relay Enabled 06 NT Relay with NT1 and NT2 Button and NT Relay Steady with NT1 Button DK424 Ringing CO Line and DK424i only 05 MOH Relay Enabled NT Relay Enabled 04 03 LED 02 applies to DK14 or DK40i only 02 LED 01 has priority External Page on Base Unit Relay Enabled LED 01 applies to DK14 or DK40i only 01 MOH on Base Unit Relay Enabled NT on Base Unit Relay Enabled 3 164 System amp Station Program 77 1 Peripheral Options Door Phones Program 77 1 Overview This program performs the following functions fF e gt e e oe o Programs door lock relays Assigns door phones lock control units Enables RMDS IMDU built in maintenance modems Sets RMDS communications standard type Enables
131. Program 66 1 Channel Group Number Parameters Program 66 1 Channel Group Number Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Blank Note Program 65 must be assigned before entering Program 66 If Program 65 changes then this program will be affected Program 66 defaults back to the settings in Program 65 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 L CHGP Channel Group Number 1 8 Enter the ISDN Trunk Group Number Trunk Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Program 66 1 Overview This program assigns PRI ISDN trunk groups to a channel group ISDN Trunk Groups are assigned based upon all available trunk groups in Program 16 identified as PRI trunk groups This program must be entered after Program 65 or anytime a change is made to 65 The channels assigned in 65 will be transferred into the last trunk group entered in 66 1 for that channel group 7 28 ISDN Programs 66 2 and 66 4 Call by Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID Programs 66 2 and 66 4 Call by Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID Processor Type DK40i all R
132. Programs related to Program 74 are Program 39 which assigns the Night Transfer and Night Transfer Lock buttons to stations Also these station s must be assigned as the designated Night Transfer Lock station in Program 36 Program 59 which assigns Night Transfer Night Transfer Lock buttons to attendant consoles Attendant consoles and stations assigned in Program 36 can also change the Night Transfer Lock button password using a special access code Program 36 is not required to assign attendant consoles to Night Transfer Lock functions Also see Programs 39 36 15 and 77 3 3 161 System amp Station Program 76 1 X Y DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs 3 162 Program 76 1 X Y DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Port 1 Type 1 Ports 2 4 Type 0 HK 1 2 43 Spkr 7 6 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 X Port Number 1 4 Run Program 91 2 gel System power must be cycled or Program 91 2 must be run to transfer Program 76 1 data entries Y Port Type 0 6 see table below from temporary memory to working memory Port Number Port Type 0 6 1 2 3 4 Program 76 1 Overview This program assigns each installed WSIU
133. RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 500 739 500 739 900 915 Blank 250 265 450 465 245 445 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 500 835 450 785 900 915 Blank 345 360 850 865 340 840 E DNT ON PDN PhDN DH ACD EORI ON PDN PhDN DH ACD ELONI OH PDN PhDN DH ACD Aoo ER EES AGD Ey BE EEN PSS Aae E ane Modem Port Modem Port Modem Port uolje S 9 We sis 3 25 System amp Station Program 09 PDN PhDN DH ACD or Modem DID Ext Assignments 3 26 Program 09 Overview This program assigns the routing destinations for incoming DID line calls Program 09 DID extension numbers can be routed to PDNs SDNs or PhDNs ACD Groups or Distributed Hunt groups Each PDN SDN and or PhDN can appear and ring immediate 12 sec delay or 24 sec delay with Program 71 72 and 73 on up to 120 telephones A DID extension number can ring up to 120 telephones maximum Any DID line can be assigned to route with Program 71 and 72 DNIS routing assignments instead of Program 09 assignments to provide all the DNIS call routing features to normal DID lines Which program options Program 09 or Program 71 and 72 DID line call routing will follow is determined for each DID line in Program 17 LED 05 and or 07 see Program 17 for more details On DK424 DID calls will alternately ring all or selected Attendant Consoles in the load share group assigned in Program 81 89 w
134. Recall Time assigned To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port PARK TIME Seconds Enter the number of seconds the system will wait three digits Enter 011 999 for 11 to 999 seconds Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port Seconds Port Seconds Port Seconds Port Seconds Program 37 Overview Each station can have a different duration from 011 to 999 seconds from the time of parking a call to the time the parked party recalls the station Initialized data assigns a park recall time of 032 seconds to all ports 3 108 Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type Processor Type Program Type Station Initialized Default Assigns Code 31 to all ports DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Important Spkr OF System amp Station Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type If you only want to view Program 38 data do not press Hold press Spkr Pressing Hold will change Program 39 assignments 5 1 Spkr 3 8 Hold Spkr
135. Relay on the PIOU or PIOUS with LEDOS5 or activate the NT Relay on the DK40i KSU with LED 01 before setting Night Transfer mode with LED 06 In one mode the relay will activate for one second then be idle for three seconds when a line rings incoming while the system is in the Night mode The intended application is to control an external ringing device at night Program 78 or Program 71 1 3 Code 271 must have Ring Over External Page activated for this feature In the second mode the relay will operate continuously while the NIGHT mode is activated One application for this mode is to control an external answering machine CO lines must be assigned to night ring over External Page Program 78 1 to allow the NT relay to operate when incoming CO lines ring LED 05 MOHI NT Relay DK40i DK424 A relay on the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU can be assigned to operate in one of two applications A choice must be made between use for Night Transfer application see NT Relay LED 06 or Music on Hold MOH If used for MOH the relay will activate when any trunk or station is placed on hold The intended application is to control a tape player which can be used as a Music on Hold source LEDs 02 and 01 MOH NT External Page Relay DK14 and DK40i For KSU relay to MOH LEDs 01 and 02 must be On For NT function LED 02 must be On LED 01 Off For External Page function LED02 must be Off LED 01 can be On or Off uolje S 9 We sis 3 167 Syst
136. Ring Transfer is allowed set Ring Transfer Recall time in Program 37 if ring transfer is not allowed LED 07 Off the station recalls immediately if transfer is attempted PET Standard Ring 06 CO Line Repeat Ringing Standard ring pattern is 1 sec on 3 sec off 05 Incoming Call Abandon 8 sec 6 sec 80 msec LED 04 DTMF Signal Time applies to manual and speed dial tones f sent out of the system via CO lines This applies when dialing from 04 CO Line DTMF Signal Time 160 msec any Toshiba telephone including the 2000 series Digital Telephone LED 04 does not apply to Call Forward or Voice Mail ID DTMF tones sent to voice mail ports See Program 10 2 LED 06 for tones sent to Voice Mail ports 03 Dial Pulse Make Ratio 33 40 CO Line Re seize guard time 0 45 CO line guard time is the time interval the system requires to release 02 0 45 or 1 5 sec per Program 42 0 a CO line and reseize it If LED 02 is off all lines are set with 0 45 second guard time if LED is on guard time is 0 45 or 1 5 seconds per Program 42 0 3 Voice First from SLTs DKTs and EKTs 01 Tone First from SLTs DKTs and EKTs f This applies to PDNs not PhDNs PhDNs are always tone first uO e S 9 Wa shs 3 27 System amp Station Program 10 1 System Assignments Part 1 of 3 3 28 Program 10 1 Overview You can make the following system assignments with Program 10 1 LED 20 Two CO Line Conference Two lines can be conferen
137. See each program Series Overview Use Program 41 Part 1 and 42 Part 2 series to set T1 parameters and assignments on the DK424 See the Strata DK Configuration and T1 sections for additional T1 information RDTU support is as follows Number of RDTU s Processor Supported RCTUBA BB B1CU 2 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 6 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 8 Program 41 1 T1 Span RDTU Frame and Line Code Assignments Initialized Default LED 01 and LED 02 Off for all T1 span lines 4 2 3 Spkr 4 1 Hold Spkr 1 fj Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 _ LEDs 01 and 02 Select the RDTU being Set as described below programmed 1 8 Extended Superframe Superframe B8ZS AMI Code eben LED 01 On LED 01 Off LED 02 On LED 02 Off 1 RDTU 2 RDTU 3 RDTU 4 RDTU 5 RDTU 6 RDTU 7 RDTU 8 RDTU Program 41 1 Overview T1 Span Framing Assignments Each RDTU PCB can be individually assigned for Superframe LED 01 Off or Extended Superframe LED 01 On T1 Span Line Code Assignments Each RDTU PCB can be individually assigned for B8ZS LED 02 On or AMI coding LED 02 Off 3 126 Program 41 2 T1 Channel Assignments Initialized Default 7 Loop Start vy More channels System amp
138. Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 14 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 DATA Agent ID Log in Code 0000 9999 SELECT Agent ID Number 000 255 DATA ACD Group Number Use the Record Sheet that follows Program 18 Program 14 1 Overview This program assigns Agent Identification ID codes to each ACD Group To receive an ACD call from a specific ACD line group the Agent must log in to the ACD Group by dialing the ID code four digits assigned in this program Note A telephone can be logged in as either an Agent or Supervisor telephone in any ACD Group but it cannot be logged in as an Agent and a Supervisor simultaneously Agents can only log in to one ACD Group at a time See Program 14 2 for more information Program 14 1 Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID Initialized Default Group Number 01 Agent ID Code blank DATA 0 No Auto Answer 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 ss DATA SELECT Agent ID Number _ 0 No Auto Answer 000 255 1 Auto Answer Press for single port entry Use the Record Sheet that follows Program 18 Program 14 1 Overview This program assigns Auto Answer to Agent telephones When Auto Answer is enabled the telephone generates a zip
139. Station Program 41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 1 4 amp 2 3 Spkr 4 1 Hold Spkr 2 _ Hold SELECT 2 a ee Enter the RDTU being programmed 1 8 Enter the RDTU channel number 01 24 to be assigned a line type To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Or Turn System Power Off 5 sec then On r Run Program 91 2 Enter the line type to be assigned to the RDTU channel 1 2 Ground Start 3 Tie immediate Loop Start initialized 4 Tie Wink DID immediate 6 DID Wink 5 See Programs 17 and 71 for other Tie DID assignments See Program 17 and Program 09 for other DID assignments Processor Type CO Line Range Processor Type CO Line Range DK40i 001 012 B1CU 001 032 RCTUA 001 016 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B3CAU BU 001 120 RCTUC D 001 144 B5CAU BU 001 200 RCTUE F 001 200 RDTU Slot RDTU Slot RDTU Slot RDTU Channel No Line Type RDTU Channel No Line Type RDTU Channel No Line Type 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 21 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 uolje1S 9 We sis 3 127 System amp Station Program 41 fo
140. The caller will continue to hear uninterrupted music until the call exits queue The call will exit queue when an agent goes idle the call overflows when the overflow timer in Program 11 1 expires the caller hangs up the disconnect timer in Program 11 9 expires Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones 0848 uOHNqHysIq 2D dyewony 6 49 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones 6 50 Flowchart 6 10 ACD Queue Pattern Configuration Three Announcements Start call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6 1 Caller is connected to 1st announcement port This In Program 14 35 set the repeat port is assigned in Program 14 31 announcement data to 1 After the 1st announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music Notes The call will attempt to exit queue source assigned in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the time when duration set in Program 11 51 e an agent telephone goes idle expires oint Has the j Program 11 51 music timer expired Caller continues to hear music source A 11 9 expires the caller hangs up In Program 14 35 set the repeat announcement data to uon Caller is connected to 2nd announcement port This port is assigned in Program 14 32 After the 2nd announcement ends and hangs up the caller is
141. Tie DID Line Options Program 17 DID Tie Line Options Program 18 Agent ID Code Name for MIS Assignments Program 35 Station Class of Service Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones in System and Station Chapter Program 71 DID Tie DNIS ANI Lines use if Program 09 is not used Star programs are the newer programs and they are located behind the program of the same name e g Program 14 2 follows Program 14 2 6 1 uonnq 4siq 2D syewo ny Automatic Call Distribution Program 03 RSIU RSSU PIOU PIOUS ACD MIS Slot Assignments Program 03 RSIU RSSU PIOU PIOUS ACD MIS Slot Assignments Initialized Default n a 1 2 3 Spkr 0 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Power Off 5 sec then On PIOU PIOUS or RSSU Slot Number 12 78 Enter 42 to assign the PIOU PIOUS or RSSU or RSIU Slot Number 11 TTY Port as MIS port or enter 49 to assign RSIU to slot 11 see Program 76 if installing RSIU DK40i TSIU does not require an entry in Program 03 Program 03 Overview This program is for specifying RSIU RSSU PIOU or PIOUS ACD MIS Slot Assignments If MIS output is required for ACD set Code 42 for the slot in which the RSSU PIOU or PIOUS is installed or Code 49 if RSIU is installed in slot 11 that connects to the SMIS personal computer If yo
142. Trunk Groups Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI and BRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 6 4 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 2 DATA Enter the number of digits to use for incoming call DID digits 2 5 Enter Trunk Group Number To add a range of trunk groups enter XX XX low trunk group high trunk group Trunk Number of DID Incoming Call Groups Digits per Trunk Group 1 OO ON oO A OJN o _ h N o _ A ol o Program 64 2 Overview This program establishes the number of digits to be used for DID or DNIS table interpretation for each ISDN trunk group The DK uses the last two to four digits of the incoming listed directory number LDN to determine the DID call destination If Program 17 was assigned for DNIS the DK uses the last two to five digits of an incoming LDN to determine the DNIS call destination 7 26 ISDN Program 65 ISDN Channel Group Assignment Program 65 ISDN Channel Group Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI Initialized Default A LEDS Off see
143. X 50 2 Least Cost Routing Home Area Code X 50 31 35 Least Cost Routing Special Code X 50 4 Least Cost Routing Long Distance Information LDI Plan Number X 50 5 Least Cost Routing Local Call Plan Number X 50 6 Least Cost Routing Dial Zero Time out X 50 Caller ID RCIU RCIS Circuit Assignments to CO Line RCOU RCOS RGLU and PCOU 51 Least Cost Routing Area Codes X 51 Station Memory Allocation to Store Caller ID and or ANI Numbers on Abandoned Unanswered Calls 52 Least Cost Routing Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code X 52 Caller ID or ANI Ground Loop Tie DID Line Circuit Abandoned Call Number Store Station Owner Assignments 53 Least Cost Routing Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans X 54 Least Cost Routing Route Definition Tables x 55 0 Least Cost Routing Modified Digits Table Delete X 55 1 2 Least Cost Routing Modified Digits Table Add X 56 Least Cost Routing Station Group Assignments X 58 1 Attendant Console Overflow Timer 58 2 Attendant Console Display Type Answer Button Operation and Call Waiting Tone 58 4 Attendant Console Answer Button Priority Assignments 58 5 Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes 60 1 SMDR Data Output Options 60 BRI Assignment for Line Station Operation X 60 2 7 SMDR Output Account Code Digit Length X 60 8 Call Forward External Remote Change Security ID Code X 61 Analog Trunk Bearer Service X 62 Non ISDN Station Bearer Service xX 63 Timer for
144. all LEDs with To advance the CO line range press Scroll an X should be lit located beneath the LCD Press Page for a lower range Processor Type CO Line Range Processor Type CO Line Range DK14 001 004 B1iCU 001 032 DK40i 001 012 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 B3CAU BU 001 120 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B5CAU BU 001 200 RCTUC D 001 144 RCTUE F 001 200 o Line me fo S Program LED On LED Off Ey LED 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CPC on AR VM 0 Calls and Voice Detect Ignore Calls 1 CO DID Tie Line DP DTMF Signal CO DID Tie Dial 2 Pulse Rate 20 PPS 10 PPS Pulse per sec 3 AR Hold Detect Ignore ESS 4 AR Timing STORA electronic 450 msec Tandem CO Line Not 5 Connection with Enabled Enabled Station Dropout Forced Account Not 7 Code Enabled Enabled No DTMF DTMF 8 ae Go receiver receiver After Flash After Flash 3 47 System amp Station Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options 3 48 Program 15 Overview This program specifies operational options on a line by line basis Code 0 Automatic Release AR on Voice Mail or Voice Calls On loop start CO lines some COs send the AR Automatic Release or CPC Calling party Control signal after an external party hangs up typically 1 15 seconds to disconnect a loop start line An AR CPC signal is a 95 or 450 millisec
145. also applies to flashes inserted when dialing via Data Interface Units DIUs Code 5 Pause After Flash Some COs or Centrex facilities require a period of time after a flash signal before they can accept dialing signals A selection of pause timing is available to automatically delay any dialing signals after flash This timing applies to Speed Dial calls with flash signals between the telephone number digits as well as to manual dialing Code 7 Toll Restriction Timing This represents the time that a DTMF receiver is held for Toll Restriction after dialing a CO line access code from a standard telephone Code 8 DNIS Ext Network External Call Forward and DISA Disconnect Timer for Loop Start Lines Disconnects DISA Call Forward External and or DNIS Telephone Network routed calls when made on loop start lines Calls can lock up keep busy indefinitely if the CO does not send a disconnect signal CPC or AR when the caller hangs up This timer prevents loop start lines from locking up by disconnecting the call automatically when the timer expires 4 10 or 20 minutes from the start of the call Callers will hear a warning tone and can reset the timer repeatedly by dialing 0 This disconnect feature is only needed for loop start lines Code 9 QRCU3 K4RCU3 K5RCU K5RCU2 RRCS BRCS DTMF Receiver Inter digital Release Time With Code 9 one channel of the QRCU3 K4RCU K5RCU K5RCU2 RRCS or BRCS Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF rec
146. and button LEDs 01 and 02 will go out after a short delay Month Day Time SOL 9 Uuo01ezIjeu No N N 1 N N is the Program Telephone DN 2 7 Initialization amp Test Program 91 2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory Program 91 2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Initialization Initialized Default See individual programs 1 2 3 Spkr 9 1 Hold Spkr 2 103 04 Hold Program Telephone Exits Program Mode and Transfers Data Enter programming mode Press LED Buttons 03 and 04 Do not press DN button LEDs 03 and 04 must be On LCD Displays 91 SELECT 2 Programming Taking Effect Program 91 2 Overview Program 91 2 simulates turning system power Off for five seconds then On to transfer data from temporary memory to working memory This power Off power On sequence is required when programming with a telephone or when using DKi Admin DKi Backup In these cases Program 03 41 2 50 and 76 1 data must be transferred from temporary to working memory Program 91 2 does not change or erase any programmed data including directory numbers set in Program 04 and 04 or logical physical port assignments in Program 01 and 02 CAUTION Running Program 91 2 drops all calls and renders the system inoperative for up to eight seconds 2 8 Initializa
147. announcements are used for the ACD Group queue skip to Code 3 Code 3 Assigns Port for Second or Third Announcement Device Assigns the port to which the second announcement device connects in a two announcement queue pattern Or it is the port connected to the third announcement device in a three announcement queue pattern Code 4 ACD Queue Music Source Port Assigns the station port or RCTU MOH jack to which the ACD queue music source is connected The music is sent to callers in the ACD Group queue during the time intervals set in Programs 11 51 52 and 53 or continuously until an Agent answers or the call overflows see Non repeating Queue Announcement following Program 14 5 Code 5 Select Repeat Enactment for Queue Pattern After the last music timer 11 51 52 or 53 in the queue pattern expires the queue pattern announcements and music can be repeated to callers starting with announcement 1 2 or 3 Use Code 5 to select which announcement to start the repeat queue pattern process The queue pattern is repeated until an Agent answers the call overflows per Program 14 4 the caller hangs up or the disconnect timer expires Program 11 9 The queue pattern can be set to repeat or not repeat announcements depending on the options set in Program 14 5 see Flowcharts 6 8 6 10 on Pages Page 6 47 Page 6 50 Queue Pattern Options 1 2 and 3 are shown in the following diagram For more details ee Flowcharts 6 8 6 10 on Pages
148. are connected to the E911 interface unit Important Program 04 Directory Number data must be blank for E911 QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU2 or RSTU ports Program 10 91 E911 Interdigit Timer Initialized Default 15 seconds 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Interdigit Timer 91 sana L____ 01 15 seconds Interdigit Timer seconds Program 10 91 Overview 10 91 assigns the time allowed to dial each digit after dialing 9 when using the E911 feature This time will affect the time that LCR or CO Line dial tone is returned when dialing 9 However a user can dial a 9 non 911 calls normally before receiving LCR or CO line dial tone and the DK will route the call appropriately Program 10 92 E911 Pause Before Send Timer Initialized Default 0 No pause 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr _ Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Pause Timer 92 0 No pause 1 1 5 second pause Pause Timer seconds 2 3 second pause Program 10 92 Overview 10 92 assigns the time the DK will wait before sending the Station Primary Directory Number to the E911 SLT port after the E911 SLT port answers uolje S 9 We sis 3 43 System amp Station Program 12 System Assignments Basic Tim
149. at more than one telephone Program 81 89 the LCD telephone that should store the Caller ID information for that line must be programmed as the owner of that Caller ID line using this program When a Caller ID line rings only one LCD telephone Program 81 89 the abandoned call Caller ID information will be stored at that LCD telephone regardless of the Program 52 assignment The number of abandoned calls the station can store is set in Program 51 An LCD telephone can be assigned as owner of any number of Caller ID lines A Caller ID line can only be assigned to one owner LCD telephone If a Caller ID CO line or ANI Tie DID line is answered by the Distributed Hunt group queue or DISA line and if this call is abandoned before it is routed to and rings a station the Caller ID or ANI data will be stored in the abandoned call memory of the station owner assigned to the Caller ID or ANI line assigned in this program Notes e Abandoned call forwarded calls will store Caller ID information in the Abandon Call Memory of the first call forwarded from station The first call forwarded from station does not have to be assigned to the CO line in this program To store abandon call information for CO lines the station must also be allocated Abandon Call Memory in Program 51 e Ifa Caller ID CO line is answered by the Strata DK Distributed Hunt Group Queue or DISA line and if this call is abandoned before it is rou
150. attached to the RCOU for four more loop start analog CO lines Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU RCIS circuits Common Control Unit The system s controller PCB that contains the system s main microprocessor and microprocessor bus ROM RAM time switch logic busy tone detectors system tones and MOH BGM Interface RCTUs include RCTUA RCTUB RCTUBA BB RCTUC D and RCTUE F Each RCTU supports different station and line capacities The RCTU PCBs also provide interface for the optional RRCS PCB and RKYS key Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit Optional PCB that provides four analog Direct Inward Dialing line circuits Supports ANI and DNIS Digital Standard Telephone Interface Unit Optional PCB that provides two standard telephone and four digital telephone circuits in its basic configuration An RSTS can be attached to the RDSU for two additional standard telephone circuits T1 DS 1 Interface Unit Optional PCB that provides up to 24 digital channels that can individually be assigned for loop start CO line ground start CO line E amp M tie line or DID line operation Supports ANI and DNIS E amp M Tie Line Unit An optional PCB that provides the system with support for four E amp M Type or Type II Immediate or Wink Start tie lines Supports ANI and DNIS Floor Mount Installation Kit Kit that is used to floor mount systems Analog Ground Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit Provides four CO line circuits that can be
151. both a Night Transfer and an Night Transfer Lock button and the person locking the system must enter the password NT lock related programs include Program 39 Station Flexible Button Assignments Night Transfer and Night Transfer Lock buttons Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes Night Transfer and Night Transfer Lock buttons NT Lock Station Assignment Program 36 is not required to assign attendant consoles to NT Lock Program 36 functions Program 15 CO Line Tenant Assignments Program 74 System NT Lock Password Assignment Program 77 3 Tenant Night Ring Over External Page Assignments 3 106 System amp Station Program 37 Ring Transfer Camp on Recall Time Program 37 Ring Transfer Camp on Recall Time Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Assigns Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 seconds to all ports 1 2 3 Spkr 3 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port ine paes HOLD TIME Port Number Enter the port number that needs a Ring Transfer Recall Enter the Ring Transfer Recall Time three Time assigned digits in seconds To add a port range enter XXX XXX l
152. button Program 39 or with the Executive Privacy Override blocking option Program 31 LED 18 To configure the Strata DK system to operate as nonprivate allow Privacy Override from all stations Disabling Privacy Override for attendant console ports does not deny Attendant Supervised Loop Monitoring LED 18 Executive Override With Executive Override enabled LED 18 On a station can break into and overhear an existing station conversation by pressing 3 after the busy station number or by pressing the EXEOVR LCD soft key You can set a warning tone for this feature see Program 10 2 Privacy Override can be perform from stations with Executive Privacy Override blocking enabled in Program 31 LED 18 The Privacy button does not block Executive Override Disabling Executive Override for attendant console ports does not deny Attendant Supervised Loop Monitoring LED 17 Do Not Disturb DND Override With DND Override enabled LED 17 On you can override a station that has DND On A called station with DND activated will return very fast busy tone four tones per second If the caller presses 2 after dialing the DND station directory number a DND Override tone is heard on the called station s speaker If a DND station has more than one PDN and it appears on other telephones when called the PDN rings at the other telephones and flashes on the DND station In this case DND override is not available unless all PDNs of the DN
153. call after four minutes The disconnect timer may be disabled see Program 12 System Assignments Basic Timing on Page 3 44 3 160 System amp Station Program 74 System NT Button Lock Password Program 74 System NT Button Lock Password Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Port 000 for all tenants e 1 2 43 Spkr 7 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Tenant Number 1 4 T DATA Night Lock Password for selected Tenant 4 digits Tenant Number NT Lock Password 4 Digits 1 A O N Program 74 Overview This program assigns the password for each Night Transfer or Night Transfer1 4 button To lock the system ringing mode requires a password and two buttons Night Transfer and Night Transfer Lock Night Transfer switches the station to Night Transfer mode Night Transfer Lock the Night Lock password locks the Night Transfer button into that ringing mode The Strata DK system provides three system ringing modes Day Day2 Night The system ringing modes are controlled by the Night Transfer button which is programmed on a flexible button of a telephone or attendant console Each ringing mode allows incoming calls to be routed to different destinations uoI e S 3 We sis
154. can then skip Program 90 since Program 91 9 automatically runs Program 90 Program 90 Example Initialization amp Test Program 90 Initialize Programs 00 99 Action Use the LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware Requirements on Page 1 14 Jan 20 Sun LCD Response 1 No N N 06 43 2 Enter Program mode by pressing 1 2 3 Do not press DN Program Mode button 3 Spkr Speaker 90 Hold Program 90 Access Program 90 System beeps after Spkr Speaker is pressed Data Store to indicate program number may be entered 4 Spkr Speaker 90 Select Prepare the system for the programs to be initialized 5 00 99 LED buttons 01 amp 02 90 Select 00 99 Enter Program numbers individually followed by or in a range Fora Data Clr range separate the low program number and the high program number with an asterisk 00 99 initializes all Programs 00 99 Star Program memory follows Program 97 6 Hold 90 Select 00 99 Secure data in system programming LEDs 01 and 02 flash Data Programmed 7 Spkr Speaker 90 Select Prepare system for another selection go back to Step 5 or exit Program 90 continue with Step 8 8 Hold 90 Select Secure default data in system memory LED 01 and 02 continue to Data Programmed flash 9 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 90 Enter another program number see Program 92 Example on Page 2 10 or exit programming mode go to Ste
155. connected to the music the disconnect timer in source assigned in Program 14 34 the caller Program 11 9 expires will hear music from this source for the time duration set in Program 11 51 the caller hangs up Has the Program 11 51 music timer In Program 14 35 set the repeat expired announcement data to 1 The caller will be reconnected to the 1st announcement When the announcement ends the caller will be reconnected to the music source for the time duration set in Program 11 51 This sequence will continue to repeat until the call exits queue the call will exit queue when Should the call an agent goes idle overflow after the Program the call overflows when the overflow 11 51 music timer timer in Program 11 1 expires the caller hangs up the disconnect timer in Program 11 9 expires Caller continues to hear No music source In Program 14 5 set the overflow point data to 1 and set the desired Yes overflow overflow destination point 1 The call will attempt to overflow per ACD Flowchart 6 4 at this point In Program 14 5 set overflow point data to O To continue to send music to the caller until the call exits queue in Program 14 32 program a vacant station port as Announcement 2 A circuit card does not have to be installed for the vacant port The caller will continue to hear uninterrupted music until the call its queue The call will exit queue en No sen
156. default setting is none Important For most carriers channel 24 is assigned to the D channel default Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS D channel assignments are negotiated with the carrier 7 17 ISDN Program 43 2 Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS Assignment Program 43 2 Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI Initialized Default Blank see Note and Important below KIH K 1 k 2 x 3 Spkr 4 3 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 2 ip PRI Master PRI Index Number with D channel 1 8 Enter the dependent PRI Index Number without D channel 1 8 Program 43 2 Overview This program specifies the card slot of additional PRI links that are dependent upon the D channel of the master D channel PRI This setting is for Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS Use the Record Sheet for 43 1 Guide to Programming NFAS with Release 4 15 software Program 42 XX slot X circuit Only assign the first PRI slot Program 43 1 X PRI Index XX D channel 43 1 43 2 43 3 PRI Index D Channel Master PRI Network PRI Interface Circuit Number Index ID Code 2 1 01 or 02 Note Normally 01 is provided by the carrier to define
157. does not apply to Handset OCA which is Mie push to talk only With Momentary LED 02 Off the Mie is always On at the start of a speakerphone call You must continuously press Mic to disable the microphone when during a speakerphone call LED 01 Speakerphone Enables LED 01 On or disables LED 01 Off speakerphone operation on any electronic or digital telephone If disabled a speakerphone Can be used as a handsfree electronic or digital telephone Enables talk back with the receiver on hook when receiving an internal call Will not allow you to talk on a call that you place or a call that you answer by pressing a ringing button with the handset on hook Program 30 Example Action press buttons LED buttons LCD Response Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware Requirements on Page 1 14 Make sure the programming button strip template is installed on the programming telephone Jan 20 Sun No N Nt 06 43 KKH 1K2 3 Enter programming mode Do not press DN button Program Mode Spkr Speaker 30 Hold Program 30 Access Program 30 Data Store Spkr Speaker 30 Select Prepare the system for a station port selection Enter the port number where the station being defined is connected 30 Select Use three digits followed by a button A range of ports may be entered at once by using the button See Note on system record sheet for port numbers
158. during the day With these values calls can be rejected if they exceed the maximum number subscribed for that service or they can ensure that a minimum number of channels remain available for incoming calls Thus the system can be used to provide an optimum service to meet the objectives of the business Call by Call services can be specified to map Strata DK capabilities to network services such as DID Tie FX WATS 800 etc These services could be provided via the local telephone carrier or be connected to any ISDN inter exchange carrier A table listing all valid DNs is provided for identifying the outgoing calls or alternatively a specific number or DID number These may be used for identifying the call on a per station basis to allow calls to be billed to a selected service or station All numbers used for identifying the call must be subscribed from the providing service or the call will be rejected by the provider NASI 7 29 ISDN Programs 66 2 and 66 4 Call by Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID Program 66 4 Call by Call Network ID Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 4 L ID Network ID Code 3 or 4 digits Enter ISDN Trunk Group Number Program 66 4 Overview Some Call by Call servic
159. first four digits that contain and digits can be restricted LED 04 On For example if LED 04 is On 17 is restricted when the is dialed but 1751 is allowed because comes after the fourth digit dialed Turn LED 04 Off if the telephone numbers that contain and after the first digit should be allowed see Programs 45 2 and 45 3 UO NILS9Y IIOL 4 35 Toll Restriction Programs 46 11 46 81 Toll Restriction Class 1 8 Parameters 4 36 Programs 46 11 46 81 Toll Restriction Class 1 8 Parameters Processor Type Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Leaves all LEDs Off DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs 4 2 3 Spkr 4 6 Hold Spkr 1 J Hota Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Select Class from Legend below Light LED Buttons as required to assign Table to Class Processor Toll Restriction Class Exception Table Processor Toll Restriction Class Exception Table DK14 1 4 8 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 8 DK40i 1 4 8 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1 8 16 RCTUA 1 4 8 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 1 8 16 LED X LED On LED Off 20 17 Not Used 16 Table 16 Area Office Exception Not Selected 15 Table 15 Area Office Exception Not Selected 14 Table 14 Area Office Exception Not Selected
160. following the first second or third announcement Range of each music timer is 000 999 seconds about 5 seconds to 16 1 2 minutes The connection time tolerance when switching between music and announcements is 5 seconds example if a music timer is set for 00 seconds the caller may still hear up to 5 seconds of music if a music source is installed Timer 11 51 defines the music interval following the first announcement Timer 11 52 defines the music interval between the second and third announcement on three announcement queue patterns Timer 11 52 is not used on one or two announcement queue patterns Timer 11 53 defines the music interval following the second announcement on two announcement queue patterns or the music interval following the third announcement on three announcement queue patterns Each music timer can be individually set from 000 seconds to 16 minutes 39 seconds see Flowcharts 6 8 6 10 on Pages Page 6 47 Page 6 50 Code 6 Call Waiting Alarm Timer 1 Defines the first alarm threshold time for the ACD calls waiting in queue ranges from 000 255 seconds If a defined number of ACD calls per Program 14 72 are in queue longer than the time defined in Program 11 6 the ACD Supervisor telephone is sent a beeping alarm indication 2400 Hz 10 Hz 0 75 second Off 0 75 second On Program 14 8 DATA must be set to 2 for the Call Waiting Alarm Timer 1 to operate Code 7 Call Waiting Alarm Timer 2 Def
161. function of these lines occurs for outgoing calls Note An optional security code for DISA outgoing lines calls is available via Program 60 6 This code should always be programmed when using DISA and built in Auto Attendant to prevent unauthorized calls through the DK system Feature 5 Ring IMDU or RMDS Maintenance Modem The IMDU DK40i DK424 and DK4241 or RMDS DK424 and DK424i only Remote Maintenance modem can be directly accessed by incoming ground loop start CO lines assigned in this Program Different alternatives are available for the system modes of DAY DAY2 and NIGHT If none of these are selected the IMDU or RMDS can still be reached by dialing a modem DN with the DISA feature or by a Ring Transfer from the DSS console attendant or any other station The IMDU or RMDS modem must be enabled with Program 77 1 LED 14 On Feature 6 Built in Auto Attendant CO Line Assignment This feature selects ground loop start CO lines for Auto Attendant operation There is no limit to the number of lines which can be assigned with Auto Attendant Different alternatives are available for system modes DAY DAY2 and NIGHT Built in Auto Attendant is not available for Tie DID ANI or DNIS lines on DK40i DK424 DK424i and is not available on any line of DK14 Note Auto Attendant assignments 61 63 have priority over ACD assignments in Program 14 0 System amp Station Program 79 Door Phone Ringing Program 79 Door Phone Ringin
162. is dialed by the DIU If the system CO lines are connected to a PBX Centrex or a Central Office that is slow to return dial tone after seizure enable Auto Pause Behind PBX to insert a pause before and after the PBX or Centrex access code is dialed by the DIU or RPCI Also light LED 05 to automatically insert a pause before network telephone numbers are autodialed by DIUs or RPCIs LED 04 PDIU DS or PDIU DI RPCI DI Connection Set LED 04 On if a PDIU DS is connected to the digital port Important Jf LED 04 is turned on for a telephone port that telephone cannot be called Set LED 04 Off if a PDIU DI or RPCI DI or any type of telephone is connected In this case the digital telephone supporting this PCB may require the Data Call DATA Data Release DRLS and or Modem buttons assigned in Program 39 Also if an RPCI DI is used in the Application Program Interface TAPI mode only and not the Data Switching mode set LED 04 Off Note The pause length is set in Program 12 3 and lines behind PBX Centrex are assigned in Programs 42 0 and 42 1 8 LED 03 RPCI PDIU DS to Modem Connection If a PDIU DS is connected to the digital port identify whether the RPCI PDIU DS is connected to a modem LED 03 On or not connected to a modem LED 03 Off If not connected to a modem the connected device can be a DCE or DTE This feature is not necessary for RPCI PDIU DIs because they are not normally connected to modems LED 02 AT Commands and
163. line calls to ACD group CO line transferred to Loop and ground start DID tie DNIS ANI DK built in Auto From another ACD ACD Group CO lines are assigned line incoming digits Attendant one digit group call overflow Cnf Trn 406XX to ACD groups in are assigned to prompts are attempt or all agents XX 01 16 Internal Program 14 0 ACD Groups in assigned to ACD unavailable or in DN calls cannot be Program 09 or groups in Program After Shift mode transferred to ACD groups Program 71 09 Call is routed to ACD Group Notes Ring idle agent telephone Internal DN and external DISA per ring agent timer in callers cannot direct dial into ACD Program 11 2 if agent does not answer ring next Groups Is an Agent ACD Call button idle idle agent per timer and continue until all idle agent Yes telephones are rung or an agent answers the call If an Agent ACD Call button is idle ACD calls will busy override and ring the button even if an Agent is busy on another DN or CO Line button Is the Do not overflow Remain in call attempting to original queue and continue overflow from another to look for an idle Agent in the ACD Group overflow group and in the queue original group Does an Agent answer Yes Talk on ACD call Ring No Answer RNA overflow to destination set in Program 14 5 See ACD Flowchart 6 7 Are all Agents log
164. method described earlier Emergency Information and Toll free Long Distance Toll Restriction Override Toll Restricted stations may be allowed to dial special codes such as 911 or Enhanced 911 E911 for emergency response 1 411 or 411 for information or 800 prefix toll free calls see Program 46 for normal 911 and 10 for E911 Important Always be sure to provide access to emergency numbers such as 911 Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to override Toll Restriction see Basic System Features Program 10 1 Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override Codes Up to two Toll Restriction Override Codes can be defined When dialed at a toll restricted station these codes enable the station user to override toll restrictions defined at the station Program 44 1 8 or 45 8 9 Codes may be changed by stations chosen in programming see Basic System Features Program 30 Also Verified Account Codes Forced or Voluntary can be used to override or change a telephone s toll restriction class on a call by call basis see Programs 69 and 70 Special Common Carrier Authorization Toll Restriction can be programmed to recognize Other Common Carrier OCC telephone numbers directory numbers authorization codes and Centrex PBX access codes The system starts inspecting numbers for Toll Restriction purposes after the recognizable code is dialed Program 45 3 6 This does not apply to 1
165. not execute Forced or the Account Code is not validated for the SMDR call report Voluntary To force a verified account code entry on Two CO line DISA calls through the system turn LED 08 and 14 On for Port 10 DK14 Port 035 DK40i Port 039 RCTUA Port 089 RCTUB RCTUBA BB or Port 249 RCTUC D or Port 344 RCTUE F Also you must enable Forced Account Code for outgoing CO line in Program 15 7 LED 12 Single Line Telephone SLT Hookflash Anti bounce Guard SLT Hookflash Anti Bounce Guard LED 12 On prevents false recalls due to hook flash bounce during SLT hang up on outside calls The system automatically disconnects the CO line if the SLT hangs up after a Hook Flash Use for QSTU2 PSTU RSTU RSTU2 RDSU PESU and KSTU2 standard telephone ports that have standard telephones with without message lamps connected to them to prevent false ring signals With this option On a CO line connected to a standard telephone is disconnected if the standard telephone user hookflashes and then hangs up If this option is Off the CO line recalls the standard telephone LED 11 Dial Pulse Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF Off Use Dial Pulse DTMF Off LED 11 On if any device DID or Tie line station port does not require the RRCS BRCS K5RCU K5RCU2 or K4RCU for DTMF decoding When the device goes off hook or the DID or Tie line is seized for an incoming call the DTMF receiver is not accessed reducing unnecessary traffic to it If a Tie o
166. numbers that can be stored per telephone is 100 IDL Total number of Caller ID ANI Telephone Numbers Available in each system DK14 200 DK40i 200 RCTUA 200 RCTUBA BB B1CU 400 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1000 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 2000 Station Logical Port Number Memory Allocation 100 max each Station Logical Port Number Memory Allocation 100 max each Station Logical Port Number Memory Allocation 100 max each uolje S 9 We sis 3 133 System amp Station Program 51 Station Memory Allocation 3 134 Program 51 Overview Use this program to allocate Abandon Call Memory when any LCD telephone must store abandon call information for Caller ID Ground Loop start line and or ANI DID Tie lines On direct incoming calls that ring on more than one telephone the Caller ID Ground Loop start line must also be assigned to the designated abandon call storage LCD telephone in Program 52 If a CO line only direct rings one telephone that telephone will store the abandoned call information automatically without being assigned in Program 52 however Program 51 is still required The IDL memory allocation displays on the program telephone s LCD indicating the total number of telephone numbers that can be stored at the designated port s These numbers are reduced accordingly each ti
167. ny Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 4 Queue Time Out Overflow Destination 6 22 Program 14 4 Overview This program sets the overflow point destination for CO line calls that are in an ACD queue for longer than the queue time set in Program 11 1 Calls only overflow when the overflow destination is idle or when it becomes idle if the overflow destination is a PDN PhDN Distributed Hunt DH Group port or another ACD Group see Flowchart 6 3 on Page 6 42 If the overflow destination is an ACD Group or a station port DN and it is busy the call remains in queue If the overflow destination is to a Normal Ring assignment Programs 81 89 and 81 84 and 87 Attendant Console or the built in AA calls will exit queue and overflow if the destination is idle or busy This assignment is not necessary if the overflow queue timer is set to infinity infinity 0000 in Program 11 1 Only ground and loop start ACD calls will overflow to the Strata DK AA or Normal Ringing DID DNIS and Tie lines will overflow to the assignment set in Program 14 2 if codes 320 321 440 or 441 is set in this program If the overflow destination is busy when overflow time occurs the following options are available Ifthe call s should exit the ACD queue and mute ring the busy overflow station assign Code 321 normal ringing in Program 14 4 and assign the ACD lines to ring the overflow station DN in Programs 81 84 87 81 84 and
168. of Integrated Systems Digital Networking ISDN and provides step by step instructions to fill in the ISDN record sheets Included is an overview of system and trunk programming for ISDN System Programs Overview System programming for ISDN has some commonalities with T1 programming ISDN programming follows two different paths depending on whether Basic Rate Interface BRI or Primary Rate Interface PRI is being installed Refer to Flowchart 7 1 and the following steps for an overview of each program s purpose ISDN features can be programmed onto the following systems as described DK40i DK424 DK424i support BRI S T BRI U basic features and PRI Note The term DK in this chapter is used to refer to the three systems that support ISDN DK40i DK424 and DK424i 7 1 NASI ISDN System Programs Overview Flowchart 7 1 ISDN System Programs Program 03 Assign BRI or PRI card slots Program 60 Assign BRI circuits for CO line TE or Station NT operation System power must cycle OFF and ON to effect changes 41T1 Assignments Program 43 Program 44 Assign the PRI Initialize BRI D channel and Service Profile ID network interface SPID number 42 Clock Source 42 Clock Source Program 63 Set ISDN dialing timers gt To record and enter the data for ISDN system programs 1 Run Program 03 Assign the RPTU PRI PCB slot position as type 79 See Program 03 for DK40i DK424 or DK424
169. pad assignments 3 128 time 1 15 toll restriction allowed denied area codes assigned by class see Program 46 2 4 allowed denied local office codes assigned by class see Program 46 6 8 class 1 8 see Program 46 11 46 81 class parameters see Program 46 10 80 disable see Program 45 2 exception office codes assigned by area codes tables 1 16 see Program 47 for office codes see Program 45 1 override code see Program 45 8 9 toll restriction traveling class override codes see Program 44 1 8 TSIU and RSIU RSIS RMDS port assignments see Program 76 1 see Program 76 2 X Y V verified account code see Program 69 verified account code toll restriction assignments see Program 70 voice mail message center port see Program 32
170. physical port display and or change 3 2 6 3 6 5 Program 03 DK424 flexible PCB cabinet slot assignments 3 6 DK424i flexible PCB cabinet slot assignments 3 8 Index P P RSIU RSSU PIOU PIOUS ACD MIS slot assignments 6 2 Program 04 station logical port PDN assignment 3 13 Program 05 flexible access code numbering 3 20 Program 09 auto attendant prompt ACD group 6 3 built in auto attendant prompt station assignments 3 23 Program 10 1 system assignments part 1 of 3 3 27 Program 10 2 system assignments part 2 of 3 3 30 Program 10 3 system assignments part 3 of 3 3 35 Program 10 4 ACD ISDN parameters 6 6 Program 11 ACD timing assignments 6 7 Program 12 system assignments basic timing 3 44 Program 13 defining the message center 3 46 Program 14 0 loop ground start line direct to ACD group assignments 6 11 Program 14 1 ACD agent ID code assignments 6 12 Program 14 2 ACD supervisor passwords 6 15 Program 14 3 announcement music port and queue pattern 6 18 Program 14 4 queue time out overflow destination 6 21 Program 14 5 overflow point and ring no answer routing destination 6 23 Program 14 6 after shift service destination 6 27 Program 14 71 queue size for alarm immediate assignments 6 29 Program 14 72 queue size for alarm 1 6 30 x pul IN 5 Index P P IN 6 Program 14 73 queue size for alarm 2 6 31 Program 14 8 alarm pattern assignments 6 32 Program 14 9 work unit assignment
171. ports each RDTU Tie DID line channel reduces the system s station port capacity by one port e Always install Tie or DID line PCBs in slot numbers that are higher than station PCB slot numbers see Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration in the Strata DK I amp M Manual e Incoming Tie line calls camp on only if Program 71 assignments are used e Copy one record sheet for each group of Tie DID lines that have different Program 17 parameters LEDs 09 10 and 14 20 Not used at this time 3 53 System amp Station Program 17 DID Tie Line Options 3 54 LED 08 ANI DNIS Digit Format Most DID Tie lines with ANI DNIS digit format include tone with digits LED 08 On One exception as of this writing Sprint provides DNIS without ANI and does not include tone with digits in this case LED 08 should be turned Off Examples of this signal format are ANI digits DNIS digits and DNIS digits DID Tie lines with normal digit format does not include tone with digits LED 08 Off LED 07 ANI Receive Line Option If a Tie or DID line should receive ANI information LED 07 should be turned On for that line If the Tie DID line receives ANI digits only no DNIS digits LED 06 07 and 08 should be On and LED 05 should be Off See Program 71 1 address 199 299 and 499 for Tie DID ANI only call routing assignments If a line receives ANI and DNIS LEDs 05 07 and 08 must be On LED 06 can be On or Off LED 06 Telephone LCD Displa
172. program assigns the members station primary DN port numbers and hunting orders 01 32 of Distributed Hunt DH groups 900 915 When a member of a DH group is added or deleted all the other members hunting orders are automatically shifted to a new sequential order If Ground Loop start CO lines ring DH Group member telephones use Program 81 89 to assign the selected CO lines to ring the DH group 900 915 do not use 81 84 and 87 to assign PDNs or PhDNs to flash and ring on the DH Group member telephones Instead put the CO lines in a pooled line group and put the appropriate Pooled Line Grp buttons on the DH member telephones Do not assign DH Group member telephones to ring in Program 81 89 To assign ANI DNIS DID Tie and Internal calls to ring DH groups use Program 04 09 71 73 or 71 1 3 as required and do not put DID or Tie line pooled or direct line buttons on DH member telephones These calls ring the DH member telephone PDN Each port assigned to a Program 31 Voice Mail Group should also be assigned to a dedicated Distributed Hunt Group See Program 31 record sheet overview for Voice Mail Distributed Hunt program example uole S 9 We sis 3 125 System amp Station Program 41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 1 Program 41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 1 Processor Type RCTUBA BB RCTUC D RCTUE F B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU and B5CAU BU Program Type System Initialized Default
173. running any other programs 3 187 System amp Station Program 93 CO Line Identification Program 93 CO Line Identification Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Blank e 1 2 43 Spkr 9 3 Hold Spkr 1 ooo Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 CO Line Identification LED Button for CO Enter the CO line identification See next page for data entry procedures line being named To advance the line range press Scroll Press Page fora Processor CO Line Range Processor CO Line Range Processor CO Line DK14 001 004 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B1CU 001 032 DK40i 001 012 RCTUC D 001 144 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 RCTUE F 001 200 B3CAU BU 001 120 B5CAU BU 001 200 LED Line CO Line Identification 16 Characters Max Enter One per Rectangle 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 3 188 System amp Station Program 93 CO Line Identification Program 93 Overview Assigns alphanumeric names such as WATS BAND 5 FX TO NY MR JONES etc to lines The names can be up to 16
174. some cases if that destination is busy the call remains in queue as shown below Only one destination can be assigned in Program 14 4 per ACD group Queue Timeout Overflow Queue Timeout Overflow Queue Timeout Overflow Queue Timeout Overflow Destination is a system DN Destination is normal CO line Destination is Strata DK Destination is another ACD group DH or attendant port number ringing assignment built in Auto Attendant Program 14 4 see Program 14 4 Program 14 4 Program 14 4 Is an agent ACD Call button idle in the overflow group Is destination busy Is destination ground loop start busy See Note or Tie DID DNIS ANI Ground Note If the Loop station port is Ring system DH DN Ground loop start an RATU or console port ring system DN Per Attendant Console assigned in Program Programs 81 84 87 Ring idle agent ACD Call port the call overflows 14 4 and 61 84 B7 button if agent answers talk to the console idle or no delayed ring on ACD call if no answer busy 3 ring another idle agent ACD RING an pi Call button or go to RNA The call will remain in queue per Program 14 2 destination ACD Flowcharts until an agent or an overflow 6 8 6 11 destination assigned in Program 14 4 or 14 5 becomes idle Is the line ground loop or Tie DID DNIS ANI Ground Loop The call remains in Ground loop start busy original queue until a
175. sure that a 20 button electronic LCD EKT telephone is connected to a PEKU electronic port not PESU DK14 and DK40i make sure the Base KSU s BATT jumper is in the On position gt To check hardware requirements on the DK424 and DK424i 1 Make sure the base cabinet power supply was tested and is functional 2 Ifusing an RCTUE F remove the small jumper PCB MBJU from the front side of the DK424 base unit backplane between slot R11 and the RCTU slot All other RCTUs require the MBJU PCB This does not apply to DK424i Make sure an that the BATT jumper is in the On position for all processors 4 Make sure a PDKU or PEKU is installed in the first slot of the in the base cabinet S11 or 101 if RSIU is not installed or if RSIU is installed in S12 or S102 5 Make sure a 20 button LCD DKT or EKT telephone equipped with programming template is connected to physical port 005 and or port 013 PDKU or PEKU circuit 6 slot 1lor 101 and or circuit 6 slot 12 or 102 Do not use RDSU or PESU in the programming telephone slot Step 2 Initialize the System 1 From a 20 button LCD programming telephone or from DKi Admin on a PC run Program 91 9 twice in succession to initialize the system At this point it is not necessary that all PCBs are installed However if they are Program 03 codes are automatically assigned to the appropriate slots CAUTION If you run Program 91 9 while the system is in service all program data is eras
176. telephone or any other device connected to a standard telephone circuit and it is required for Direct Inward System Access DISA and DID The K4RCUSA circuits are also used to detect busy tone for the Automatic Busy Redial ABR feature and must be installed to allow ABR to operate CO Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit DK40i The KCDU has two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits The KCDU digital telephone circuits can support all but one of the devices supported by either the PDKU or Base Unit integrated digital telephone circuits digital telephones PDIU DIs PDIU D12s PDIU DSs ADMs DDCBs and RPCls Modular add on key or integrated circuit that installs onto the K4RCU3 to add the auto attendant feature to the DK40i The optional PCB provides four standard telephone circuits and it can only be installed in the base unit The KSTU2 supports the two wire devices such as standard telephones Auto Attendant devices voice mail machines and facsimile machines The KSTU2 can also support an alternate Background Music BGM source on circuit four Local Access and Transport Area Liquid Crystal Display The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that displays calling information Least Cost Routing Long Distance Information Light Emitting Diode Status indicators located on printed circuit boards PCBs digital telephones and electronic telephones Term LSI MDF MDFB MOH N
177. telephone the Agent receives a short dial tone burst every 15 seconds and a steady LCD display MONITOR BY SUPRV The system also sends the monitor tone to the outside caller connected to the Agent If Tone LCD is not enabled the Agent and outside caller has no indication that their call is being monitored by the Supervisor LED 04 ACD Group Unavailable Destination When all Agents in a Group are in the Unavailable mode simultaneously new incoming ACD calls that are normally routed to the ACD Group s call waiting queue is immediately diverted to either the Overflow Queue Point destination set in Program 14 5 or to the End of Shift destination set in Program 14 6 depending on the status of Program 10 4 LED 04 see Flowchart 6 6 on Page 6 45 Automatic Call Distribution Program 11 ACD Timing Assignments Program 11 ACD Timing Assignments Initialized Default See table below 4 2 4 3 Spkr 1 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold DATA Time min or sec Code 1 9 he ACD Group Number Music Timer 1 3 used only with Code 5 skip this entry for all other codes Processor ACD Group Numbers DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 01 16 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 01 16 Code Time Initialized Data Notes 1 0000 3600 sec
178. the capability to receive Speaker Off hook Call Announce OCA calls DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA HS OCA Enhanced 911 operation that provides more complete locator information to the responding agency Electronic Telephone Aisesso 5 Extended Super Frame Off hook Call Announce Subassembly An optional upgrade to the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEKU or Electronic Telephone Standard Telephone Interface Unit PESU that enables properly configured telephones see HVSU2 to receive Off hook Call Announce OCA calls Federal Communications Commission The federal agency which regulates the telecommunication industry All Toshiba hardware is FCC listed or approved Electronic Door Phone Lock Control Unit A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones MDFBs and provides door lock control Electronic Direct Station Selection Console A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic telephone circuits and is associated with electronic telephones GL 3 Glossary HESB LED GL 4 Term HESB HESC 65A HHEU HPFB HVSU2 IMDU ISDN K4RCU3 KCDU KKYS KSTU2 LATA LCD LCR LDI LED Definition External Speaker Box A speaker amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide a variety of functions such a
179. the second span but in some instances as in a DMS the carrier uses 01 to define a backup D channel and 02 defines 47b d You need to confirm this with the carrier prior to installation 7 18 ISDN Program 43 3 Network PRI Interface Assignment Program 43 3 Network PRI Interface Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI Initialized Default Blank see Important below 1 2 3 Spkr 4 3 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 3 ID Network PRI Interface Code Enter the PRI Index Number 1 8 supplied by public provider 0 19 Program 43 3 Overview Program 43 3 assigns each PRI interface and ID code for communicating with the ISDN provider to identify the B channels to be used with NFAS Use the Record Sheet for 43 1 NASI Program 43 4 PRI Explicit Implicit Coding Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI Initialized Default LED 01 On 1 2 3 Spkr 4 3 Hold Spkr 4 I Hola Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 4 DATA Light LEDs to assign feature Enter the PRI Index Number 1 8 PRI Index Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LED Setting 02 20
180. the station can be automatically connected to the PDN or to a line The line connected can be the lowest numbered line available on the telephone or the highest idle line from a selected group Notes e Program 32 does not apply to standard telephones To allow system features to be accessed standard telephones always receive system internal dial tone when originating calls e Ifringing line preference is not selected no auto preference selection will occur when a station goes off hook during an incoming ring condition e Toshiba cordless telephones can have PDN Code 01 selected for Auto Preference so the user will get system dial tone when pressing the TALK button from the idle state or a line or line group can be selected for Auto Preference if CO dial tone should be accessed when the TALK button is pressed e Strata AirLink wireless handsets must have Code 01 assigned to receive system dial tone after pressing CALL in the idle mode A line or line group can be selected instead if CO dial tone should be accessed when CALL is pressed uole S 9 We sis 3 91 System amp Station Program 32 RS 232 Voice Mail Message Center Port Program 32 RS 232 Voice Mail Message Center Port DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Blank Ht 1 2 3 Hold Hold Hold Hold
181. this function on standard telephones Initiates DK to send dialed digits to the ISDN network when this button is pressed from a digital or electronic ISDN Start Start 469 telephone Program 63 2 invokes the same function when the Dial Timer expires Also see Tone Button in this table LCD Message Select LCD Msg Select or LCD M 481 Begins LCD message selection Message Waiting and Flash Msg Wait Flash or MW FL 499 E polin message walling CED for EKTand Flash 3 5 7 i Sets microphone On Off for incoming handsfree Microphone Cutoff Microphn Cut off or MCO 488 Directory Number DN calls Modem Modem or MODEM 455 Used to reserve modem in modem pool Right Teanataccdanankas E UOR Tanaina AS Rra o O o aa S Oaa Night Transfer Tenant 1 Night Transfer1 or NT1 439 Night Transfer Tenant 23 Night Transfer2 or NT2 440 Night Transfer Tenant 33 Night Transfer3 or NT3 441 Sers eran ke ling DAY NIGHT ing imode Night Transfer Tenant 48 Night Transfer4 or NT4 442 uoleys 9 W3 S S 3 117 System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments Table 3 3 Feature Button Codes for Digital Electronic and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones continued Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Night Transfer Lock Tenant 1 Night Lock1 or NT1 L1 431 Available with RCTUA3 RCTUBA3 RCTUBB3 or Night Transfer Lock Tenant 2 Night Lock2 or NT2 L2 432 RCTUC D3 Release 3 or above only Also available with
182. to DTMF 04 8 P4 LOD T B S p3 Key LED 12 02 4 P2 Code for ISDN Sub address Separator 01 2 P1 roe Modified Digits Table MDT Add to FRONT of Dialed Number Program 55 1 Table No 1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 11 Add to END of Dial Modified Digits Table MDT ed Number Program 55 2 Table No 1 2 3 4 5 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 6unnoy so45 sea 5 21 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code 5 22 Program 55 1 and 2 Overview Enter the digits that must be added to the front of the number dialed in the Add Digits Table The maximum digits is 22 including pauses Length of pause can be indicated by using codes P1 P8 specified in the Pause Entry Reference Table Each pause takes two digits of memory space Try to allow for the longest wait e g make the pause longer rather than shorter to accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to access the service tones etc If using special codes in Program 45 3 use Program 45 4 to indicate if the Program 45 3 codes should be sent before or after the Program 55 1 and 55 0 Modified Digits Table MDT digits Program 45
183. to Tel Port Port Forward to Tel Port Port Forward to Tel Port Port Forward to Tel Port uolje S 9 We sis 3 113 System amp Station Program 38 Standard Telephone Ring Down Destination Program 38 Overview Standard telephones can be assigned to ring a destination automatically by going off hook ring down They can also be programmed to ring a destination if an incomplete valid number is dialed This program assigns the ring down destination The timer in Program 12 1 determines when the destination should ring after the standard telephone goes off hook or if an incomplete valid number is dialed If a standard telephone is assigned a ring down destination ring down will always occur after the ring down timer expires unless a valid feature access code or DN is dialed prior to the ring down timer expiration Program 12 1 Ring down applies only to standard telephone ports not electronic or digital telephone ports 3 114 Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments
184. tone one half second burst of dial tone into the handset and the Agent can automatically answer ACD calls If the Agent telephone is off hook the headset receiver or if on hook the telephone speaker receives zip tone when an ACD call is sent to the Agent Auto Answer applies to direct and transferred ACD calls but not to incoming PBX calls to the Agent ACD Call PhDN button Program 18 Agent Names for SMIS MIS Assignments Initialized Default blank Automatic Call Distribution Program 18 Agent Names for SMIS MIS Assignments 1 2 3 Spkr 1 8 Hold Spkr _ eee _ Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Agent ID Number 000 255 L __ DATA Agent Name 8 characters maximum max Processor Agent ID ACD Group Maximum Number of Numbers Numbers Agent ID Codes DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 000 199 01 08 200 RCTUC D B2CAU CU B3CAU CU 000 255 01 16 256 RCTUE F BSCAU CU 000 255 01 16 256 Program 14 1 Program 14 1 Agent ID Program 18 Auto Answer with Agent ID ACD Group Code Agent Name Zip Tone Number Number 4 digits 8 characters max Program 18 Overview Each Agent ID number set in Program 14 1 can be assigned an alphanumeric name 8 characters maximum that displays on the ACD SMIS displays and reports The name for each Agent is entered in this pr
185. total number of channels in a channel group 23 or 47 minus the total reserved minimum channels assigned to all trunk groups within the channel group 7 13 NASI ISDN Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups Program 67 4 ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel Reservation This program sets the maximum number of B channels for a given trunk group The maximum number determines the number of available B channels available from the total shared channels Important To allow Strata DK Automatic Callback ACB and trunk queuing to function when using trunk group or LCR access codes to make an outgoing call the maximum value for a trunk group i e Tie line group should not exceed the number of lines ordered from the Central Office for that facility s trunk group Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups This program assigns CO line groups or Dial 9 groups Refer to this program only for BRI lines Do not make changes to trunk groups assigned in Program 16 as PRI type These will be assigned automatically when PRI programming is entered The system record sheet is on Page 3 51 of this manual ISDN Program 16 ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment Program 16 ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI BRI Initialized Default Type 1 non ISDN 1 2 3 Spkr 1 6 Hold Spkr _ Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hol
186. 0 200 15 35 55 75 95 115 135 155 175 195 10 30 50 70 90 110 130 150 170 190 05 25 45 65 85 105 125 145 165 185 1000 series digital telephone strip shows programming button LED assignment locations Shown as reference only not available as an individual strip LED Buttons and CO line numbers 01 20 Last digit of EK port number for programs with a format like 71 72 and 73 CO line numbers 21 200 2000 series digital telephone strip supplied with each Strata DK Programming Manual and each Documentation Package that ships with the system Can also be used with 6000 and 6500 series electronic telephones Figure 1 3 LED Buttons Programming Keystrips 1 13 Overview First time Programming First time Programming Follow these general procedures the first time you install a system or after major hardware changes and or you need to start from scratch Step 1 Check Minimum Hardware Requirements A system must have the following minimum hardware installed for programming as described in the Installation chapters of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual gt To check hardware requirements on the DK14 and DK40i 1 Make sure the base cabinet power supply was tested and is functional 2 Make sure a 20 button digital LCD DKT telephone equipped with a programming template is connected to any digital telephone circuit Base KSU PDKU QCDU KCDU or RDSU digital port or make
187. 0 and above to connect to one or two CAMA trunks Two RCMS PCBs enable connection to four CAMA trunks Enhanced 911 E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface Enables connection from the DK424 Release 4 0 and above to E911 locator services without third party equipment The RMCU supports two subassemblies RCMS that provide a total of up to four ports Aisesso 5 Conduit Connection Box Device required for floor mounted systems with three or more cabinets to connect AC power and reserve power battery cabling to the system Cabling from the AC power source and from the reserve power battery source can only be installed by a licensed electrician Four circuit plug in PCB four circuit piggy back PCB each of which receives and decodes FSK Caller ID CLID or CND information from the Central Office ground or loops Caller ID lines Each RCIU RCIS circuit works in conjunction with a DK424 RGLU RCOU RCOS line PCB circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly Optional subassembly that attaches to the RCOU PCB to provide four additional CO analog line circuits to the PCB Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU RCIS circuits GL 7 Glossary RCOU RPSU280 GL 8 Term RCOU RCTU RDDU RDSU RDTU REMU RFIF RGLU RKYS RMDS RPCI DI RPTU ROM RPSB 1 and 2 RPSU280 Definition CO Line Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides the system with four loop start CO lines An optional RCOS subassembly can be
188. 0 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 1 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 0 09 Bellcore Standard 1985 Version 1 space Bellcore Standard 1985 Version 2 space 08 Caller ID ANI numbers are sent out the SMDI port Caller ID ANI numbers are not sent out the SMDI port 07 06 05 04 PEKU Ports 33 34 Amp connected RCTUBA BB PEKU Ports 33 34 stations connected or higher 03 PEKU Ports 25 26 Amp connected PEKU Ports 25 26 stations connected 02 PEKU Ports 17 18 Amp connected PEKU Ports 17 18 stations connected 01 PEKU Ports 09 10 Amp connected PEKU Ports 09 10 stations connected Program 10 3 Overview You can make the following system assignments with Program 10 3 LED 20 SMDI Message Desk Number For CO line calls answered by Voice Mail Auto Attendant devices either the three digit CO line number 001 200 or the Message Desk number 001 can be sent in the Message Desk fields of the SMDI packet The system distinguishes CO line number 001 from Message Desk number 001 3 35 System amp Station Program 10 3 System Assignments Part 3 of 3 3 36 LED 19 Speed Dial Entry Timeout Station users can either have up to one minute or up to three minutes to store a Speed Dial number or memo If they do not store the number or memo within the set time their station exits the Speed Dial storage mode and returns to the normal idle state The timer is required because of the User Programmable Feature Buttons featur
189. 0 and 001 and CO lines 18 200 gt To assign CO line ringing ports to station LEDs 1 On the record sheet on the previous page enter the port numbers in the grey boxes in the top row 2 Enter the CO Line numbers in the left column 3 Mark X s in the boxes indicating which LED should be lit when a CO Line call comes in on a particular port Auto Attendant Use Programs 81 89 to set up DK424 built in Auto Attendant delay ring feature per the guide on the next page CO lines to Ring Station PDN Ports and or Distributed Hunt DH Group Ports CO lines that must ring DH groups must be assigned to ring the specific DH group number 900 915 If the CO Line button or Pooled Line Grp buttons must appear on the DH group member telephones Program 81 84 and 87 assignments are not necessary Do not assign DH group member station ports in Program 81 89 uole S 9 We sis Station Ringing Modes Important 720 telephones maximum can be programmed to ring in any one mode Day Day2 Night per CO line The delay functions are mainly used in Centrex application but can be used for other situations If delayed ringing occurs the station that initially rings will continue to ring with subsequent delayed ring stations A wide variety of line ringing to stations can be programmed into the system There are nine categories Ringing Mode Comments Day Immediate Ring assigned telephones on first ring from CO line
190. 0 displays the software version of the system processor PCB or on the DK40i Base KSU or DK14 KSU and if installed the RK YS KKYS or QKYS key type See the Program 00 Record Sheet for an illustration of software displays This information cannot be altered with this program Code 1 Level 1 Security Code Use to assign a Remote Maintenance security code that allows entry to all programs and data Code 2 Level 2 Security Code Use this program to assign a Remote Maintenance security code that allows entry to Programs 30 39 77 89 and 30 31 Important When using a DKi Admin PC either Security Code 1 or 2 enables the DKi Admin user full access to all Strata DK programs Always change Security Code 1 and Code 2 to prevent unauthorized programming changes by DKi Admin users that may try to log in remotely with the default security code 0000 Code 8 Software RAM Checksum and Code 9 Power Off Counter For factory purposes only Program 00 Part 1 Example Action press buttons LED Buttons LCD Response 1 Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone See First No N N time Programming on Page 1 14 Jan 20 Sun 06 43 2 HKH1T K2Z 3 Program Mode Enter programming mode Do not press DN button 3 Spkr Speaker 03 Hold Program 00 Speaker beeps to indicate when to enter program number Access Data Store Program 00 4 Spkr Speaker 00 Select Prepare system for a selection 5 Select
191. 0 series etc are in the same position as shown on the 2000 series digital telephone programming keystrip 3 112 System amp Station Program 38 Standard Telephone Ring Down Destination Program 38 Standard Telephone Ring Down Destination Processor Type Program Type Release 4 0 and higher RCTUs and BCUs Station Initialized Default Does not assign Ring Down Destination to any port 1 2 3 Spkr 3 8 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Standard Telephone Logical Port Number Enter the port number of the station that needs a Ring Down Destination assigned To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port FORWARD TO TEL Port Number Enter the port number of the PDN PhDN or DH DN that should ring when the Ring Down Timer Program 12 1 expires Processor Rang E aae iBone Processor oRange i Ii anges it arian DK14 N A N A 900 915 B1iCU 000 055 500 579 900 915 DK40i N A N A 900 915 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 900 915 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 900 915 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 900 915 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 579 900 915 B5CAU BU 000 335 500 835 900 915 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 900 915 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 900 915 Port Forward
192. 000 119 LED 11 13 On for all ports KIH K 1k23 Hold Spkr J Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr 3 SELECT Station Logical Port Number s Enter the port numbers to which class of service must be assigned Light LED Buttons for the port specified in the last step All LED Buttons marked with an X in the table below should be lit uolje S 9 We sis Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Feature LED a Toshiba Stratagy VP B Station No 20 Toshiba Stratagy VP B No Station 19 Executive amp Privacy Override Blocking 18 End End Signal Rev VM 17 Receive VM ID Code 16 Toshiba Stratagy VP Integration A D 15 Handset OCA 14 Handset OCA Warning Tone 13 Pooled Line Key No Flash if No Ring 12 Busy Override Tone Continuous 11 All Call Page Allowed EKTs DKTs 10 VM No Conference 09 VM Group 4 does not apply to DK14 08 VM Group 3 does not apply to DK14 07 VM Group 2 06 VM Group 1 05 VM to VM Call Blocking Called Calling 04 OCA Enabled To Receive 03 Handsfree No W
193. 001 200 000 335 Port ____ Port ____ Add on Module 1 Add on Module 2 Add on Module 1 Add on Module 2 Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19 08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18 07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17 06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16 05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15 04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14 03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 01 11 01 11 01 11 01 11 Number of Number of Processor ADMs System Speed Personal Speed Dial Numbers Dial Numbers DK14 8 40 40 DK40i 12 40 40 RCTUA 12 40 40 RCTUBA BB B1CU 40 100 40 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 120 100 40 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 200 800 40 Program 29 Overview This program allows ADM buttons to be customized Each ADM button can be programmed as either a Direct Station Selection CO line System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial buttons Only 2000 series Digital Telephones can connect with ADMs and up to two ADMs can be connected to a telephone Important Run this program for each station that has an ADM or the ADM will not function Program at least one ADM key for each ADM It is impossible to assign PDNs SDNs or PhDNs to DSS consoles or ADMs Button Assignments System amp Station Program 29 Add on Modules Button Assignments RCTUB RCTUB B1CU B1CU Add on RCTUC D Add on RCTUC D Module 1 DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTU
194. 0030 sec 0000 No Overflow 2 000 255 sec 030 sec 3 000 255 sec 060 sec 4 000 120 sec 001 sec 5 000 999 sec 030 sec 6 000 255 sec 120 sec 7 000 600 sec 240 sec 00 Disables Alarm 8 00 30 min 01 min Guard Timer blocks Alarm Reset 9 00 60 min 00 min 00 Disables Timer Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 ACD Queue RBT before Connect to Call waiting Call Waiting Disconnect Group Overflow Ring Agent Weel Announce Music Timer Alarm Alarm gam of ACD Call Timer Timer i i 5 Guard Timer Number Timer Timer 1 21 3 Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny 6 7 Automatic Call Distribution Program 11 ACD Timing Assignments 6 8 Program 11 Overview The ACD timers listed below can be set individually for each ACD Group ACD timers apply to loop Tie DID DNIS and ANI lines not ground start lines Code 1 Time in ACD Queue Before Overflow The time period ranges from 0000 3600 seconds a call s remains in an ACD queue pattern before it attempts to overflow to the destination set in Program 14 4 The queue timer can be set from 1 second to 3600 seconds 60 minutes or to no overflow time out If no overflow time out is set Data 0000 then the call remains in queue or overflows per Program 14 5 operation settings see Flowcharts 6 3 and 6 4 on Pages Page 6 42 and Page 6 43
195. 1 144 B5CAU BU 01 16 001 200 RCTUE F 01 16 001 200 ACD Group ACD CO Line Assignments Number Write in CO lines assigned to direct ring each ACD Group on incoming calls Program 14 0 Overview Assigns ground and loop start CO lines to directly ring a designated ACD Group CO lines that are assigned to an ACD Group should also be assigned as a line group in Program 16 A CO line can only be assigned to one ACD Group Important Agent telephones that should receive calls from lines assigned to an ACD Group should not be assigned a Pooled Line Grp button or individual CO Line buttons Program 39 for lines that are in the ACD Group ACD line calls ring Agent ACD Call buttons PhDNs and ACD calls that overflow ring the overflow destination telephone DN buttons or CO Line Pooled Line Grp button See Programs 09 17 LED 05 and 71 1 for DID Tie DNIS ANT line digit to ACD Group assignments Also see Program 11 Code 1 9 ACD Timing Assignments Note Program assignment 78 61 63 overrides Program 14 0 CO line assignments uOHNqHysIq 2D dyewo ny Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 1 ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments 6 12 Program 14 1 ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments Initialized Default blank 1 2 3
196. 1 A3 Announcement Device 1 3 OP1 OP3 can be a station or Attendant Console port including an additional announcement device but not A1 A3 ACD Group built in AA or ring telephone DNs per the normal ringing assignment Programs 81 84 87 81 84 and 87 M Music Source M1 Time Program 11 51 M2 Time Program 11 52 M3 Time Program 11 53 1943 Notes Unanswered ACD calls to Agent telephones will be routed to the destination assigned in Program 14 5 Ifitis desired to route Overflow Point RNA calls to a Voice Mail box see Program 14 6 record sheet for instructions Ifno overflow point is selected DATA 0 and the queue overflow time is set to infinity Program 11 1 calls do not overflow Ifthe overflow operation is at overflow points 1 2 or 3 assign the overflow destination in this program Ifthe overflow occurs after the queue timer expires assign the overflow destination in Program 14 4 Ifall Agents are in the Unavailable mode CO calls to the ACD Group can be routed to the assigned overflow destination in this program as an option see Program 10 4 LED 04 ACD calls that ring Agent telephones and are not answered route to the destination set in Program 14 5 see Flowchart 6 7 Overflow Operation If the Program 14 5 overflow destination is a station PDN PhDN another ACD Group or a Distributed Hunt Group and it is busy when a call overflow point is reached the call remains
197. 14 0 0 DK40i 1 3 1 3 RCTUA 1 3 1 3 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 1 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1 8 1 8 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 1 8 1 8 PCBs DDSS HDSS DDSS PDKU HDSS PEKU Lowest to Highest Console Number Attendant DKT EKT Number 1 8 Low Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number Slot Number High Slot Number COIN a Bl ND uol e S 9 Wa shs 3 69 System amp Station Program 28 DSS Console Attendant Telephone Assignments 3 70 Program 28 Overview DK40i allows up to three DSS consoles DK40i KSU supports one DSS Expansion Unit supports two more A DDSS console can only be connected to circuit 8 of the DK40i base digital ports or a PDKU and an HDSS console can only be connected to circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU DK424 and DK424i supports up to eight DDSS consoles or eight HDSS consoles or any combination of the two types of consoles up to eight may be installed with an RCTUC D or RCTUE F common control unit The RCTUA and DK40i can support three DSS consoles the RCTUB RCTUBA BB B1CU can support four and the RCTUC D RCTUE F B2CAU BU B3CAU BU and BSCAU BU support eight The telephone connected to circuit 1 of the PCB or the DK40i Base KSU supporting a console is designated as an attendant telephone Consoles and telephones are numbered 1 8 as they are installed from the lowest to highest slot number For example in DK424 if a PDKU
198. 15 05 15 05 15 04 14 04 14 04 14 03 13 03 13 03 13 02 12 02 12 02 12 01 11 01 11 01 11 Program 29 1 8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignments uolje1S 3 We sis 3 71 System amp Station Program 29 1 8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignments Program 29 1 8 Overview Each button on the DSS consoles can be flexibly assigned as either a Direct Station Selection DSS Line CO or SD button The standard equipped Night Transfer NT and All Call Page AC buttons may be changed to one of these three types but not vice versa Station Speed Dial buttons assigned to a DSS console share the associated attendant digital or electronic telephone s Speed Dial memory The personal Speed Dial numbers of the DSS console circuit port s are not available Initialized data assigns the 60 buttons to be Direct Station Selection DSS All Call Page AC and Night Transfer NT Each of the consoles can be independently programmed Important Only program the following buttons SD Line CO DSS All Call Page AC and Night Transfer NT programming other feature buttons on a console may cause system operation problems It is not possible to assign PDNs SDNs PhDNs to DSS consoles or ADMs Note When assigning CO line access buttons 001 200 the associated telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also See Program 40 on Page 4 4 3 72 Program 29 1 8 DSS Console and Number Button A
199. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Toll Restriction Program 41 Station Outgoing Call Restriction Program 41 Overview Program 41 restricts each station or Direct Inward System Access DISA CO line from outgoing access to each line If restricted that station can still answer a ringing line or pick up a call on hold but cannot directly access a line for an outgoing call by pressing the line button or dialing the line access code All Call Pickup functions operate normally This does not deny access via LCR Notes e Automatic Busy Redial ABR overrides Program 41 To deny a CO line to be accessed for DISA tandem connection or external call forward turn its LED On see DISA ports legend UO NIL S9Y IIOL 4 7 Toll Restriction Program 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection amp Access Codes Program 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection amp Access Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default A LEDs Off for all CO lines Assigns no access codes to PBX groups B 1 2 43 Spkr 4 2 Hold Spkr O Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 0 Specify CO Lines by setting LED Buttons as d
200. 186 25 45 65 85 105 125 145 165 185 24 44 64 84 104 124 144 164 184 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 39 59 79 99 119 139 159 179 199 38 58 78 98 118 138 158 178 198 37 57 77 97 117 137 157 177 197 36 56 76 96 116 136 156 176 196 35 55 75 95 115 135 155 175 195 34 54 74 94 114 134 154 174 194 23 43 63 83 103 123 143 163 183 22 42 62 82 102 122 142 162 182 21 41 61 81 101 121 141 161 181 33 53 73 93 113 133 153 173 193 32 52 72 92 112 132 152 172 192 31 51 71 91 111 131 151 171 191 16 36 56 76 96 116 136 156 176 196 11 31 51 71 91 111 131 151 171 191 06 26 46 66 86 106 126 146 166 186 01 21 41 61 81 101 121 141 161 181 17 37 57 77 97 117 137 157 177 197 12 32 52 72 92 112 132 152 172 192 07 27 47 67 87 107 127 147 167 187 02 22 42 62 82 102 122 142 162 182 18 38 58 78 98 118 138 158 178 198 13 33 53 73 93 113 133 153 173 193 08 28 48 68 88 108 128 148 168 188 03 23 43 63 83 103 123 143 163 183 19 39 59 79 99 119 139 159 179 199 14 34 54 74 94 114 134 154 174 194 09 29 49 69 89 109 129 149 169 189 04 24 44 64 84 104 124 144 164 184 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 18
201. 2 Caller ID ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments 3 135 Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series Part 1 cee eecceecceesceeceeceeeeceaeceeaeceeaeeceeeeeeaeens 3 137 Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes 0 ei eececeecceseeeeeeseeeseecnseceseeseeeseeeseeeeaes 3 140 Program 60 1 SMDR Data Output Options 000 ee eeceeeeeeseecceceseeseceeeeeceeesaecnaeceaeeseeseneseneenaes 3 144 Program 60 2 7 SMDR Output Account Code Digit Length oe ceeceeeeereeereeesecnseeeeeeees 3 145 Program 60 8 Call Forward External Remote Change Security ID Code eeeereereee 3 147 Program 69 Verified Account Godes sridenta terroren ksnar ae are e a Eak 3 148 Program 70 Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments ceceseeseceseceteeeeeeeeeenees 3 150 Prostam SD NUS aee e EER OEE aR EREA E AE A R EE AEAN 3 152 Program 71 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments 3 157 Program 72 DNIS Number Network Table Assignment 0 ceecesceeseeseeseceeseceeeeeseeeeeeeneeenaes 3 159 Program 74 System NT Button Lock Password ceceecssscesecsseceseceeceeeeseceeeneesaecaecsseeseeeseeeeaes 3 161 Program 76 1 X Y DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUS cece ceceeceeeeeeeteeenaeceeaeeeeaeeceeeeees 3 162 Program 76 2 X Z WSIU TSIU and RSIU RSIS RMDS Transmission Rates 0 3 163 Program 77 1 Periphe
202. 2 door phone busy signal door lock assignments see Program 77 2 to DN flashing assignments see Program 79 IN 1 xapu Index E IN 2 door phone ringing see Program 79 E E911 8 1 CAMA digits sent on 911 calls see Program 11 5 DK424 operation overview 8 1 trunk group line assignments see Program 11 1 trunk group hunting see Program 11 2 CESID station information see Program 12 8 11 E911 CAMA trunks see Program 11 0 interdigital timer see Program 10 91 interdigital timer see Program 11 6 pause before send timer see Program 10 92 programming overview 8 3 SMDR 8 2 special DN notification see Program 11 8 standard telephone ports assignment see Programs 10 11 and 10 12 station to CAMA trunk group see Program 13 EKT and DKT ringing tones CO line calls see Program 80 emergency bypass of forced verified account codes see Program 44 91 93 extension assignments see Program 09 F first time programming 1 14 fixed call forward see Program 36 flexible access code numbering see Program 05 flexible button assignments see Program 39 flexible PCB cabinet slot assignments DK424 see Program 03 DK424i see Program 03 G ground loop tie DID line options see Program 15 group pickup assignments see Program 31 H hardware requirements minimum 1 14 hold recall timing see Program 34 initialization system 1 14 initialize Programs 00 99 see Prog
203. 2 Serial Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides interface to any of the following features voice mail SMDI MIS for ACD SMDR local or remote DK Admin DK Backup Personal computer built in RMDS or external system maintenance modem Open Architecture personal computer By itself the RSIU PCB provides one interface port With up to three RSIU RMDS subassemblies it can provide up to four interface ports Standard Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB an older version of RSTU2 with a built in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals voice mail devices Background music source fax machines etc The RSTU has a built in 80V RMS sine wave ring generator The RSTU also has connectors for the R48S which extends station loop length and is described in this section Standard Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB functionally identical to the RSTU RSTU2 also contains a 90 volt DC message waiting generator switching circuit to operate standard telephone message waiting lamps Wall bracket Fixture Bracket that is part of an installation kit RFIF that is used to floor mount systems Strata AirLink Wireless System Interface Unit A proprietary PCB that enables wireless telephone functionality to Strata DK systems Floor Mount Fixture Fixture that is part of an installation kit RFIF that is used to floor mount systems Optional 48V Power Supply Subassembly tha
204. 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Ringing Tone Code Ringing Tone Code Ringing Tone Code Tone 2 Tone 3 Port Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 2 3 Number 1 2 3 Port Tone 2 Tone 3 Port Number 2 3 Number Program 80 Overview External speakers and all electronic and digital telephones are paged by dialing DN 39 The All Call Page AC button is used to page all digital and electronic telephones only external speakers are not included when using the button PESU PEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in Program 19 1 CAUTION To prevent system malfunction DO NOT install the PESU in slot 18 of the DK40i system 3 178 System amp Station Program 80 Call Forward Station Ring Assignment Program 80 Call Forward Station Ring Assignment Processor Type All RCTUs and BCUs with Release 3 2 and above Program Type Station Initialized Default LED 01 04 and 07 On for all lines 4 2 3 Spkr 8 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT CO Line Number iz LED buttons ringing assignment in To specify a CO line range enter which calls should Call Forward XXX XXX low line high line Processor CO Line Range Processor CO
205. 267 7 8 9 Change 6 DKT Mute Ring Adjust 6101 DISA Security Code Change 658 DKT Ring Level Adjust 6102 Verified Account Code Change 659 Port Swap Station Relocation Off 6281 Set LCD Messages 68 Station Relocation On 6282 System LCD Messages N A 60 99 Logical Port Swap On 6283 Traveling Class Code 1 8 Change 691 698 Call Forward Ext Set or Remote Change Code 670 Logical Port Swap 627 Destination Intercom No Date Set 651 Physical Port Calling 629 Physical Port No Time Set 652 Message Waiting Set Cancel N A 7 77 Weekday Set 653 Night Lock Password Change 622 CO Line Outgoing Calls 7001 7200 7 To store a CO line or feature access code in Speed Dial memory from rotary telephones or telephones without the Speed Dial and Redial buttons enter 44 7XXX instead of 7XXX Default Distributed Hunt DNs 850 865 8 CO Group Outgoing Calls 801 816 See Program 04 9 Least Cost Routing or CO Group 9 Distributed Hunt Group Prog 04 Port Ref 900 915 Program 05 Overview Program 05 enables you to change feature access codes The first digit of a feature access code can be changed to a different digit or to two digits Digits after this prefix cannot be changed Some access codes cannot be changed such as the code for Automatic Callback and are shown with N A on the record sheet Notes e Access code conflicts may exist if new access codes are assigned and a new system number
206. 27 to set off hook digital telephone handset receiver volume levels 9 103 04 Hold Power Off 5 Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting Memory seconds then all stations Program 92 9 does not affect Call Power On Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings Program 92 Overview Program 92 clears all previously entered or random data of the type listed but does not clear data in system Programs 00 99 CAUTION You must run Program 92 when first installing the system or an RCTU if you do not the system could begin to operate erratically Running Program 91 9 automatically runs Program 92 1 9 to erase customer data Notes e Running Program 92 5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels Use Program 27 to set off hook handset receiver volume levels for digital telephones Initialization amp Test Program 92 Initializing Misc Backup RAM e Program 92 9 does not affect Call Forward External or Fixed Call Forward settings e You must power the system Off then back On to clear telephone LCD Call Forward Displays and Call Forward button LEDs Call Forward memory is cleared when you run Program 92 9 even if system power is not cycled Program 92 Example Action press buttons LED Buttons LCD Response 1 Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone See Step No N Nt 1 Check Minimum Hardware Requirem
207. 293 Connects any held call to an existing call Switches ATTD consoles dial pad from Out Dial Out Dial 294 digital to tone mode Redial Last Number Redial or RDL 496 Redials the last number Release to Idle Release Call or RLS 476 Sa current caland makes station Speed Dial Select Speed Dial or SDS 497 Begins speed dial selection Allows attendant to talk to either party Split Call Split 293 separately on a conference call Places call on attendant hold loop key so Supervised Loop Sup Loop 239 attendant can supervise call Transfer Recall Trans RC 260 No answer transferred calls recall on this button Can originate calls on this button The Attendant Call Attd Call 000 Attendant Call LED is lit red any time the attendant talk path is connected Table 3 5 Recommended PC Attendant Console Button Codes Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Display BLF BLF 298 Displays BLF on CRT or EL display Indicates to all consoles an incoming Incoming Emergency In Emrg 261 emergency call Indicates a message from station or VM device to Attendant Disconnects and Message Waiting Flash Msg Wait Flash or MW FL 499 recalls dial tone on CO line accesses Centrex or PBX features enters pause or flash during speed dial programming Overflow Overflow 299 Places console in the call overflow mode Park Recall Park RC 263 Parked calls recall on this button Table 3 6 Incoming Line Group Button Assignments In LG1 241 In LG5 245 In LG9 249 In LG13 25
208. 3 In LG2 242 In LG6 246 In LG10 250 In LG14 254 In LG3 243 In LG7 247 In LG11 251 In LG15 255 In LG4 244 In LG8 248 In LG12 252 In LG16 256 uole s 9 We sis 3 141 System amp Station Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes 3 142 Table 3 7 Optional Attendant Console Button Codes Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Alarm Alarm Reset or ALRM 477 Resets alarm condition system wide Call Pickup Tenant 1 Call er Pickup Tenant 4 PKUP 1 PKUP 4 435 438 Picks up tenant 3 s ringing CO calls CO line access of appearing calls CO line ranges vary according to processor CO Line Appearance Line 1 48 001 048 RCTUBA BB Line 1 144 001 144 RCTUC D Line 1 200 001 200 RCTUE F Momentarily unlocks door 3 or 6 Door Lock 0 Door Lock 4 seconds The PC attendant activates DDCB HDCB DRUK O54 EIER these options when these buttons are assigned Activates ALL CALL Paging to telephone Emergency Page Access Emrg Page 292 speakers not EXTR Page Overrides any existing ALL CALL page Night Transfer Night Transfer1 or NT1 Night 439 442 Sets Tenant 1 CO line DAY NIGHT ring Tenant 1 Tenant 4 Transfer4 or NT4 mode A Prevents Privacy Override not Executive Privacy Privacy On Line or PRIV 453 Override Changes station Privacy mode to Non Privacy Release Privacy Release or PRV RLS 479 private for CO lines Pause Spd Dial Pause or PA
209. 40 RCTUE F 336 PhDN can appear on all Toshiba telephones in the system but a PhDN is limited to ring on 120 telephones maximum Phantom DN owner telephones have the following attributes Set Call Forward for PhDNs Set Call Forward Mail Box destinations VM ID codes for PhDNs Receive Message Waiting indication for up to four Phantom Directory Numbers on individual PhDN MW button LEDs When off hook the PhDN telephone owner will receive OCA calls directed to a busy the PhDN PDN and or PhDN Call Forward Message retrieval can only be set received from the PDN and or PhDN owner telephone uolje S 9 We sis 3 121 System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments 3 122 Alert Signal Button Assignments gt 4 2 3 Spkr 3 o Hold Spkr E Hoa Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Enter the logical port number of the telephone that will be assigned an Alert Signal button Station Number YYY the Program 39 code for the Alert Signal button that should be installed Press the telephone button to which Alert Signal should be assigned Alert Signal Button No Code Button Number 01 20 Speed Dial Number Alert Signal Button Partner Station Number 427 428 429 AJOJN 430
210. 43 1 6 Hold Spkr Spkr Hold Hold Hold Spkr Spkr SELECT CO Line Group see legend Only enter the last two digits of the CO line Group or enter 00 for Dial 9 group LED Buttons CO line Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back To advance the CO line range press Scroll located beneath the LCD Press Page for a lower range After programming VolA to turn all LEDs On Vol to turn all LEDs Off press Mode and CO line number then to display and advance Specify CO line by setting LEDs as defined by the table below When you are finished all LEDs with an X should be lit Processor Type CO Line Range CO Line Groups Processor Type CO Line Range CO Line Groups DK14 001 004 01 04 B1CU 001 032 01 04 DK40i 001 012 01 08 B2CAU BU 001 120 01 16 RCTUA RCTUBA BB 001 016 001 048 01 08 01 08 B3CAU BU B5CAU BU 001 120 001 200 01 16 01 16 RCTUC D 001 144 01 16 RCTUE F 001 200 01 16 LED Line CO Line Groups Number Dial 9 00 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02
211. 45 1 LCR Features Parameters Enables LCR features including a warning tone for last choice route number a comfort dial tone during LCR processing and the Long Distance Information dialing plan Home Area Code Notifies LCR software of the area code of the installation site Special Codes Notifies LCR of special emergency and operator codes that will be automatically routed as a local call without unnecessary delay Long Distance Information Plan Number Notifies LCR software how to route a long distance information call Local Call Plan Number Notifies LCR software which call routing plan is designed to handle local and special calls Burnoy so45 see7 5 1 Least Cost Routing LCR Conditions 5 2 Timeout after 0 Zero Notifies the system of the time delay to the user after dialing a 0 before a regular operator is accessed Area Code and Office Code Exceptions Separate area code tables and office code exception tables quantity listed below can be defined one for each available call routing plan Each table defines the area codes that are handled by the particular routing plan According to the tables defined specific exception office codes can be routed through a different call plan than the overall area code plan Area Code and Office Call Routing Area Code and Office Call Routing Processor Code Exception Tables Plans Brocco Code Exception Tables Plans DK14 8 8 RCTUBA BB B1CU 8 8 D
212. 5 6 7 8 Program 44 1 8 Overview This program enables you to assign a code for each of the Toll Restriction classes established in Program 46 If one of these codes is entered at a station the station assumes the code s class for that call When the call is complete the station returns to its regular class assigned in Program 48 The Traveling Class code data is not sent out the SMDR port and does not print out on station call records Account Codes Forced or Voluntary can also be used for this function in which case the Account Code will print out on SMDR see Programs 69 and 70 Notes e Stations selected in Program 30 LED 16 On can add change or delete the codes set in Program 44 1 8 e When the Toll Restriction Override code is dialed the station s class defined in Program 48 changes to the class assigned to the code in Program 44 1 8 e Donotuse the same codes set in Program 45 8 and 9 e Stations enabled in Program 30 Button LED 16 On are allowed to enter and change Toll Restriction Class 1 8 override codes UONILIS9Y IIOL 4 13 Toll Restriction Program 44 91 93 Emergency Bypass of Forced Verified Account Codes 4 14 Program 44 91 93 Emergency Bypass of Forced Verified Account Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Code 91 911 Codes 92 and 93 are blank KIH K 1k 2 3
213. 502 aa mw4s02 code 424 L id zzz 500 ww as00 Code 423 a vy o02 CEM YYY 001 TE ae g Be SDN 3200 1 Program 04 g Directory TANS D03 PDN 3200 3 eo NNNNN YYY 000 PDN 3200 2 Station 3200 Port 000 XXX 000 T YYY 000 YYY 001 501 co1 1 502 503 Station 3201 Port 001 me XXX 001 System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments The total number of DNs allowed on a telephone PDN SDNs and PhDNs is limited to the number of buttons on the telephone i e a 20 button telephone can have 20 DN buttons The number of SDN buttons programmed on a telephone for a given Primary Directory Number must always be the same as the number of PDN buttons that exist on the PDN owner telephone Example If PDN 200 appears on 3 buttons on station 200 and SDN 200 should appear on station 201 then SDN 200 must appear on 3 buttons on station 201 Never put more or less SDN buttons of the same Directory Number on a telephone than PDN buttons that appear on the PDN owner telephone If this guideline is not followed calls to the PDN telephone will be missed on the SDN telephone The maximum number of PDNs and PhDNs per system is listed below Processor Max PDNs PhDNs Processor Max PDNs PhDNs DK14 10 B1CU 56 DK40i 27 B2CAU BU 112 RCTUA 32 B3CAU BU 192 RCTUBA BB 80 B5CAU BU 336 RCTUC D 2
214. 7 007 023 023 008 see Notes 008 024 024 009 009 025 025 010 010 026 026 011 011 027 027 012 012 013 013 014 014 015 015 Notes e Expansion slots 15 18 See DK40i Configuration tables in Chapter 2 of the Strata DK I amp M Manual e IfKSTU2 is installed in the Base Cabinet it uses ports 008 012 unless TBSU or TBUU circuits are installed and configured as station circuits in Program 60 KSTU2 ports are shifted to start at Port 010 or 012 depending on TBSU or TBUU configuration If TBUS or TBUU is installed in the Base Cabinet each circuit will use two ports starting with Port 008 only if the circuit is configured as a station circuit in Program 60 If the BRI circuit is configured as a line circuit it does not use station ports e Line circuit PCBs ground loop E amp M Tie DID T1 PRI BRI do not use station ports in DK40i Base or Expansion Cabinets 3 14 DK424 or DK424i Record Sheet System amp Station Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment gt 4 2 3 Spkr 0 A Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number s Press PDN or Button LED 01 to erase 1 4 digits
215. 87 Note Delay ring assignments do not apply to Program 14 4 for delay ring Ifthe overflow destination is the DK Built in AA or an Attendant Console calls will always exit queue when the overflow timer expires Program 11 1 even if the AA or Attendant Console is busy Ifthe call s should remain in queue until the busy overflow station or DN becomes idle assign the overflow destination DN or another ACD Group in Program 14 4 as the overflow point Ifthe overflow destination is a busy Distributed Hunt Group the ACD call will not exit the ACD queue and enter the Distributed Hunt Group queue Ifitis required to route Queue Time Out overflow calls to a Voice Mail box see the Program 14 6 record sheet Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination Initialized Default Overflow point 0 no overflow point HK HB 1 2 43 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 5 SELECT ACD Group Number DATA Destination SELECT Overflow Point 1 3 Queue Timer 0 Processor ACD Group Numbers PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range DK40i 01 08 000 027 500
216. 959 If any of these values is single digit precede with a zero Set the day PDN 6 5 3 Redial L__ Enter the digit for today s day 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday Step 6 Run Additional Programs as Required Overview Programming Examples Programming Examples Some commonly used programs have explicit examples listed below Refer to these pages to help familiarize you with running these programs Program Page Program 91 9 System Initialization 2 3 Program 90 Initializing Programs 00 99 2 5 Program 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Logical Physical Port Initialization 2 2 Program 92 Initializing Speed Dial Numbers VM ID Codes Character Message Memory 2 9 Timed Reminders Digital Telephone Volume and Call Forward Backup Memory Program 00 Software Check 2 12 3 3 Program 03 DK14 Slot Assignments and DK40i DK424 Flexible PCB Slot Assignments 3 4 3 6 Program 04 Station Logical Port Primary Directory Intercom or Number Assignment 3 17 Program 30 Station Class of Service 3 80 Program 33 Station Hunting 3 93 1 16 Initialization amp Test This chapter gives you information on the Strata DK s Initialization and Test programs The programs in this chapter are not given in numerical order rather in order of importance These programs inclu
217. AMA trunk if X 1 or it will process the call as a normal call if X 0 or 2 9 L164 8 9 E911 Program 11 8 911 Special DN Notification Assignments Program 11 8 911 Special DN Notification Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type System Initialized Default Data Blank 4 2 3 Spkr 4 1 Hold Spkr 8 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 8 PDN or PhDN port number that should ring to be notified when 911 is dialed by a station 71 72 or 1 Day Mode 73 required for ringing 4 Day2 Mode 7 Night Mode S PDN Port PhDN Port EET PDN Port PhDN Port Range Range Range Range DK14 000 009 500 509 B1CU 000 055 500 579 DK40i 000 027 500 527 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 579 B5CAU BU 000 335 500 835 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 Mode DN Port Number Day Day2 Night Program 11 8 Overview This program designates which PDN or PhDN should have ringing notification on 911 calls all installed consoles are always notified A unique or the same DN can be designated as the E911 notification DN in each system ring mode Day Day2 and Night T
218. ANI line call routing is not being used If the digits assigned to the group are sent to the Strata DK System on any incoming DID or Tie line call the call is directed to the assigned ACD Group see Program 14 0 to assign ground and loop start lines to an ACD Group Note If DID Tie DNIS ANI lines use Program 71 DNIS assignments instead of Program 09 to route callers to ACD Groups turn on LED 05 in Program 17 for each of the appropriate DID Tie DNIS ANI lines If the line receives ANI but not DNIS turn LED 05 Off and 07 and 08 On in Program 17 Use Program 71 0 3 to make the appropriate digit and routing assignments Refer to Programs 17 and 71 6 5 Automatic Call Distribution Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters 6 6 Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters Initialized Default LEDs 12 and 14 are On 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 i Light Button LEDs as defined by the table below If the X column is checked the LED should be On Button LED X LED On LED Off 04 All Agents Unavailable Route Per Prog 14 5 Overflow All Agents Unavailable Route Per Prog 14 6 After Shift Point Destination Destination 03 Agent receives Supervisor Monitor Tone LCD display Agent does not receive Supervisor Monitor Tone LCD
219. ASI ISDN Call By Call Overview Call by Call Min Max Control There are two variables that can be programmed for each trunk group to ensure optimum call utilization These are the minimum and maximum values The minimum min value is defined as the minimum number of B channels in reserve that are necessary to ensure that a given trunk group can adequately service calls The default value is zero The maximum max value is the maximum number of B channels that are necessary to ensure that a given trunk group can adequately service calls during a peak period The default value is 23 The min and max values must be determined by you based on the traffic volume and environment Here are some guidelines The total number of lines assigned to all trunk groups as minimums should not exceed the number of B channels in the channel group For example if there are 23 B channels in the channel group the total sum value programmed as minimum in all trunk groups should not exceed 23 The maximum value typically never exceeds the total of the subscribed B channels for the channel group The programmed maximum value is typically used to limit the total number of shared lines available to a given trunk group Example 2 This example shows how to determine the maximum number available to a trunk group Refer to Figure 7 3 Add the min values from the other trunk groups then subtract that sum from the number of B channels in the chann
220. Access 06 Speed Dial Allowed 05 5 30 Pickup AC Page Only Release 3 2 04 Microphone Button on at Start of Call 03 MIC Button Locked 02 Speakerphone 01 System amp Station Program 30 Station Class of Service Program 30 Overview Program 30 enables or disables features for individual telephones at the station level The following text describes Program 30 LEDs LED 20 SLT ISDN Terminal Dial This feature applies to single line telephones and ISDN station terminals to indicate when a number has been dialed and to begin dialing a sub address If a is dialed as the first digit it indicates that a feature access code is being entered For ISDN if separate dialing and sub address digits will be used turn LED 20 On If it is Off can be used as a dialing separator LED 19 Privacy Override With Privacy Override enabled LED 19 On a station can override calls and listen to a CO line conversation by pressing acommon CO Line button not a DN button DN buttons are always private A maximum of two stations can override an existing station line conversation You can set a warning tone for Privacy Override see Program 10 2 Privacy Override of Direct Inward System Access DISA Two CO line calls is not allowed Privacy Override is not available on any call CO line or internal that appears on a PDN SDN or PhDN button Block Privacy Override by a station via a Privacy
221. Busy Out No Busy Signal 3 168 System amp Station Program 77 2 Door Phone Busy Signal Door Lock Assignments Program 77 2 Overview This program performs three functions Sets number of times door phone rings Sets fast busy tone if the called door phone does not exist Configures B pack on DDCB HDCB output for door lock control LED 20 Door Phone Ring Count The number of times that a door phone will ring digital and electronic telephones is set with this LED Light the LED for one ring turn it Off for five rings The default is five rings See Program 79 to assign which telephones will be rung by door phones LEDs 01 02 03 05 06 07 09 10 11 13 14 and 15 Door Phone Busy Out Each door phone controller DDCB or HDCB can interface with up to three door phones The system treats each controller as a station Therefore this is quite different from all other station arrangements using telephones Only one door phone can be in used at one time The system does not automatically know how many door phones are connected to each DDCB or HDCB so it must be told This program is used to enter that information so that a caller will receive fast busy tone if the called door phone does not exist Door phones 1A 1B 1C are numbered 151 152 153 respectively and are connected to the DDCB or HDCB at Port 004 Door phones 2A 2B 2C are numbered 154 155 156 respectively and are connected to the DDCB or
222. CD Flowchart 6 1 Call routed from another ACD Call enters ACD group queue because all Call routed from another ACD group because all agents in agents are busy on calls or in the After Call group because the group is in that group are not available Work mode While a call is in queue the the after shift mode see ACD Flowchart 6 6 Strata DK continuously monitors points A B see ACD Flowchart 6 5 and C below simultaneously If the queue disconnect timer set in Program 11 9 expires before the call is answered by an Agent that goes idle or the call overflows the Strata DK will disconnects the call Strata DK Continuously monitors points A B and C below Has agent ACD Call button in ACD group become idle before overflow occurs Has the call reached the overflow point in Program 14 5 Has the overall queue timer in Program 11 1 expired Go to ACD Flowchart 6 4 Queue Point and Flowcharts 6 8 6 11 Queue Pattern Configurations Overflow To Busy Destination Operation Overflow Ground loop Tie DID DNIS ANI Destination Busy Start Line Lines System DN E No Overflow No Overflow Distributed Hunt Group No Overflow No Overflow4 Normal Ring Stations Overflow See 14 2 Port Ring agent ACD call button Go to ACD Flowchart 6 3 Queue Overflow Time Out Continue the agent answer before the Ring No Answer timer in Program 11 3 exp
223. CO lines assigned to Tenant 1 1 2 3 Spkr 1 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT CO Line Number TENANT Assign the CO line to a tenant To add a line range enter XXX XXX low port high port see legend below Processor Type CO Line Range Tenants Supported Processor Type CO Line Range Tenants Supported DK14 001 004 2 B1CU 001 032 4 DK40i 001 012 2 B2CAU BU 001 120 4 RCTUA 001 016 2 B3CAU BU 001 120 4 RCTUBA BB 001 048 4 B5CAU BU 001 200 4 RCTUC D 001 144 4 RCTUE F 001 200 4 co Tenant Group co Tenant Group co Tenant Group Mins 1 2 3 4 Be 1 2 3 4 ne 1 2 3 4 Program 15 Overview A system CO line can be shared by more than one business tenant for the purpose of separating CO line ringing pickup and Night Transfer Program 15 assigns CO line business tenants 3 50 System amp Station Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups or Dial 9 Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups or Dial 9 DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Processor Type Program Type System Initialized Default A CO lines assigned to the Dial 9 group HK HB 1 2
224. CTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Ho1d SEL 2 ___T i SV Service Parameters Enter ISDN Trunk Group FA Enter the Facility Code Trunk Facility Service Carrier Code Trunk Facility Service Carrier Code Group Code Parameters Prog 66 4 Group Code Parameters Prog 66 4 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16 Program 66 2 Overview The facility code and service parameters will be supplied by the ISDN carrier at the time the ISDN lines are ordered Standard telephone services POTS will not have a Facility Code nor a Service Parameter The Call by call feature enables individual PRI B channels to be shared among various types of services specified by the customer rather than having to dedicate each channel to a particular type of service The Call by Call feature can reduce the number of circuits required to access various services especially if various services have different peak busy periods In release 4 15 and higher the minimum and maximum number of B channels allocatable to any type of service can be assigned Each of these values can be set for three time periods
225. CU must be installed to detect busy tone so that ABR will function LED 05 Speed Dial LED 04 enables On or disables Off Station and System Speed Dial Initialized default On all ports LED 04 Call Pickup Code Option Determines the operation of pickup code 5 30 in Release 3 2 and above software If LED 04 is On 5 30 only picks up All Call Page and External Page per Program 10 2 LED 15 If LED 04 is Off 5 30 picks up an internal call ringing on a telephone as a priority or it picks up All Call Page or External Page if no internal calls are ringing Prior to Release 3 2 5 30 picked up ringing calls as priority over All Call Page pickup calls uole S 9 We sis 3 79 System amp Station Program 30 Station Class of Service 3 80 LED 03 Microphone Button On at Start of Call When enabled LED 03 On the microphone and Mic button LED is turned On at the start of an on hook speakerphone call For this feature to work you must enable the MIC button lock operation LED 02 On When receiving internal DN calls the flexible Microphone Cutoff Microphn Cut off button Program 39 can be used to prevent room monitoring and Handsfree Answerback LED 02 Mic Button Locked Momentary The Mic button turns electronic or digital telephone microphones On Off With Locked LED 02 On the Mie button will be On or Off depending on LED 03 when you begin the call and you can alternately push it On or Off This
226. CUs Least Cost Routing kK 1 2 3 Spkr 5 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold LCR Plan No Modified Digits Table see Legend in Program 55 see Legend below CO Line Group 01 16 see Program 16 Route Definition Numbers see Legend below Program 16 Program 55 Program 16 Program 55 Route i os Route 3 z Processor Definition CO Line Modified Processor Definition CO Line Modified Group Digits Group Digits DK14 4 01 08 01 06 RCTUBA BB B1CU 4 01 08 01 06 DK40i 1 4 01 08 01 06 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1 6 01 16 01 12 RCTUA 1 4 01 08 01 06 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 6 01 16 01 12 Route Program 16 Route Program 16 LCR rea A Program 55 LCR SR A Program 55 Plan noumuen GOH Modified Digits Plan Po oenone GOINNE Modified Digits 01 16 ieee legend Sroun ee see legend above 01 16 tse logan Bicep eee see legend above above legend above above legend above Program 54 Overview Program 54 defines different ways of routing calls for each of the LCR plans Define each route by selecting and entering Bunnoy s09 see7 5 17 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Route Definition Number Route definitio
227. Call by Call Network ID See Programs 66 2 and 66 4 Call by Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID on Page 7 29 Use the record sheet for Program 66 2 7 32 ISDN Program 66 5 Line Directory Number LDN Registration Program 66 5 Line Directory Number LDN Registration Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 5 ere Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 5 di mm LDN Listed Directory Number Enter the Channel Group Use LED Button 01 to enter a blank 0 BRI Wild card entries are valid 1 8 PRI Enter LDN Index 01 48 g Ch LDN Ch LDN Ch LDN 2 Group Index EON Group Index EDN Group Index cui Program 66 5 Overview This program is used to assign seven digit listed directory numbers per channel group The index number assigned is correlated to a CO line port number in Program 66 6 for direct inward ringing assignments and to trunk groups in Program 66 7 ISDN calls are originated and terminated using a listed directory number and call type bearer service The Strata DK must know the listed directory numbers subscribed from the PSTN
228. D line to be assigned in CAMA Trunk Groups This is to allow 911 calls to be routed out normal CO lines in case the CAMA trunk s can not be accessed busy or out of service If the 911 call hunts from the CAMA trunk s ina CAMA Trunk Group to a normal CO line in a CAMA Trunk Group the 911digits dial pulses or DTMF tones will be sent out the normal line without the station CESID information digits The normal lines assigned in CAMA trunk groups can be assigned in Program 16 line groups as well It is recommended to always assign normal lines in CAMA Trunk groups to back CAMA trunks E911 Program 11 2 CAMA Trunk Group Hunting Assignments Program 11 2 CAMA Trunk Group Hunting Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type System Initialized Default Blank KIH 1 2 3 Spkr 1 1 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Hunt from CAMA Trunk Group 01 08 ST L DATA Hunt to CAMA Trunk Group 01 08 Hunt from CAMA Trunk Group Hunt to CAMA Trunk Group 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Program 11 2 Overview This program enables E911 calls to hunt for an idle line in a CAMA trunk group in the order assigned in this program If all lines in a CAMA trunk group ar
229. D 15 On sends an answer tone DTMF A tone to the Toshiba voice mail system when a station answers and a disconnect tone DTMF D tone when a station disconnects This allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond quickly rather than waiting during long time outs If the Central Office CO provides an Automatic Release AR signal sometimes referred to as Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision D tone is also sent to disconnect VM ports when outside callers hang up see Program 15 0 and 15 3 LED 14 Off hook Call Announce OCA Handset or Speaker If a station is enabled to receive OCA Program 31 LED 03 On LED 14 defines which type of OCA the telephone should receive Headset Handset LED 14 On or Speaker LED 14 Off Digital Telephones Speaker OCA requires a DVSU and a special Program 03 code Only digital telephones can receive Handset OCA Handset OCA does not require DVSU or any other special hardware Electronic Telephones Speaker OCA requires a HVSU and three pair wiring Headset OCA does not require these items Electronic or standard telephones cannot receive Handset OCA LED 13 OCA Handset Warning Tone This option enables LED 13 On or disables LED 14 Off a warning tone one second tone burst for digital telephones that receive Headset OCA Does not apply to Speaker OCA LED 12 Pooled Line Button Operation No Flash if No Ring When enabled LED 12 On on telephones assigned to ring in Programs 81 89 incoming
230. D station are busy LED 16 Change Toll Restriction Traveling Class Code When LED 16 is On for a port the station occupying it can change the four digit Toll Restriction Traveling Class of Service Codes established in Program 44 1 8 Stations selected for this feature must follow the dialing sequences below to change the codes Class 1 691 Class 5 695 Class 2 692 Class 6 696 Class 3 693 Class 7 697 Class 4 694 Class 8 698 PDN class code 691 698 four digit code Redial uole S 9 We sis 3 77 System amp Station Program 30 Station Class of Service LED 15 Change Verified Account Code With LED 15 On a station can change the Verified Account Codes established in Program 69 Selected stations must dial the following sequence to change the codes PDN 659 Verified Account Code Redial System Verified Account Code RCTUE F B5CAU BU 000 499 RCTUA BA BB C D B1CU BU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU B3BAU BU DK40i DK14 000 299 Press button if your electronic telephone does not have a Redial button Total Account Code digit length is set in Program 10 4 up to 15 digits All digits do not have to be verified LED 14 Verified Account Code With LED 14 On the system verifies all Forced or Voluntary Account Codes set in Program 69 dialed by the station user If the station user does not dial a specific Verified Account Codes the call does
231. DIU etc Codes allowed in DK40i Expansion KSU 11 13 16 21 28 31 41 61 62 64 66 77 78 91 92 and 81 CAUTION Running Program 91 9 erases Program 03 option codes Program 91 1 does not Important After completing Program 03 set the configuration in memory by running Off and wait five seconds before turning it back On Program 03 is the main record sheet for the hardware configuration of the entire system It provides space to record station ports assigned to the station and numbers assigned to the ground loop start CO Tie and DID line PCBs Use the PCB Code Reference Table on the Program 03 record sheet to determine the proper option code for each PCB with an option The DK40i Base KSU is divided into four fixed slots even through the unit has no slots per se Slot 00 represents the system s common control TMAU2 and optional K4RCU3 KS5RCU or K5RCU2 Slot 11 contains the KSU s eight digital circuits ports DKU Slot 12 contains the KSU s four optional CO or DID line circuits TCOU or TDDU or two BRI TBSU or TBUV circuits Slot 13 contains the four optional standard telephone circuits KSTU2 Slot 14 contains four optional Caller ID circuits for TCOU TCIU2 Slots 15 or 17 support the RDTU T1 and RPTU PRD cards If one of these PCBs is installed in slot 15 slot 16 can be used If installed in slot 17 slot 18 cannot be used DK40i Slots 15 18 Expansion KSU Assignment Criteria Allowed
232. DK digital lines should synchronize to the DK clock source then enter blanks in Program 42 1 and 2 In this case the DK clock runs free and is considered the Master Synchronization source ISDN Program 43 1 3 D Channel Control and NFAS Assignments Program 43 1 3 D Channel Control and NFAS Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI Initialized Default Blank see Important below 1 2 3 Spkr 4 3 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 T L DCH D channel circuit number 01 24 LED Button 01 deletes a digit Enter PRI Index Number 1 8 43 1 43 2 43 3 PRI Index EAN Master PRI Network PRI Interface D Channel Circuit Number Index ID Code NASI Program 43 1 3 Overview Programs 43 1 3 are related in that there is a correspondence between Program 43 1 and 43 2 Program 43 1 determines which channel acts as the master Program 43 2 points back to the master channel by using the corresponding index number Note To program NFAS with Release 4 15 software refer to the guidelines on the following page Program 43 1 Overview This program 43 1 assigns which channel on the PRI link is used for D channel the data master control channel The
233. DK14 only TSIU DK40i only or RSIU RSIS DK424 only port to a function For Program 76 1 X Y X identifies the WSIU TSIU port number 1 2 or RSIU RSIS RMDS port number 1 4 Y identifies the WSIU TSIU or RSIU RSIS RMDS port function as shown below Port Type Y Function 0 No port equipped This should be used for any of the four RSIU RSIS RMDS ports that are not used 1 TTY or modem TTY RS 232 port set Program 77 1 LED 14 Off DK14 DK40i DK424 or DK424i RMDS modem port set Program 77 1 LED 14 On DK424 or DK424i SMDR MIS or SMIS DK424 SMDI 0 a A O N Open Architecture Interface see Program 77 4 DK424 R3 2 Caller ID output to Caller ID interface box DK14 only 1 If port type code 1 is set then Program 77 1 LED 14 status determines if the port operates as a system administration maintenance modem LED 14 On or an RS 232 administration maintenance TTY port LED 14 Off For modem operation an RMDS piggy back PCB is required for RS 232 TTY port a TSIU WSIU RSIU RSIS RMDS PCB may be used 2 If the DK14 CO lines must pass Caller ID information to the Toshiba telephones LCD RPCI DI an interface box TC1041 MLX 41 must be connected to one of the WSIU outputs For more information see the Caller ID instructions in Chapter 1 DK14 Installation of the Strata DK I amp M Manual Port types set in this program override RSSU PIOU and or PIOUS fu
234. DKi Admin Communications Protocol Enables disables door phone ring tone to external paging when system is in Night mode Assigns a relay to operate with door lock function or external page for mute control Assigns a relay to operate in one of two Night Transfer modes Assigns a relay to operate in one of two applications LED 20 Door Lock Time The Door Lock Relay contact may be programmed to operate for either three or six seconds applies to PIOU PIOUS PEPU DDCB and HDCB door lock controls LEDs 16 19 Port Number Door Phone Lock Control Units Door phone lock existence is defined by this program The door lock option is set via Program 77 2 DK424 and DK424i Door phone lock controllers DDCBs and or HDCBs can only exist at Ports 004 012 020 and 028 and can only be installed on Circuit 5 of aPDKU RDSU PEKU and or PESU PDKUs and RDSUs support DDCBs but not HDCBs PEKUs and PESUs can support HDCBs but not DDCBs After assignment of a DDCB or HDCB door phone numbers 151 159 161 163 effectively replace the station number assignment in Program 04 Up to four DDCBs HDCBs can be installed in a system with RCTUB RCTUBA BB and C D E F and all BCUs only 3 are allowed with RCTUA They must be assigned a PDKU RDSU PEKU or PESU port number to operate DDCB to PDKU or RDSU and HDCB to PEKU or PESU See Program 79 and 79 for door phone ringing assignments Station PCBs that are connected to HDCB DDCB door phones c
235. DTMF tone VM integration only not with SMDI VM integration Program 71 5 DNIS Number Name Display VM ID Code Enter VM ID code that should be sent to Voice Mail when the selected DNIS number Call Forwards or rings directly to Voice Mail 1 16 digits Press LED Button 02 to enter Press LED Button 03 to enter Press LED Button 04 to enter Pause KIH K 1 x 2 x 3 Hold Spkr 5 Spkr 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold DNIS Address oL DNIS NAME TAG up to 16 characters see previous legend DNIS Record Sheet Use the character entry procedures that follow Program 93 record sheets NAME TAG displays on LCD telephones when a DNIS Call rings in DNIS Number DNIS DNIS Number Routing Points Address q ps ated 71 1 71 2 71 3 1 2 3 DNIS Number VM ID Code 1 16 digits DNIS Number Name 1 16 characters 71 4 71 5 uolje S 9 We sis 3 153 System amp Station Program 71 DNIS DNIS Number ENS gree e E a E cuneate E COTS 71 1 71 2 71 3 ode 1 16 digits 16 characters Address ays aa SF Program 71 0 Overview Defines the DID Tie DNI
236. DTU NT 1 OCA OPS PBTC PBX PCB PCM PCOU PDIU DI2 PDIU DS PDKU2 PDN PEKU PEMU Glossary LSI PEMU Definition Large Scale Integration Related to circuit design technology Strata DK system printed circuit boards PCBs use LSI circuit design Main Distribution Frame The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet Door Phone Box A peripheral two way speaker box option Music on Hold Customer supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on hold on CO lines or the intercom Toshiba 30 foot cable that connects the RDTU to the KSU Used in ISDN Network Termination device that powers a U interface ISDN line and enables multiple S T ISDN devices to connect to it The NT 1 must be UL listed U S or CSA certified Canada Off hook Call Announce There are two types Handset OCA and Speaker OCA Off premises Station A Toshiba supplied cable used to connect customer supplied batteries to a cabinet power supply in a one or two cabinet system for emergency reserve power for the entire system Private Branch Exchange Industry standard term which refers to a telephone switch usually on premises which serves an individual company and is connected to a public telephone exchange through the Central Office CO Printed Circuit Board Pulse Code Modulation A widely used form of digital telephone switching CO Line Interface Unit An optional PCB an older version of RCOU that pro
237. Default LED 17 On all others Off 1 2 3 Spkr 2 0 Hold Spkr I Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT PDKU PDSU Station Logical Port 1 Number that is connected to PDIIU DS or to DKT with PDIU DI or RPCI DI LED Buttons 01 06 define data port type LED Buttons 17 20 assign data port to security group Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 DK40i Base PDKU RDSU KCDU Digital Port Number LED X LED On LED Off 20 Data Security Group 4 Not Included 19 Data Security Group 2 Not Included 18 Data Security Group 3 Not Included 17 Data Security Group 1 Not Included 12 16 Not Used 11 RPCI DI DNIS Sent RPCI DI DNIS Not Sent 10 RPCI DI Caller ID ANI Sent RPCI DI Caller ID ANI Not Sent 07 09 Not Used 06 DTR Pulse with Data Release No DTR Pulse 05 Auto Pause Behind PBX No Auto Pause 04 PDIU DS Connected PDIU DI RPCI DI Connected 03 PDIU DS to Modem Connection PDIU DS to other type DCE or DTE 02 AT Commands and Result Codes AT Commands Only 01 PDIU DS or RPCI Connected No PDIU DS or RPCI Connected Program 20 Ov
238. E F B5CAU BU Speed dial number set by station port 000 System Speed Dial code ranges vary per processor 60 99 DK14 DK40i RCTUA 6 System Speed Dial des D 600 RCTUBA BB RCTUCID B1CU B2CAU BU 699 B3CAU BU 200 999 RCTUE F B5CAU BU Tone Tone Dial Select or TONE 490 CO dial signals set to tone or pulse Unavailable to Strata AirLink handsets RWIU WWIS interface Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in Program 31 1 2 3 See Program 15 for Tenant Group assignments 4 The Strata AirLink handset RWIU WWIS interface displays DND but no warning tone is enabled for Executive or Busy Override The Strata AirLink handset RWIU WWIS interface has mute only 6 Both wireless system handsets RWIU and Base Station Interface Adapter only have an internal memory Speed Dial capability Note e The Strata AirLink call button is set using Program 39 key 01 It must be set as the PDN of the handset Nn e Strata AirLink handset buttons 1 6 when used with the FCN button are set using Program 39 keys 02 07 respectively 3 118 System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments Directory Number Button Assignments then the DN is an SDN ZZZ the Program 04 Port
239. E F Module 2 DK14 DK40i RCTUA RCTUE F Button No B2CAU BU Button No B2CAU BU B3CAU BU B3CAU BU B5CAU BU B5CAU BU 01 000 000 000 000 01 20 020 020 020 02 001 001 001 001 02 21 021 021 021 03 002 002 002 002 03 22 022 022 022 04 003 003 003 003 04 23 023 023 023 05 004 004 004 004 05 24 024 024 024 06 005 005 005 005 06 25 025 025 025 07 006 006 006 006 07 26 026 026 026 08 007 007 007 007 08 27 027 027 027 09 008 008 008 008 09 28 10 028 028 10 009 009 009 009 10 29 11 029 029 11 10 010 010 010 11 30 12 030 030 12 11 011 011 011 12 31 13 031 031 13 12 012 012 012 13 32 14 10 032 14 13 013 013 013 14 33 15 11 033 15 14 014 014 014 15 34 16 12 034 16 15 015 015 015 16 35 17 13 035 17 16 016 016 016 17 36 18 14 036 18 17 017 017 017 18 38 19 15 037 19 18 018 018 018 19 39 20 16 038 20 19 019 019 019 20 40 21 17 039 uole S 9 We sis 3 75 System amp Station Program 30 Station Class of Service 3 76 Program 30 Station Class of Service Processor Type Program Type Station DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default LEDs 01 05 and 07 for all ports 1 2 3 Hold Spkr 3 0 Spkr Hold a Spkr
240. ED Button 01 to erase data Processor CO Line Range PDN Port Range Processor CO Line Range PDN Port Range DK14 001 004 000 009 B1CU 001 032 000 055 DK40i 001 012 000 027 B2CAU BU 001 120 000 111 RCTUA 001 016 000 031 B3CAU BU 001 120 000 191 RCTUBA BB 001 048 000 079 B5CAU BU 001 200 000 335 RCTUC D 001 144 000 239 RCTUE F 001 200 000 335 CLID ANI Station Owner CLID ANI Station Owner CLID ANI Station Owner CLID ANI Station Owner CO Line Port Number CO Line Port Number CO Line Port Number CO Line Port Number Number Assigned Number Assigned Number Assigned Number Assigned uolje S 3 We sis 3 135 System amp Station Program 52 Caller ID ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments 3 136 Program 52 Overview Use this program for any LCD telephone that must store abandon call information for Caller ID Ground Loop start lines and or ANI DID Tie lines must be allocated Abandon Call Memory LCD telephones can be allocated memory to save up to 100 numbers in 10 number increments see IDL totals When Caller ID and ANI lines ring into the Strata DK system and the caller hangs up before the call is answered the call is considered abandoned In this case the Caller ID and ANI information received can be stored at a designated LCD telephone When a Caller ID line rings
241. Enter the area codes that define the set 4 31 Toll Restriction Program 46 6 8 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class Program 46 6 8 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class Processor Type Program Type Toll Restriction DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default ncludes all office codes in all classes KIH K 1k23 Spkr 4 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Toll Restriction Class DATA Office Codes see Legend below Enter 6 7 8 6 add to memory 7 Delete from memory 8 Display allowed codes in memory press to scroll high office code Enter or display office codes To add a range enter XXX XXX low office code Several ranges or individual office codes may be entered by separating them with the button Processor Toll Restriction Class Processor Toll Restriction Class DK14 1 4 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 DK40i 1 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1 8 RCTUA 1 4 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 1 8 Class Check one Allowed 1 Denied O DATA Office Codes Class Check one DATA Office Codes Allowed 1 Denied O Tables with deny
242. GM bps BRI CAMA Definition Auto Attendant built in or external This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialing prompts Automatic Call Distribution Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents The ACD supervisor s LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which allows the supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents Automatic Call Distribution ACD with Management Information System MIS Add on Module See DADM A 25 pair connector typically used on a multi button telephone set for interfacing cables to many electronic key and PBX systems Automatic Number Identification Telephone number of the calling party is sent to the Strata DK system over incoming DID or tie lines This feature is provided by some long distance telephone service companies Represents all of the DK424i processors The DK424i processors are B1CU B2CAU B2CBU B38CAU B3CBU B5CAU B5CBU Abbreviation for the B2CAU B2CBU Abbreviation for the BBCAU B3CBU Abbreviation for the B5CAU B2CBU Used in ISDN Data or voice information is transmitted on the B channels of an ISDN line at 64kpbs The B channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair it is a logical rather than a physical channel Also see BRI and PRI Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution Background Music Allows customer supplied music to be sent to telephone speaker
243. Group No Processor ACD Group Numbers Queue Size DK40i 01 08 001 012 RCTUA 01 08 001 016 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 001 048 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 01 16 001 144 RCTUE F BS5CAU BU 01 16 001 200 ACD Group Number Queue Size Program 14 72 Overview The system causes the Supervisor Reset Queue Alarm button to flash and the Supervisor telephone to sound a one second On one second Off beeping alarm when the number of calls in the ACD queue exceeds the number of calls set in this program for a time duration set in Program 11 6 Program 14 8 DATA must be set to 2 if using this option see Program 11 6 and Program 14 8 for more information 6 30 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 73 Queue Size for Alarm 2 Program 14 73 Queue Size for Alarm 2 uonnq 4siq 12D syewo ny Initialized Default Queue Size 010 K 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 7 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 73 L DATA Queue Size SELECT ACD Group No Processor ACD Group Numbers Queue Size DK40i RCTUA 01 08 001 012 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 001 048 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU CU 01 16 001 144 RCTUE F BSCAU CU 01 16 001 200 ACD Group Number Queue Size Program 14 73 Overview The system causes the S
244. H 1 2 3 Spkr 1 1 Hold Spkr X X Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Station Port Number see legend L X Location CESID digits to send on CAMA trunk when station dials 911 0 10 digits max See Program 11 LED 01 for 7 or 10 digits Processor Port Range Processor Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port Location CESID Port Location CESID Port Location CESID Port Location CESID Digits Digits Digits Digits Program 12 Overview This program assigns the Caller Emergency Service Identification CESID information that will be sent to the CAMA trunk using Multi Frequency MF signals When a station dials 911 the E911 feature causes the DK to seize the CAMA trunk and send 911 11 or 1 per Program 11 5 plus the station s unique CESID information entered in this program This CESID information is also sent to the displays of internal notification consoles and stations The CESID information can be 7 or 10 digits maximum per Program 11 0 LED 01 Note that the digits sent on the CAMA trunk are MF tones so they cannot be checked with a
245. HDCB at port 012 etc LEDs 04 08 12 and 16 Door Lock Assignments Each B jack on the DDCB and HDCB output can be configured for door lock control Door lock control buttons Unlock Door0 4 for door locks are assigned to electronic or digital telephones in Program 39 Door lock activation time is set in Program 77 1 Each DDCB requires one PDKU or RDSU circuit and each HDCB requires one PEKU or PESU electronic telephone circuit These door locks are not associated with but are in addition to the door lock control provided by the PIOU PIOUS or PEPU PCB CAUTION To prevent system malfunction DO NOT install the RDSU or PESU in slot 18 of the DK40i system DK424 and DK424i DK40i DK14 DDCB HDCB Slot Number Port Number DDCB Type DK40i Port Number DK14 Port Number 11 004 DDCB1 004 002 12 012 DDCB2 012 003 13 020 DDCB3 020 NA 14 028 uole S 9 We sis 3 169 System amp Station Program 77 3 Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones Program 77 3 Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Zones 1 4 assigned to tenant 1 FH 1 2 3 Spkr Hold Spkr 7 7 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 3 i i Enter the tenant 1 4 to be as
246. Important below Note Program 65 must be assigned before entering Program 66 NASI 4 2 3 Spkr 6 5 Hold Spkr Hota Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL Channel Group 1 8 GRP Light LEDs to select PRI B channels for the channel group Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back Processor ISDN B channel Proceceor ISDN B channel Lines PRI T Lines PRI T RCTUA 23 B1iCU 32 B2CAU BU RCTUBA BB 47 B3CAU BU 120 RCTUC D 141 B3CAU BU 180 RCTUE F 188 Channel CO Line Ports B Channels Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Program 65 Overview This program assigns an ISDN group number and its PRI B channel members All B channels assigned to an ISDN channel group must use the same D channel The B channels on the same DS 1 interface can belong to different channel groups All ISDN connections require the active B channels to be assigned to a channel group The B channels appear as CO ports assigned in sequence when the PRI card type is entered Note Do not include the channels used as D channels Important B channels 1 23 are active by default from the public carrier in a standard PRI interface 7 27 ISDN
247. Incoming Station Ports Service Pad Level Pad Level Program 62 Overview When Strata DK stations except ISDN stations use ISDN facilities each station needs to be assigned the type of service expected to be used The choices are Speech or 3 1 kHz used for modem and fax connections Set the transmission level for outgoing paths for calls Default value is 6 db Phones marked as Speech bearer service can receive calls marked Speech or 3 1 KHz audio Phones marked as 3 1 KHz Audio can only receive calls marked with same bearer service 7 23 ISDN Program 63 ISDN Dialing Parameters Program 63 ISDN Dialing Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System PRI and BRI Initialized Default 4 seconds 1 2 3 Spkr 6 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 10r2 T DATA Seconds see table below see table below Select Timeout Parameter Value Comments 1 Sub address dialing Value 00 to 10 seconds default 04 2 Outdialing Value 02 to 10 second default 04 Program 63 Overview This program sets the timer for sending dialed digits if the user does not press the Start button or if the dialed number does
248. Initialized Default A LEDs Off for all CO lines all stations can access all lines 1 2 3 Spkr 4 1 Hold Spkr J Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Numbers _ JES LED Buttons CO Lines To add a port range enter XXX XXxX low port high port Light LEDs for the port s that are allowed access Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back After programming press e VolA to turn all LEDs On Vol to turn all LEDs Off e Mode CO line number then to display and advance CO Line PDN Port DISA Port Prococcon CO Line PDN Port DISA Port Processor Range Range R3 X Range Range R3 X DK14 001 004 000 009 010 B1CU 001 032 000 055 089 DK40i 001 012 000 027 035 B2CAU BU 001 120 000 079 249 RCTUA 001 016 000 031 039 B3CAU BU 001 120 000 239 249 RCTUBA BB 001 048 000 079 089 B5CAU BU 001 200 000 335 344 RCTUC D 001 144 000 239 249 RCTUE F 001 200 000 335 344 Program 16 For R4 3 and higher If a Tie line is assigned in Program 16 for Toll Port Number Line Group Restriction and LCR on tandem calls assign a class of service Program ports Number 900 916 to match the Tie line group numbers 01 16 respectively 900 916 00 16 Port CO Line LED 20 19 18
249. K AA per Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation of the DK Installation and Maintenance Manual gt To enter one digit dialing prompts along with their destination station numbers 1 Enter Program 09 SELECT appears on the LCD 2 Press the desired prompt digit AUTO ATT DIAL displays on the LCD 3 Enter 4XX XX the destination ACD Group number associated with the prompts and press the Hold button 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for more prompt station entries 6 3 Automatic Call Distribution Program 09 Auto Attendant Prompt ACD Group Assignments 6 4 gt To enter two digit dialing prompts along with their destination group numbers 1 Enter Program 09 SELECT appears on the LCD 2 Press the desired leading digit AUTO ATT DIAL displays on the LCD 3 Press then the Hold button The first digit will now be set 4 Press Spkr then press a second digit AUTO ATT DIAL displays on the LCD Enter 4 5 Enter the destination ACD Group number assigned to the two digit prompt then press the Hold button 6 To complete more second digit prompt station entries repeat Steps 4 and 5 Notes When transmission and DTMF levels are lower than normal or when the digital announcement voice frequencies match DTMF digital frequencies talk off AA efficiency may be improved with two digit dialing options instead of one digit dialing options Press button LED 01 to delete data Program 78 61 63 overrides CO l
250. K40i 8 8 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 16 16 RCTUA 8 8 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 16 16 Schedule Assignments Call Routing Plans These plans quantity listed above can send the outgoing calls of different groups of stations according to a time schedule and call route definitions Route Definitions Groups of CO lines assigned to special common carriers foreign exchange lines or other special services can be specified as call routes LCR Modified Digit Assignments Carrier codes can be programmed to dial automatically when a call is placed over the appropriate route Digits can be added to the front or back of special common carrier codes or other access numbers to make placing calls an invisible process for the user Digits may also be deleted from the front of the dialed number LCR Station Access Priority Assignments Each station port defined in the system may be assigned to one of four station priority groups The groups can have varying access to the defined call routes at different times of day Each group is partitioned from the other groups LCR Conditions If a station has direct line appearances or Pooled CO Line buttons programmed to allow direct outgoing line access LCR is bypassed using the Pooled Line or a CO Line button LCR accommodates special code dialing such as 911 for emergency response 1 411 or 411 for information or 800 area code toll free numbers These calls can be directed to the local call r
251. LED 11 On in Program 30 for each station port assigned to the DID or Tie line Code 2 Line Pulse DP Rate If a line is assigned DP signaling the rate can be either 20 or 10 pulses per second PPS Some Central Offices do not reliably accept 20 PPS Code 3 Automatic Release AR From Hold Transfer The Automatic Release AR signal sometimes called Calling Party Control CPC or Supervised Loop Control This signal consists of a momentary open of the loop start CO line provided by some COs the duration of the open depends on the CO If a CO line is programmed Programs 15 0 and 15 3 to detect the AR CPC signal the DK system drops the line when the CO sends the signal typically 1 15 seconds after the outside party hangs up The system sends D Tone to voice mail ports to drop the ports when AR CPC is detected The Strata DK system disconnects a loop start CO line voice call and displays CO LINE HANG UP on the station s LCD anytime the AR CPC signal is detected and the CO line has Programs 15 0 and 15 3 enabled On loop start CO lines some Central Offices send an AR CPC signal If the system CO line is on hold or being transferred to another station or Auto Attendant port when the AR CPC signal is sent it is automatically disconnected if this option is activated System amp Station Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options Two CO line DISA calls always release when AR CPC is sent DISA release via AR CPC is not re
252. Music Port Assignments and Queue Pattern X 14 4 Queue Time Out Overflow Destination X 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination Assignments X 14 6 After Shift Service Destination X 14 71 Queue Size for Alarm Immediate Assignments X 14 72 Queue Size for Alarm 1 X 14 73 Queue Size for Alarm 2 X 14 8 Alarm Pattern Assignments X 14 9 Work Unit Assignments Stroke Digit Length X 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options X 15 CO Line Tenant Assignments 16 Assign CO Line Groups Dial 9 81 84 81 88 or 801 816 X 16 ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment X 17 DID Tie Line Options X 17 DID Intercept Port Number 18 Agent ID Code Name for MIS Assignments X 19 Alternate Background Music BGM Source Slot Assignment 20 Computer Interface Unit and Data Interface Unit Configuration 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments 22 Computer and Data Interface Units DIU Station Hunting Data Calls 23 Built in Primary Auto Attendant Announcement Device Assignments 24 Built in Secondary Auto Attendant Announcement Device Assignments 25 1 Incoming Built in Auto Attendant Call Overflow Time 26 Built in Auto Attendant Camp on Busy Time X 27 Digital Telephone Handset Headset Receiver Volume Level X 28 DSS Console Attendant Telephone Assignments X 29 1 8 DSS Console Button Assignments Console Number X 29 Add on Module Button Assignments X 30 Station Class of Service xX 30 Telephone Group Page Assignments x 31 Station Class of Service X 31 Group Pickup Assignments X
253. Not Used 01 On Explicit coding for the RPTU that provides D channel control Off Implicit coding for the RPTU that provides D channel control Program 43 4 Overview Program 43 4 assigns each PRI interface that has D channel control of a channel group to have explicit or implicit coding on outgoing calls DK RPTU accepts both explicit and implicit coding on incoming calls Explicit is one 1 PRI using one 1 D channel Implicit is multiple PRIs using one 1 D channel 7 19 ISDN Program 44 BRI Service Profile Identifier SPID Parameters Program 44 BRI Service Profile Identifier SPID Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk BRI Initialized Default Blank Spkr 4 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold FH 1 2 3 SEL BRI Trunk Number L Enter SPID Value 20 digits max Use Button LED 01 to enter a blank DATA SPID Type 0 2 0 Non initializing trunk NIT 1 one SPID for the interface 2 one SPID for each B channel BRI Trunk SPID Number Type SPID Value Program 44 Overview BRI interfaces generally require entering an Service Profile Identifier SPID intialization value to activa
254. Number 500 835 of the PhDN that should be assigned DN button should be assigned sa Directory Numbers are assigned to the flexible button positions on telephones Primary Directory Number Buttons PDNs are similar to Intercom numbers Secondary Directory Numbers SDNs are PDNs which appear on another telephone Phantom Directory Numbers PhDNs are generally used as numbers that may appear on a group of telephones such as an extension number which rings all phones in a department There are a number of considerations for assigning Directory Numbers Toshiba suggests reading the following steps and Directory Number Considerations before assigning DNs gt To assign directory numbers to flexible buttons 1 Refer to the next page to determine how many and what type of Directory Numbers to assign per telephone You can use the Flexible Button Assignments forms to indicate where DNs will be placed see Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments on Page 3 113 Assign PDNs and SDNs by entering the Program 04 port number assignment sequence shown below Refer to Program 04 for Station Logical Port Numbers Y YY where YYY is the port number of the DN If a telephone has multiple PDN buttons put the lowest number NNNN 1 on the top the next lowest number NNNN 2 below that etc This is the order in which they will ring from the top down See the Directory Number Programming Example Assign
255. Number PhDN owner telephone Transferred Caller ID and or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the transferred to telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program see Program 52 Call forwarded Caller ID and or ANI line abandoned call numbers will be stored in the PDN or PhDN owner telephone memory if that telephone is assigned memory in this program ACD calls that are abandoned while the call is in queue or calls abandoned while connected to an Auto Attendant or VM device will register on the SMDR report as a call answered by the ACD announcement DN Auto Attendant DN or Voice Mail DN System amp Station Program 52 Caller ID ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments Program 52 Caller ID ANI Abandoned Call Number Station Owner Assignments Processor Type Program Type Station DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default No station owners assigned KH 1 2 3 Ho Spkr 5 2 Id Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Caller ID or ANI CO Line Number To add a range of line numbers enter XXX XXX low port high port CLASS OWNER the station port number that should store Abandon Call Numbers for the Caller ID or ANI CO Line s entered Press L
256. OXXX or 101 XXX carrier access codes which are always restricted to stations that are toll restricted in any class in Program 48 Toll Restriction Completing the Toll Restriction System Record Completing the Toll Restriction System Record The following instructions explain how to complete System Record Sheets used to program the Toll Restriction feature They are arranged in the same order in which the tables appear in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets The following instructions are intended to give a concise general definition of the programming characteristics defined by each record sheet Note On each record sheet mark an X in the space provided to indicate that a choice is selected Unless otherwise specified this indicates the LED is lit When appropriate indicate digits to be entered using the station dialpad UO HILIS9Y IIOL 4 3 Toll Restriction Program 40 Station CO Line Access Program 40 Station CO Line Access Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A LEDs On for all CO lines all stations can access all lines DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Toll Restriction KIH K 1x2 3 Spkr 4 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr l Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Numbers a To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port
257. PBX calls that register on SMIS when the Agent is logged into an ACD Group with the ACD Call button PBX calls are calls that originate from or ring the Agent ACD Call button when the ACD Call button PhDN is dialed or when a CO line is programmed to ring the ACD Call button PhDN If the Agent s telephone is not logged into an ACD Group calls originated or received by the ACD Call button are considered non ACD calls Do not program ACD CO Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons on Agent telephones Supervisor telephones do not require an ACD PhDN If the ACD call is placed on hold while the Supervisor is monitoring it there is only silence until the Agent takes the call off hold and monitoring resumes The Supervisor telephone is busy to new calls when in the Monitor mode Busy Override Off hook Call Announce and Camp on are available to callers that call a Supervisor in the Monitor or Verify Status mode Important The Monitor mode is automatically cancelled if an Agent transfers an ACD call Related Programs Programs ground loop start CO line ringing assignments Programs 81 89 for use with Overflow After Shift destinations in Programs 14 4 14 5 and 14 6 Programs CO line Group assignments Program 16 for lines that are assigned to an ACD Group in Program 14 0 6 39 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 1 ACD Group Call Routing Possible ways to route CO
258. PCBs PDKU RDSU RSTS RSTU RSTU2 PSTU PEKU PESU KCDU PRBSU RBSS RBUU RBUS RCOU RCOS RGLU2 RCIU2 RCIS RWIU PCOU RDDU REMU PEMU PIOU PIOUS RSSU PEPU Stratagy DK Note Some PCBs cannot be installed in slot 18 see Chapter 2 DK40i Configuration of the Strata DK I amp M Manual Expansion KSU PCBs must be installed in the slots specified in Tables 2 9 2 15 beginning on or the system may not operate properly Slots 15 and 16 support Speaker OCA and RPCI DIU Data Switching slots 17 and 18 do not All slots support Handset OCA and RPCI DI TAPI operation On DK40i1 RCIU2 must be installed in slot 17 RCIU1 cannot be used The RWIU must be installed in slot 15 and slot 16 must be vacant to support 9 to 16 wireless handsets It can be installed in any expansion slot to support 1 8 wireless handsets Ifthe RWIU supports 9 to 16 handsets program code 61 in slot 15 and 16 uole S 9 We sis 3 5 System amp Station Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments Processor Type All RCTUs Program Type System Initialized Default PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Programs 91 1 or 91 9 Code 00 for empty slots yy more codes KIH K 1x23 Spkr 0 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr
259. Page 6 47 Page 6 50 6 19 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 3 Announcement Music Port and Queue Pattern Code 4 Music Source Announcement 1 QUEUE Code 1 PATTERN 1 Program 11 51 Timer gt Go back to repeat announcement 1 Or gt Overflow point OP1 assigned in Code 5 above no in Program 14 5XX1 overflow point OPO in Program 14 5XX0 Code 4 Code 4 EUE i i QUEUE gt u Announcement 1 Music Source Announcement 2 Music Source PATTERN 2 Code 1 Program 11 51 Code 3 Program 11 53 lt Timer gt 1 lt Timer gt Go back to repeat announcement 1 or2 Or Overflow point OP2 assigned in Code 5 above no in Program 14 5XX2 overflow point OPO in Program 14 5XX0 Code 4 Code 4 Code 4 EUE i QUEUE S Announcement 1 Music Source Announcement 2 Music Source Announcement 3 Music Source PATTERN 3 Code 1 Program 11 51 Code 2 Program 11 52 Code 3 l lt Timer gt lt Timer gt Go back to repeat announcement 1 2 or I gt 1940 Program 11 53 lt Timer gt assigned in Code 5 above no overflow point OPO in Program 14 5XX0 XX ACD Group Number Figure 6 2 ACD Queue Announcement and Music Patterns 6 20 Overflow point OP3 in Program 14 5XX3 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 4 Queue Time Out Overflow Destination Program 14 4 Queue Time Out
260. Port PhDN Port DK14 000 009 500 509 DK40i 000 027 500 527 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 589 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 telephones EKs that should ring when the selected DN is called Port Reference Number of that should ring PDN or PhDN Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back Press VolA to turn all LEDs On Press Vol to turn all LEDs Off Processor PDN Port PhDN Port B1CU 000 055 500 579 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 B5CAU BU 000 335 450 785 DN Port Reference Number EK Telephone Ports The Program 04 PDN port number of the telephones that should ring uole s 9 We sis 3 157 System amp Station Program 71 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments Important Jn the EK Telephone Ports column enter the Program 04 telephone ports of the telephones that should ring when the DN is called from another DN or a Tie or DID line maximum of 120 telephones can be assigned to ring The DN button must be assigned Program 39 to the telephone that should ring First Telephone Group Buttons 01 20 on the programming telephone are associated with the telephone groups displayed on the telephone LCD GRP EKO000 Telephone Port 000 is represented by programming button 01 GRP EK001 Telephone Port 001 is represented by prog
261. Program 14 5 All Agents Unavailable All Agents Unavailable All Agents Unavailable All Agents Unavailable Destination is a system Destination is normal CO Destination is another ACD Destination is Strata DK DN DH or attendant line ringing assignments group see Program 14 5 built in AA see console port number see see Program 14 5 Program 14 5 Program 14 5 Ground loop start connect to Strata DK AA and route call per AA Is Is Is an programming destination destination agent ACD Call 3 busy busy button idle in the DID Tie DNIS ANI line group ring or camp on to station programmed in Program 14 2 Ring system Ground loop start DN DH or ring system DN per console port Programs 81 89 and assigned in 81 84 87 If agent answers Program 14 5 Tie DID DNIS ANI Ring idle agent talk on ACD call If ring station port per No Answer ring Program 14 2 another idle agent ACD Call button or go to RNA Loop ground start busy Loop ground start busy destination see override ring system DN override ringing the busy all sha i ie Flowchart 6 per programs 81 84 87 system DN assigned in agents and 81 84 87 programs 81 89 and busy or in After call work 81 84 87 mode DID Tie DNIS ANI line camp on busy to system DID Tie DNIS ANI line The group s shift is ended or all agents DN DH or attendant camp on busy to system are not available console port as
262. Program 22 RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data Calls Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Does not assign hunt to ports to any port 1 2 3 Spkr 2 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Port Number see legend below c HUNT TO see legend below Enter the RPCI DIU digital port number of the hunt from station Enter the hunt to RPCI DIU digital port number Enter the port number s to which class of service must be assigned LED Button 01 deletes a digit from the hunt to To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port port Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Hunt From Hunt To Hunt From Hunt To Hunt From Hunt To Hunt From Hunt To Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port uole S 9 We sis Program 22 Overview This program assigns computer and Data Interface Unit DIU station hunt ports for data calls If a RPCI PDIU station printer modem etc is busy data station hun
263. Program 91 1 automatic preference see Program 32 B backup RAM initialization see Program 92 C cabinet type identification DK424 see Program 03 call forward external remote change security ID code see Program 60 8 call forward station ring assignment see Program 80 3 179 call park pickup abbreviated dialing see Program 05 caller emergency service identification CESID 8 1 caller ID ANI abandoned call number station owner assignments see Program 52 caller ID circuit assignments to CO line PCBs see Program 50 CAMA trunks 911 enhanced trunks 8 1 CO line assign groups see Program 16 special ringing assignments see Program 78 tenant assignments see Program 15 CO DID and tie line ring transfer see Program 37 computer and data interface unit configuration see Program 20 computer and DIU station hunting for data calls see Program 22 credit card dialing 0 see Program 43 D data transfer from temporary memory to working memory see Program 91 2 date 1 15 day 1 15 DID intercept port number see Program 17 DID tie line options see Program 17 direct inward dialing parameters see Program 64 1 directory number button assignments 3 119 distributed hunt group member assignments DK424 see Program 40 DN to DN tie to DN and DID to DN ringing assignments see Program 71 73 DNIS see Program 71 DNIS number network table assignments see Program 7
264. Queuing 05 16 CO Line Ringing 78 80 81 89 81 84 87 Conferencing 10 1 10 2 10 3 15 Credit Card Calls 0 dialing 43 60 7 Data Port DIU Configuration 20 21 22 39 DAY NIGHT Mode Delayed Ringing 10 2 78 81 89 80 81 84 87 80 82 83 85 86 88 89 Digital Telephone 03 27 30 38 39 80 92 5 Direct Inward Dialing DID 09 15 17 17 30 71 72 Direct Inward System Access DISA 15 10 1 60 78 Direct Station Selection Buttons 29 1 29 8 39 Automatic Busy Redial ABR 10 1 16 30 39 Automatic Callback 05 39 10 2 Automatic Hold 35 Automatic Hold Recall 34 Automatic PCB Recognition 91 Automatic Preference 32 Automatic Release Hold VM 15 Port Background Music 05 10 2 19 39 Busy Override 05 31 Busy Station Transfer Ringing 35 Cabinet Type Identification 03 Call Blocking VM Ports 31 Call Forward Blocking with 35 Handsfree Directory Number 04 04 33 39 71 0 3 71 72 73 79 79 81 89 81 84 87 Call Forward External 05 12 15 41 60 8 Directory Number Buttons DISA Code Revision 39 04 05 30 40 41 Call Forward Station Ring ground loop start lines 80 Distinctive Station Ringing 10 2 80 Call Forwarding all types 10 2 36 39 40 Distributed Hunt 04 33 40 71 0 3 81 89 81 84 87
265. Record 00 0 eeseesecsseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsaeceaecnaeceeeseeeeeeeeenees 4 3 Program 40 Station CO Line ACCES Sinni ei e e E aea e N a Sai 4 4 Program 41 Station Outgoing Call Restriction eesseeseeseessesessessessesresresestrtssesttsrestestessestesressestesrent 4 6 Program 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection amp Access Codes ceiceceeceeeeeseeeneceneeeseeenes 4 8 Program 42 1 8 PBX Centrex Access Codes eeceeeessessscsseceeesseeesecesecesesseeseaeesaeceaeseeeeseeeaaecnaees 4 10 Program 43 0 Credit Card Dialing Option eee csseeeeceseeeeeeeeeecaaeceaeceseeseeseeeeeaeesaecaeeaeen 4 11 Program 44 1 8 Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override Codes ceeceeceecceeeeseeeneeeneeenseees 4 13 Program 44 91 93 Emergency Bypass of Forced Verified Account Codes ceeeeseesecereeeteees 4 14 Program 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plane eee ceeeceseceseeeeeeeeeeseeaeceseceseceeeseneeeaeeeneeeaeees 4 15 Program 45 2 Toll Restriction Disable 0 eee ceeceseceseeeseeeseecseceseceseceseeeseecaaesaeceseeeeeeaeeenaeeneen 4 19 Program 45 3 6 Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length 4 20 Program 45 8 9 Toll Restriction Override Code cee eesceseeseeeseeesecenseceseceseceeeseneeeaeeeaecnaesaeens 4 22 Program 45 1 1 4 Toll Restriction for Office Codes cee ceeccecsseceeseceeneeceeeeeeeeeesaecesaeeneaeeeees 4 23 Program 45 2 1 6 LCR Toll Rest
266. Refer to the following table for PCB slot and slot code information DK14 Base KSU COU WMAU DKU and QCDU2 None Slot Number 00 11 12 13 14 PCB Code 91 or 92 62 11 00 or 31 00 PCB Type QRCU3 Options OCA DIU Station Numbers 000 007 008 009 CO Line Numbers 001 004 Notes In the DK14 software QCDU2 digital ports are considered to be installed in slot 11 QCDU2 CO lines are considered to be installed in slot 12 opt QRCU3 opt Always assigns 8 ports 000 007 digital ports OCA DIU No DSS allowed Always assigns 4 CO lines Always assigns 2 ports 008 009 standard telephone ports uolje S 9 We sis 3 3 System amp Station Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments DK40i System Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Program 91 1 or Program 91 9 Code 00 for empty slots 15 18 Base KSU has codes for PCBs vy more codes 1 x 2 x 3 Spkr 0 3 Hold Spkr Hold Turn System Power Off 5 sec then On OF SELECT Slot Number 00 11 18 CARD PCB Code See Reference Table DK40i Base KSU Run Program 91 2 PCB Code Reference Table TBSU PCB Fixed Slot Code Ports T
267. Result Codes Enable this feature LED 02 On if the RPCI or DIU must respond to AT commands and return result codes in the Data Switching command mode RPCI DIU AT dialing commands and result codes are listed in the RPCI DI and the Data Interface User Guide If the DIU is connected to a modem LED 02 should be On If the RPCI DIU is connected to a printer LED 02 should be Off If an RPCI DI is used in the Application Program Interface TAPD mode only and not the Data Switching mode this option is not applicable If the feature is not enabled LED 02 Off the RPCI DIU only responds to AT dialing commands ATDT ATD and ATDD and does not return result codes If the DIU is connected to a terminal or a personal computer with communication software LED 02 should be On LED 01 RPCI and PDIU Connection Enable this feature LED 01 On if there is a PDIU DI RPCI DI or PDIU DS connected to the digital port Each RPCI DI or PDIU DI uses the same digital port as the telephone it is attached to This feature is not applicable if an RPCI DI is used only in TAPI and not DIU mode 3 60 System amp Station Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Blank
268. S ANI line extension numbers that the system should be able to receive Each extension number can be from two to five digits normally the local telephone company and or the DNIS long distance carrier company will provide a list of these numbers Each RCTU supports a different quantity of DNIS or DID Tie line extension numbers shown above in the Program Sequence To assign a DNIS and or normal Tie DID line to Program 70 0 assignments Program 17 LED 05 must be turned On for the line In this case Tie lines do not follow Program 04 assignments and DID lines do not follow Program 09 assignments When this program is used with normal non DNIS or non ANI Tie and or DID Lines Program 17 LEDs 06 07 and 08 must be Off Program 71 1 71 3 Overview Assigns the routing destination of each DNIS and or normal Tie DID line extension number and or the routing destination of Automatic Number Identification ANI only lines Important Program 71 1 assigns DNIS numbers to route to selected DN buttons and makes them flash when the DNIS number is called When assigning DNIS numbers to route to Directory Numbers PDNs SDNs PhDNs using program 71 1 Program 71 72 and 73 must also be used to assign the telephones on which the DNs appear to ring When assigning DNIS numbers to route to ACD and DH groups using Program 71 the telephones and appropriate PDN SDN or PhDN in these groups must also be assigned to ring in Program 71
269. S External Network routing calls With Release 3 2 a station which set up a tandem call and then dropped out can dial the pickup code 5 79 to retrieve the tandem call If more than one tandem connection is set up by a station 5 79 picks up the call with the lowest CO line as a priority uoleys 9 We sis Prior to Release 3 2 standard telephones could set up tandem calls but they could not drop out If they tried to drop out the call would ring back to the standard phone Code 7 Forced Account Code Verified or Non verified If the Forced Account Code feature is used see Program 30 a station user is required to enter an Account Code before a CO line call can be completed A choice exists for each line Code 8 Operation After CO Line Flash If a standard telephone user is on an existing CO line call and flashes the hookswitch on their telephone a Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF receiver channel may or may not be connected depending on this assignment If the CO line is a rotary dial only type the QRCU2 K4RCU3 K5RCU K5RCU2 BRCS or RRCS must be seized after flash when dialing from DTMF standard telephones The QRCU2 KSRCU K5RCU2 K4RCU3 RRCS or BRCS will decode the dialed tones and send dial pulses to the line 3 49 System amp Station Program 15 CO Line Tenant Assignments Program 15 CO Line Tenant Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default A
270. SID on the CAMA trunk If there is no idle PDN 911 is sent on the originally selected CO line without CESID To ensure that here is an idle PDN when a telephone is assigned to auto off hook select a CO line or CO line group in Program 32 The telephone should have a button appearance of this CO or pooled line Or if the telephone does not have these line buttons it should have another PDN button appearance to connect to the CAMA trunk in case 911 is dialed 8 3 E911 Program 11 0 E911 CAMA Trunk Assignments 8 4 Program 11 0 E911 CAMA Trunk Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type System Initialized Default A LEDs Off 1 2 43 Spkr 1 1 Hold Spkr O Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 0 Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below On Enabled Off Disabled LED Button X LED On LED Off 11 E911 enabled E911 disabled 10 CAMA trunk 4 not used CAMA trunk 4 used 09 CAMA trunk 3 not used CAMA trunk 3 used 08 CAMA trunk 2 not used CAMA trunk 2 used 07 CAMA trunk 1 not used CAMA trunk 1 used 06 05 04 03 No internal notification Internal notification provided 02 CAMA trunk Control Disconnect Normal disconnect 01 Seven CESID Digits Ten CESID Digits Progra
271. STU2 LEDs 09 and 10 should be Off for RSTU2 RSTU RDSU KSTU2 QSTU2 and PSTU alternate BGM Also run Program 19 to assign BGM to a PCB slot number DK14 DK40i The normal MOH source can be connected to the MOH RCA jack on the DK14 KSU or on the DK40i KSU DK424 and DK424i The normal MOH source always connects to an RCTU or BCU Also run Program 19 to assign BGM to a PCB slot number When disabled LED 10 Off deletes DTMF tones returned to digital and electronic telephones when dialing from dial pad or speed dialing also deletes auto dial digits from callers that are call forwarded to voice mail This does not affect the actual DTMF tones sent out to trunks or voice mail devices When disabled LED 09 Off BGM connected to the PEKU or PESU is sent to electronic and digital telephone speakers and external page optional To assign the BGM PCB slot number see Program 19 1 PESU PEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in Program 19 1 System amp Station Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 of 3 LED 08 Display Dialed Number Timing An LCD telephone will display a dialed number on outgoing calls and the CO line Program 93 ID name DNIS ANI or Caller ID information on incoming calls for either 15 or 60 seconds before the display changes to the elapsed time of the call LED 07 Standard Telephone Distinctive Ring If Distinctive Ring is enabled LED 07 On the CO line call ring pattern is standard 0 2 seconds o
272. SU 42 MIS for ACD TTY RBSU with RBSS 78 4 S T Interfaces z 8 stations 4 CO lines PRI Interface PIOU PIOUS RSSU 43 SMDI VM Interface TTY RPTU Interface Card 79 23 CO lines PDKU2 RWIU 61 8 Stations RPTU 83 16 PRI Lines R4 3 PDKU2 OCA DIU 62 8 Stations 84 8 PRI Lines R4 3 PDKU2 DSS OCA DIU 64 8 Stations uolje S 3 W3 S S 3 7 System amp Station Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignments Processor Type All BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default PCB codes of PCBs installed prior to running Programs 91 1 or 91 9 Code 00 for empty slots yy more codes K 1 2 3 Spkr 0 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Slot Number 00 01 11 78 E Turn System Power Off 5 sec then On Pal CARD PCB Code See Reference Table 2i Run Program 91 2 See Worksheet 6 in the Strata DK I amp M Manual Chapter 6 for PCB placement DK424i Base Cabinet 1 Slot Number B101 B102 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 PCB Code PCB Type Options Station Tie DID ASDN Port Numbers CO Tie DID ASDN Line Numbers DK424i Expansion Cabinet 2 Slot Number 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 S208 S209 S210
273. Secondary timing source The DK is synchronized to the Public Network If the Primary synchronization is lost it switches to the secondary timing source When a T1 or PRI slot number is assigned the DK only accepts a 1 for the circuit number The circuit number is only used for BRI interfaces to specify which circuit is to be used for the Clock Source If the PCB in this slot is not a T1 or ISDN PCB the system will not accept data and any entries will be cleared BRI interfaces should be used as a clock source only when a T1 or PRI interface is not equipped Set T1 parameters and assignments with the Program 41 Part 1 and 42 Part 2 series See the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual for additional T1 information RDTU RPTU support is as follows Processor Number of RDTU Number of RBUU RPTU s Supported RBUS s Supported RCTUA 0 4 RCTUBA BB 2 8 RCTUC D 6 14 RCTUE F 8 20 For proper T1 or ISDN operation the equipment at each end of a digital T1 span line must be synchronized The DK is synchronized as slave to the equipment on the other end of the digital line by the RDTU RPTU RBUU RBUS PCB designated as the Primary Reference in Program 42 1 If a malfunction occurs and Primary Synchronization is lost the DK automatically switches modes and synchronizes to the equipment connected to the secondary PCB designated as the Secondary Reference If the equipment on the other end of the
274. Sending Dialed Digits X Overview Numerical Program Listing 5 5 3 E w 5 3 c Program Title E 3 f Els s S eee e aa ao E aA HOl F 3as ae 64 1 Direct Inward Dialing Parameters X 64 2 Number of DID DNIS Digits for Trunk Groups X 65 Call by Call Channel Group Assignment X 66 1 Channel Group Number Parameters X 66 2 Call by Call Trunk Group Codes and Network ID x 66 4 66 3 Channel Group Trunk Parameters X 66 5 Line Directory Number LDN Registration x 66 6 LDN Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignments X 66 7 LDN Trunk Group Assignments xX 67 1 Trunk Group Call Direction X 67 Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported X 67 Call Types for ISDN Trunk Groups X 67 ISDN Trunk Group Maximum Channel Reservation X 68 1 Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters X 68 2 Outbound CNIS Parameters X 69 Verified Account Codes xX 69 1 CNIS Presentation Parameters X 69 2 Special Number Assignment xX 70 Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Class Assignments X 71 0 DID Tie DNIS ANI Lines xX 71 1 3 DNIS Number and ANI Line Routing Assignments Xx x 71 4 DNIS Number and ANI Only Lines Voice Mail VM ID Assignments X 71 5 DNIS Number Name Display X 71 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments 72 DNIS Network Table Assignments 74 System NT Button Lock Password 76 1 TSIU
275. System amp Station Program 60 2 7 SMDR Output Account Code Digit Length Program 60 2 7 SMDR Output Account Code Digit Length Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System Initialized Default tem 2 10 seconds Item 3 SMDR output is enabled for answered incoming outgoing calls Item 4 a 6 digit length is assigned to all Forced Voluntary Account Codes Item 7 21 digits 1 2 3 Spkr 6 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 7 Item Make a selection from the table below See table below Item Description Data SMDR Threshold Time Time 2 0 1 second 1 10 seconds SMDR Output when a call is completed SMDR COR 3 0 Outgoing Only 1 Incoming and Outgoing Forced Voluntary Account Code Digit Length 04 15 Account 4 See Program 69 for Verified Account Codes Digits are verified per Program 30 Button LED 14 and Program 69 SMDR Printout Options Toll Dial Data Toll Dial 0 All Calls item 3 printout outgoing call only is still available 5 1 Dial 0 calls only 2 Dial 1 calls only 3 Dial 00 calls only 4 Dial 1 0 calls only 5 Dial 1 00 calls only DISA Security Code 01 15 digits may be changed from station per Program 30 If a security code is not programmed outgoing trunk access via DISA will not require a security code when dialing
276. T Program Number Cancels printout at Exit Program to be printed on SMDR any time Mode To specify a range of programs enter XX XX Data Print low program in range high program in range Printout begins Program 97 Overview Contents of each program can be sent to the SMDR port for a hard copy printout 3 190 Toll Restriction 4 This chapter gives you an overview of the Toll Restriction feature and step by step instructions to fill in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets for DK14 DK40i and all DK424 and DK424i processors Toll Restriction Methods Toll Restriction screens and selectively restricts outgoing calls using three different methods Each type of restriction can be programmed for individual stations Toll Restriction can also be enabled disabled for each outgoing line in the system Important Strata DK requires that a 1 be dialed before an area code to provide simple three or six digit toll restriction Simple Toll Restriction Only involves the first digit dialed The system can be programmed to reject outgoing calls beginning with 0 or 1 see Program 48 Three digit Toll Restriction Involves the system analyzing the area code dialed and selectively allowing disallowing outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables see Program 46 Codes 2 4 Six digit Toll Restriction Involves the system analyzing the area code and the office code and selectively allowin
277. TOSHIBA Telecommunication Systems Division Strata DK Digital Business Telephone Solutions Programming Manual DIK I Software Release 3 1 DIK 40i DIKARA DIKARA Software Release 4 3 and ACD Strata DK General End User Information The Strata DK Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission s Rules and Regulations FCC Requirements Means of Connection The Federal Communications Commission FCC has established rules which permit the Strata DK system to be connected directly to the telephone network Connection points are provided by the telephone company connections for this type of customer provided equipment will not be provided on coin lines Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs Incidence of Harm If the system is malfunctioning it may also be disrupting the telephone network The system should be disconnected until the problem can be determined and repaired If this is not done the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service If possible they will notify you in advance but if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Service or Repair For service or repair contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area call
278. TUA 1 4 1 4 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 1 8 1 6 LCRPlan Schedule Action Start Time LCR Plan Schedule Action Start Time 01 16 1 3 Code H H M M 01 16 1 3 Code H H M M 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program 56 A Baie thal i Program 56 2 Proaram b4 r LCR LCR Stati oute Definition LCR LCR Stati oute Definition EaR Sened peta a see legend above a Bees Gites Sn see legend above 01 16 5 seelegend ist ana 3ra ath f 01 16 i seelegend ist 2nd 3rd 4th above Pick Pick Pick Pick above Pick Pick Pick Pick Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 53 Overview This program assigns up to three time schedules to each plan Each time schedule consists of four or six different route definition choices defined in Program 54 available to the eight station groups defined in Program 56 It may be helpful to complete Program 54 portions of the plans and Program 56 before proceeding If Schedules 1 amp 2 start at the same time then Time of Day schedule change does not occur and data only needs to be entered for Schedule 1 Typical Installation Without Time Schedule Feature In most cases an installation does require use of the time schedule feature To reflect this on the record sheets for Plans 01 16 1 Enter the same Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1 and 2 Use the military format HH MM Hours Minutes Fill in a
279. Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Telecommunication Systems Division in Irvine CA 949 583 3700 Telephone Network Compatibility The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations and procedures If such changes affect the compatibility or use of the Strata DK system the telephone company will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Notification of Telephone Company Before connecting a Strata DK system to the telephone network the telephone company may request the following 1 Your telephone number 2 FCC registration number Strata DK may be configured as a Key or Hybrid telephone system The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of the system Ifthe operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines it may be registered as a Key telephone system If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines such as dial access Least Cost Routing Pooled Line Buttons etc the system must be registered as a Hybrid telephone system In addition to the above certain features tie Lines Off premises Stations etc may also require Hybrid telephone system registration in some areas Ifyou are unsure of your type of operation and or the appropriate FCC registration number contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor for assistance DK14 and DK40i Key system CJ6MLA 74479 KF E
280. U PIOU PIOUS ACD MIS slot assignments see Program 03 xapu IN 7 Index S V S set date time and day 1 15 SMDR data output options see Program 60 output account code digit length see Program 60 2 7 software check see Program 00 special common carrier numbers and authorization code digit length see Program 45 3 6 station class of service see Program 34 see Program 35 CO line access see Program 40 hunting voice calls only see Program 33 logical port PDN assignment see Program 04 display and or change see Program 01 memory allocation for store caller ID ANI see Program 51 outgoing call restriction see Program 41 physical port display and or change see Program 02 toll restriction classification see Program 48 Strata AirLink Alert Signal 3 122 DK424 and DK424i PCB Codes 3 7 Program 32 3 91 Program 39 3 116 Strata DK how to program 1 10 system and station programs 3 1 assignments basic timing see Program 12 part 1 of 3 see Program 10 1 part 2 of 3 see Program 10 2 part 3 of 3 see Program 10 3 initialization 1 14 see Program 91 9 NT button lock see Program 36 password see Program 74 T T1 assignment series DK424 see Program 41 channel assignments 3 127 IN 8 clock source see Program 42 span RDTU frame and line code assignments 3 126 span primary timing reference assignments 3 130 span receive level pad assignments 3 129 span transmit level
281. U 495 Pe eee in Speed dial sae Program Pause Long Spd Dial Lng Pause or PAU L 493 Sets a 10 second pause in Speed Dial Will Auto Dial a Caller ID and or Unanswered Caller ID and peers or ANI Stored Number Auto Lost Call Auto Dial or LCAD 462 rie dt aaa can ANI Dial telephone number that was stored in station Caller ID ANI memory Table 3 8 Additional Feature Button Codes Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Account Code Account Code or ACCNT 450 Allows aVoluntary Account Code To pe entered Console can alert another station but Alert Signaling Alert 1 4 427 430 another station cannot alert the console See Program 39 for more information s Pages up to 120 idle electronic or digital All Call Voice Page All Call Page or AC 489 telephones over speaker Automatic Busy Redial Auto Busy Redial or ABR 470 Sets ABR of busy outgoing number Automatic Callback Busy Auto Callback or ACB 494 Sets ACB for station recalled by busy line Call Forward All Calls Call Frwd All Calls or CFAC 487 All calls forward to selected station i i Forwards all calls to pre defined Call Forward A C Fixed Call Frwd to or CFF 486 destination See Program 36 Forwards calls to selected station if Call Forward Busy Call Frwd Busy or CFB 459 station is busy Call Forward Busy Forwards calls to selected station if No Answer Call Feud Busy NANS OnE BIN eat station is busy or does not answer Call Forward External Call Frwd External or CF EXT 460 Forward calls externall
282. UA Port 089 RCTUB RCTUBA BB 249 RCTU C D and Port 344 for RCTU E F Also enable Forced Account Code for outgoing CO line in Program 15 7 Processor Port Processor Port DK14 10 RCTUB RCTUBA BB B1CU 089 DK40i 035 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 249 RCTUA 039 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 344 LED 07 Off hook Call Announce OCA Automatic When LED 07 is On a calling station has this feature enabled If the system is set for Ring First Signaling Program 10 1 LED 10 On the user must dial 21 after hearing busy tone or 12 after hearing ringback tone in order to OCA the called station OCA Automatic only works on systems with Voice First Signaling Program 10 1 or 10 2 LED 01 Off in which case the user does not have to dial 21 or 12 Initialized default On all ports The called station must also be enabled to receive OCA see Program 31 LED 03 LED 06 Automatic Busy Redial ABR Access ABR can be enabled LED 06 On or disabled LED 06 Off for each station The system selects the last line in the originating line group each time ABR is initiated see also Program 10 1 If you do not enable ABR access here the ABR soft key does not appear on LCD telephones ABR operates when calling on ground and loop start lines but is not functional for DID or Tie line calls ABR overrides Program 41 Program 41 is normally used with LCR For the DK40i1 KSRCU K5RCU2 or K4RCU must be installed for the DK14 QR
283. UC B1CU B2CAU B3CAU B5CAU Y RCTUDS3 RCTUF B2CBU B3CBU B5CBU OK RAM is good NG RAM is defective An X NG or Y NG RAM test result indicates a defective processor PCB change the appropriate X or Y processor PCB and retest RAM on the newly installed processor PCB Replace the DK14 KSU or DK40i Base KSU if Test 1 NG Backup RAM Test 1 2 3 Spkr 0 0 Hold Spkr 6 1 QA Hold RCTU Tests RAM 15 seconds downtime Programming Telephone LCD Displays l BACKUP RAM TEST SOL 9 U01ezIJeu 2 15 Initialization amp Test Program 00 Part 2 Processor RAM Test Display Backup RAM Test Results 1 2 3 Spkr 0 0 Hold Spkr 6 2 Programming Telephone LCD Displays DK424 DK14 DK40i TEST 2 X OK Y OK TEST 1 OK or or TEST 2 X NG Y NG TEST 2 NG X 00000 xX 00000 Where X RCTUA RCTUBA RCTUC B1CU B2CAU B3CAU B5CAU Y RCTUD3 RCTUF B2CBU B3BU B5CBU OK RAM is good NG RAM is defective An X NG or Y NG RAM test result indicates a defective RCTU PCB change the appropriate X or Y processor PCB and retest RAM on the newly installed processor PCB Replace the DK14 or DK40i Base KSU if Test 1 NG Program 00 Part 2 Overview Use this program to test the RAM on system p
284. UE B5CAU 20 calls 4 amplified For DK 40 DK424 and DK424i amplifiers are switched into Two CO line calls automatically one amplifier for each call starting from the lowest PEKU ports enabled to the highest see Program 10 3 record sheet Skipping ports is allowed Two CO line calls established after all amplifiers are in use will not be amplified Example The first amplifier can be connected to PEKU ports 017 and 018 skipping ports 009 and 010 In this case LED 02 should be On and LED 01 should be Off See Program 10 1 LEDs 19 and 20 Program 10 2 LEDs 18 and 19 and Program 15 5 for more information on Two line Conference Important The amplifiers used for supervised Two line Conference connections are switched in automatically starting with the first connection Calls made when there are no amplifiers available will not be amplified Unsupervised Two line tandem connections are not limited to the numbers listed above by processor but are limited by the number of lines equipped in the system Note External amplifiers also amplify two line DISA Call Forward External DNIS externally routed calls DID and Tie line trunk to trunk calls 3 38 System amp Station Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters Initialized Default LEDs 12 and 14 are On
285. We sis Program 33 Overview Program 33 assigns Station Hunting to PDNs or PhDNs When a called station is busy the Station Hunting feature will ring the alternate hunt to PDNs or PhDNs defined in this program If the hunt to DN is busy the system will try to ring the next hunt to DN and so on If a hunt to DN is in the Call Forward mode the call forward will have priority over the hunt A ground loop start CO line will hunt from a PDN or PhDN only if it has been assigned to immediate ring at the owner station of the PDN or PhDN exclusively in Programs 81 84 or 87 and 81 84 or 87 3 93 System amp Station Program 33 PDNJ PhDN Station Hunting Voice Calls Only 3 94 On Ring first systems if a PDN appears on more than one button on owner s telephone the DK will not hunt until all appearances of the PDN are in use On Voice first systems the system will hunt for an available station if any one of the PDN appearances is busy Program 33 Example Action press buttons LED buttons LCD Response Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone connected to physical port 005 circuit 6 Make sure the programming button strip template is installed on the programming telephone See Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type on Page 3 109 No N Nt Jan
286. X XXX low port Buttons which should be lit high port Processor Type Port Range Pickup Groups Processor Type Port Range Pickup Groups DK14 000 009 8 B1iCU 000 055 20 DK40i 000 027 16 B2CAU BU 000 111 20 RCTUA 000 031 20 B3CAU BU 000 191 20 RCTUBA BB 000 079 20 B5CAU BU 000 335 20 _RcTUCID o00 233 2 RCTUE F 000 335 20 Pickup Group LED Bon Pickup Group 20 20 Pickup Group 19 19 Pickup Group 18 18 Pickup Group 17 17 Pickup Group 16 16 Pickup Group 15 15 Pickup Group 14 14 Pickup Group 13 13 Pickup Group 12 12 Pickup Group 11 11 Pickup Group 10 10 Pickup Group 9 09 Pickup Group 8 08 Pickup Group 7 07 Pickup Group 6 06 Pickup Group 5 05 Pickup Group 4 04 Pickup Group 6 03 Pickup Group 2 02 Pickup Group 1 01 Program 31 Overview Stations can be divided into as many as 20 pickup groups see the legend above the record sheet Station users can pick up calls internal or line that are ringing any station within their group by dialing a single access code or with a Call Pickup button assigned with Code 480 in Program 39 and pick up calls that are ringing stations in other groups by dialing selected access codes Stations can belong to more than one group See Program 05 for access codes This feature also picks up ringing transfer and hold recall calls but does not pick up held calls or selectively by directory number To pickup held or ringing PDN and or PhDN calls selectively u
287. X is the number you want the system to send out on an outbound call for Caller Number Identification This tells the system to send the number entered in Program 68 2 as the ball basen Calling Party Number Identification for all station on outbound calls This tells the system to accept DNIS calls on the ISDN PRI trunks 001 023 17 A Gea EEDS 02708 and to following DNIS Program 71 72 and show ANI if presented to the DK system i This tells the system that the incoming DNIS number XXXX is assigned to a DOU AE DNIS address 000 in the DK system 7 8 ISDN Guidelines for Programming ISDN Calling Features Table 7 3 ISDN PRI DNIS Type Call Programming continued Program Bie Number Program Data Description i This tells the system to route the incoming DNIS call that was route to DNIS TAA 000 X XXX address 000 to Station Port XXXX Programming for ISDN PRI LDN Type Call The following table shows the minimum programming needed to make Listed Directory Number LDN type ISDN PRI calls work in the Strata DK System Table 7 4 ISDN PRI LDN Type Call Programming Program Pare Number Program Data Description 03 XX 79 XX is the DK slot where the RPTU PCB is placed 10 4 LED 9 On N registration will route the unknown number or call type in numbering 16 XX 2 This tells the system that trunk group XX is an ISDN PRI Trunk Group This tells the system to make the
288. Y IIOL For NANP upgraded SW version the dial plan can also be changed from the station port 000 default station 10 100 or 200 gt To change the System Dialing Plan for the North American Dialing Plan With the handset on hook You hear a confirmation tone X is NANP X KEY CODE press a DN 650 the current system dialing plan 1 2 3 7 8 or 9 Enter 6267 You hear a confirmation tone CODE 6267 NANP Enter the one digit X for You hear a confirmation tone CODE 6267 NANP X the system dialing plan X 1 2 3 7 8 or 9 4 17 Toll Restriction Program 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plan 4 18 4 Press Redial or RDL The telephone returns to the idle mode DATA PROGRAMMED 5 Press Spkr Plan 7 10XXX 1 NXX NXX NXX The Strata DK systems in this Programming Manual default to this plan Used when dialing 1 before the long distance number Call is placed to a destination outside the area code by dialing a 1 before dialing the area code The user places a local code plus distance call to a destination in the same area code by simply dialing the number without a 1 in front The area and office codes may be interchangeable The system differentiates between them whenever it sees the digit 1 dialed This plan supports five digit Carrier Access CA codes 1OXXX compared to seven digit CA codes When using this plan the system recognizes the following If 1 is the f
289. YYYY Agent ID code Each Agent telephone must have a unique single appearing PhDN button to receive and originate ACD calls Program When the Agent logs into an ACD Group from any ACD Call PhDN in X single appearing PhDN that PhDN is the active Program 39 ACD Button on the Agent telephone Supervisor telephones do not require a unique PhDN button unless the Supervisor telephone will be used as an Agent telephone periodically Enables the Agent to peg an ACD call with an Work Unit 444 X account number that will be sent to a SMIS personal computer and or SMDR device Provides ACD call pickup within the Group The x Agent must be logged into the same Group in order ACD Fick p 146 X X to pick up the ACD call The Pickup call is considered an ACD call on the MIS status report Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones ACD Feature Button Designation Feature Code Program on Agent Telephone Program on Supervisor Telephone Notes Unavailable ACD Help 452 449 xX Turns the Agent s availability off and on While in this mode the Agent does not receive any new incoming ACD calls Rings a Supervisor DN button enabling an Agent to request assistance while talking on an ACD call Calls the highest numbered Supervisor telephone or PDN End After Call Work Time 445 Manually cancels unused wrap up time This enables an Agent to re
290. a station port has appearance of a line with restrictions disabled the restrictions will be removed from the station on an individual line basis through Program 45 2 Enter one of the following codes in the Station Restriction column Enter Function Description 00 No Station Toll Restriction default 01 Area Code Toll Restriction This restricts a station from dialing all area codes Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 This prevents the station from making any long distance calls or as a first or second digit for old plan 1 2 operator assisted calls in addition to outgoing calls outside the home 02 ei atte i or 3 or new plan 7 8 or 9 as defined in area code In applicable areas this prevents long distance office codes Program 45 1 from being dialed if 1 NNX 03 Class 1 Toll Restriction Class 1 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 10 04 Class 2 Toll Restriction Class 2 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 20 05 Class 3 Toll Restriction Class 3 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 30 06 Class 4 Toll Restriction Class 4 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 40 07 Class 5 Toll Restriction Class 5 area and office code restrictions are defined in P
291. above ACD Features can be programmed RCTUBA BB C D 10 49 x x onto SD buttons or onto speed dial codes This table B1CU B2CAU BU shows the range of Station and System Speed Dial B3CAU BU station Codes by processor DK40i RCTUA 60 99 x x system RCTUBA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU 600 699 xX X B3CAU BU system RCTUE F and k B5CAU BU station 100 1393 4s x RCTUE F and 200 999 x x Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Program 39 Overview This program assigns ACD Agent and Supervisor buttons for Toshiba digital and or electronic telephones All other button codes see Program 39 Record Sheet in Chapter 10 Record Sheets in this manual are allowed on Agent and Supervisor telephones Telephones can be programmed with both Agent and Supervisor buttons to enable dual functions however a telephone cannot function as a Supervisor and Agent station simultaneously If both Agent and Supervisor buttons are assigned to a telephone the type of log in code Agent or Supervisor determines how the telephone will function see Program 14 1 and 14 2 uonnq 4siq 2D dyewo ny Agent and Supervisor Telephone Programming Considerations ACD Agent telephones must be programmed with a PhDN button called the ACD Call button to receive ACD calls This button must be a unique PhDN that appears only on that Agent telephone The ACD Call button is used to originate and receive
292. al page See Program 17 LED 01 and Program 71 LED 14 Privacy Override Warning Tone Privacy Override allows a station user to enter an existing CO line conversation by pressing a CO Line button if the called station is assigned in Program 30 A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties LED 13 Auto Callback Camp on Tone A busy called digital or electronic telephone user may optionally hear a one time beep tone from the speaker signifying that another station has tried to call and has activated the Automatic Callback feature LED 12 CO Line Beep Tone If this LED is lit a beep tone will be sent every three minutes to stations on outgoing line calls LED 11 Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF Tone Return This option deletes DTMF tones that are returned to digital or electronic telephones when manually dialing or speed dialing It also eliminates auto dial digits returned to callers when digits are automatically sent to voice mail ports on forwarded calls LEDs 10 and 09 Background Music Music on Hold Separation An alternate Background Music BGM source can be sent to digital telephone speakers electronic telephone speakers and external page speakers while another Music on hold MOH source can be sent to lines or internal stations on hold The alternate BGM source can be connected to either circuit 3 on a PEKU PCB circuit 8 on a PESU PCB or circuit 2 on a PSTU KSTU2 RDSU RSTU2 RSTU or Q
293. alized default program sequence then record sheets A program overview and additional program information are given after the record sheets see Figure 1 1 Note Some common program sections also include examples for your convenience System Programs Program 30 Station Class of Service Program Overview __ Program 30 Overview Brief description of program E ean aoLa for individual telephones at the station level The following function s Privacy Override LED 17 Additional Program Toner by pressing a common CO lin buton aota DNI ton You eat seta wagon Information for Privacy Override see Program 10 2 re E Additional details on the program features that were given on the Program 30 Station Claas of Service system record sheet Number Title __ Program 30 Station Class of Service Processor Type Program pe Speer eranprn Gives the type of processor that is tos compatible with the given program Program Sequence _____ opener ches cag rma a Be sure to read this information Keystrokes for entering data E isto AI LEDS masa wth an E before attempting to use a program from system record sheets with your system application follow a pattern consisting of a five step process described a
294. all If call waiting tone is not enabled new calls do not present an audible indication The call waiting display always displays the number of calls waiting to be answered LED 04 Speed Up PC Attendant Console LCD Display Release 4 15 or higher When LED 04 is On it speeds up the display for the PC Attendant Console Version 4T and higher LED 04 Off is for the traditional Attendant Console LCD Display The Default if Off Program 58 4 Attendant Console Answer Button Priority Assignments Initialized Default 0 7 2 3 4 5 6 Highest Priority Lowest Priority 1 2 3 Spkr 58 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 a al Enter button numbers in priority order Console Number 1 4 Button Name Park RC Trans RC Hold RC In Trans LINE In Dial O PDN Button Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Program 58 4 Overview Each incoming call or recall type can be assigned a specific Answer button priority level ranging from 0 6 If the Answer button is assigned Priority answer operation in Program 58 2 then incoming calls recalls will ring to the Answer button based on their assigned priority levels Priority 1 calls have the highest priority while Priority 6 calls have the lowest System amp Sta
295. alue Use the record sheet with Program 67 3 7 39 ISDN Program 67 5 Multiple Time Zone Settings Program 67 5 Multiple Time Zone Settings Processor Type All RCTUs Release 4 15 or higher DK40i and all BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Default 0000 xH 1 2 3 Spkr 6 7 Hold Spkr 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 5 Enter the Time Zone Starting Time 0000 2359 Enter the Channel Group 1 8 Enter the Time Zone 1 3 Program 67 5 Overview This program enables setting three different time zones In Release 4 1 the maximum number of lines that can be obtained by each trunk group and the minimum number of lines that can be secured is programmable By programming the max and min number of lines that can be used by a trunk group this prevents a trunk group from monopolizing all the lines 7 40 ISDN Program 68 1 Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters Program 68 1 Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default A LEDs Off FH 1 2 3 Spkr 6 8 Hold Spkr 1 a Hold Spkr Hold Spkr
296. am 11 0 E911 CAMA Trunk Assignments When this feature is used the station or Attendant console that answers the E911 notification call will be connected in a three party conference with the E911 calling telephone and the E911 CAMA trunk E911 dispatch person who answers the 911 call The CESID information and user name of the 911 calling station displays on all Attendant Console monitors and E911 notification telephone LCDs when the E911 notification call rings LED 02 CAMA Trunk Disconnect Operation Options After an E911 call is established disconnecting the calling or notified telephone or notified telephone console from the CAMA trunk can be controlled exclusively by the E911 trunk dispatch person receiving the 911 call The disconnect operation for each option is LED 02 Off Allows either the E911 call originating telephone or 911 dispatcher to disconnect the CAMA trunk In the following example conversation exists between originating telephone notified telephone console and the E911 CAMA trunk dispatch person E911 originator hangs up The E911 notified station and the E911 CAMA trunk remain and disconnects connected The notified station can disconnect from the CAMA trunk E911 notified station hangs The E911 originating station and the E911 CAMA trunk remain up and disconnects connected Originating station can disconnect from the CAMA trunk E911 dispatcher hangs up All parties are disconnected CAMA trunk
297. am 14 5 for delay ring Ifthe overflow destination is the Strata DK System built in AA or Attendant Console calls will always exit queue when the overflow point is reached even if the AA or Attendant Console is busy If the call s should remain in queue until the busy overflow destination becomes idle assign the overflow destination as a DN 000 239 or 500 739 except Attendant Console ports or ACD Group 01 16 in Program 14 5 If the Program 14 5 overflow destination is a DH Group calls will not exit the ACD queue and enter the busy DH Group queue Only ground and loop start ACD calls overflow to the DK AA or normal ringing DID DNIS ANI and Tie lines will overflow to the assignment set in Program 14 2 if code 320 or 321 is set in this program Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination If announcements should not be repeated see Flowcharts 6 8 6 10 on Pages Page 6 47 Page 6 50 and Non Repeating Queue Announcement explanation under Program 14 5 Call Queue Overflow Point OP Guide h OP1 OP2 e A1 gt Mie gt A2 e gt M2e gt A3 gt M3 o OPO lt _ Calls in Queue go back to the announcement 1 3 selected in Program 14 3 Code 5 T and continue to repeat until overall overflow Queue Time Program 11 1 When the Overflow Queue Timer expires the call attempts to overflow to the destinations set in Program 14 4 A
298. am the appropriate one or two digit Centrex PBX line access code in front of the emergency number Notes e Do not use this program with ABR and DISA e This program does not override Toll Restriction Emergency numbers must be put in allowed tables in the normal Toll Restriction programming procedures e If Enhanced 911 E911 is required use E911 Programs in place of 44 91 93 Toll Restriction Program 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plan Program 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plan Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Assigns Dial Plan 7 to the system current North American Numbering Plan KIH 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 DATA Plan 1 9 Enter Codes 1 9 to indicate the dial plan for the system x Plan Toll Restriction LCR Dial Plans 9 101XXXX 1 NXX NXX NXX 8 101YXXX 1 NXX NXX NXX 7 1O0XXX 1 NXX NXX NXX 6 For UK only 5 0 0 and universal Codes 5 and 4 are not used in USA 4 Universal 0 and universal Codes 5 and 4 are not used in USA 3 10XXX 1 AC NXX NXX 2 10XXX 1 AC NXX 1 NNX 1 10XXX AC NXX 1 NNX Where In NXX and NNX X 0 9 N 2 9 NXX or code interchangeable with area and office codes s
299. ammed 7 Spkr Speaker 00 Select Prepare system for another selection go back to Step 5 or exit Program 00 continue with Step 8 8 Hold 00 Select Secure Program 00 data in system memory Data Programmed 9 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 00 Enter another program number see Program 91 1 Example on Page 2 7 or exit programming mode go to Step 10 System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 00 10 Hold No N N Exit programming mode Jan 20 Sun 06 58 1 N N is the Program Telephone DN Initialization amp Test Program 00 Part 2 Processor RAM Test Program 00 Part 2 Processor RAM Test Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Test Includes Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments Initialized Default None General RAM Test Note See Program 00 Part 2 Overview on Page 2 16 HK H 1 2 43 Spkr 5 1 01 03 Hold Tests RAM 15 seconds downtime Spkr 0 0 Hold Programming Telephone LCD Displays al GENERAL RAM TEST Display General RAM Test Results 1 2 3 Spkr 0 0 Hold Spkr 5 2 Programming Telephone LCD Displays DK424 DK14 DK40i TEST 1 X OK Y OK TEST 1 OK or Or TEST 1 X NG Y NG TEST 1 NG X 00000 xX 00000 Where X RCTUA RCTUBA RCT
300. an ACD queue for an indefinite period of time after the outside caller hangs up and the CO line does not provide the Calling Party Control CPC or AR disconnect signal This timer only disconnects calls in queue it does not disconnect calls that are answered by Agent telephones or other telephones devices If 00 data is entered the disconnect feature is disabled The disconnect feature is always disabled for ground start CO lines see Flowchart 6 2 on Page 6 41 later in this chapter Note 255 sec is 4 minutes and 15 seconds Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 0 Loop Ground Start Line Direct to ACD Group Assignments Program 14 0 Loop Ground Start Line Direct to ACD Group Assignments Initialized Default No CO lines assigned to direct ring to ACD Groups all LEDS Off 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 0 Light Button LEDs of CO lines that should be assigned to the ACD Group ACD Group Number Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back Processor Are Group CO Line Range Processor screen CO Line Range DK40i 01 08 001 012 B1CU 01 08 001 032 RCTUA 01 08 001 016 B2CAU BU 01 16 001 120 RCTUBA BB 01 08 001 048 B3CAU BU 01 16 001 120 RCTUC D 01 16 00
301. and as the first digit of any number in Program 45 3X Toll Restriction assumes the number entered in this table begins with a or Important To allow to be dialed as a first digit at least one number must be entered in Program 45 3X Using x or as the First Digit on ISDN BRI PRI In order to use or as the first digit on ISDN BRI PRI you need to enter the following in the Program 45 3 programming sequence Pricey 7 DATA OPTION OPTION Press LED 02 1 twice then press 0 0 LED 01 once UO HIL S9Y IIOL 4 27 Toll Restriction Program 45 4 Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR Program 45 4 Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR Processor Type Program Type Toll Restriction and LCR Initialized Default A I LEDs Off DK424 all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 1 and higher 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below Button LED X LED On LED Off 20 3 Not used Not used Sends the digits from Program 45 3 before Sends the Programs 55 1 Modified Digits Table 02 the Programs 55 1 Modified Digits Table MDT digits before the digits from Program 45 MDT digits 3 01 Inserts a pause into the dialing sequen
302. annel Group 3 is set for three time zones Time zone 1 starts at 00 60 hours and ends at 12 00 hours Time zone 2 starts at 12 00 hours and ends at 18 00 hours Time zone 3 starts at 18 00 hours and ends at 00 60 hours 00 00 06 00 12 00 18 00 23 59 Channel Group 1 Time Zone 1 Channel Group 2 Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Jo_ _eiim gt _A E Channel Group 3 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 1 i Time Zone2 Time Zone 3 4916 Figure 7 3 Time Zones An example of an application for time zones would be a cable TV provider During the day they would have more outbound trunk lines set up for telemarketing In the evening there would be more inbound traffic as people would be ordering subscriptions services Therefore some lines would be shared by more than one trunk group to ensure that all the traffic can be handled There would also be several lines reserved for DID calls Call by Call Programming There are three programs used to set up the Call by Call feature Program 67 5 Multiple Time Zone Settings This program maps the channel groups to the time zones Program 67 3 ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel Reservation This program sets the number of reserved channels for a given trunk group These channels will be reserved to a type of service such as 800 calls DID etc You can specify up to 47 B channels as a minimum if D channels are shared using Non Facility Associated Signaling Note Available shared channels is the
303. ans Program 45 2 Toll Restriction Disable DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Toll Restriction Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A LEDs Off for all CO lines all lines apply Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Program 45 2 Toll Restriction Disable Program 45 2 Overview This program enables you to program lines be exempt from any Toll Restrictions defined in this section Mark the exempt lines with an X on the record sheet Toll Restrictions disabled in this program override Station Toll Restrictions defined in Program 48 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 2 a Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 IE LEDs Buttons Specify CO lines by setting LED Buttons as defined by Press serol to advance Ob Pageto the table below All LEDs with an X should be lit when go back finished After programming press On Disable Toll Restriction VolA to turn all LEDs On Vol to turn all LEDs Off Processor CO Line Range Processor CO Line Range DK14 001 004 B1iCU 001 032 DK40i 001 012 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 B3CAU
304. arning Tone 02 Handsfree Disabled 01 3 83 System amp Station Program 31 Station Class of Service 3 84 Program 31 Overview Program 31 sets most voice mail or External Auto Attendant port assignments Each standard telephone port QSTU2 RSTU2 RSTU PSTU PESU RDSU KSTU2 QSTU2 connected to a Toshiba Stratagy Stratagy DK or VP voice mail system should have LEDs 04 15 16 17 18 19 and 20 and one of the following 05 06 07 or 08 turned On These LED s should be On for VM ports only not for telephone ports LED 09 should be Off for VM Auto Attendant blind transfer and VM tandem CO line connection with automatic release LED 09 should be On for VM Auto Attendant supervised transfer operation Example Programming Assignment to Set Up Voice Mail in a Distributed Hunt Group Program 32 008 VMG1 Message Center Program 13 010 VMG2 Message Center 008 Button 5 On 009 Button 5 On 010 Button 6 On 011 Button 6 On VMG1 RSTU VM Ports Program 31 VMG2 RSTU VM Ports 850 01 008 850 02 009 VMG1 DH Group Members Bis 851 01 010 851 02 O11 VMG1 DH Group Members RS232C SMDI N A on DK14 Phones using 200 008 DHG1 VMG1 ee voice mail 009 ACUN machine 1 lt 2 Phones using Ta voice mail s pi Voice Mail i 203 machine 2 V Machine 2 Standard Telephone Voice Mail Ports 1565 All ports as
305. ase 4 3 System Initialized Default Data Blank HK 1 2 3 Spkr 1 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Station Port Number L 911 Station CAMA Trunk Group Number see legend 01 08 Port Number Station Group Port Group Number Location Information Digits Group Number Location Information Digits Port Group Number Location Information Digits Program 13 Overview This program assign stations to different CAMA trunks groups if more than one CAMA trunk is installed This can be used to divide services for multi users Tenants or distribute traffic during an emergency If only one CAMA trunk is installed all stations must be assigned to the CAMA trunk group in which the CAMA trunk is assigned in Program 11 1 If a station dials 911 and the trunk group to which it is assigned is busy the call will hunt to the next trunk group s per Program 11 2 E911 Program 13 Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment L164 8 13 E911 Program 13 Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment 8 14 Strata DK Programming 5 00 Glossary Term AA ACD ACD MIS ADM Amphenol Connector ANI BCU B2CAU BU B2CAU BU B5CAU BU B channel B8ZS B
306. at follow the BRI PCBs ZENO EU T gt JBRLU interface Bs a BAO esac CCA RBSU RBSS 78 4 BRI S T e Consult i configuration section to check that the iis configured properly RBUU RBUS 76 2 BRI U ckts 83 12 PRI Lines R4 3 e RPTU and RDTU can be installed in slot 15 or 17 only If one of RPTU s these PCBs is installed in slot 17 then slot 18 must be left 84 8 PRI Lines R4 3 vacant If an RPTU or RDTU is installed in slot 15 then slots TSIU No Code Required 16 17 and 18 can be used for other PCBs None 00 None e RWIU must be installed in slot 15 to provide 16 handsets or slot 17 to provided eight handsets System amp Station Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments Program 03 for DK40i Overview Program 03 tells the system what type of optional PCBs are installed in the Expansion KSU You must run Program 03 after installing PCBs with options such as OCA DIU etc Also run Program 03 for each PCB slot when installing a PCB in that location It is not necessary to run Program 03 for slots 00 14 The DK40i automatically assigns the Base KSU PCBs if they are installed when system power is turned On However if DSS is required on the Base KSU s DKT circuit 8 you must run Program 03 to assign code 64 to slot 11 If universal PCBs are installed Program 91 1 and 91 9 automatically assign the appropriate PCB codes to the installed slots But Programs 91 1 or 91 9 do not assign option codes such as OCA
307. ation is in a location where a user places a long distance call to a destination outside the area code without dialing 1 before dialing the area code The user places a long distance call to a destination in the same area code by dialing 1 directly before the office code The first three digits of a ten digit number is an area code if the middle digit is 0 or 1 Pressing the first three digits immediately after a 1 in an eight digit string is an office code A seven digit string starting with an office code is a local call Plan 2 is 14 AC NXX 1 NNX Use this plan where a user places a long distance call to a destination outside the area code by dialing a 1 before dialing the area code The user places a long distance call to a destination in the same area code by dialing a 1 directly before the office code When using this plan the system recognizes the following The first three digits following a 1 in an 11 digit number are an area code if the middle digit is O or 1 The first three digits dialed immediately after a 1 in an eight digit string is an office code Plan 3 Plans 4 6 Toll Restriction Program 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plan Plan 3 is 1 AC NXX NXX Use this plan where a user places a long distance call to a destination outside the area code by dialing a 1 before dialing the area code The user places a long distance call to a destination in the same area code by simply dialing the number without a 1 in
308. ation is sent from the caller The Strata DK handles the number the same way that ANI information from T1 trunks is handled For instance the number can display on the called telephone s LCD or it can be used by TAPI interfaces or it can be recorded in SMDR data records The PSTN may send one or two Caller ID messages for incoming calls One message is the Caller ID supplied by the network which is generally the billing number while the second is the user generated number The Strata DK will use the user supplied number if required Note Individual callers can choose to block this information regardless of this setting 7 41 NASI ISDN Program 68 2 Outbound CNIS Parameters Program 68 2 Outbound CNIS Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 6 8 Hold Spkr 2 Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 2 _ CPN Enter the Calling Party Number CPN 10 or 11 digits Enter the Trunk Group 01 16 Trunk Groups Calling Party Number Program 68 2 Overview This program defines the default Calling Party Number CPN for the ISDN trunk group used for placing a call The PSTN uses this Calling Party Number for the user provider Caller ID and optionally may use it for billing the call Th
309. ault LED 01 02 04 05 16 are On all other LEDs Off 1 2 3 Spkr 3 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Hold Spkr SELECT Station Logical Port Number Te LED Select LEDs to light for the port specified in the last step Mark an X in the Enter the port number s being defined To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port table below for all LEDs which should be On Processor Type Port Range geste eile a Processor Type Port Range gig eee casas DK14 000 009 8 B1CU 000 055 32 DK40i 000 027 16 B2CAU BU 000 111 96 RCTUA 000 031 16 B3CAU BU 000 191 96 RCTUBA BB 000 079 32 B5CAU BU 000 335 96 RCTUC D 000 239 96 RCTUE F 000 335 96 Port Feature LED Busy Station Transfer 20 Busy Station Ringing 19 Automatic Hold 18 DKT 2000 Telephone 17 Continuous DTMF Tones Off No CF NA Handsfree or OCA 16 ISDN Immediate Dialing 15 Toll Restriction After Answer 14 Toll Restriction After Answer 13 Not used 12 09 ISDN Cause Code Display 08 Not used 07 Disable Hold Display Scrolling Release 3 2 and 06 higher LCD Personal Message 05 10 19 Allowed Message Waiting RCV 04 Message Waiting Lamp 03 Standard Telephones LCD Type 32 On 12 Off 02 LCD Display 01
310. be assigned to any analog B2CAU BU 000 120 ground or loop start CO line circuit Circuit numbers B3CAU BU 000 120 do not have to match B5CAU BU 000 200 RCIU RCIS Circuit n RCIU RCIS Circuit RCIU RCIS Circuit ee AMEN Tele oo Number Assigned 39 Hino Amiss Number Assigned BE A SED Number Assigned uolje1S 3 We sis Note The Tip Ring leads of RGLU RCOU RCOS and PCOU Caller ID CO lines assigned to RCIU2 RCIS circuits must be bridged at the MDF The Tip Ring leads of TCOU and TCIU2 are bridged by the PCB connectors in the DK40i Base KSU For more information on RCIU RCIS assignments and installation refer to Chapter 7 Universal Slot PCB Installation and Chapter 8 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Diagrams in the Strata DK I amp M Manual On DK14 the Tip Ring leads of the CO line circuit must be connected to the line Tip Ring leads of the Caller ID interface box See Chapter 1 DK14 Installation Figure 1 18 and the Caller ID text under WSIU1 Serial Interface Board in the Strata DK I amp M Manual 3 131 System amp Station Program 50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs Program 50 Overview In DK40i and DK424 each analog ground loop start CO line that receives Caller ID information from the local Central Office must be assigned to an RCIU or RCIS circuit using this program In DK14 each CO line that receives Caller ID must be assigned an MLX 41 inte
311. box checked do not represent memory All office codes in memory are allowed International calls may be allowed denied by entering 011 as the area code See Program 47 for International Call Restriction by Country Codes 4 32 Toll Restriction Program 46 6 8 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class Program 46 6 8 Overview This program defines the office codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction Class within the home area code Office code tables for each class can each describe office codes allowed or denied for the class The tables in memory operate as allow tables If an office code exists in a table displays with 8 then it is allowed Anything not displaying is not allowed Initialized data allows all office codes in the home area code for each class For each class choose whether the record table is used to record allowed office codes in memory allowed or denied office codes not in memory denied Enter the office codes that define the set UO NILIS9Y IIOL 4 33 Toll Restriction Programs 46 10 80 Toll Restriction Class Parameters Programs 46 10 80 Toll Restriction Class Parameters Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A I LEDs Off DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Toll Restriction 1 2 3 Spkr 4 6 Hold Spkr 0 Hold Spkr Hold
312. c Set Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial 64 LED 04 On if the Strata DK system is connected to a voice mail VM system that sets station Message Waiting MW LEDs by RS 232 or by dialing 63 Station number PDN or PhDN or RS 232 signal This ensures the message LED remains flashing and are not cancelled by the DK system until the VM machine cancels the Message LED by sending an RS 232 signal or pressing 64 Station Intercom number PDN or PhDN Also when using RS 232 Voice Mail Integration SMDI LED 16 must be set to On in Program 31 for PGM 10 2 to function Set to Automatic LED 04 Off to cancel the flashing message waiting LED any time a station calls the VM machine and the VM machine answers LED 03 Ringing Modes The Strata DK system can be set for either two ringing mode or three ringing mode operation The Day and Night modes are available with the two mode operation and the Day Day2 and Nights modes are available with the three mode operation Each ringing mode has distinct CO line ring assignments Programs 71 1 3 78 81 89 and 81 84 87 The three mode selection is useful for alternate answering positions Station users can change modes with the Night Transfer button on either a DSS console Program 29 a telephone Program 39 and or Attendant Consoles Program 59 3 33 System amp Station Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 of 3 3 34 This feature applies to loop and ground
313. caecnaecnseenseeeaes 7 9 Call By Call Overview sci fusiintiscese dep ietees biewie conte eee a eia Ee E E A E T ET e e 7 10 PU Example eenia eee ae eia e aeoaea eaa e E ea aeaaee aa iaa aalen eree a 7 10 Call by Gall Line Sharing oirnn acini uid ga Va eet aie aan 7 11 Call by Call Min Max Control cccecccccscceesseceseceeaceceneececeessaeseaaecseaceseaeeceacessaeeeeaaeceaaeceeaeeeneees 7 12 Contents E911 Tim ZOnes ci sists eevee essed e e TEE eel E E E ER E ee tetas 7 13 Call by Call Programming cocer ita e aE eE EEE E a a aa ere 7 13 Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups 0 eeeescessecseceseceeeceseeeseecsaeeseceseceseecaeecaaeaeceseeeeesaeeeaaesaeen 7 14 Program 16 ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignment c cccsceesseceseceeceeeneceeaeceeaeceeaeeceaeeeneeesas 7 15 Program 42 Clock SOUC naoinear sos dade cob i a eaa e ea eai o dues R aa iia 7 16 Program 43 1 3 D Channel Control and NFAS Assignment cescesceseceseceeeceseeeneeeneeeneees 7 17 Program 43 2 Non Facility Associated Signaling NFAS Assignment 00 0 0 ceeeeseeseereceeee 7 18 Guide to Programming NFAS with Release 4 15 software ceeeeessecsseceseceneceseceaeesseeeeeeneens 7 18 Program 43 3 Network PRI Interface Assignment 00 ee cscececceseceseceseeeseeceeeseceseeeseeeaeeenaeeneens 7 19 Program 43 4 PRI Explicit Implicit Coding Assignment 0 0 0 0 cee eeeeseeseeereeeseceeeceeeeeneeeneeeneees 7 19 Program 44
314. cal Call Plan Number 6unnoy 3so45 sea 5 7 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 50 5 LCR Local Call Plan Number Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default See the legend below k 1 2 3 Spkr 5 0 Hold Spkr 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 5 DATA Local Call Plan see Legend below Local Call Plan Local Call Plan Local Call Plan Local Call Plan Feceesar Number Default SIS CEE Number Default DK14 01 08 08 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 08 DK40i 01 08 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 01 16 16 RCTUA 01 08 08 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 01 16 16 Program 50 5 Overview The Local Call Plan handles special codes and operator calls Of the 16 Route Plans available for LCR call processing define one as the Local Call Plan typically Route Plan 1 Enter the number of the plan over which local calls operator assisted 0 calls and special code calls will be routed 5 8 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 50 6 LCR Dial 0 Zero Time out Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default Assigns an LCR Dial Zero Time out value of 06 e 1 2 43 Spkr 5 0 Hold Spkr 6 Hold
315. call forward set the call will camp on for 16 seconds and then route per the Auto Attendant flow diagram the call will not forward a second time to another destination uole S 9 We sis 3 67 System amp Station Program 27 DKT Handset Headset Receiver Volume Level Program 27 DKT Handset Headset Receiver Volume Level Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Initialized Default VR 2 1 2 3 Spkr 2 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Digital Telephone Logical Port Number VR Enter volume level 1 4 Default volume level is 2 Total DKT Volume Range VR Lowest 0 1 2 3 4 5 67 8 Highest Volume Volume Set VR 1 4 for initial off hook handset receiver volume level VR resets to programmed level 1 4 after each call on hook off hook Each level is equivalent to a 2dB change Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port VR Level Port VR Level Port VR Level Port VR Level
316. calls are restricted for the class being defined To allow 0 dialing LED 01 must be Off Allowing 0 dialing allows operator assisted toll calls If a station is allowed 0 Credit Card calling in Program 43 LED 01 must be Off Program 43 will restrict operator assisted calls 4 34 Toll Restriction Programs 46 10 80 Toll Restriction Class Parameters LED 02 01 Restricted Mark an X next to LED 02 if overseas operator or unassisted overseas operator calls are restricted for the class being defined If a station is allowed 0 Credit Card calling in Program 43 LED 02 must be Off Program 43 will restrict 01 operator assisted calls LED 03 1 AC 555 and AC 555 Allowed Mark an X next to LED 03 to allow the particular class to call all restricted area codes plus the office code of 555 including out of area directory assistance calls Turning the LED off does not necessarily deny information calls This may also be accomplished in the office code table and or the area office code exception tables LED 04 Restrict Numbers Containing or Within the First Four Digits Numbers set in Program 45 2X override the restriction function of Program 46 10 80 Button LED 04 LED 04 applies only to the first four digits of a dialed number when no digit restriction Code 0 is set for the station Toll Restriction class in Program 48 Turn LED 04 On only if Strata DK CO lines are connected to a Central Office that absorbs and digits The
317. calls on the PRI Span as DID or DNIS Calls 64 2 X X tells the system the number of digits to look for on a DID or DNIS call This tells the system that there are 23 bearer channels on the first Channel aor GO LED 001 023 0n Group and that they will appear on CO lines 001 023 This tells the system that Trunk Group 01 is assigned to PRI Channel 66 1 01 1 Group 1 7 6 ISDN Guidelines for Programming ISDN Calling Features Table 7 2 ISDN PRI DID Type Call Programming continued Program ae Number Program Data Description 01 LEDs 01 02 11 12 This tells the system that Operator calls Carrier Access 1 10 Digit Dialing On and Ring Back Tone to the outside caller are allowed 01 LED 13 On This tells the system when interfaced with DMS XXX to send the Progress 66 3 Descriptor 81 or 83 LED 14 On When connecting to a DMS XXX with NI1 protocol LED 15 On Set up message for outgoing call When connecting to a DMS XXX LED 11 must be Off in Program 66 3 when this LED is On 66 5 101 XXXX This assigns the LDN DID DNIS number the asterisk can be used as a wildcard 66 6 101 LEDs 01 23 On This assigns the CO lines to the index 67 1 013 This tells the system that the PRI Span is for both way calling z This tells the system to accept Speech 3 1K Analog 56K and 64K type 67 2 01 LED s 01 04On calls on the ISDN PRI Span 68 1 01 LED s 01 03 On a the system to accept and
318. ce Does ne insertapa se intoithe dialing sequence Program 45 4 Overview When LCR is used to make calls this program determines if the codes set in Program 45 3 are sent before or after the digits that are set in the modified digits table MDT See Programs 55 1 and 55 0 Program 45 4 only works when the code of Program 45 3x is dialed The length of the pause inserted is determined by the timer setup in Program 12 3 unit pause length of 1 5 or 3 seconds This program has no effect on outgoing calls without Program 45 3 codes The digit deletion function of the modified digits table Program 55 0 applies to the digits that immediately follow the Front Modified Digits Table F MDT LED 01 Pause following Program 45 3 code If LED 01 is On a pause is inserted after the digits from Program 45 3 are sent if LED 01 is Off a pause is not inserted LED 02 Order of LCR bypass code and MDT If LED 02 is On the code from Program 45 3 is inserted before the Front Modified Digits Table F MDT digits if LED 02 is Off code from Program 45 3 is inserted after the F MDT digits See example on Page 29 If LED 02 is On digits are not deleted from the Program 45 3 code per Program 55 0 if LED 02 is Off digits are deleted from the Program 45 3 code per Program 55 0 LCR Example Toll Restriction Program 45 4 Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR The table below shows the actual dial output digits at the ti
319. ced with one or two telephones digital electronic or standard Conference see LED 19 in this program to enable this feature Also Two line Conference must be allowed for DISA CF EXT and DNIS external routing use of outgoing lines CO lines must be enabled for tandem connection with Program 15 Code 5 LED 19 Conference Gives stations the ability to enable LED 19 On or disable LED 19 Off any Conference LED 18 Ring Detect Time Sets normal ring detect time LED 18 On Only use the normal setting except unless connected to CO Centrex lines that send ring signals less than 120 milliseconds LED 17 Station to Station Call Volume PAD On reduces station to station talk path volume 8 dB LED 17 should be Off in all cases except where extreme quiet room noise is expected LED 16 BRI Standard or Non initializing Terminal Determines the initialization process for BRI lines connected to the ISDN network A normal sequence is followed if this is turned On If it is Off no initialization sequence is needed LED 12 Automatic Busy Redial ABR Cycles If activated from an electronic or digital telephone ABR retries dialing a telephone number on a line if a far end busy signal is detected Turn LED 12 On to have the system try up to 10 times turn Off for up to 15 attempts This feature is not available with standard telephones and or Tie or DID lines LED 11 ABR Redial Time Upon detecting a far end busy signal on a line ABR will retr
320. ceive another ACD call End Of ACD Shift 443 Enables the Supervisor to stop new calls from entering the ACD Group queue or from ringing Agents The End of ACD Shift mode routes new calls to the After Shift destination set in Program 14 6 A Supervisor must be logged in to use this button Transfer to ACD Group Conf Trn 406XX Program this Speed Dial sequence on telephones that must transfer calls to ACD Groups This enables one touch transfer of CO lines ground loop start or DID Tie to ACD Group XX XX ACD Group 01 16 Transfer to an ACD Group is always blind and immediate and does not recall the transferring station If the ACD Group shift is ended or all Agents are unavailable the transferred call is routed per the called Group s After Shift or All Agents Unavailable destination Monitor ACD Call 447 Used by Supervisor to monitor Agent calls Supervisor telephone only Enables the Supervisor to listen to any Agent s ACD calls not non ACD or PBX calls by pressing the Monitor ACD Call button and then entering the Agent s ID code During Agent monitoring a one way talk path enables the Supervisor to listen to the Agent outside party conversation without the Agent caller hearing the Supervisor An optional Call Monitor tone dial tone burst can be sent to the Agent caller every 15 seconds see Program 10 4 LED 03 while the Supervisor is monitoring the ACD call The Agent LCD dis
321. certain the maximum REN for your calling area 4 Network connection information USOC jack required RJICX RJ2EX RJ2GX RJ48C RJ48X RJ11 RJ14C RJ21X see Network Requirements in this document Items 2 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label Radio Frequency Interference Warning This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer s instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory LISTED UL Requirement If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is subject to lightning or other electrical surges then secondary protection is required Secondary protection is also required on DID OPS and Tie lines Additional information is provided in this manual 4917 Important Notice Music On Hold Esse In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Compos
322. characters each and display when the line is being used by an LCD station When programmed to display Caller ID DNIS ANI and ACD call information will display in place of CO line Alpha identification data gt To enter CO line identification 1 Enter Program 93 and select the desired CO line 2 Using the guide below enter the CO line identification information Numeric Mode 0 9 are treated as numerals Dial pad starts in numeric mode Press to switch to alpha mode Alpha Mode Moves cursor to T right and starts special character entry when in the Alpha Mode Left Moves cursor to left Changes from Numeric to Alpha Mode and vice versa Scrolls alpha and special characters Alpha Entry Example Special Character Entry A m 2 Q 10 B 2 O Z 100 c m200 m 1000 Alpha Entry m1 000 o o Character Sequence 100000 o 1 00000 Special Entry Character Sequence 3 189 System amp Station Program 97 Printing Program Data through SMDR Program 97 Printing Program Data through SMDR Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Prints out customer database 1 2 3 Spkr 9 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELEC
323. code will be checked e If A C O C or SPCC code begins with 0 1 or 00 that call will print out e When accessing LCR feature all digits sent to CO will be output System amp Station Program 60 8 Call Forward External Remote Change Security ID Code Program 60 8 Call Forward External Remote Change Security ID Code Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default No digits ee More Codes Ss 1 2 3 Spkr 6 0 Hold Spkr 8 eee Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEIEET E L DATA ID code 1 15 digits When entering less than 15 digits enter digits Telephone port number to then press Hold which the CF Ext ID security LED Button 01 blanks erases data code will be assigned LED Button 02 a wild card can be any digit from 1 9 Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Telephone Port CF EKT ID Code Telephone Port CF EKT ID Code Telephone Port CF EKT ID Code Number 1 15 digits Number 1 15 digits Number 1 15 digits uolje S 9 We sis
324. collect digits from station users making a ISDN PRI call before sending it to the network 64 4 1 LED 01 On This tells the system to except the incoming calls on the PRI Span as DID or DNIS calls 64 2 X X tells the system the number of digits to look for on a DID or DNIS call This tells the system that there are 23 bearer channels on the first Channel eases CO Een neon Group and that they will appear on CO lines 001 023 This tells the system that Trunk Group 01 is assigned to PRI Channel Group 66 1 101 1 1 01 LEDs 01 02 11 12 This tells the system that Operator calls Carrier Access 1 10 Digit Dialing On and Ring Back Tone to the outside caller are allowed 01 LED 13 On This tells the system when interfaced with DMS XXX to send the Progress 66 3 Descriptor 81 or 83 LED 14 On When connecting to a DMS XXX with NI1 protocol LED 15 On Set up message for outgoing call When connecting to a DMS XXX LED 11 must be Off in Program 66 3 when this LED is On 66 5 101 XXXX This assigns the LDN DID DNIS number the Q asterisk can be used as a wildcard 66 6 101 LEDs 01 23 On_ This assigns the CO lines to the index 67 1 01 3 This tells the system that the PRI Span is for both way calling 67 2 01 LEDs 01 04 On This tells the system to accept Speech 3 1K Analog 56K and 64K type calls on the ISDN PRI Span 68 1 101 LEDs 01 03 On HE tells the system to accept and send Calling Party Number on ISDN PRI 68 2 01 XXX XXX XXXX XXX XXX XXX
325. commends keeping LED 13 Off until some time in the future when the public network is updated to send a progress indicator with all calls LED 14 ISDN Start Button Access Code Release 4 15 When LED 14 is On the ISDN Start button access code is automatically sent when the Speed Dial or SD button is pressed The default is On If LED 14 is Off the number entry timer expires LED 15 Single Line Telephone Off Hook Retrieval of Held Calls Release 4 15 If the SDN is on exclusive hold then the Single Line Telephone SLT cannot retrieve the call when it goes off hook If LED 15 is Off the SLT cannot retrieve a call from hold on an SDN on a DKT by going off hook If LED 15 is On the SLT can retrieve a call on hold when if goes off hook if a DKT has an SDN of the SLT on it and it is on hold If an SLT places a call on hold by entering 41 then the SLT cannot retrieve the call from hold when it goes Off Hook 42 must be entered from the SLT LED 16 Not Used Release 4 3 Only LEDs 17 18 19 Buffer assignments for LCR TR over Tie Line Tandem connections R4 3 This feature applies to analog and T1 Tie lines but not ISDN PRI BRI Tie lines Toll Restriction TR and Least Cost Routing LCR on tandem calls When a DK system receives an incoming call on a analog Tie line and the originator on the far end system dials the access code of an outgoing CO line TR and LCR will be applied to the outgoing tandem call TR and LCR wil
326. connect RBDB to cabinet RPSU280 power supplies ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI Unit Provides two circuits each of which provide two simultaneous voice and or data connections with a single interface BRI uses the 2B D transmission format which is defined as two 64 kbps bearer channels and one 16 kbps data control channel Available for DK424 with Release 4 1 ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI Subassembly Attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI U circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and or station side connections only Available for DK424 with Release 4 1 Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to RBDB battery distribution box 3 or more cabinet installations ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI Unit Provides two BRI U circuits Each circuit provides two simultaneous voice and or data connections with a single interface BRI uses the 2B D transmission format which is defined as two 64 kbps bearer channels and one 16 kbps data control channel Available for DK424 with Release 4 2 ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI Subassembly Attaches to the RBUU to provide two additional BRI U circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and or station side connections only An RBUU with the RBUS subassembly provides four BRI U circuits in one card slot Available for DK424 with Release 4 2 Enhanced 911 E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Subassembly Enables the DK424 Release 4
327. connected to the music source assigned in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the time duration set in Program 11 52 Has the Program 11 52 music timer expired Caller continues to hear music source Caller is connected to 3rd announcement port This port is assigned in Program 14 33 After the 3rd announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source In Program 14 35 set the assigned in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the duration set in repeat announcement Program 11 53 data to 3 3rd only Has the Program 11 53 music timer expired Caller continues to hear music source Should the caller continue to receive the 1st 2nd and 3rd announcements or 2nd and 3rd J announcements or only the 3rd In Program 14 5 set the overflow point announcement when the music data to 3 and set the desired overflow timer in Program 11 53 destination Should gran f the call expires overflow after the Program 11 53 music timer expires The call will attempt to overflow per ACD Flowchart 6 4 at this point in queue 1st 2nd and 3rd Overflow In Program 14 5 set point 3 overflow point data to 0 0882 the queue timer in Program 11 1 the call reaches the overflow e the disconnect timer in Program 2nd and 3rd ISDN F This chapter provides you with an overview
328. cseaeceeaeeseeeeesas 3 182 Programs 81 84 and 87 Ground Loop Start CO Line to DN LED Flash Assignments 3 184 Program 93 CO Line Identification ee eee eseceseceseceseeeeeeeseesseessecaeceeesceescaeesaecsaecsseeeeeesneesaes 3 188 Program 97 Printing Program Data through SMDR 1 00 0 eeceseceeeceseceseeeacecseecnaeceeceseeeeeeeeneeaaes 3 190 Chapter 4 Toll Restriction Toll Restrictions Methods srein atte Fel en faa v eae aa aa a a era e a a i et 4 1 Simple TollREStricttOn ss eaea na ERE EE E E eda Be iaa 4 1 Three digit Tolls Restriction y c 2 20ei 2 cecss cs cys ctdeeee adele nce Peake a a a de teceatantats 4 1 SiUX d1 Git Toll Restricciones ii O EE de tubes AE E EE E E EE EE ous 4 1 Toll Restriction Feat rte Scerni na a aaen edna aaee e a o aa a aa aa 4 1 Station Priority Classes I 8 nririeosee isale lera E EE EEN A eaten ates 4 2 Office Code Exception Tables sanen E E AEE E REEE AEA Eaa 4 2 Contents Least Cost Routing Emergency Information and Toll free Long Distance Toll Restriction Override cee 4 2 Toll Restriction Override by System Speed Dial 0 ieee eeeeceeeceseeeeeceecnseeeeeeeeeseeeeesenaeenaees 4 2 Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override Codes 00 0 eeeescsseeseceseeeeeeeeeeaeeceeceseeeseeeseeesaeenaeenaees 4 2 Special Common Carrier Authorization cee esessecssecsseceseeseeeseeeeseeeseesaeceaecsseeeseeeseeeaeeeaeeeaaeeaeens 4 2 Completing the Toll Restriction System
329. ction go back to Step 5 or exit Program 30 continue with Step 9 9 Hold 30 Select Secure Program 30 data in system memory Data Programmed 10 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 30 Enter another program number or exit programming mode go to Step 11 Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 33 11 Hold No N N Exit programming mode Jan 20 Sun 06 58 1 N N Programming telephone PDN uO e 1S 9 Wa ShsS 3 81 System amp Station Program 30 Telephone Group Page Assignments 3 82 Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A LEDs Off Program 30 Telephone Group Page Assignments DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station 1 2 Spkr 3 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Hold Spkr Enter the station logical port which will be assigned to page a group or groups To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Press LED Buttons 01 08 to light LEDs for the port specified in the last step In the table below X all LED Buttons which should be lit Processor Type Port Range Number of Page Groups Processor Type Port Range Number of Page Groups DK14 000 009 4 B1CU 000 055 4 DK40i 000
330. ctive Program 17 LED 06 07 08 must be Off and LED 05 must be On for normal Tie DID lines The last address in Program 71 0 is used to assign ANI only lines to a routing destination see Table 3 9 Address Processor 499 RCTUC3 D3 RCTUE3 F3 B2CAU BU B3CAU BU B5CAU BU 349 RCTUBA3 B3 B1CAU 199 RCTUA3 or DK40i Table 3 9 DNIS Addresses All ANI only lines must be assigned to the same routing destination this destination can be unique in each of the ringing modes Day Day2 Night To assign an ANI only Tie DID line to Program 71 1 assignments Program 17 LED 05 must be turned Off and LED 07 and 08 must be On for lines that receive ANI digits only Program 71 4 Overview This feature is available when using DTMF In band VM integration only it is not provided with SMDI VM integration This Program assigns a Voice Mailbox ID VMID number to each DNIS Tie DID extension number and or ANI only lines This allows each DNIS Tie DID extension number and or ANI only lines to be routed to a unique Voice Mail box when the number directly rings or is Call Forwarded to the Voice Mail system When a DNIS Tie DID extension number or ANI line rings a station that has call forwarding set to Voice Mail the DNIS Tie DID extension or ANI VMID is sent to the VM machine if programmed in Program 71 4 If a DNIS Tie DID extension or ANI VMID is not programmed the Call Forwarding station s VMID is sent to the voice mail machine 3 155 S
331. d Hold Hold Spkr 1 1 Spkr 1 Spkr Spkr T C Line circuit number of CAMA trunk Turn On LED of line that corresponds to the CAMA trunk position in the system CAMA Trunk Group 01 08 RCTUC D 001 144 RCTUE F 001 200 Processor Type CO Line Range Processor Type CO Line Range DK14 001 004 B1CU 001 032 DK40i 001 012 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 B3CAU BU 001 120 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B5CAU BU 001 200 CAMA Trunk Group 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 CO Line Numbers of CAMA Trunks Program 11 1 Overview This program assigns lines to CAMA trunk groups Each RCMU RMCS line used must be assigned to one of the eight CAMA trunk groups using Program 11 1 The RCMU RMCS system line number not the CAMA trunk number 1 4 is entered into the appropriate CAMA trunk group in this program If CAMA trunks are not assigned in this program the E911 CAMA feature will not operate When the RCMU RMCS PCBs are installed they assume the next four consecutive system CO line numbers For example if a normal ground start line PCB RGLU is installed in slot 12 its system line numbers are 01 04 And if the RCMU RMCS is installed in slot 13 its line numbers are 05 08 This program also allows any type ground loop Tie DI
332. d SEL Trunk Group Number TYPE 1 3 see below 1 non ISDN Trunk Group default 2 PRI Trunk Group 3 BRI Trunk Group Trunk Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Value Trunk Group Type 1 Non ISDN 2 Primary Rate Interface PRI Basic Rate Interface BRI Program 16 Overview This program must be entered prior to Program 16 Each trunk group in the system must be defined whether it is used for non ISDN trunks PRI trunks or BRI trunks Do not make changes in Program 16 for PRI trunk groups This may cause unexpected operations NASI 7 15 ISDN Program 42 Clock Source 7 16 Program 42 Clock Source Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs For Release 3 1 and earlier programming see below Program Type System T1 PRI BRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 4 2 Hold Spkr _ Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 or 2 Circuit Number 1 Primary Source 2 Secondary Source PRIMARY SECONDARY Slot Number of Primary or Secondary PRI Clock Source Release 4 0 entry Not used for release 3 1 Clock Source Slot Number Circuit No Primary Secondary Program 42 Series Overview This program assigns the T1 PRI or BRI interface RPTU PCB as a Primary or
333. d Initialized data assigns a six digit length for all Account Codes See Program 60 1 and Program 69 for Verified Account Codes Item 5 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Printout Options This option selectively deletes local call data and allows long distance toll call data only to be sent out the SMDR port The type of long distance toll call data that prints out is selected by long distance prefix codes 0 1 00 or 1 or 0 Item 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Security Code The optional security code 1 15 digits is required for incoming DISA calls to access outgoing CO lines If the DISA security code is not set in programming DISA users can access outgoing lines without dialing a security code This code is not required for DISA internal calls to stations The DISA security code can also be changed from stations enabled in Program 30 If the DK280 built in Auto Attendant is installed make sure to program a DISA security code to prevent Auto Attendant callers from making unauthorized external DISA calls by using the DISA access feature Dial Item 7 Credit Card Call Digit Length Station users bypassing Toll Restriction with the 0 Credit Card Calling feature Program 43 must dial a predetermined number of digits including the 0 This predetermined number is established with Item 7 and can be 1 30 digits Set 11 digits in this program when using LCR Notes e If PBX code is dialed numbers dialed after the
334. d continuous music Continue Should the caller receive the 1st announcement again when the music time in Program 11 51 expires Yes continue to repeat announcement music an agent goes idle the call overflows when the overflow timer in Program 11 1 expires the caller hangs up the disconnect timer in Program 11 9 expires 0881 6 47 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones 6 48 Flowchart 6 9 ACD Queue Pattern Configuration Two Announcements Overflow after second announcement music Or Repeat announcement music Start call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6 1 Notes The call will attempt to exit queue when an Agent telephone goes idle the queue timer in Program 11 1 expires the call reaches the overflow point the caller hangs up the disconnect timer in Program 11 9 expires In Program 14 32 set the announcement port data to blanks using KO1 on the programming telephone Caller continues to hear music source In Program 14 5 set the overflow point data to 3 and set the desired overflow destination The call will attempt to overflow per ACD Flowchart 6 4 at this point Caller is connected to first announcement port This port is assigned in Program 14 3 After the first announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source assigne
335. d After Call Work Time button by making another call or by going off and on hook After Call Work Time is not activated after the completion of PBX calls made from or received on the Agent telephone s ACD Call button or PhDN Code 4 Ring Back Tone RBT Timer Defines the time that a new incoming ACD call receives ring back tone if no Agents are idle and the caller must wait for the ACD queue announcement ranges from 000 120 seconds Flowchart 6 1 on Page 6 40 This timer only applies to CO lines that are routed directly to the ACD Group all types of CO lines If a CO line is transferred to an ACD Group by a station or DK AA and no Agents are idle this timer does not apply Calls immediately enter the ACD Group s queue If a caller hangs up while connected to the RBT timer the call is considered unanswered and the Strata DK system does not send answer supervision 800 type calls are not billed in this case If the outside caller hangs up while the incoming call is connected to the RBT timer the call is abandoned and is not considered as an answered call No answer supervision is sent from the Strata DK System and 800 type calls will not be billed Calls abandoned after the call is sent to the first announcement will be considered as answered and billed Automatic Call Distribution Program 11 ACD Timing Assignments Code 5 Music Timers 1 2 and 3 Defines the time interval that ACD callers in queue are sent music
336. d data assigns 0000 to all times Start time for schedule 2 is the stop time for schedule 1 Start time for schedule 3 is the stop time for schedule 2 Start time for schedule 1 is the stop time for schedule 3 6unnoy 3so45 sea 5 15 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code 5 16 HMIS Example Enter LCR schedule assignments for LCR plan 01 02 and 08 16 Stations in groups 1 2 and 3 are controlled by HMIS The following table gives you an example of how you might set up Program 53 for the HMIS Program 56 Programioz Program 56 Program 54 LCR S LCR Station Route Definition LCR gii LCR Station Route Definition Plan ma Group see legend above Plan A Group see legend above 01 16 see legend 4st 2nd 3rd Ath 01 16 see legend 4st 2nd Ath above Pick Pick Pick Pick above Pick Pick Pick 01 1 1 1 q Guest Room with restricted calling 2 1 Home Guest Room local 800 888 911 Area 3 Code Guest Room complete restriction 911 only 4 1 Q __ Hotel Administration unrestricted 02 1 1 1 2 1 Local Call 3 1 Route 911 4 1 2 Long 3 Distance 4 1 Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 54 LCR Route Definition Tables Processor Type Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default 0701 DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and B
337. d in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the time duration set in Program 11 51 Has the Program fone No Caller continues to hear 11 51 music timer expired music source Yes Caller is connected to second announcement port This port is assigned in program 14 33 not Program 14 32 After the second announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source assigned in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the time duration set in Program 11 53 not Program 11 52 Has the No Program 11 53 music timer expired Yes Should Overflow the call Point 2 overflow after the Program 11 53 music timer expires In Program 14 5 set overflow point data to 0 Continue In Program 14 35 set the repeat announcement data to 3 Should the call continue to receive the first and second announcement or only the second when the music timer in Program 11 53 expires Repeat second announcement and music only an agent goes idle In Program 14 35 set the repeat announcement data to 1 Repeat first and second announcment and music until the call overflows when the overflow timer in Program 11 1 expires the caller hangs up the disconnect timer in program 11 9 expires ACD Queue Pattern Configuration Two Announcements continued Notes Two a
338. d with the Tie or DID numbers on telephone LCDs In this case the normal Tie digit assignments in Program 04 and or DID digit assignments in Program 09 will not be active Important e An individual telephone user can disable enable the DNIS name display by using the Mode 60 61 function on his her LCD telephone e The DNIS extension name can be assigned or not assigned to display as a priority over the ANI display in Program 17 LED 06 when both ANI and DNIS digits are received on the same call e Ifaname is not assigned to a DNIS number DN XXXX will display on telephone LCDs when the DNIS Tie DID line rings into the DK system where XXXX actual DNIS Tie DID digits received Program 71 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default PDNs are programmed to immediately ring their respective telephones in Program 71 no other default ringing assignments are made System amp Station Program 71 73 DN to DN Tie to DN and DID to DN Ringing Assignments e A 1 2 3 Spkr 7 Hold Spkr EK Button Hold Spkr Hold Press the button associated with the Enter 1 Immediate Ring 2 3 oul Delay 1 Ring 12 sec delay Delay 2 Ring 24 sec delay To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Processor PDN
339. de fF gt oe o Program 91 9 System Initialization Program 90 Initialize Programs 00 99 Program 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber Program 91 2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory Program 92 Initializing Misc Backup RAM Program 00 Part 1 Software Check Program 00 Part 2 RCTU RAM Test Examples are also given for these programs except Programs 91 2 and Program 00 Part 2 1S 1 9 UO eZI e11U 2 1 Initialization amp Test Program 91 9 System Initialization 2 2 Program 91 9 System Initialization Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Initialization Initialized Default See individual programs y Repeat a second time after LEDs 01 03 05 07 and 09 extinguish y 4 2 3 Spkr 9 1 Hold Spkr 9 OAA Hold Program Telephone Exits Program Mode Enter programming mode Press Buttons 01 03 05 07 and 09 Do not press DN button LEDs 01 03 05 07 and 09 must be On LCD Displays SYSTEM INITIALIZATION Program 91 9 Overview Note Always run Program 91 9 before entering the customer database when first installing a system or when its software must be set to the default configuration but not while system is in service CAUTION If you run Program 91 9 while the system is in service it will e
340. digital or electronic telephones to activate Call Forward on Voice Announce calls e OCA calls do not Call Forward No Answer in any case LED 15 ISDN Immediate Dlaling ISDN Immediate Dialing Without Subaddress enables the system to send out the SETUP message to an ISDN line without waiting for the user to press the Start button and without waiting for the time span between digits to time out If LED 15 is On ISDN Immediate Dialing is valid If LED 15 is Off the feature is Off default ISDN Immediate Dialing is available for PRI calls on POTS FX OUTWATS and BRI POTS calls It is unavailable for senderized and cut through calls on Tie lines since the Tie lines are provided for exclusive use Immediate Dialing is not applicable for INWATS lines since this service line is for incoming calls only Since the ISDN Immediate Dialing begins as soon as the dialed number is confirmed as valid per the NANP table below ISDN subaddress dialing will be unavailable since the user will not have the opportunity to enter a subaddress Table 3 2 ISDN Immediate Dialing for Call Types Call Type Program Number Dialed from Station ISDN Immediate Dialing Available National 1 AC OC XXXX Yes OAC 45 5 OAC OC XXXX Yes Local 50 5 OC XXXX Yes No because the number of digits varies International 01 XXX XX XX depending on country Carrier Operator 00 Yes Operator 50 6 0 No because it competes with credit calls Cred
341. digital or electronic telephone this assignment can disable it allowing silent room monitoring of the area surrounding the telephone This will also prevent ringing the digital or electronic telephone as a ring first situation Initialized data activates the warning tone for all ports LED 01 Handsfree Disabled It is possible to disable the internal call Handsfree Answerback function on any digital or electronic telephone This option ensures privacy no room monitoring when enabled on the called station but it prevents the called station from answering an internal call hands free The Microphn Cutoff button Program 39 can be used instead of this feature to allow the user to enable disable Handsfree Answerback as desired System amp Station Program 31 Group Pickup Assignments Program 31 Group Pickup Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default A LEDs Off 4 2 3 Spkr 3 1 Hold Spkr I Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Station Logical Port Number Light LED Buttons for the port specified in the last uolje1S 9 We sis Enter the station logical port which will be assigned to a pickup step In the table below mark an X for all LED group or groups To add a port range enter XX
342. dividual area codes may be 3 Delete from memory entered by separating them with the button 4 Display allowed codes in memory press to scroll Processor Toll Restriction Class Processor Toll Restriction Class DK14 1 4 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 DK40i 1 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1 8 RCTUA 1 4 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 1 8 Class Check one Allowed O Denied O DATA Area Codes Class Check one Allowed 1 Denied DATA Area Codes Tables with deny box checked do not represent memory All area codes in memory are allowed International calls may be allowed denied by entering 011 as the area code See Program 47 for International Call Restriction by Country Codes UONIHIS9Y IIOL Program 46 2 4 Overview Each class area code provides for a different combination of restrictions The tables in this program define the area codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction class The tables in memory operate as allow tables If an area code exists in a table displays with 4 then it is allowed Anything not displaying is not allowed Initialized data allows all area codes for each class all codes are in all tables All allowed area codes can be displayed 4 for each class For each class choose whether the record table is used to record allowed area codes in memory allowed or denied area codes not in memory denied
343. e 3 digit Office Code Display Office Codes in Exception Table 4 more 3 digit Office Code Processor Table Number LCR Plan SOE GING Processor Table Number LCR Plan BS EIU Codes Codes DK14 01 08 01 08 8 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 01 08 8 DK40i 01 08 01 08 8 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 01 16 01 16 16 RCTUA 01 08 01 08 8 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 01 16 01 16 16 Table Number Table Number Table Number Table Number Area Code Area Code Area Code Area Code LCR Plan LCR Plan LCR Plan LCR Plan Data Office Code s Data Office Code s Data Office Code s Data Office Code s Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 52 Overview This Office Code exception table enables the user the flexibility of routing specific office codes through a different call plan than other office codes used with that area code Example 1 Any number of exception code tables can be assigned to each route plan although each exception table can only be used once system wide Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of area codes and office code exceptions or a set of office code exceptions This program applies to both examples listed below In the first case an office code exception table does not ne
344. e Refers to two way standard CO trunk lines that are assigned to a particular extension or hunt group Direct Inward Dialing line Direct Inward System Access A feature that allows an outside party to access the Strata DK system internal stations or outgoing CO lines without having to go through an operator or automated attendant An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorized access to outgoing CO lines for through system calling Digital Key Toshiba s customer database programming and upload download software package for Strata DK systems Toshiba s customer database upload download software package for Strata DK systems Digital Telephone Term DKT2000 series DKSU14A DKSUB280 or DKSUB424 DKSUE280 or DKSUE424 DKSUBI40 DN DNIS DPFT DSS DTMF DVSU E911 EKT ESF EOCU FCC HDCB HDSS Glossary DKT2000 series HDSS Definition Toshiba proprietary digital telephones consisting of four models two 10 button models with handsfree answerback and or LCD display and two 20 button telephones with speakerphone or a speakerphone with LCD display Strata DK14 Key Service Unit KSU with power supply Equipped with two loop start CO line circuits and four digital telephone circuits built in Includes external page interface MOH BGM interface power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control Base Cabinet Unit that houses the Common Control Unit RCTU as well as six u
345. e s RPCI DI RS 232 output If DNIS information should be sent from the Telephone s RPCI DI to the Personal Computer to which it is connected turn LED 11 On if this information should not be sent to the PC turn LED 11 Off LED 10 RPCI DI Caller ID and ANI to PC Option Caller ID and ANI information that is sent to a telephone can be sent or blocked from the telephone s RPCI DI RS 232 output If Caller ID and ANI information should be sent from the RPCI DI to the Personal Computer to which it is connected turn LED 10 On if this information should not be sent to the PC turn LED 10 Off This option does not apply to PDIUs because they can not send ANI Caller ID or DNIS numbers LEDs 07 09 Not used at this time uole S 9 We sis 3 59 System amp Station Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration LED 06 DTR Pulse LED 06 should always be Off LED 06 should be off for all PDIU DS RPCI DIs or PDIU DIs Refer to Chapter 10 Peripheral Installation for more PDIU DS modem pool information LED 05 Auto Pause Behind PBX Turn LED 05 On to enable Auto Pause Behind PBX This inserts the Auto Pause after a Centrex or PBX access code is dialed by a DIU or RPCI A CO line must be assigned in Program 42 0 and must have an access code assigned in Program 42 1 8 Pause time is determined by Program 12 3 Also when Auto Pause Behind PBX is enabled the Auto Pause is inserted after the CO line access code
346. e 11 No DTMF Tone Return When Dialing DTMF tone return when dialing 10 BGM connected to PESU Circuit 8 EKT connected to PESU CKT 8 09 BGM connected to PEKU Circuit 3 EKT connected to PEKU CKT 3 08 Elapsed Time Display 1 min After Access or Elapsed Time Display 15 sec After Access or Answer a CO Answer a CO line Line 07 Standard Tel CO Ring per Prog 10 1 LED 06 Standard Tel CO Ring Distinctive 06 VM ID Code DTMF Signal Time 80 ms 160 ms 05 Send Music on hold Send Ringback Tone to the transferred party 04 MW cancel from VM RS 232 or dial 64 DN MW cancel from VM Automatic When Answer 03 3 Ringing Modes 2 Ringing Modes 02 Hunt C F override from DSS console s phone Hunt C F override from DSS console Voice First from DSS Console 01 Tone First from DSS Console Ths applies to PDNs not PhDNs PhDNs are always tone irst System amp Station Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 of 3 Program 10 2 Overview You can make the following system assignments with Program 10 2 LED 20 Padded Tone Return With some Central Offices callers may experience clicking or squealing sounds or a loud DTMF tone return during or after dialing To counteract this it is recommended that padded tone return or no tone return be enabled LED 20 On or No DTMF tone return LED 20 Off and LED 11 On If this option is not selected LED 20 Off Program 10 2 LED 11 selects normal level DTMF Return or No DTMF Return The opt
347. e dial 0 and Attd Call button calls Transfer Recall In Trans and Hold recall will not overflow e Overflow recall time is set in Program 58 1 uole S 9 We sis 3 139 System amp Station Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes Processor Type RCTUBA BB RCTUC D RCTUE F B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU and B5CAU BU Program Type Station Initialized Default Given throughout this section B 1 2 43 Hold Hold Hold Hold Spkr 5 9 Spkr Spkr DATA Button Code See legend Attendant Console 1 4 1 Left 2 Right Press LED Buttons 01 12 on Programming Telephone to enter data for corresponding console button Codes Left Buttons 1 12 Codes Right Buttons 1 12 Split 295 Join Loop 239 Sup Loop 296 Conf 297 Overflow 299 Night 439 In Emrg 261 In DN 257 In Dial 0 262 Redial 496 Spdial 497 SD13 13 In Trans 258 Trans RC 260 Hold RC 259 BLF 298 Out Dial 294 SD12 12 In LG3 243 In LG2 242 In LG1
348. e which allows the PDN Hold and Cnf Trns buttons to be programmed in Speed Dial Memory The three minute setting is recommended if station users frequently store memos with Speed Dial numbers using the Mode button below the LCD LED 18 Built in Auto Attendant Camp on Busy Ring No Answer Routing This option is designed for Auto Attendant configurations that have primary announcement devices but no secondary ones tells the system where to route Auto Attendant calls that ring and are not answered or have been camped on for a designated time see Program 26 The calls can be sent back to the primary announcement device or to the station or stations assigned to the CO lines normal ringing pattern see Programs 81 84 and 87 LEDs 16 and 17 Built in Auto Attendant Disconnect Time If LED 18 is assigned for normal ringing set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect Built in Auto Attendant calls that have not been answered by the alternative stations The time the Auto Attendant rings stations per Program 81 84 87 after a loop start line caller does not dial and or a ringing station does not answer If a call is not answered before ring disconnect time period time out the call will disconnect This prevents loop start lines from being locked up when there is no CPC supervision from the central office after the outside caller hangs up Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the desired time as follows 40 seconds LED 16 Off LED 17 Off
349. e 3 76 If the first dialed digit is the will be treated as a feature access code If is entered at any point after that in other words as long as it is not the first digit dialed then the system will treat the following numbers as a subaddress A second should then be entered to indicate the end of the subaddress NASI 7 3 ISDN ISDN Related Programs Flowchart 7 2 ISDN Trunk Programs Standard Trunks Program 16 Assign Trunk Groups Programs 81 89 81 87 Direct Ringing Lines Program 16 Define ISDN Trunk Group Type non ISDN PRI BRI PRI Program 65 Define the number Program 16 Assign Trunk Groups of B channels per channel group Programs 66 1 3 Assign channel and trunk group parameters Programs 66 2 4 Assign call by call service parameters Program 67 Assign call direction for each ISDN trunk group Programs 66 5 7 Assign LDNs to channel groups and indexes Assign LDN channel groups to ISDN trunk ports Programs 68 1 2 Define and enable Called Number ID Service CNIS Program 69 Assign CNIS indexes and DID or LDN Program 64 Assign ISDN trunk groups to use DID DNIS or DIL for incoming calls Program 17 LEDs DID DNIS Programs 09 17 71 73 DID Ringing Programs 71 and 72 DNIS Ringing ISDN Trunk Programs Overview Trunk Programs Overview See Flowchart 7 2 for an overview of the ISDN trunk programming procedure
350. e 31 Default 20 Button A SD10 MW FL cos Do Not Disturb C07 SDS CO6 RDL CO5 PAU co4 SD15 CO3 SD14 co2 D13 co1 SD12 PDN SD11 Code 33 20 Button C 1 The Speed Dial button is the same as the SDS or REP buttons in previous Strata systems Program 39 Code 97 Also if changing PEKU PCBs electronic telephone to PDKU PCBs digital telephone or vice versa always check that the Speed Dial or MW FL button is set appropriately in Program 39 2 This button is initialized as SD10 with RCTUA since there are only 16 CO lines uolje S 9 We sis 3 111 System amp Station Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type 30 50 70 40 60 80 16 36 56 76 17 37 57 77 18 38 58 78 19 39 59 79 20 40 60 80 90 110 130 100 120 140 96 116 136 97 117 137 98 118 138 99 119 139 100 120 140 150 170 190 160 180 200 156 176 196 157 177 197 158 178 198 159 179 199 160 180 200 3 3 11 31 51 71 12 32 52 72 13 33 53 73 14 34 54 74 15 35 55 75 29 49 69 39 59 79 91 111 131 92 112 132 93 113 133 94 114 134 95 115 135 89 109 129 99 119 139 151 171 191 152 172 192 153 173 193 154 174 194 155 175 195 149 169 189 159 179 199 06 26 46 66 07 27 47 67 08 28 48 68 09 29 49 69 10 30 50 70 28 48 68 Z 38 58 78 86 106 126 87 107 127 88 108 128 89 109 129 90 110
351. e Volume Called ID ANI x and Call Forward Backup RAM 93 CO Line Identification X 97 Printing Program Data through SMDR X Alphabetical Program Listing Overview Alphabetical Program Listing This alphabetical program listing gives you features topics and the corresponding Strata DK program numbers that relate to the topic Feature or Topic Program Number Feature or Topic Program Number Account Codes 15 70 39 69 30 60 Call Pickup 10 1 15 31 39 ACD 03 09 09 10 4 11 14 0 14 4 14 1 14 2 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 8 14 9 14 71 14 72 14 73 15 17 18 35 39 71 1 3 Call Transfer with Camp on 10 1 03 10 3 20 39 50 51 52 Caller ID 59 60 1 77 4 DK 14 only 76 1 76 2 Camp on 10 2 31 34 37 Centrex PBX Compatible 42 0 42 1 8 45 Centrex Ringing Repeat 10 1 CO Centrex PBX Feature Buttons 39 42 0 42 1 8 Add on Module 29 Alarm Sensor 39 All Call Voice Page 05 10 2 31 39 Alert Signal 39 Alternate Point Answer 10 1 Amplified Conference External 10725 1079 ANI 10 3 20 39 51 52 59 60 1 71 0 5 72 77 4 Attendant Console Auto Attendant Built in 03 58 1 58 2 58 4 58 5 59 09 10 3 23 26 78 81 89 CO Line Access 39 40 41 CO Line Alpha Identification 93 CO Line Groups 16 CO Line Reseize Guard Time 10 1 42 0 CO Line
352. e console s DN assigned in Program 04 it supports incoming calls only and can only appear once on a console uole S 9 We sis 3 143 System amp Station Program 60 1 SMDR Data Output Options Program 60 1 SMDR Data Output Options Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default LED 01 Off 1 2 4 3 Spkr 6 0 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 aif aE Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below LED Button X LED On LED Off 20 Caller ID ANI and DNIS data will be sent from the Account code data will be sent from the system 01 system SMDR port SMDR port Program 60 1 Overview Program 60 1 determines which information will be sent out the system SMDR port System Account codes or Caller ID and or ANI telephone numbers Turn LED 01 On if received Caller ID and or ANI information should be sent out the system SMDR port Turn LED 01 Off if Account Code information should be sent out the system SMDR port Note LED 01 determines if received Caller ID and or ANI information LED 01 On or data is sent out the SMDR port This data is output on the last 15 digit right hand field columns of the SMDR print out 3 144
353. e different area codes and exception office codes over different line groups 6unnoy 3so45 sea 5 9 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 51 LCR Area Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default Leaves Tables 01 15 blank all codes 000 999 initialized to the plan legend below Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold 1 2 43 Spkr 5 SELECT LCR Plan Number DATA Area Code s 3 digits see Legend below To add a range of area codes enter XXX XXX Action Code low office code high office code 2 To add code to table 3 To delete code from table 4 To display codes from table Processor LCR Plan Number LCR Plan Default Processor LCR Plan Number LCR Plan Default DK14 01 08 08 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 08 DK40i 01 08 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 01 16 16 RCTUA 01 08 08 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 01 16 16 LCR Plan LCR Plan LCR Plan LCR Plan Data Area Code s Data Area Code s Data Area Code s Data Area Code s 5 10 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 51 Over
354. e for PCBs with options You must run Program 03 after installing PCBs with options such as OCA RRCS DIU etc Also run Program 03 for the slot of each new PCB when installing a new PCB in an existing installation If universal PCBs are installed Program 91 1 and 91 9 automatically assigns the appropriate PCB codes to the installed slots But they do not assign option codes such as OCA PDIU RRCS etc CAUTION Running Program 91 9 erases Program 03 option codes Program 91 1 does not uole1S 9 Wa sis Important After completing Program 03 set the configuration in memory by running Program 91 2 or turn the base cabinet power supply switch off and wait five seconds before turning it back on See Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration Strata DK I amp M Manual to determine PCB slot placement PIOU PIOUS RSSU Codes 41 42 and 43 assigns PIOU PIOUS RSSU TTY port as Remote Maintenance MIS for ACD and SMDI respectively SMDR Paging Relay Control and other miscellaneous options are active on the PIOU PIOUS that has the lowest number code 41 42 or 43 in the system Codes set for RSIU RSIS RMDS in Program 76 have priority over codes 41 42 and 43 Piggyback PCB Speaker OCA Data Interface Unit Options Run Program 03 to assign codes for all options except RCOS Program 91 9 erases option codes assigned with Program 03 Program 91 1 does not erase option codes already programmed After completing all Program 03 data entry
355. e in use a new 911 call that attempts to connect to a busy trunk group can hunt to another trunk group If that group is busy the call will hunt to another CAMA trunk group until an idle group is found E911 calls will hunt for an idle line ina CAMA trunk group in the order assigned in this program Within each CAMA trunk group E911 calls will hunt the lines in that group from the lowest numbered line to the highest numbered line This hunting operation is true if the lines in a CAMA trunk Group are CAMA trunks or normal CO lines L164 8 7 E911 Program 11 5 CAMA Digits Sent on 911 Calls Program 11 5 CAMA Digits Sent on 911 Calls Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type System Initialized Default 971 e 1 2 43 Spkr 1 1 Hold Spkr 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 5 CAMA digits sent if user dials 911 911 11 1 Use LED button 01 to blank out 9 or 91 X choose 1 CAMA Digits Sent 911 11 Program 11 5 Overview 1 This program specifies which digits 911 or 11 or 1 will be sent to the to CAMA trunk when a user dials 911 or 94 911 When a caller dials 911 the DK can send 911 11 or 1 out the CAMA trunk before sending the CESID location digits set in Program 12 Nor
356. e number sent is based on the call originator The originator can be a tandem call a station with or without DID or a station with a designated number Fora tandem call the CPN digits received are the digits that will be sent Fora direct station call the default number assigned to the selected service and which is programmed into the Strata DK as the CPN will be the number sent Fora fixed number the system sends the number assigned in the system in this program or it can use the DID programming to determine the number to be sent Program 69 DATA Type 1 or 2 defines whether fixed numbers from this program are sent or if DID digits from Program 09 are sent 7 42 ISDN Program 69 1 CNIS Presentation Parameters Program 69 1 CNIS Presentation Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default None 4 2 3 Spkr 6 9 Hold Spkr 1 _ _ Meta Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 INDX Index Number 00 32 Index 00 uses default value assigned in 68 2 Enter Station Port s All others use values assigned in 69 2 To add a range enter XXX XXX low port high port CG Channel Group 1 8 Station Ports Channel Group Index NASI Program 69 1 Over
357. e option is selected LED 04 Off callers calling in on the DK DID or Tie lines will hear dial tone after accessing the DK Tie DID lines Second Dial tone will not be sent to callers if this option is not selected LED 04 On Important Normally Tie lines require a second dial tone LED 04 Off and DID lines should not return a second dial tone LED 04 On The initialized data is set for DID lines so this data must be changed when installing Tie lines if second dial tone is required LED 03 04 applies to REMU PEMU TDDU RDDU and RDTU DIDs and Tie lines System amp Station Program 17 DID Tie Line Options LED 03 DID Camp on Busy Turn LED 03 On if DID line callers should hear ringback tone and camp on to busy stations when calling busy stations Turn LED 03 Off if the DID callers should hear busy tone when calling busy stations Analog Tie lines will not camp on to busy stations It is recommended to turn LED 03 On for all DID lines To provide Camp on busy over RDTU Tie line calls configure Tie lines as DID lines in Program 41 2 LED 03 must be on for the lines in Program 17 This is allowed because Tie and DID signalling is the same for Tie and DID T1 lines Also both Tie and DID lines that route per Program 71 DNIS assignments will camp on busy if LED 03 is turned On Tie lines that route per Program 04 will not camp on busy LED 03 04 applies to REMU PEMU TDDU RDDU and RDTU DIDs and Tie lines LED 02 Wink Immediate
358. each desired special network service for example outbound and inbound WATS DID and Tie lines Since dedicated facilities are usually provided for peak traffic the company pays for the unused bandwidth during normal and light traffic periods T1 Example In the example shown in Figure 7 1 a span of 24 T1 channels are organized as follows Five are assigned to trunk group 1 and assigned to 800 service Ten are assigned to trunk group 2 and assigned as DIDs Nine are assigned to trunk group 3 and assigned as Tie lines These lines are all fixed and dedicated This is if the traffic is low on any given trunk group the lines cannot be re allocated Therefore the user is paying for unused bandwidth T1 Channel Group Trunk Group 1 1 2 5 Channels dedicated to 800 numbers 3 4 Trunk Group 2 z 10 dedicated to DID numbers 0 Trunk Group 3 24 9 dedicated to Tie numbers 4914 Figure 7 1 T1 Trunk Groups 7 10 Call by Call Line Sharing The Call by Call feature enables you to reserve dedicate a specific number of channels for a specific trunk group such as DID or Tie lines and to enable a specific number of channels lines to be shared Shared lines are automatically pooled when they are not in use and can be used by other trunk groups within the channel group to service calls on a Call by Call basis The Reserved quantity of lines for one trunk group cannot be used by other trunk groups and are dedicated to the assigned trun
359. eceecneeeseesaecaeceaeceeeeeneeeaeesaeceaeee 6 32 Program 14 9 Work Unit Assignments 0 ees eeecsecsseceseceseesseecsaeeseceeeeseesaeecaeecaeceseeseeeseeeaaesaaees 6 34 Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line OptionS cece eeesseceseceeeeeeeeeeecseecaaececeseeseeeeaeesaeenaeens 6 35 Program 17 DID Tie Line Options secenario e e ea a E i E aeea 6 35 Program 35 Station Class Of SefViC sicot eiiie aeii i E E aaa 6 35 Program 71 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line Sisene eiieeii aae eine naaa ie naen 6 35 Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones cic ceeeeeeeeseceeceteeeeeeeneensees 6 36 Chapter 7 ISDN System Programs OVELVie W sccesestsccuseysacbutastieesse tacts heb sat OE E E EAR AE AOO AE AE EEE E RRE E Es 7 1 ISDN Related Programs aneda nine e a e E mieten een diaii 7 3 Prunk Programs Overview ites iccsdeesaiites acceeed i i Se legen betters aaa ella E ele ese E AR E e 7 5 Guidelines for Programming ISDN Calling Features 00 cc ice eeceecceseeeneeeseeceeceeeeeceseesseeeaeeeaaeenaees 7 6 Programming for ISDN CO Switch Type ee ceecceeeseesseecnseeseceeceseceseesaeecaaecaecsaeesseeseeeeaaeenaes 7 6 Programming for ISDN PRI DID Type Call oo eee eeeeeeceseceneceeeceeeeeseecaeecsaecnaeceeeseeeeseeseasenaes 7 6 Programming for ISDN PRI DNIS Type Call cece eee eseesseeseceseesseceeeeeseecaaecsaecaeeseeeseeseneenaes 7 8 Programming for ISDN PRI LDN Type Call oo ee eeeeeseecnseceneceeeeseesseeseseeeae
360. econd digit can be NNX Office code not interchangeable second digit cannot be 1 or 0 AC Area Code 1 NNX 1 may be dialed before office codes 10XXX old 5 digit Carrier Access Codes 101YXXX 101XXXX new 7 digit Carrier Access Codes Y 0 50r6 Program 45 1 Overview This program enables you to define a dial plan for the Toll Restriction software to recognize the typical dialing sequence of long distance local calls made from the system s home area code and to identify area and office codes The dialing plan defines several components of a telephone number for long distance calling Notes e Setting the proper dialing plan in this program is also required for the Least Cost Routing feature to function properly UONILIS9Y IIOL 4 15 Toll Restriction Program 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plan 4 16 e The Strata DK System automatically restricts direct dialing of 1OXXX 1 and 1OXXXXX 1 access codes to any station that is toll restricted These codes are allowed in system speed dial and LCR modified digit tables This is necessary to control Long Distance Carrier access 10XXX 0 and 1OXXXXX 0 are allowed denied depending on the station s class and Program 46 10 80 button LED 01 assignment Pre January 1995 North American Numbering Plan NANP Plan 1 Plan 2 Plans 1 6 use numbering plans for systems that do not use the NANP established January 1995 DK14 DK40i and all DK424 and DK424i processors provide plans 1 9
361. ecseceeeseeeseceseceseceseceeeeeneeeaeeeaeonaeees 3 74 Program 30 Station Class of Service cee eeeesessecseceseceseceseeeseecaceseceseceseecseecsaesaeesseeseeeaeeeaaecaeee 3 76 Program 30 Telephone Group Page Assignment cesceeeesceeseceseceseeeeeeeeecaaecaeeeeeeseeeaeeenaees 3 82 Program 31 Station Class Of Service eeeeeesesssecseceseceseceseeeseecsaeeseceseceseesseessaesaeceseeseeeaeeeaaeeneees 3 83 Program 31 Group Pickup Assignments 0 ceceeeeseesssecsseeseceeeeeseecseecaeceseeeeeeaeeeaeesaecnseeeneeeaees 3 89 Program 32 Automatic Preference ee eeeeseessecneceeeceseceseeeseecsaeesecsseceseeeaeecaaecaeesseeseeeeaeeenaeenaees 3 90 Program 32 RS 232 Voice Mail Message Center Port cee eeecseceseceseeeeeeeeeesaecaeceeeeseeeseeenaees 3 92 Program 33 PDN PhDN Station Hunting Voice Calls Only ceccceeceeseeeeeteceeneeeeseeeesaes 3 93 Program 33 PhDN Owner Telephone Assignment 0 0 0 0 ce eesceseceeeeseeeesecnseceseeseeeeeeeaeeenaeeneens 3 95 Program 34 Hold Recall Timing iii aoreet as EEE E APEE Esia 3 97 Program 34 Station Class Of Service eee eeessseeseceseceseceseeescecsaeeseceseceaeeeseesaaesaeceseeeeeeaeeeaaeeaeens 3 98 Program 35 Station Class Of Service ceeesseeseeeseceseceseceeeeeaeeeseesaecaeceeesenescaeesaecsaecsseeseeesneesaes 3 100 Program 36 Fixed Call Forward ceecesessceeseeeseceseceseceeeesseesseesaecsaeceeeseeeecaeesaecaecsseeeeessneeeae
362. ed and all calls are dropped Program 91 9 sets the following elements to initial default status Data for Programs 00 99 Speed Dial Memory Logical Physical Port Locations Voice Mail Identification Codes Character Message Memory Overview First time Programming Timed Reminders Digital Telephone Volume Levels Call Forward Memory Power Off then On Station Message Waiting Status Caller ID Lost Call Memory Install all PCBs Run Program 91 1 to inform the software of the system hardware configuration M LM AO Step 3 Run Programs 03 and 19 1 1 2 Run Program 03 for all PCBs that have options Run Program 19 1 to inform the software of the system option Alternate BGM slot Step 4 Run Program 00 Run Program 00 Part 1 to assign remote maintenance security codes Run Program 00 Part 2 to test the processor and RAM Step 5 Set Date Time and Day You can set date time and day anytime individually or all 1 2 3 Use DKT or EKT assigned to logical Port 000 or attendant console Make sure the handset is on hook Set the date PDN 6 5 1 Redial Date in year month day format YYMMDD If month or day is single digit precede with a zero Set the time Redial PDN 6 5 2 Time in hours minutes seconds format HHMMSS from 000000 to 235
363. ed to be defined in addition to the area codes in Program 51 but it may In the second case the plan only pertains to exception office codes for certain area codes To route International 011 calls over any selected plan by Country Code program 011 as the Area Code and the Country Code as the Office Code in Program 52 in any Exception Code Table If the Country Code is two digits add 10 3 digit Office Codes as follows XXO through XX9 where XX is the Country Code In the first example office code exception tables are defined to the area code table Use the continuation sheet to define the exception office codes As many as 16 office code exception tables can be linked to a plan but each exception table can only be used once When using the continuation sheet be sure that the same exception table is not assigned to more than one plan 1 2 3 4 Turn to the continuation sheet that follows Plan 16 record sheet Determine the plan number where the exception office codes will be routed Fill in the area code of the exception office codes in the spaces provided by the correct plan number These office codes will be routed differently than the overall area code Enter the specific office codes that are to be routed differently Example 2 In the second example the route plan only applies to office code exceptions The first office code exception table may be documented on the LCR Plan record sheet 1 2 Check the box on t
364. edial or ABR 470 Sets ABR of busy outgoing number Automatic Callback Busy Auto Callback or ACB 494 Sets ACB for station recalled by busy line Background Music Tel Set Music or BGM 478 Turns BGM On or Off through station speaker Call Forward All Calls Call Frwd All Calls or CFAC 487 All calls forward to selected station System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments Table 3 3 Feature Button Codes for Digital Electronic and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones continued Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Forwards all calls to pre defined destination See Call Forward A C Fixed Call Frwd to or CFF 486 Program 36 Call Forward Busy Call Frwd Busy or CFB 459 Forwards calls to selected station if station is busy Call Forward Busy No Call Frwd Busy NAns or CFB 457 Forwards calls to selected station if station is busy or Answer NA does not answer Call Forward External Call Frwd External or CF EXT 460 Forward calls externally Call Forward No Answer Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA 458 Arkaia CAIS to sclecied station It steno pee nor Call Park Park in Orbit or PARK R3 464 Call Park Only CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be used Call Park LCD Display ek Orbit Dlsplay or CPD 465 interchangeably Displays call parked via telephone LCD Call Park and Page Call Park Page or CP PG R3 463 Parking and Paging Park Pickup Call Pickup
365. eeeeenees 7 34 Program 66 7 LDN Trunk Group Assignment cc cscescsseeeseeeseeeseceseceeeeeaeeeaeceaecaeeeneeeeeenaees 7 35 Program 67 1 Trunk Group Call Direction eeeesceseceeeeseeeseceseceseeeeeeeaeeeaeceaeceaeeeeeeeneeaaees 7 36 Program 67 2 Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported 00 0 eee eeseeseceseceeeeeseeeaeeeneenaeees 7 37 Program 67 3 ISDN Trunk Group Minimum Channel Reservation ce eeeesseceseceteeeeeeeeeeneees 7 38 Program 67 4 ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel Reservation cceeeeseeseceseeeeeeeeeneees 7 39 Program 67 5 Multiple Time Zone Settings cece eeesseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaecesecsseceeeeeaeeeaeesaeseaeees 7 40 Program 68 1 Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters ecceeseeseceseceseceeeceseesaeeeseeeneens 7 41 Program 68 2 Outbound CNIS Parameters 0 0 0 0 ese eseeseceseceeeeseessecesecesesseeseneeeaeceaeceaeeneeeeeeenaees 7 42 Program 69 1 CNIS Presentation Parameters 00 ceceeseesecsseceseceseeeeeeeseeeaeesaecsseesseeeseeeneeeaaeeaeens 7 43 Program 69 2 Special Number Assignment cc ceeceeccesceeseecsseeseceeeceseesseessaesseceseesseeeaeesnaeenaees 7 44 Chapter 8 E911 Operation Overview vi ceiciieecs ces etic ek eet Rea Lie ee ee 8 1 SMD Res aena e satus a e Ea S pa E ET EEEa sa EE SEEE EEEE O E 8 2 PrOSTAMMING OVELCVISW poeri iseic rerpieitieiisres ieee R REE eat a aE EE EEE EEEN e 8 3 Program 11 0 E91 1 CAMA Trunk Assig
366. eeeeeseaeesaeesaessaeen 1 12 First time Programming nieocenione Ee E EEE TE a e tha dadattunbines Meeeses 1 14 Step 1 Check Minimum Hardware Requirements 0 cece eseeseeseceseceseceeeeeseeeseeesecesecsseeeseeeaes 1 14 Step 2 Initialize the System ensenen naeio ontana aaaea ee A a a a a leiaat 1 14 Step 3 Run Programs 03 and 19 1 oo ee ceececesceessecesseeceaceceeeeecaeeesaeceeaeeseaeeceeeeseeeeaaeceeaeeneeeeees 1 15 Step 4 Rum Prostrani OO s psccteceesstecien lock e ideal cage clete a a e aaa a a ee 1 15 Step S Set Date Time and Day sesrinesonernie rni e ee a a T E ES 1 15 Step 6 Run Additional Programs as Required cee ceeeesesseeeseceseceseceseceseeeaeecsaecsaeeseeeseeeneeeees 1 15 Programming Examples ainiaan enirere eren dias cab E VEA anne abana ied 1 16 Chapter 2 Initialization amp Test Program 91 9 System Initialization ee eesceseesseeeeeescecsseceeceseeeseeesaecaaecseceseesseeeseeeaaessecsaeeeseeeaes 2 2 Program 90 Initialize Programs O0 99 ooo eeccceesscceseceecceceeeceaeceesaeceaaeceeaeeceeeecaeeeeaaeeeaaeceeaeeneeees 2 4 Program 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumbet cc ceeecceseeseeereeeteceneeeeeeenes 2 6 Program 91 2 Data Transfer from Temporary Memory to Working Memory 2 8 Program 92 Initializing Misc Backup RAM eee eeeeseeeseceseceseceneeeaeessecsaecsseeeeeseaeesaecaecnaeeeeeees 2 9 Prosram 00 Part 1 SoftWare Check iprasta aa ia aea biade eir
367. efined by the table below Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back After programming press e Vol to turn all LEDs On Vol to turn all LEDs Off e Mode and CO line number then to display and advance Processor CO Line Range Processor CO Line Range DK14 001 004 B1CU 001 032 DK40i 001 012 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 B3CAU BU 001 120 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B5CAU BU 001 200 RCTUC D 001 144 RCTUE F 001 200 Button Line Set Button LEDs LED Trunk Centrex PBX Connection LED On Normal LED Off 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 4 8 Toll Restriction Program 42 0 CO Line to PBX Centrex Connection amp Access Codes Program 42 0 Overview Use this program to allow Centrex PBX after flash features to operate Do not use this program when the Centrex feature assume 9 is used and the DK LCR is activated see notes below The Strata DK System recognizes PBX Centrex access codes via Programs 42 1 8 Program 42 0 informs the software which lines are connected to a PBX or to Centrex This combination allows Toll Restriction and Speed Dialing to function properly Notes If the CO line is programmed for behind Centrex PBX LED On reseize guard time is 1 5 seconds If
368. eiver is seized when it is needed for the decoding process such as for a standard telephone with a DTMF dial pad When placing outgoing calls with DTMF standard telephones the talk path to the outside party is not cut through until the DTMF receiver circuit is released The DTMF receiver channel s release time can be programmed for between one and nine seconds initialized timing is four seconds this is the time it takes to release the DTMF receiver circuit after the last digit is dialed The choice of timing is a trade off between CO line time to connect and user speed If the time is too long the outside called party may answer before the voice path is cut through and the caller is not heard If the time is too short a standard telephone user inputting DTMF tones could be cut off prematurely from using other features such as Speed Dial or Toll Restriction Standard telephones can also defeat Toll Restriction if the seize time is too short and they are not required to dial outgoing calls via LCR Toshiba recommends that standard telephones should always be required to dial outgoing calls via LCR to prevent them from defeating Toll Restriction Note If no digits are dialed after accessing an outgoing CO line the DTMF receiver remains seized for 15 seconds and then drops however the line remains connected uoleys 9 We sis 3 45 System amp Station Program 13 Defining the Message Center Program 13 Defining the
369. el group The remainder is the total number of lines available for that trunk group This is outlined in steps 1 and 2 below 1 Determine the total number of lines available to Trunk Group 1 Channel Group 1 3 Trunk Group 2 Min 5 Trunk Group 3 Min 8 Min Value for Trunk Groups 2 amp 3 Trunk Group 1 Max 23 Min 8 2 Subtract from other Trunk Groups min values from the number of B channels in that Channel Group Trunk Group 2 23 B channels in Channel Group 1 8 Min Value for Trunk Groups 2 amp 3 15 Lines available to Trunk Group 1 Max 7 y Trunk Group 3 Min 3 Max 12 8 reserved 7 shared Note Even through the max value is set for 23 channels only 15 channels are available for Figure 7 3 Example 2 Shared Trunk Lines Trunk Group 1 Maximum trunk group values are set in Program 67 4 Minimum trunk group values reserved are set in Program 67 3 7 12 ISDN Call By Call Overview Time Zones This feature allows the programming of up to three time zones for a given channel group thus enabling different min max scenarios and different services for each channel group In the example shown in Figure 7 3 Channel Group 1 is set for one time zone that starts at 00 00 and ends at 23 59 Channel Group 2 is set for two time zones Time zone 1 starts at 00 00 and ends at 12 00 hours time zone 2 starts at 12 00 hours and ends at 23 59 hours Ch
370. election disables the queue alarm DATA 1 Immediate Alarm This selection causes the system to send immediately a queue alarm to the Supervisor telephone when the number of calls in the ACD queue exceeds the number set in Program 14 71 DATA 2 Call Waiting Alarm 1 and 2 This selection allows two timed alarms to be set Alarm 1 sounds when X 1 number of calls are in the ACD queue longer than the time period set in Program 11 6 X is set in Program 14 72 Alarm 2 sounds when Y 1 number of calls are in the ACD queue longer the time period set in 6 32 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 8 Alarm Pattern Assignments Program 11 7 Y is set in Program 14 73 Normally Alarm 1 is used as a caution alarm to indicate a less critical alarm than Alarm 2 Example Alarm 1 may be set to alert the Supervisor when five calls are in queue for longer than three minutes and Alarm 2 may be set to alert the Supervisor when ten calls are in queue for five minutes Once alarm 2 is activated Alarm 1 is inactive until Alarm 2 thresholds are no longer exceeded Alarm 1 is an interrupted beeping tone Alarm 2 is a continuous beeping tone uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny 6 33 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 9 Work Unit Assignments Program 14 9 Work Unit Assignments Initialized Default account digits for each Group 02 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr
371. em amp Station Program 77 2 Door Phone Busy Signal Door Lock Assignments Program 77 2 Door Phone Busy Signal Door Lock Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default A LEDs are Off He 1 2 a 1 Spkr 7 7 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below ane a X LED On LED Off 20 One Door Phone Ring Five Door Phone Rings 19 18 _ 17 16 DDCB4 HDCB4 B jack is Lock Control 4 DK424 B is connected to Door Phone 4B 15 Door phone 4C Busy Out No Busy Signal 14 Door phone 4B Busy Out No Busy Signal 13 Door phone 4A Busy Out No Busy Signal 12 eo B jack is Lock Control 3 DK40i B is connected to Door Phone 3B 11 Door phone 3C Busy Out No Busy Signal 10 Door phone 3B Busy Out No Busy Signal 09 Door phone 3A Busy Out No Busy Signal eee meek ie Leok Conte te KABA a is connected to Door Prone 28 07 Door phone 2C Busy Out No Busy Signal 06 Door phone 2B Busy Out No Busy Signal 05 Door phone 2A Busy Out No Busy Signal oa ee Macke Lock Coro PT Gat a is conected to Door Phone 18 03 Door phone 1C Busy Out No Busy Signal 02 Door phone 1B Busy Out No Busy Signal 01 Door phone 1A
372. eneric record sheets as required to accommodate your system ports and settings The Installation and Maintenance I amp M Manual a companion book covers the installation and maintenance information and instructions for the Strata DK systems discussed in this book Organization This manual is organized as follows for your convenience Chapter 1 Overview includes general programming information and basic instructions on how to program the system with a 20 button LCD digital or electronic telephone Chapter 2 Initialization amp Test includes information for initializing and test programs Chapter 3 System amp Station includes programming information for the entire system and individual stations Chapter 4 Toll Restriction includes programming information for Toll Restriction Chapter 5 Least Cost Routing includes programming information for Least Cost Routing Chapter 6 Automatic Call Distribution includes ACD programming for DK40i DK424 and DK424i Release 4 3 Chapter 7 ISDN includes programming instructions and record sheets for Integrated Systems Digital Networking features for the DK40i DK424 and DK424i Chapter 8 E911 includes programming information for connecting the DK40i DK424 and DK424i to Enhanced 911 CAMA trunks Glossary Index The programs in each chapter are given in numerical order except Initialization and Test which is given in order of importance The progra
373. ents on Page 1 14 Jan 20 Sun 06 43 2 HKH1 K2 3 Program Mode Enter programming mode Do not press DN button System beeps after Spkr Speaker is pressed to indicate program number may be entered 3 Spkr Speaker 92 Hold Program 92 Access Program 92 Data Store 4 Spkr Speaker 92 Select Prepare the system for selection of programs to initialize For new system installation perform all 1 4 5 Select one of the following 92 Select 1 1 LED Buttons 01 amp 03 Each Dial Clr Clears Station Speed Dial Voice Mail ID codes and LCD memos assigned to station speed dial numbers or 92 Select 2 2 LED Buttons 01 amp 04 Common Dial Clr Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to system speed dial numbers or 92 Select 3 3 LED Buttons 02 amp 03 Msg Clr Clears Character Message Memory station and system and user name display or 92 Select 4 4 LED Buttons 02 amp 04 Tmr Reminder Clr Clears timed reminders or 92 Select 5 5 LED Buttons 01 amp 05 DKT VR Initial Presets the Ring Speaker Mute Ring and Intercom Tone BGM volume levels of all digital telephones to approximately mid range or 92 Select 9 9 LED Buttons 03 amp 04 Back Up RAM Clr Clears Call Forward and Message Waiting R3 Memory except Fixed Call Forward Memory 6 Hold 92 Select 1 0 LEDs lit in Step 5 turn off to secure data in system programming Data Programmed Repeat Steps 4 6 unt
374. ephones that require the Message Waiting Lamp functions must be connected to an RSTU2 PCB Only one standard telephone with Message Waiting Lamp is allowed to be connected to each RSTU2 port LED 02 LCD Type 32 12 Digital and 6000 6500 series LCD electronic telephones have 32 character displays Therefore assignments should be left in the initialized state of 32 characters LED 02 must be On to receive the voice mail message waiting indication LED 01 LCD Display This option should be used LED 01 On for all stations even non LCD unless it is desired to disable the station s LCD and message waiting functions Program 36 Fixed Call Forward DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Does not assign a Fixed Call Forward location to any port System amp Station Program 36 Fixed Call Forward 1 2 3 Spkr 3 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number Enter the port number of the station that needs a Fixed Call Forward location assigned To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port p FORWARD TO TEL Port Number Enter the port number of the PDN PhDN or DH DN that will be call forwarded to when the Fixed Call Forward button
375. ers Authors and Publishers or other similar organization if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music on hold feature of this telecommunication system Toshiba America Information Systems Inc hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license CPO1 Issue 8 Part I Section 14 1 Notice The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the Equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility teleph
376. erview Program 20 identifies the digital station ports connected to RPCI PDIU and the type of PDIU connected RPCIs have two modes the Data Switching DIU mode and the Application Program Interface or TAPI mode In the DIU mode the RPCI operates as a PDIU DI Integrated Data Interface Unit all Program 20 options apply except LED 10 and LED 11 which only apply to the RPCI in TAPI mode In TAPI mode the RPCI does not require Program 20 assignments except for LED 10 and or LED 11 if ANI DNIS and or Caller ID must be sent from the RPCI DI to the PC to which it is connected 3 58 System amp Station Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration Notes e RPCIs and PDIUs cannot be connected to PDKU1 circuit 8 but can be connected to all eight PDKU2 circuits RPCIs and PDIUs that support data switching cannot be connected to PDKU in all slots See the Strata DK I amp M Manual DK424 Chapter 4 DK424 Configuration Tables 4 4 and 4 5 Chapter 6 DK424i Configuration to identify which slots can support RPCIs and DIUs and Chapter 12 Peripheral Installation for additional hardware information DK40i slots 17 and 18 do not support data switching e Ifa PC is connected to the RPCI or PDIU set the communication mode escape sequences in the PC communication software Modem Initialization character sequence This ensures the escape sequence is restored in case the RPCI Telephone or PDIU is unplugged temporarily
377. erview This program notifies the system of how many digits to ignore before it applies Toll Restriction It allows the system to use Special Common Carrier SPCC authorization codes to modify restrictions when the station user is dialing a long distance carrier The user enters a telephone number to access the carriers Original restrictions re activate after the carrier number is dialed The sequence is the first five digits of the SPCC Number 950XXXX Telephone Number Credit Card Authorization Code SMDER prints out the following SPCC Number Telephone Number the Authorization Code does not print out If the SPCC access code is a 1 800 number the dialed SPCC code will overwrite the actual telephone number dialed on the SMDR report Do not set 1OXXX or 101XXXX Carrier Access Codes CACs in this program The DK Strata system automatically treats CACs as special codes and applies Toll Restriction and LCR as follows For stations that are Toll Restricted 1OXXX 1 101XXXX 1 are restricted for manual dialing but are allowed in system speed dial and LCR modified digit tables 10XXX 0 101XXXX 0 are allowed or denied depending on the station s class and 46 10 80 Key 01 assignment LCR always routes 1OXXX and 101XXXX via the local route plan if not restricted Toll Restriction Program 45 3 6 Special Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization Code Digit Length There are two elements Toll Restriction software mus
378. es are provided by inter exchange carriers These services need a network ID code for call setup When a Network ID Code is entered the service parameters in 66 2 must be blank If both the Service Parameter and the Network ID are programmed Service Parameter has priority and Network ID will be ignored Record Sheet Use the record sheet for Program 66 2 7 30 ISDN Program 66 3 Channel Group Trunk Parameters Program 66 3 Channel Group Trunk Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default LEDs 1 2 and 12 On all other LEDs Off xH 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 3 a Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold s k SEL 3 TL DATA Light LEDS to assign Enter the ISDN Trunk features See tables below Group Number 01 16 LEDs 03 06 specify the trunk types shown in the following table Tie Tie OutWATS OutWATS LEDE PS EX senderized cutthrough IntraLATA InterLATA rests 03 On On On 04 On On On On 05 On 06 On On Trunk Groups REPS senna 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 01 On Operator calls allowed Off Not allowed On Carrier Access allowed Off Not allowed Trunk Group Type 02 03 04 05 06 Trunk Group Type 07 10 Not Used On ISDN Call Number Type Unknown 11 Off Standard Called Party Number Type
379. eseeseeeeeeenaees 3 22 Program 09 Built in Auto Attendant Prompt Station Assignments 0 cccccceseeeeseeceeneeceeeeeeees 3 23 Program 09 PDN PhDN DH ACD or Modem DID Ext Assignments cc eeeeeeeteeeees 3 25 Program 10 1 System Assignments Part 1 Of 3 oo cece eeseeseeeseceseceseceseesseecaaesaeceseeeseseaeeeneeeneen 3 27 Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 Of 3 oo cee escesseeseeeseceseceseceseeeseecsaesaeceseeeeesaeeenaeeneee 3 30 Program 10 3 System Assignments Part 3 Of 3 oo cee eeeeeseesceeseceseceseceseeeseecsaesaeesseeeeeeneesaaesneen 3 35 Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters e cc eeceesseeseceseceseceseeeseeeaeecaeceseceseeeseeeaeeenaeeaeens 3 39 Program 10 Enhanced 911 Operation 0 cece eeeesceseceseceseeeseecsaeeeceseceseeeseessaesaeceseeeseeeaeeeaaesnaees 3 42 Program 12 System Assignments Basic Timing cee eeeesceseceseceseeeeeeeseeeseesseceseeeseeeneeeaeeeaeeaeens 3 44 Program 13 Defining the Message Center 0 ee eeceecceeeceseeececceeeeeseeeseeeseecsaeceaeeseeeeeeeeeeaaesaaees 3 46 Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options eee eseeseceseceeeeseeeeeecseecaaeceeceeeseeeeaeeeneeeaeens 3 47 Program 15 CO Line Tenant Assignment 00 0 0 cee ceeeeseeesceeseceseceeceseeeseeeaeecaeesseesseeseeeaeeeaaeeneens 3 50 Program 16 Assign CO Line Groups or Dial 9 occ eeceeeeseeseecseceseceseceseeeaeecseesaeceseeseeeaeesaaesaeees 3 51 P
380. ew This program assigns the destination for ACD calls or calls transferred to an ACD group that come in after the ACD shift has ended After Shift begins when the Supervisor presses the End of ACD Shift button or when the last Agent logs off see Flowchart 6 5 on Page 6 44 If a station port is assigned only one call at a time is serviced by the End of ACD Shift telephone or answering device lowest CO line first if calls are waiting Waiting calls camp on and receive ring back tone If all Agents are in the Unavailable mode calls to the ACD Group can be routed to the After Shift destination set in Program 14 6 or to the queue overflow point destination set in Program 14 5 see Program 10 4 LED 04 If the End of ACD Shift destination is the Normal Ring assignment Program 81 89 loop and ground start lines mute ring busy stations and DID Tie DNIS ANI lines camp on to busy End of ACD Shift stations assigned in Program 14 2 If the End of ACD Shift destination is another ACD Group calls are directed to the Group as if they were new ACD calls to the Group gt To Program ACD loop and or ground start CO lines to night ring over external page A PIOU PEPU or PIOUS is required 1 Assign normal ringing 321 or 441 in Program 14 6 2 Assign ACD lines to night ring over external page in Program 78 13 3 Assign Night Transfer button to appropriate telephone s in Program 39 4 Assign Night Relay operation in Program 77 1 LED 06
381. fault Assigns a Hold Recall Time of 032 seconds to all ports Hold HK 1 2 43 Spkr Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr 3 4 Hold HOLD TIME Seconds Enter the number of seconds the system will wait three digits Enter 000 for no Hold Recall Enter 011 160 for 11 to 160 seconds SELECT Station Logical Port Number Enter the port number having its Hold Recall Time defined To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port Seconds Port Seconds Port Seconds Port Seconds uolje S 3 We sis Program 34 Overview Each station can have a different time from 011 to 160 seconds from the point of placing a call on hold to the point of recall Initialized data assigns a recall time of 032 seconds to all ports 3 97 System amp Station Program 34 Station Class Of Service Program 34 Station Class Of Service DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Ini
382. fered by one of the Auto Attendant s digital announcers The exact dialing prompts along with their associated station numbers PDNs PhDNs Distributed Hunt DN and ACD group numbers are assigned with this program The actual announcements that are delivered to callers are recorded on customer supplied digital announcers The dialing prompts can either be all one digit or all two digits or numbers of 1 4 digits One digit dialing prompts can be used but they cannot conflict with the first digit of the PDN in Program 04 or the PhDN and DH DN in Program 04 Two digit dialing prompts are only used when it is necessary to stop the announcement to prevent errors in digit translation or when single digit prompts conflict with PDN PhDN and DH DN numbering plans Digit Translation errors occur sometimes when line transmission is low or the announcement voice frequencies are the same as a DTMF digit and the system RRCS BRCS K4RCU3 K5RCU K5RCU2 or QSTU3 circuit will not dial or misdials The first digit of the two digit prompts cannot conflict with PDNs in Program 04 or PhDNs and DH DNs in Program 04 uole s 9 We sis 3 23 System amp Station Program 09 Built in Auto Attendant Prompt Station Assignments gt To create one digit dialing prompts and to assign the associated destination station numbers 1 Enter Program 09 2 When SELECT appears on the LCD press the desired digit prompt Then
383. for RCTUC D and RCTUE F processors The following table gives you an example of how you might set up Program 51 for the HMIS LCR Plan 01 LCR Plan 02 LCR Plan 08 LCR Plan Data Area Code s Data Area Code s Data Area Code s Data Area Code s 714 000 713 800 715 799 888 801 887 889 999 Bulnoy 3so45 see7 5 11 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code 5 12 Program 52 LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default Leaves all office code tables blank and all tables assigned to LCR Plan see legend below i More Data J 4 2 3 Spkr 5 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Office Code Exception Table see Legend below Action Code DATA LCR Plan Area Code or Office Code To add a range of office codes enter XXX XXX low office code high office code Action Code Function Action Codes DATA Assign Exception Table to LCR Plan LCR Plan 01 16 Assign Area Code to LCR Plan N o 3 digit Area Code Add Office Code to Exception Table Delete Office Codes from Exception Table 3 3 digit Office Cod
384. front The office codes are interchangeable The system differentiates between them whenever it sees the digit 1 dialed When using this plan the system recognizes the following If 14s the first number entered in an 11 digit string the next three digits are an area code A 10 digit string is not recognized The first three digits in a seven digit string are an office code There is no distinction between local call dialing and long distance dialing within the area code Digits 5 7 in an 11 digit string may be an interchangeable office code as well Not used in the United States Post 1995 North American Numbering Plan NANP Plans 7 9 use the NANP established January 1995 DK14 DK40i and all DK424 and DK424i processors provide plans 7 9 Prefix 1 is used only when followed by an area code The area code can be the home area code depending on the telephone company s plan in that state Area Office code numbering schemes All area codes and office codes will have the format NXX making the new plan have both interchangeable area codes as well as interchangeable office codes Intra area code toll calls can be according to a seven digit only plan in some states In this case a seven digit call may be a local call or a toll call Therefore only particular office codes can determine a toll call for a seven digit call not the dial plan in 45 1 Changing System Dialing Plan for NANP from a Station 1 UOHIHIS9
385. functional dial tone For HMIS set LED 04 On If LED 04 is Off station users hear nothing after dialing the LCR access code until the destination rings or issues a busy signal LED Button 05 Warning Tone Last Choice Route Number LED 05 On The user is notified with a warning tone to indicate that LCR has routed the call over the least desirable route number The most expensive route is typically programmed to be the least desirable A user has three choices upon hearing the warning tone Ignore the tone LCR places the call using the least desirable route Hang up and try later to save money Activate the Automatic Call Back feature The appropriate line group calls the user back when a more desirable route number becomes available LED 05 Off No warning tone sounds Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default Leaves the home area code blank 1 2 3 a Hold Spkr Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr SELECT 2 DATA Home local area Code Program 50 2 Overview LCR matches the area code entered here with the LCR route plan containing the home area code in its Area Code Table The home area code is later entered into one of the available LCR route plans throug
386. g Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default A LEDs are Off uole S 3 We sis 1 2 3 Spkr 7 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Port Number _ Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in Enter the port number having the table below Door Phone Ringing assigned To specify a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Processor Port Range Processor Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Feature LED Ports Muted ring to busy DKT EKT 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 Door phone 4C Ring DP12 12 Door phone 4B Ring DP11 11 Door phone 4A Ring DP10 10 Door phone 3C Ring DP9 o Door phone 3B Ring DP8 amp Door phone 3A Ring DP7 Door phone 2C Ring DP6 Door phone 2B Ring DP5 Door phone 2A Ring DP4 Door phone 1C Ring DP3 Door phone 1B Ring DP2 N BF a oa N Door phone 1A Ring DP1 DP Door Phone Program 3 175 System amp Station Program 79 Door Phone Ringi
387. g disallowing outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables and Office Code Tables see Program 46 codes 2 4 and 6 8 Note Standard telephones that are Toll Restricted should always be forced to use Least Cost Routing LCR to place outside calls This prevents Toll Restriction defeat when the RRCS K4RCU3 K5RCU or QRCU3 circuit times out Toll Restriction Features For description purposes Toll Restriction is divided into several components or subfeatures The subfeatures operate independently of the restriction methods just described although they may employ these methods UONILIS9Y IIOL 4 1 Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Features 4 2 Station Priority Classes 1 8 Eight classes of Toll Restriction can be defined to assign different levels of priority to individual stations with RCTUC D and RCTUE F Four classes are supported with DK14 DK40i1 RCTUA and RCTUBA BB Classes can be defined so each is progressively more restrictive by allowing or denying specific area or office codes calls to long distance information international calls and operator assisted calls Programs 46 10 80 Office Code Exception Tables Class 1 8 restrictions can be further modified by defining as many as eight exception tables to allow or deny access to specific office codes that fall within previously restricted area codes Program 47 Exception office code access is accomplished with the Six digit Toll Restriction
388. ged out or has the supervisor ended the shift Call routes to ACD Group s After Shift destination See ACD Flowchart 6 5 Call routes to ACD Group s Are all Agents After Shift destination or unavailable Overflow Point destination See ACD Flowchart 6 6 Send call to ACD Group queue go to ACD Flowchart 6 2 No If the answer to all the above questions is no then one or more agents are in the available mode but are talking on other calls or in After Call Work mode Does an agent become idle before Program 11 4 timer expires Continue Yes Continue Is the call a direct CO line call or other type transferred from a Send call to ACD Group queue station or Auto Attendant routed from go to ACD Flowchart 6 2 another ACD group because all agents are unavailable or in After Shift Mode Send ring back tone to the caller for the time duration Direct set in Program 11 4 or until an agent becomes idle 0875 6 40 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 2 ACD Group Queue Overflow Operation Call enters ACD group queue because agents are logged in but are busy on other calls or are in After Call Work mode when the call is directed to the ACD group Call is sent to ACD group directly by Program 14 0 09 or 71 or the call is transferred to the group from a station or Auto Attendant see A
389. ging over PIOU external page zones see Program 77 3 numerical program listing 1 1 O Overlap Area Code see Program 45 5 P park recall training see Program 37 PBX centrex access codes see Program 42 1 8 peripheral options door phones RSIU RSIS RMDS PIOU PIOUS IMDU PEPU see Program 77 1 PhDN owner telephone assignment see Program 33 Program 03 DK424 cabinet type identification 3 12 Program 04 PhDN assignments for internal and tie line calls 3 18 Program 05 call park pickup abbreviated dialing 3 22 Program 09 ACD group DID tie line digit assignments 6 5 Program 09 PDN PhDN DH ACD or modem DID extension assignments 3 25 Program 10 11 E911 standard telephone ports assignment 3 42 Program 10 12 E911 standard telephone ports assignment 3 42 Program 10 91 a x lt E911 interdigital timer 3 43 Program 10 92 E911 pause before send timer 3 43 IN 3 Index P P IN 4 Program 11 0 E911 CAMA trunks 8 4 Program 11 1 CAMA trunk group line assignments 8 6 Program 11 2 CAMA trunk group hunting assignments 8 7 Program 11 5 CAMA digits sent on 911 calls 8 8 Program 11 6 E911 interdigital timer 8 9 Program 11 8 911 special DN notification assignments 8 10 Program 12 CESID station information 8 11 Program 13 station to CAMA trunk group 8 13 Program 14 1 auto answer with zip tone 6 12 Program 14 2 DID tie DNIS ANI line after shift overflow substitut
390. gned for each station The Message Center port must be the lowest voice mail standard telephone port in the Program 31 Voice Mail Group It is normally the same port for all stations 3 92 System amp Station Program 33 PDNJ PhDN Station Hunting Voice Calls Only Program 33 PDN PhDN Station Hunting Voice Calls Only Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 3 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT PDN or PhDN Port gm HUNT TO PDN or PhDN Port Reference Reference Number of the hunt from Number of the hunt to station srauon Press LED Button 01 to delete digit from the To add a port range enter XXX XXX hunt to port low port high port Processor Type PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range Processor Type PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range DK14 000 009 500 509 B1CU 000 055 500 579 DK40i 000 027 500 527 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 579 B5CAU BU 000 335 500 835 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 Hunt From Hunt To Hunt From Hunt To Hunt From Hunt To Hunt From Hunt To uole S 3
391. goes idle and disconnects LED 02 On Enables E911 call disconnect to be exclusively controlled by the dispatch person receiving the call on the E911 CAMA trunk In the following table conversation exists between originating telephone notified telephone console and the E911 CAMA trunk dispatch person E911 originator hangs up The E911 notified station cannot disconnect from the E911 CAMA and disconnects trunk E911 notified station hangs The E911 originating station cannot disconnect from the E911 CAMA up and disconnects trunk E911 dispatcher hangs up All parties are disconnected CAM trunk goes idle and disconnects LED 01 Number of CESID location digits sent with E911 Calls After 911 is sent out the CAMA trunk Automatic Number Identification CESID location digits are sent out the CAMA trunk to identify the location of the station The maximum number of CESID digits sent with each E911 call can be either 7 digits LED 01 On or 10 digits LED 01 Off CESID location digits are individually set in Program 12 for each station Contact your local E911 CAMA trunk provider to determine the number of CESID digits required L164 8 5 E911 Program 11 1 CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments 8 6 Program 11 1 CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 System Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A LEDs Off 1 2 43 Hold Hol
392. gram 40 Overview This program is used to allow or deny each station and or DISA to use CO lines on a line by line basis This applies to all analog and digital line types Any station can have access to as many lines as desired Any station denied access either to make a call or to answer a call to a line cannot seize it by dialing either an access or pickup code or by using a CO line button This also denies access via Least Cost Routing Also use this program to divide lines for Tenant Service Use Program 40 to deny CO line call pickup If only outgoing access is to be prevented but answering incoming calls should be allowed use Program 41 not Program 40 to deny CO line access Program 40 does not deny access to answer transferred calls If the LED for a CO line is Off in this program access to the line on direct incoming or outgoing calls is denied Important Jf the DISA port is denied CO line access in Program 40 DISA callers cannot access outgoing CO lines when calling in on DISA lines Also External Call Forward will be blocked on the denied lines See DISA port legend Tie Lines If a Tie line is assigned to a line group in Program 16 then program port 900 916 to match the appropriate Tie line group 4 5 UO NILS9Y IIOL Toll Restriction Program 41 Station Outgoing Call Restriction Program 41 Station Outgoing Call Restriction Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction
393. h Program 51 Thus LCR is informed of how to handle local calls Typically systems are configured to have the LCR route plan containing the home area code as the same as the local route plan defined in Program 50 5 Typically you would program it to be Route Plan Number 1 rather than the default Plan 16 6unnoy Ss09 sea 5 5 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Programs 50 3 1 5 LCR Special Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default 977 in 31 all other codes blank 1 2 3 Spkr 5 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 31 35 DATA Special Code Enter 31 35 to indicate Enter the code from the table below the special code Key 01 blank SELECT Special Code 4 Digits Examples 31 911 32 411 33 34 35 Programs 50 3 1 5 Overview This program allows special 1 4 digit codes such as 911 to be routed over the local call route immediately when dialed If Enhanced 911 E911 is required E911 programs should be used instead of this program You can enter five special codes in the spaces provided next to 31 35 The codes can be a maximum of four digits and should include items such as 911 for emergency calls and 411 or 1 411 for local inf
394. h the LDN number that was entered in Program 66 5 for that 001 023 On Trunk Group 67 1 01 3 This tells the system that the PRI Span is for both way calling 67 2 01 LEDs 01 04 On This tells the system to accept Speech 3 1K Analog 56K and 64K type calls on the ISDN PRI Span 68 1 01 LEDs 011 03 On ao the system to accept and send Calling Party Number on ISDN PRI 68 2 01 XXX XXX XXXX XXX XXX XXXX is the number you want the system to send out on an outbound call for Caller Number Identification NASI 7 9 ISDN Call By Call Overview Table 7 4 ISDN PRI LDN Type Call Programming continued Program Number Program Data Description This tells the system to send the number enter in Program 68 2 as the 26971 000 344 1 109 Calling Party Number Identification for all stations on outbound calls 81 89 Programmed as needed for incoming CO Line Ringing Assignment 81 84 Programmed as needed for incoming CO Line Ringing Assignment 87 Call By Call Overview The Call by Call feature enables a group of ISDN B channels to be assigned to calls of multiple network services or even to different carriers on a Call by Call basis Call by Call allocates ISDN trunk groups in a more efficient manner than regular T1 service In order to understand the Call by Call concept it is helpful to examine T1 In a T1 environment specific channels trunks must be pre assigned and provisioned to support
395. he E911 Internal Notification option is enabled disabled in Program 11 0 LED 03 When this option is enabled 911 calls will be sent on the CAMA trunk normally and will also ring on attendant consoles Emergency ICI buttons and a designated telephone s DN PDN or PhDN if assigned in this program Special CESID information regarding the E911 caller will display on attendant consoles monitors and or on notification telephone LCDs to help identify the location of the telephone that dialed 911 All telephones that must be notified when a 911 call is made must have an appearance of the notification DN button Program 39 and the Notification DN must be programmed to ring immediate or delayed the notification telephones Programs 71 72 and or 73 If the notification DN has Call Forward set the call will follow the call forward process as a normal internal call When the notification DN is answered a three party conference is established between the E911 originating station the E911 dispatcher on CAMA trunk and the E91 1notification station console answering party After the E911 notification call is answered it stops ringing on all stations consoles where it was presented E911 Program 12 CESID Station Information Program 12 CESID Station Information Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Data Blank DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 System KI
396. he Program 39 Park in Orbit buttons are not available on a telephone Changing the 331 and 332 codes only applies to Call Park Pickup LED 01 blanks out the Call Park abbreviated dialing data Example If Park Pickup code 331 is changed to the digit 1 Park Pickup functions by dialing 1XXX where XXX is the orbit number in which the call is parked 3 22 System amp Station Program 09 Built in Auto Attendant Prompt Station Assignments Program 09 Built in Auto Attendant Prompt Station Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System and ACD Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 0 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Prompt ah L AUTO ATT DIAL 1 4 digits Press prompt number offered Enter the station numbers PDNs PhDNs DH to caller First or second digit DNs or 4 plus the ACD Group No which will receive Auto Attendant calls Could be if establishing the first digit Press LED Button 01 to delete data Dialed Digit Menu Prompts Station Number PDN Department Division Etc 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Program 09 Overview Program 09 tells the system where to direct calls after incoming Auto Attendant callers dial a digit s in response to the menu of dialing prompts of
397. he appropriate CO Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons in which case you should not program a DN to flash with Program 81 Station assigned in Program 82 and the DN assigned in Program 81 ring after a 12 second delay for 12 seconds and then stop ringing Assign the appropriate DN or Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons to these ports using Program 39 System amp Station Programs 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Ringing Assign any station to ring the AA CO lines in Program 83 86 Day 2 89 Night This assignment is only a flag that notifies the software to delay ring stations assigned in Program 82 Program 83 station assignments do not ring The station assigned in Program 83 will not ring because AA will answer the call after 24 seconds Assign DN buttons that flash ring on this station port using Program 39 No Delay If AA line s are assigned to ring stations in Program 81 but no stations are assigned in Programs 82 or 83 AA will answer the call immediately no delay ring 12 Second Delay If AA line s are assigned to ring stations in Programs 81 and 82 but no stations are assigned in Program 83 stations assigned in Program 81 will ring immediately for 12 seconds and then the AA will answer stations assigned in Program 82 will not ring 24 Second Delay If AA CO line s are assigned to ring stations in Programs 81 82 and 83 then the following ringing occurs Note The Auto Attendant Answe
398. he record sheet next to Office Code Exception Table number Enter the number of the exception table 01 16 Make sure this table number is not entered on any other plan or on the continuation sheet Enter the applicable area code Enter the specific office codes that are to be routed differently than the area code Bunnoy Ss09 see7 5 13 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code 5 14 Program 53 LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Least Cost Routing Initialized Default Assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules M 1 2 3 Spkr 5 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold LCR Plan 1 16 L Start Time HHMM HH 00 23 MM 00 59 Schedule 1 3 OF Route Definition Numbers see Legend below Action Code 0 or LCR Station g Group Number Press LED Button 01 to erase data LED does see Legend below not light Processor Program 56 Program 54 Route Processor Oe euiee Program 54 Route LCR Station Groups Definition G Definition roups DK14 1 4 1 4 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 1 4 DK40i 1 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B83CAU BU 1 8 RC
399. he telephone on which it appears must be assigned to ring in Program 79 uolje1S 9 We sis 3 177 System amp Station Program 80 EKT and DKT Ringing Tones CO Line Calls Program 80 EKT and DKT Ringing Tones CO Line Calls Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Tone 1 is assigned to all ports 1 2 3 Spkr 80 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number T Ringing Tone Code 1 Tone Option 1 2 Tone Option 2 3 Tone Option 3 Enter the telephone port number for which the ringing tone is being defined To specify a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Ring Tone Option 1 2 3 Incoming Line Call 500 640 Hz 1200 1500 Hz 800 1000 Hz Transferred Line Call 540 760 Hz 1300 1780 Hz 880 1180 Hz Incoming Line Call distinctive ring tones apply to DID ground and loop start CO lines Ring tone for internal or DN calls and Tie line incoming calls is 500 Hz for all telephones Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000
400. hen a DID Attendant Console extension number is assigned to ring any one of the Attendant Console ports in the load share group System amp Station Program 10 1 System Assignments Part 1 of 3 Program 10 1 System Assignments Part 1 of 3 Processor Type Program Type System DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default LEDs 07 08 09 16 18 19 and 20 are On 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 pas Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below Button LED X LED On LED Off Not Allowed 20 Two CO Line Conference Allowed Two CO line Conference must be allowed for Tandem Line DISA CF EXT and DNIS external routing operation Also See Program 15 Code 5 19 Conference Allowed Not Allowed 18 Ring Detect Time Normal Ring Detect Time Short Rings 17 id to Station Call Volume PAD No Station to Station Call PAD 16 BRI Standard Initialization 2 TEls None TEI 0 15 13 Not Used Not Used 12 ABR Cycles 10 times 15 times 11 ABR Redial time 30 sec 1 min System Speed Dial Override Toll 10 Restriction Restricted 09 Exclusive Hold Allowed Not Allowed 08 Alternate Point Answer Transfer Privacy Not Allowed 07 Ring Transfer of CO Line Allowed If
401. i on Pages 3 4 3 8 Assign the RBSU without the RBSS piggy back board as type 77 and the RBSU with the RBSS piggy back as type 78 2 For BRI run Program 60 to assign each circuit for CO line TE or Station NT operation 3 Turn system power supply Off five seconds and On to activate Program 03 and 60 program data Note These are the only programs relating to RPTU operation that require system power to be cycled Off and On 4 For PRI run Program 43 to assign which channel on the PRI link is used for the D channel The second assignment specifies the card slot of additional PRI links that are dependent on the master D channel PRI The third assignment sets the ID code for the PRI link For BRI skip to Step 5 5 For BRI run Program 44 to initialize the Service Profile Identifier SPID interface The TE initializes the SPID and sends it to the network Once the SPID is confirmed from the CO it does not have to be sent to the switch again 7 2 ISDN ISDN Related Programs For BRI and PRI run Program 42 to assign the PRI or BRI or T1 circuits to be used for Primary and Secondary Clock Source To enter the program enter the card slot number followed by the circuit number When using the RPTU PRI or RDTU T1 interface then the circuit number is always 1 For BRI and PRI run Program 63 to assign the timer for sending dialed digits Also use this program to enable sub address dialing 63 1 is not zero See the foll
402. ialized Default A LEDs are Off K 1 2 3 Spkr 7 8 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Feature Number ah _ CO Line 1 2 5 or6 Specify CO lines with LED Buttons as defined by the table Code 1 3 below All LEDs with an X should be lit when finished Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back After programming press Press VolA to turn all LEDs On Press VoI to turn all LEDs Off Mode CO line number to display and advance Processor CO Line Range Processor CO Line Range DK14 001 004 B1iCU 001 032 DK40i 001 012 B2CAU BU 001 120 RCTUA 001 016 B3CAU BU 001 120 RCTUBA BB 001 048 B5CAU BU 001 200 RCTUC D 001 144 RCTUE F 001 200 Feature code _ Feature Line Number Description LED 01 02 03 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 3 Ring Over External Page during NIGHT mode 1 DISA CO Line during DAY Mode 2 2 DISA CO Line during DAY2 Mode 3 DISA CO Line during NIGHT Mode Ring IMDU or RMDS Modem during DAY Mode 5 2 Ring IMDU or RMDS Modem during DAY2 Mode 3 Ring IMDU or RMDS Modem during Night Mode 1 Auto Attendant during DAY Mode 6 2 Auto Attendant during DAY2 Mode 3 Auto Attendant during Night Mode
403. ification 4 40 Program 48 Overview This program assigns a combination of Digit Restriction and Station Restriction to each station port defined in the system Digit Restriction If Digit Restriction is enabled for a particular station the station is able to dial the number of digits defined in the Program 45 1 Toll Restriction dialing plan Enter 1 in the Digit Restriction column to enable Digit Restriction for the selected station This prevents a user from dialing a second call when dial tone is returned from a CO after the outside party disconnects Enter 0 in the Digit Restriction column to disable Digit Restriction for the selected station This allows toll restricted users to dial any number of digits e g to an external voice mail device computer etc In systems prior to the DK280 Release 3 1 and in DK40i digit restriction is always applied to restricted stations after dialing a number using system speed dial With all DK424 and DK424i processors digit restriction after dialing a number using system speed dial will only be applied to stations with digit restriction Code 1 in this program Station Restriction Station Restriction assigns Toll Restriction to individual station ports in addition to previous restrictions It includes eleven different choices described below One of the choices must be entered for each port Station restrictions are overridden by lines disabled as defined in Program 45 2 If
404. igits from the record INT XXXX sheet Note Station numbers must not exceed four digits or conflict with feature access codes listed in Program 05 record sheet 7 Hold 04 Select 000 335 Secure data in system programming Data Programmed 8 Spkr Speaker 04 Select Prepare the system for another selection go back to Step 5 or continue with Step 9 9 Hold 00 Select Secure Program 04 data in system memory Data Programmed 10 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 04 system beeps Enter another program number or continue with Step 11 11 Hold No N N Exit programming mode Jan 20 Sun 06 58 1 N N program telephone PDN uole S 9 We sis 3 17 System amp Station Program 04 PhDN and Distributed Hunt DN Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls 3 18 Program 04 PhDN and Distributed Hunt DN Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Station See the legend below DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs B 1 2 43 Spkr 0 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT PhDN or DH DN Port TEEI see table below To erase existing PDNs enter XXX XXX low port high port Adding a new range of PDNs cannot be done in this manner PhDN or DH DN assig
405. igits set in Program 60 7 are not dialed the call will be cut off 20 seconds after the last digit is dialed When not dialing via LCR the digit length should usually be 25 which is the sum of the digits in the telephone 11 and credit card 14 numbers When using LCR a digit length of 11 is recommended Stations that are enabled with 0 credit card calling should not be restricted for dialing 0 or 01 in Programs 46 10 80 and 48 Important More digits than the length set in Program 60 7 are allowed to be dialed there is no limit to the amount of digits that can be dialed Toll Restriction Program 44 1 8 Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override Codes Program 44 1 8 Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default A Classes Blank no code 1 2 3 Spkr 4 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Toll Restriction Class 1 8 DATA Toll Restriction Code for Selected Class 1 4 digits Processor Toll Restriction Class Processor Toll Restriction Class DK14 1 4 RCTUBA BB B1CU 1 4 DK40i 1 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 1 8 RCTUA 1 4 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 1 8 Ura et peer DATA 1 4 Digit Code 1 2 3 4
406. ignment Program 33 PhDN Owner Telephone Assignment Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Blanks no data 1 2 3 Spkr 3 3 Hold Spkr g Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT PhDN Port Reference Number Enter the PDN Owner Station Logical Port Number Processor Type PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range Processor Type PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range DK14 000 009 500 509 B1CU 000 055 500 579 DK40i 000 027 500 527 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 579 B5CAU BU 000 335 500 835 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 PhDN Port Owner Telephone PhDN Port Owner Telephone PhDN Port Owner Telephone Reference Program 04 Reference Program 04 Reference Program 04 Number Port Number Number Port Number Number Port Number uolje S 9 We sis 3 95 System amp Station Program 33 PhDN Owner Telephone Assignment Program 33 Overview This program assigns each PhDN to a designated Owner telephone Each PhDN must be assigned to a designated Owner telephone and that PhDN must be assigned using Program 39 to appear on the owner telephone If a PhDN is not assigned to an
407. ignment See Program 10 2 for standard telephone port DTMF timing This program pertains to manual dialing or speed dialing from all Toshiba telephones with the following exception When dialing manually from 2000 series telephones signals last as long as the buttons are pressed minimum 80 msec LED 03 Dial Pulse DP Make Ratio Dial Pulse timing sent out to CO lines can be changed from the normal 40 make ratio to 33 This selection only applies to those CO lines assigned in Program 15 to signal dialing with dial pulse instead of Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF LED 02 Line Reseize Guard Time Should be set for 0 45 seconds for most installations Set guard time for 1 5 seconds using Program 10 1 LED 02 On and Program 42 0 if CO lines experience the following situations no dial tone when a line is released and reseized immediately or when operating behind Centrex or PBX false hookflash signals are sent to the CO when stations release and reseize the same line immediately LED 01 Tone First Voice First Signaling Electronic and Digital Telephone With Voice First a Directory Number call to an electronic or digital telephone will be preceded by a one second burst of tone followed by voice communication via the Handsfree Answerback function For Tone First repetitive Directory Number ring tone is sent in a one second on three seconds off pattern Conversion from one signaling mode to the other can be made by dialing an additio
408. il Step is completed 1 N N is the Program Telephone DN 2 10 Initialization amp Test Program 92 Initializing Misc Backup RAM Action press buttons LED Buttons LCD Response 7 Spkr Speaker 92 Select Prepare system for another selection go back to Step 5 or exit Program 92 continue with Step 8 8 Hold 92 Select Initialized data in system memory LEDs got out Data Programmed 9 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 92 Enter another program number see Program 30 Station Class of Service on Page 3 76 or exit programming mode go to Step 10 System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 92 10 Hold No N N Exit programming mode Jan 20 Sun 06 43 SOL 9 Uuo01ezIjeu 2 11 Initialization amp Test Program 00 Part 1 Software Check Program 00 Part 1 Software Check Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Test Includes Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments Initialized Default None 2 12 1 2 3 Spkr 0 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Ho
409. in queue until the overflow point destination becomes idle See Flowcharts 6 2 6 3 and 6 4 When the overall queue timer expires the call also attempts to overflow to the destination set in Program 14 4 The call is sent to an idle Agent or to the overflow point set in Programs 14 4 or 14 5 whichever becomes idle first If the overflow destination is the Normal Ring assignment Programs 81 84 and 89 the DK Attendant Console or AA overflow occurs even if the destination is busy See Flowchart 6 4 on Page 6 43 If the overflow destination is the DK AA or Normal Ringing assignments DID Tie DNIS ANI line calls overflow to Program 14 2 assignment only when the destination is idle uOHNqHysIg 2D Wyewo ny 6 25 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination 6 26 Non Repeating Queue Announcement Case 1 Provide callers with one announcement followed by music until the call is answered by an Agent or until the call overflows refer to Flowchart 6 8 on Page 6 47 Overflow time is determined by the overall queue timer Program 11 1 one second to one hour or no overflow Assign Announcement 1 to the appropriate digital announcer standard telephone port Program 14 31 Assign Announcements 2 and 3 to any vacant PDKU or PEKU port Program 14 32 and 14 33 DATA XXX vacant port See Notes Assign music in Program 14 34 See Notes following Case 2
410. in Slot 11 had a DDSS console connected to it the DDSS console would be Console 1 and the digital telephone connected to circuit 1 would be Attendant Telephone 1 As many as four DSS consoles can be assigned to one attendant telephone Because more than one DSS console can be assigned to an attendant telephone the detailed arrangement must be programmed Initialized data assigns one DSS console to one attendant telephone both connected to the same PDKU or PEKU PCB Notes Refer to Program 03 Flexible PCB Slot Assignments for the PCB slots of PEKUs and PDKUs configured to support consoles The system automatically assigns the console supported by the PEKU or PDKU in the lowest number PCB slot to be console number 1 The system automatically assigns the telephone connected to the first station port on a console PDKU or PEKU to be attendant number 1 If more than one console is associated with one attendant telephone then specify the same number attendant telephone for all consoles associated with it System amp Station Program 29 1 8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignments Processor Type Program Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Initialized Default See Program 29 Initialized Default DSS Console Button Assignments on Page 3 73 4 2 3 Spxr 2 9 Hota Spxr _ ML Heta Spkr Hota Spkr Hold SELECT DDSS HDSS console number 1 8 DDSS HDSS LED Butto
411. in feature access codes e See Program 09 or 71 for DID line call routing to DH Groups see Programs 81 89 or Ground Loop start CO line call routing to DH Groups uole S 9 We sis 3 19 System amp Station Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering Processor Type Program Type System Initialized Default See record sheet DkK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs kK 1 2 3 Spkr 0 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Access Code 1 9 SPECIAL DIAL New Access Codes See the table below for standard The first digit of access codes can be replaced by 2 digits access codes Press LED Button 01 to enter blanks Default New Features Affected Access Access Code N A Not Affected Cannot Change Cane 0 Unused Voice First Tone First Dial 1 N A Door Phones 151 159 161 163 IMDU or RMDS Access DK424 and DK40i 19 Default PDNs and Park Orbits see Program 04 Station LCD Messages 10 19 N A Station Speed Dial 100 139 N A RCTUE F B5CAU BU Station Speed Dial Set 10 49 N A RCTUA BA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU Default PDNs and Park Orbits see Program 04 Busy Override Dial 2 N A Do Not Disturb Override Dial 2 N A ACD Ports 04 09 71 Off hook Call Announce 2 N
412. in queue can overflow when they reach a particular point in the queue pattern after the first second or third music timer expires DATA 1 2 or 3 sets the music timer overflow point Queue Timer Expiration Calls can cycle in the queue pattern and the same announcement s and music repeats until the overall queue timer expires no overflow point DATA 0 selects the queue timer expiration See Program 14 3 Code 5 also see Flowcharts 6 2 and 6 8 on Pages Page 6 41 and Page 6 47 Calls in queue can overflow when they reach a particular point in the queue pattern after the first second or third music timer expires or calls can cycle in the queue pattern and the same announcement s and music are repeatedly sent to the destination set in Program 14 4 until the overall queue timer expires see diagram later in this section For further details see Program 14 3 Code 5 or Flowcharts 6 4 and 6 8 on Pages Page 6 43 and Page 6 47 Ifall Agents are Unavailable and the LED 04 is turned On in Program 10 4 calls route to the destination set in Program 14 5 Ifthe overflow station s or DNs are busy when overflow time occurs the following options are available Ifthe call s should exit the ACD queue and mute ring the busy overflow station assign Code 321 normal ringing in Program 14 5 and assign the ACD lines to ring the overflow station DN in Programs 81 84 87 81 84 and 87 Delay Ring assignments do not apply to Progr
413. ine TE 2 2 CO Line TE Station Operation 3 NT default 4 4 Note Power must be cycled Off then On before changes take effect LEDs Program 60 Overview This program assigns each circuit for CO Line TE or ISDN Station NT operation Circuits 1 or 2 can be used for either CO line or ISDN station operation while circuits 3 and 4 can only be used for ISDN station operation NASI 7 21 ISDN Program 61 Analog Trunk Services for ISDN Program 61 Analog Trunk Services for ISDN Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default See below 1 2 3 Spkr 6 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL Type of Service 1 3 L Enter the Bearer Service 1 Bearer Service 0 3 1 kHz Audio 2 Outgoing Call Pad Level 1 Speech default 3 Incoming Call Pad Level Enter the trunk number s being defined DATA For 61 2 and 61 3 enter Pad To add a range enter XXX XXX low Level default is 2 See legend below trunk number high trunk number Data Pad Level db Data Pad Level db 0 0 4 12 1 3 5 15 2 6 6 18 3 9 7 3
414. ine assignments in Program 14 0 which means CO lines that are assigned to AA and ACD Groups will be routed to the AA Automatic Call Distribution Program 09 ACD Group DID Line Digit Assignments Program 09 ACD Group DID Line Digit Assignments uOHNqHysIq 2D dyewo ny Initialized Default See table below 1 2 3 Spkr 0 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold ACD Group Port Number 3 digits __ DID Tie line digits assigned to ACD Group Port Number 1 4 digits ACD Group Default DID Tie Procesno Port Numbers Line Digits DK40i 036 043 42 49 RCTUA 040 047 240 247 RCTUBA BB B1CU 090 097 290 297 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 250 265 450 465 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 345 360 870 885 ACD Group ACD Group Port DID Tie Line Digits Number Number Assigned 1 4 Digits Program 09 Overview Program 09 assigns DID Tie line incoming digits to a particular ACD Group and assigns DID digits to station ports only if Program 71 is not used Related Programs Program 04 assigns Tie line digits to station ports See Programs 09 and 04 in the Strata DK Programming Manual Refer to Program 17 LED 05 for DID and Tie line options Use Program 09 if Program 71 DID Tie DNIS
415. ines the second alarm threshold time for ACD calls waiting in queue ranges from 000 600 seconds If a defined number of ACD calls per Program 14 73 are in queue longer than the time defined in Program 11 7 the ACD Supervisor telephone is sent a beeping alarm indication 2400 Hz 10 Hz one continuous sound Program 14 8 DATA must be set to 2 for the Call Waiting Alarm Timer 2 to operate Code 8 Alarm Guard Timer Defines the minimum time interval between queue alarm signals sent to the Supervisor telephone The timer can be set from 01 30 minutes If the timer is set to 00 the Reset Queue Alarm button does not function to end a queue alarm indication on the Supervisor telephone Example If the queue alarm sounds at the Supervisor telephone and the Supervisor resets the alarm by pressing the flashing Reset Queue Alarm button the Alarm Guard Timer begins to count down from the time set in this program If the number of calls in the ACD queue still exceeds the queue size set in Program 14 71 72 or 73 after the Alarm Guard Timer expires the alarm sounds again on the Supervisor telephone 6 9 uonnq 4siq 2D syewony Automatic Call Distribution Program 11 ACD Timing Assignments Code 9 Call Disconnect Timer Defines the maximum time an ACD call can remain in queue ranges from 01 60 minutes This timer should be used when using loop start Tie or DID DNIS ANI on ACD lines This prevents CO lines from being connected to
416. ing Program 12 System Assignments Basic Timing Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Initialized Default Program Timing Code 1 15 secs Code 3 1 min Code 4 2 secs Code 5 0 secs Code 8 1 min Code 9 4 secs 4 2 3 Spkr 1 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 3 5 8 9 DATA Enter ring down time 00 60 FEN tie eas from SELECT CODE Enter the 1 digit code which corresponds to the time listed in the table below For Program Codes 8 and 9 the LCD responds with LINE TIME instead of SELECT CODE Bogen Function Code Time eues 1 Standard Telephone Ring Down Timer Release 4 0 XX XX 2 digits 00 60 secs 3 Pause Timing 1 1 5 sec Speed Dial 2 3 0 sec 1 0 5 sec 4 Flash Timing 2 2 0 sec Not used in U S 4 0 2 sec 5 eerie 0 no pause 5 Voice ae Delay 1 ese 2 3 0 sec 7 SLT Toll Restriction DTMF Receiver time after Dial 9 XX XX 01 30 sec 0 no disconnect timer 8 DNIS Ext Network External Call Forward and DISA 1 4 min disconnect Disconnect Timer for Loop Start Lines 2 10 min disconnect 3 20 min disconnect r T e ees Program 12 Overview This program assigns system times for ring down disconnecting calls pause times flash times au
417. ing plan will have to be implemented e Be sure access code changes do not conflict with existing access code or station numbering schemes Refer to Program 04 Port Station Number Assignment e If access codes are being changed to a number that is currently assigned change the currently assigned code to an unused code first In the initialized state the only unused code is zero 0 3 21 System amp Station Program 05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing Program 05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 0 5 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 DATA 1 or 2 digit abbreviated SELECT Call Park type dialing for Call Park Pickup 1 Change 331 Call Park Pickup Code 2 Change 332 Call Park Pickup Code It is only necessary to change one code but each code can be changed to the same or different Park Pickup dialing codes Program 05 Overview This program assigns two Call Park Pickup abbreviated dialing codes to pick up parked calls For dialing convenience the 1 or 2 digit abbreviation for Call Park Pickup replaces the Call Park access codes 331 and 332 To park calls Code 331 and 332 must still be used if t
418. ioes 2 12 Program 00 Part 2 Processor RAM Test ccccessccessseceeseceseeeeeececaeceeaeceeaeeceaeeceaeeeeaaeneaaeceeaeeeeeeeesas 2 15 Chapter 3 System amp Station Program 01 Station Logical Port Display and or Change ceeeeeeseeeseeeeceeceseeeeceseseneeeseeenaes 3 1 Program 02 Station Physical Port Display and or Change cee ceeceecceseeereecseeceseeeeeeseeeseeeaeeenaes 3 2 Program 03 for DK14 Slot Assignments 2 0 0 0 ee esessceeseceseceeeeeseeeseessecaeceseeeaeecaeesaeceaeceaecneeeeneesaes 3 3 Contents System amp Station Program 03 for DK40i Flexible PCB Slot Assignments 0 ccc ecescesceeeeeseeeseecseececeseceseeeseeeseeenaes 3 4 Program 03 for DK424 Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignment ceseesceseceseceseceeeeeeeeneeenees 3 6 Program 03 for DK424i Flexible PCB Cabinet Slot Assignment 0 ces sssesseceseceseceseeeeeeseeenees 3 8 Program 03 for DK424 Cabinet Type Identification 20 0 ee eeeceeseceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeseaaeeeaaeceeeeeeees 3 12 Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment eee eeceeescesseceseceseceseeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeaeee 3 13 Program 04 PhDN and Distributed Hunt DN Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls 3 18 Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering cc ceeceeceeseeeseeseceeceeeeeeeeeaecaaecaeeseeseneeeeeenaeenaee 3 20 Program 05 Call Park Pickup Abbreviated Dialing 0 ei ceec ee eeeesecsseceneceeeeeneeeaeceaec
419. ion can dial a VAC after accessing a CO line by pressing the Speed Dial 50 DK14 DK40 RCTUA C D B1CU B2CAU BU and B3CAU BU Speed Dial 050 RCTUE F and BSCAU BU or by pressing the Account Code button Forced Account Code requirements are assigned via station and line program options stations are assigned in Program 30 LED 08 On and lines are assigned in Program 15 7 Stations must dial VACs when assigned in Program 30 LED 14 On Direct Inward System Access DISA callers that access outgoing lines can be required to enter Verified Account Codes with Program 30 LED 08 On for Port 99 3 149 System amp Station Program 70 Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments Program 70 Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default 000 for all VACNs 1 2 3 Spkr 70 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Verified Account Code Ess VAC Restrict Code 00 10 Number VACN 00 No Station Toll Restriction DATA VAC Digit Restriction 2 ae 0 No Digit Restriction 01 Area Code Toll Restriction 1 Digit Restriction 02 Area Code Toll Restriction and 0 or 1 as 1st or 2nd digit 03 Class 1 T R 07 Class 5 T R 04 Class 2 T R 08 Class 6 T R
420. ion destinations 6 16 Program 15 CO line tenant assignments 3 50 Program 16 ISDN trunk group type assignment 7 15 Program 17 DID intercept port number vacant or wrong number 3 56 Program 31 group pickup assignments 3 89 Program 32 RS 232 voice mail message center port 3 92 Program 33 PhDN owner telephone assignment 3 95 Program 34 station class of service 3 98 Program 36 system NT button lock password changing station assignment 3 106 Program 37 park recall timing 3 108 Program 40 for DK424 distributed hunt group member assignments 3 124 Program 41 for DK424 T1 assignment series part 1 3 126 Program 42 clock source for T1 ISDN Program 43 1 3 D channel control and NFAS assignments 7 17 Program 43 2 non facility associated signaling NFAS assignment 7 18 Program 43 3 network PRI interface assignment 7 19 Program 44 BRI service profile ildentifier SPID parameters 7 20 Program 45 1 toll restriction for office codes 4 23 Program 45 2 1 6 LCR toll restriction bypass for special numbers 4 24 Program 45 3 1 9 LCR toll restriction bypass for special numbers 4 26 Program 45 4 special code dialing sequence with LCR 4 28 Program 45 5 Overlap Area Code 4 30 Program 50 caller ID circuit assignments to CO line PCBs 3 131 Program 51 station memory allocation for store caller ID ANI 3 133 Program 52 caller ID ANI abandoned call number station owner assignments
421. ion digit length that the SMDI voice mail system design requires This parameter is set for the Voice Mail system digit length not the DK station digit length If the voice mail system SMDI is designed per the Bellcore Standard TR TS Y 000283 1985 version set this parameter to seven digits LEDs 10 11 and 12 On which is equal to Hex 7 Current VP and Stratagy voice mail SMDI systems are designed for this seven digit operation If the voice mail system SMDI is designed per the Bellcore Standard TR NWT 000283 1991 version set this parameter between 1 10 digits with LEDs 10 11 12 and 13 See Program 10 3 record sheet for LED HEX values Digit length setting is not necessary with Toshiba Proprietary Interface LED 10 13 Off LED 08 Caller ID Automatic Number ID This option determines if Caller ID CLID and or Automatic Number Identification ANI telephone numbers will be sent out the system SMDI port SMDI only not Toshiba proprietary Turn LED 08 10 11 12 and 13 On if received Caller ID and or ANI numbers should be sent out the system SMDI port Turn LED 08 Off initialized default if received Caller ID and or ANI numbers should not be sent out the system SMDI port LED 09 SMDI Bellcore Standard Version Toshiba Proprietary and SMDI is available with RCTUB2 or RCTUC RCTUD2 Release 2 and above only and is only for use with Toshiba VP systems not with Toshiba Stratagy systems uole S 9 We sis Bellcore released tw
422. ional padded DTMF frequency system tone is returned to callers at a lower than normal volume level with each digit dialed from the telephone dial pad or when speed dialing is used The tones are also heard by callers routed to voice mail when DK sends VM ID codes LED 19 Stations Use External Amplified Conference Enable this feature LED 19 On only if an external amplifier Program 10 3 is used for Two line conference calls This provides additional amplification to the station during a Two line conference call If Two CO line conference tandem call volume is low due to CO line loss Toshiba recommends testing two line Conference with LED 19 On if it improves the volume level and there is no hum noise keep LED 19 On Disable this feature LED 19 Off if an external amplifier is not switched into two line conference calls in all cases Do this because line unbalance may cause hum noise on the station talk path during Two CO line conference calls LED 18 Two CO Line Conference LED 18 should be Off whenever Two line Tandem DNIS Network External Call Forward DISA connection is allowed in Program 15 5 and Program 10 1 LEDs 19 and 20 unless Two CO line conference amplifiers are connected Program 10 3 LED 01 04 uole S 9 We sis This increases the volume level between the two outside parties on a tandem two line connection but it will not affect station volume if conferenced into the tandem connection If Two CO line volume is
423. ires GO to ACD Flowchart 6 7 Yes Ring No Answer Talk on ACD call 0846 Notes 1 No overflow means the call will not exit queue to ring the busy overflow destination The call exits queue and rings the busy overflow destination as soon as the destination goes idle 2 Overflow means the call will exit an ACD queue and busy override or mute ring the busy destination 3 System DNs include Program 04 PDNs SDNs and Program 04 PhDNs 4 The call will not overflow into a DH queue when all DH Group members are busy or in DND 6 41 uOHNqHysIq 2D dyewo ny Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 3 ACD Time Out Overflow Call enters ACD queue calls waiting in an ACD group s queue can be sent to an overflow destination if they have been in queue longer than the time duration set in Program 11 1 Queue Over ow Timer Notes Call remains in queue the Strata DK System DNs include Has the queue continuously monitors for an idle agent Program 04 PDNs SDNs overflow timer in Program queue overflow timer time out or 11 1 expired overflow point per Program 14 5 See ACD Flowchart 6 2 Program 04 PhDNs DH Distributed Hunt Group CO lines will atttempt to exit the ACD group s queue and will route to the group s Queue Time out Overflow Destination set in Program 14 4 In
424. irst number dialed in an 11 digit string the next three digits are an area code 1 AC 7 digit number A ten digit string is not recognized AC 7 digit number Digits 2 4 and 5 7 in an 11 digit string are NXX format and are interchangeable The first three digits in a seven digit string are an office code There is no distinction between local call dialing and long distance dialing within the area code If 16 digit dialing Area Code 7 digits is required to be unrestricted and routed over the local LCR route program the Area Code in Program 46 2 4 and Program 45 2 Same as Plan 7 except a new 7 digit carrier access code must be 101 YX XX format where Y is 0 5 or 6 X is 0 to 9 Same as Plan 7 except a new 7 digit carrier access code must be 101X XXX format where X is 0 to 9 Area codes and office codes in XXX format where X is 0 to 9 are allowed to be programmed in the area code and office code tables for Toll Restriction and Least Cost Routing purposes Only area codes formatted N 0 1 X and office codes formatted NNX are valid on call processing for the old dial plans 1 2 3 New area codes NXX are valid only in NANP dialing plans 7 8 9 Office codes of the form NNX and NXX are valid on call processing for the old dialing plans 1 2 3 and new dialing plans 7 8 9 respectively For international calls area code 011 and office codes XXX as country codes are valid on the call processing for all dialing pl
425. is pressed PhDNs or DH DNs can be entered with DK Release 3 2 and above software only Press LED Button 01 to enter blanks E eee PEE et eae DK14 000 009 500 509 900 915 B1CU 000 055 500 579 900 915 DK40i 000 027 500 527 900 915 B2CAU BU 000 111 500 739 900 915 RCTUA 000 031 500 531 900 915 B3CAU BU 000 191 500 739 900 915 RCTUBA BB 000 079 500 579 900 915 B5CAU BU 000 335 500 835 900 915 RCTUC D 000 239 500 739 900 915 RCTUE F 000 335 500 835 900 915 Port Forward to Tel Port Port Forward to Tel Port Port Forward to Tel Port Port Forward to Tel Port Program 36 Overview Fixed Call Forwarding is different from other station Call Forwarding options It is fixed in terms of the destination PDN which is assigned in this program The station user cannot change the Fixed Call Forward destination unlike the other station Call Forwarding options If Fixed Call Forwarding is set on a station the station does not ring and all calls forward immediately Note this feature See Programs 39 and 59 Telephones and attendant consoles must have a Fixed Call Forward button to activate uolje S 9 We sis 3 105 System amp Station Program 36 System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment Program 36 System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment Processor Type
426. is program assigns Listed Directory Numbers LDNs trunk groups to the member s channel group Note The number of direct appearing CO lines cannot exceed the number of CO ports allocated in Program 03 One PRI card Type 79 assigns 24 B channels thus allowing 24 direct appearances For Programs 66 5 and 66 6 Multiple calls can be received with the same LDN The LDN and Channel Group information in 66 5 and 66 6 must match Calls are assigned the next available non busy port as follows For PRI Choose the highest available port to the lowest For BRI Choose the lowest available the highest Multiple LDNs can be assigned to the same CO appearances Note In Release 4 15 DID DNIS digits must be registered in this program in order to route incoming calls on PRI 7 34 ISDN Program 66 7 LDN Trunk Group Assignments Program 66 7 LDN Trunk Group Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 7 L DIR Trunk Group 1 16 Enter the Channel 0 blank ue lowest POTS trunk Group Number 1 8 group Is used Enter the LDN Index 1 48 See Program 66 5 Channel LDN Trunk Groups Group Index 1 2 EATS NASI 1 WW ea de Ww We we
427. it 43 0 AC OC XXXX Yes 3 102 System amp Station Program 35 Station Class of Service Table 3 2 ISDN Immediate Dialing for Call Types continued Call Type Program Number Dialed from Station ISDN Immediate Dialing Available 45 1 7 Equal Access National 10XXX Equal Access OAC Yes 45 1 8 Equal Access Local 1010XXX Equal Access Credit Equal Access 1015XXX Equal Access International No 1015XXX Equal Access Operator 45 1 9 101XXX Au e XX_ Ext 69 Return Call No due to an insufficient number of digits Special Dlal 50 3 N11 Yes Immediate Dialing complies with NANP therefore it doesn t apply when the number of digits dialed are not fixed as in an international call the dialed number competes with other types of calls such as operator or credit calls a special dialing number system is provided by the telephone company such as class of service Immediate Dialing also does not work for DNIS network routing see Program 72 DISA external connection features CF EXT Also if a numb er that is Toll Restricted is dialed the call will be blocked For LCR the SETUP message is sent out without requiring the Start button if Start is registered in Program 55 LCR Modified Digits Table on Page 5 19 Speed Dial Redial can be used to make immediate outgoing calls act like ISDN Immediate Dialing calls see
428. k group service Example 1 ISDN Call By Call Overview In Call by Call each trunk group has a number of channels reserved as minimum and a number of channels available to be shared Shared channels are available on a Call by Call basis For example in Figure 7 2 11 channels 2 5 4 11 are programmed as the minimum number of reserved channels in Trunk Groups 1 2 and 3 To determine the number of channels available to be shared subtract the minimum channels from the 23 total channels 23 11 12 ISDN Channel Group 1 kwoONnN 23 B Channels ISDN Channel Group 1 has 23 B channels available for Trunk Groups 1 2 and 3 Trunk Group 1 2 programmed as minimum for 800 numbers Trunk Group 2 5 programmed as minimum for DIDs Trunk Group 3 4 programmed as minimum for Tie line calls 4915 Minimum You can reserve B channels for trunk groups by programming them as minimum Trunk Group 1 above has 2 minimum Trunk Group 2 has 5 and Trunk Group 3 has 4 There are a total of 11 2 5 4 minimum channels Figure 7 2 Example 1 Call by Call and Min Max Control 23 total channels 11 minimum channels 12 shared channels The 12 shared channels are available to all three trunk groups ona Call by Call basis first come first served Shared The number of shared channels available for a particular trunk group varies dynamically according to the usage by other trunk groups 7 11 N
429. k group uses DID private numbers or a default number from Program 68 2 Calling Number Presentation for outbound calls is used by the public network to send the telephone number to the called location For each phone in the system assign an index value to define the Calling Number to be sent to the public network Each index value can be defined to provide a specific 10 digit telephone number DATA Type 2 or a DID prefix value with the final digits to be programmed in 09 DATA Type 1 to complete the 10 digit telephone number The number of indexes is 32 maximum and an index value of zero 0 will cause the ISDN systems to send the default number Program 69 provides a method to present the call back number that can be used to reach that station This number can either be a DID number or a designated number that is programmed to ring that particular station Through subscription options from the public service provider this Calling Party Number can be used for billing calls This capability may be required for office suites and certain contracted obligations needing independent accounting for the telephone service This subscription can require number screening When screened calls not presenting a valid billing number will be rejected by the service local provider If optional calls will always be placed and a number sent that does not match will be billed to the main number for that site E911 This chapter contains programming reco
430. l be applied according to the TR LCR programming of the DK receiving the incoming Tie line call and placing the outgoing tandem call Call Park on tandem calls Once the outgoing call is made over a Tie line it can be parked and retrieved by the originating caller at the far end system To allow the above features to function station port memory must be used as working memory buffers during call processing time Use Key LED 17 18 and 19 to assign memory buffers see Table 3 1 The number of memory buffers assigned must match the number of DTMF receivers installed in the DK system receiving the Tie line call that is establishing the outgoing tandem connection System amp Station Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Tandem Parameters EN LED 19 LED 18 LED 17 0 Off Off Off 4 Off Off On 8 Off On Off 12 Off Off On 16 On Off Off 20 On On On 24 On On Off Note LEDs 19 18 17 Off disables the feature Table 3 1 DTMF Buffers Important The ports used for buffer memory are not available for telephones The ports are automatically assigned from the highest numbered port down for the number of ports used Example if four ports are needed as buffers in an RCTUC D then ports 239 238 237 and 236 will not be viable for telephones The first port that uses memory for this feature by processor DK40i 027 RCTUA 032 RCTUBA BB B1CU 079 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 239 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 335 uO
431. l memory from rotary phones or phones without the Speed Dial and Redial buttons enter 44 7XXX instead of 7XXX Start Trace 489 Station Port 000 only Stop Trace 488 Station Port 000 only Cancel Auto Call Back 43 3 20 System amp Station Program 05 Flexible Access Code Numbering Default Access Code Features Affected N A Not Affected Cannot Change New Access Codes Call Pickup Station 5 Station No Ringing CO or DID line 59 Directed Pickup of CO Line on Hold 5 7 XXX XXX 001 200 Selected Group Pickup 5 320 339 Own Group s Pickup 5 34 Pickup Ringing Line 59 uole S 9 We sis 5 DN Pickup 5 2 XXX XXX PDN or PhDN DK Pick up External Page 5 30 or for Zone Page Release 3 1 and above 5 35 38 pe i Verified Account Codes DK14 DK40i RCTUA C D 5 79 Pick up Tandem Connection Release 3 2 and Speed Dial 50 RCTUE F BSCAU BU Speed Dial above 050 Call Forward 601 602 603 604 T R Override Code Change 654 655 Timed Reminder 605 609 System Speed Dial M W for Voice Mail On 63 Station No N A 600 699 RCTUB RCTUBA BB RCTUC D and M W for Voice Mail Off 64 Station No BICU B2CAU BU BICAU BU gt System Speed Dial Set N A 60 99 DK14 DK40i valce Mal ID Code Set Call Fwd 656 and RCTUA Voice Mail ID God Seti ins MW GST LCD User Name 621 Set 620 Reset TR dial plan LCD Message Set 68 Set 650 6
432. l overflow to a designated attendant console or station port Program 58 5 if the call is not answered within the time 011 999 seconds specified by this program The overflow call will ring on either the In Trans button assigned in Program 59 of the console that receives the overflow call or the DN or CO Line button of a station Notes e This program sets overflow timer for all attendant consoles 1 4 e The overflow destination is assigned in Program 58 5 uolje S 9 We sis Program 58 2 Attendant Console Display Type Initialized Default A I LEDs Off 1 2 3 Spkr 5 8 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 nR pas LED Button 01 On for EL or Off for EGA display Console Number 1 4 LED Button 02 On sets Answer Button operation for First In First Out FIFO or priority per Program 58 4 LED Button 03 On sets Attendant Console Call Waiting Tone LED Button 04 On selects the PC Attendant Console Off selects the traditional Attendant Console Button 01 LED Button 02 LED Button 03 LED Button 04 LED Attendant On Off Off Console On Off On Off 58 Call Waitin On iti g No Call Traditional EL EGA ee 4 Tone Waiting Tone sender Console kl olny 3 137 System amp Station Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series Part 1 3 138 Program 58 2 Overview This program identifies in
433. lated to this program CO line calls disconnected by the AR CPC signal will be represented on the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR report by a next to the CO line number Code 3 does not apply to ground start lines which automatically disconnect when the external party hangs up See Important note in earlier paragraph on Code 0 DK424 only If loop start lines are programmed to detect the AR CPC Hold signal they do not remain on the attendant console loop keys when the attendant console sets up trunk to trunk connection If programmed to ignore AR CPC Hold they remain on the attendant console Hold loop keys Important Enable AR CPC Hold detect on loop start lines only after testing that the CO sends the AR CPC Hold signal Code 4 Automatic Release AR Time AR CPC signaling timing is different depending on the Central Office equipment An assignment choice exists between Crossbar or ESS Central Offices For more information on AR CPC see the preceding Code 0 and Code 3 sections Code 5 Tandem Line Connection Once a Two line Conference call is made by an electronic digital or in R3 2 standard telephone users or voice mail ports the user or voice mail device may drop out of the conference and leave the two lines connected The choice exists for each line that may have this capability This option must be enabled to allow CO lines ground loop Tie DID to be used for outgoing DISA Call Forward External and Tie DID DNI
434. ld Spkr Hold Select Code Password Codes 4 digits eee tem Pree ootan _ LSD Bisply 0 ROM Version not programmable eee below 1 1st Level Password Password 2 2nd Level Password Password 8 Software RAM Checksum not programmable Sum 9 Power Cycle Counter not programmable Counter MERECOOCOO O0 KREME DKT LCD Display gt L x 1 2 0r3 see table below ROM Version If RKYS KKYS or QKYS is installed 4904 DKT LCD Display Processor Type DKT LCD Display Processor Type QMA DK8 RAA4X RCTUA4 PSSA DK16 RBA4X RCTUBA4 BB4 WMA4 DK14 RCA4X RCTUC4 D4 TMA4 DK16e DK40 DK40i REA4X RCTUE4 F4 RAA RCTUA R1 R2 B1A4X B1CU RBA RCTUB R1 R2 B2A4X B2CAU BU RCA RCTUC R1 R2 B3A4X B3CAU BU RAA3X RCTUA3 B5A4X B5CAU BU RBA3X RCTUBA3 RCTUBB3 RCA3X RCTUC3 D3 REA3X RCTUE4 F4 Key Type Description KEY 1 RKYS1 KKYS1 or QKYS installed Built in Auto Attendant software KEY 2 AA and ACD software RKYS2 KKYS2 installed KEY 3 RKYS3 KKYS3 installed ACD MIS and AA installed Initialization amp Test Program 00 Part 1 Software Check Program 00 Part 1 Overview This program enables you to run various checks on the Strata DK System DK14 the QKYS feature key must be installed on the QRCU3 PCB to allow AA DK40i the KKYS feature key must be installed on the KSRCU PCB to allow AA DK424 and DK424i the RKYS feature key must be installed on the RCTU or BCU to allow AA ACD and ACD MIS Code 0 ROM Version Code
435. line calls in pooled line groups only flash on Pooled Line buttons When disabled LED 12 Off the Pooled Line LED flashes when an incoming line call is received even if the telephone does not ring LED 11 Busy Override BOV Tone Digital or Electronic Telephones If a DN is busy and receives a call on an idle DN or CO button from another station or an outside line then BOV tone is sent BOV tone can be continuous muted one second rings LED 11 On or two muted one second rings three seconds apart LED 11 Off If all the DN button appearances of the called DNs are busy the call will camp on and the telephone receives two muted rings camp on tone three seconds apart only if LED 01 is On for the telephone in Program 34 This BOV feature does not apply to CO lines that are ring transferred to a busy telephone with or without an idle DN or CO Line button In this case the call is a camped on call to the busy telephone BOV and Camp on muted ring tone frequency for digital and electronic telephones 1209Hz modulated by 10Hz on CO line calls 1209Hz unmodulated on station to station calls Standard Telephones This feature does not apply to Camp on tone sent to standard telephones Standard telephones only receive two Camp on tone bursts three seconds apart regardless of this BOV Tone feature s setting Also you must run Program 34 to enable a standard telephone to receive Camp on tone Camp on tone is sent when the b
436. ll four digits Note If LCR software sees Schedules 1 and 2 have the same start times then it only looks at Schedule 1 for route definitions 2 Enter Route Definition numbers for Schedules 1 and 2 Four definitions route pick or choices can be entered for each group LCR Station Class Groups 1 8 are assigned in Program 56 LCR Route Definition numbers 1 4 or 1 6 are defined in Program 54 3 The order in which the route definitions are entered defines the order of LCR line selection The most desirable route should be entered in the left most position and the least desirable route in the right most position 4 If 1 is assigned to Station Group 1 and 1 for route definition only then those assigned will only be able to use Route Definition 1 thereby restricting them during times that route definition 1 is not allowed 5 Keep in mind that the route definition number is being entered not the CO line group number The definitions are assigned in Program 54 Installation Requiring Time Scheduling Feature When an installation requires the time scheduling feature to be programmed three shifts of route definitions can be assigned per station group To reflect this on the record sheet substitute Step 1 of the procedure described for the typical customer with the following Enter the Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1 2 and 3 Use military time in the format HH MM Hours Minutes Fill in all four digits Initialize
437. low due to CO line loss test the volume level with LED 18 On If it improves without adding hum noise keep LED 18 On LED 17 TRNS Soft Key Immediate Transfer If this feature is activated and a transfer is initiated with the TRNS Soft Key the call will ring transfer Camp on Busy immediately after the last digit of the called station busy or idle number is dialed This feature does not apply to transfers initiated with the fixed Cnf Trn button or CONF Soft Key LED 16 Executive Override Warning Tone Executive Override allows a station user if assigned in to break into and listen to an existing station conversation A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties 3 31 System amp Station Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 of 3 3 32 LED 15 External Page Included with All Call Page External speakers and all electronic and digital telephones are paged by dialing Directory Number DN 39 The All Call Page button is used to page all digital and electronic telephones only external speakers are not included when using the button If the All Call voice page access code 39 is entered or if the paging number is dialed on incoming Tie DID or DNIS lines external page all zones may be included with All Call telephone speaker paging This option does not affect the All Call Page button function which activates electronic and digital telephone speakers only never extern
438. ls Enter the Time Zone 1 3 For Rel 4 0 enter 1 Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 B channels reserved B channels reserved B channels reserved Min Max Min Max Min Max Trunk Groups CON or B G NM 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Program 67 3 Overview This program defines the minimum number of B channels reserved for this service Each of the three time zones may have a different value Enter the minimum and maximum number of B channels reserved for each Time Zone 7 38 ISDN Program 67 4 ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel Reservation Program 67 4 ISDN Trunk Groups Maximum Channel Reservation Processor Type All RCTUs Release 4 15 or higher DK40i and all BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type Trunk PRI Initialized Default 23 maximum default channels 1 2 3 Spkr 6 7 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 4 MAX Maximum number of B channels reserved Enter the Trunk Group 01 16 0047 when sharing D channels Max 47 Enter the Time Zone 1 3 NASI Program 67 4 Overview This program specifies the maximum number of B channels that can be used to carry calls with this service Each of the three time zones may have a different v
439. m 09 are dialed on incoming calls the calls will alternately ring the Load Share consoles Auto Attendant Delay Ring gt To set Auto Attendant Delay Ring operation Note Ifthe Auto Attendant must answer calls on the first ring do not assign CO lines to ring 3 182 telephones in Programs 81 89 Assign CO lines to ring the Auto Attendant AA in Program 78 Program 78 61 AA DAY Program 78 62 AA DAY 2 Program 78 63 AA NIGHT Assign stations that should ring immediately for 12 seconds before the AA answers to the AA CO lines in Program 81 84 Day 2 87 Night Also assign the DN that should flash when the CO lines ring with Program 81 84 Day 2 87 Night As an option the station can be equipped with the appropriate CO Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons in which case you should not program a DN to flash with Program 81 Stations assigned in Program 81 and the DN assigned in Program 81 ring immediate for 12 seconds and then stop ringing unless they are also assigned to ring in Program 82 Assign DN for the appropriate CO Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons to these ports using Program 39 Assign stations that should ring after a 12 second delay for 12 seconds before the AA answers to the AA CO lines in Program 82 85 Day 2 88 Night Also assign the DN that should flash when the CO lines ring with Program 81 84 Day 2 87 Night As an option the station can be equipped with t
440. m 11 0 Overview This program enables E911 calls to be analyzed by the system for appropriate handling The following assignments in Program 11 0 must be enabled to allow Enhanced 911 E911 CAMA trunks to operate LED 11 CAMA Operation Enabled Disabled Led 11 must be turned On to enable the E911 feature to operate LED 10 07 CAMA Trunk Circuits Enabled Disabled Up to four CAMA RMCU RCMS trunks can be installed on Release 4 0 DK424 and DK424i systems Turn LEDs 07 10 On to enable the appropriate CAMA trunks 1 4 RMCU RCMS CAMA trunk circuit are numbered 1 4 from the bottom up see the front of the installed RMCU RCMS If only one RCMS is to be installed place it on the bottom position of the RCMU The Universal Slot PCB and Universal PCB Wiring chapters of the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual provides details regarding RMCU RCMS PCB installation and circuit numbering LED 03 Internal Notification of E911 Calls Enabled Disabled To allow Attendant consoles and station DNs to be called along with the E911 CAMA trunk when a 911 call is made LED 03 must be turned Off With this feature enabled E911 calls will ring the CAMA trunk plus the Incoming Emergency IN Ermg button on all Attendant consoles and the DN button PDN or PhDN designated in Program 11 8 The designated DN must be programmed to ring telephones in 71 72 and 73 as required for each telephone on which the designated DN appears E911 Progr
441. m 40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments Program 40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs Program Type Station Initialized Default No member station port assigned to any DH Group A 1 2 3 Spkr 4 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Distributed Hunt DH aries DATA Hunt Port Number Group Number see legend When editing the data field use LED Hunt order 01 32 Button 01 to delete a number Processor DH Port Range Hunt Port Range Processor DH Port Range Hunt Port Range DK14 900 915 000 009 B1CU 900 915 000 055 DK40i 900 915 000 027 B2CAU BU 900 915 000 111 RCTUA 900 915 000 031 B3CAU BU 900 915 000 191 RCTUBA BB 900 915 000 079 B2CAU BU 900 915 000 055 RCTUC D 900 915 000 239 B5CAU BU 900 915 000 335 RCTUE F 900 915 000 335 DH Port Hunt Order Hunt Port DH Port Hunt Order Hunt Port DH Port Hunt Order Hunt Port 900 915 01 32 Number 900 915 01 32 Number 900 915 01 32 Number 3 124 System amp Station Program 40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignments Program 40 Overview This
442. m number may be entered 4 Spkr Speaker 03 Select Prepare the system for a selection 5 Dial a PCB slot number 00 78 for DK424 or 00 18 for DK40i using 03 Select 00 78 the dial pad Card 91 62 or 00 The system defaults as follows 03 Select 00 Slot Number 00 Card 91 Initialized default assigns slot 00 and 01 to be a non optioned RCTU without RRCS DTMF receivers or DK40i Base without K4RCU3 K5RCU and K5RCU2 11 03 Select 11 Slot Number Initialized default assigns slot 11 to be anon optioned PDKU without Card 61 DSS console or OCA Code 61 ss P3 03 Select 12 78 Slot o9 at 12 78 ey 00 18 DK40i Minberi Initialized default assigns slot 12 78 to be empty Code 00 Guta e060 6 00 99 03 Select 00 78 Dial the PCB code recorded on the record sheet Refer to the PCB Card 00 97 code reference table on Program 03 record sheet for a definition of the codes 7 Hold 03 Select 00 78 Secure data in system programming Data Programmed 8 Spkr Speaker 03 Select Prepare system for another selection go back to Step 5 or continue with Step 9 9 Hold 92 Select Secure Program 92 data in system memory Data Programmed 10 Spkr Speaker Program Exit Program 92 system beeps Enter another program number or exit programming mode go to Step 11 11 Hold No 205 Exit programming mode Jan 20 Sun 06 58 12 To secure Program 03 entries Power off for five seconds then power on or run Pr
443. mally it is required to send 911 but this will vary so you must check with the CAMA trunk provider to identify what to enter into this program Digits sent on the CAMA trunk are multi frequency MF tones so they cannot be checked with a DTMF test set 8 8 E911 Program 11 6 E911 Interdigital Timer Program 11 6 E911 Interdigital Timer Processor Type DK4o0i all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 Program Type System Initialized Default Data 2 seconds KIH 1 2 3 Spkr 1 1 Hold Spkr 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 6 DATA interdigital time delay before routing calls after 9XX 01 15 seconds If X 1 timer resets If X 0 2 9 digits are routed sent normally DATA 01 15 secs Program 11 6 Overview This program assigns the amount of time allotted for the E911 interdigital timer When the E911 feature is enabled the DK applies the E911 interdigital timer any time a user dials 9 as the first digit This applies to any type of call originated from a DN when you dial 9XX or 9 9XX After 9 is dialed as the first digit the DK will wait the number of seconds set in this program before processing the dialed digit If 91 or 99 is dialed as the first and second digit the system will wait the number of seconds set in this program before processing the dialed digits If 91X is dialed the system will route the call out the C
444. mation for the Strata DK40i DK424 and DK424i systems and their stations ACD is not available for the DK14 The programs specific to ACD are listed below ff gt gt gt H e e eH o o o oo o o o oo oo O amp H Program 03 RSIU RSSU PIOU or PIOUS ACD MIS Slot Assignments Program 09 Auto Attendant Prompt ACD Group Assignments Program 09 ACD Group DID Tie Line Digit Assignments use if Program 71 is not used Program 10 4 ACD Parameters Program 11 ACD Timing Assignments Program 14 0 Loop Ground Start CO Line Direct Ring to ACD Group Assignments Program 14 1 ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments Program 14 1 Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID Program 14 2 ACD Supervisor Passwords Program 14 2 DID Tie DNIS ANI Line After Shift and Overflow Substitution Destination Program 14 3 Announcement Music Port Assignments and Queue Pattern Program 14 4 Queue Time Out Overflow Destination Program 14 5 Overflow Point and Ring No Answer Routing Destination Assignments Program 14 6 After Shift Service Destination Program 14 71 Queue Size for Alarm Immediate Assignments Program 14 72 Queue Size for Alarm 1 See also Program 11 code 6 Program 14 73 Queue Size for Alarm 2 See also Program 11 code 7 Program 14 8 Alarm Pattern Assignments Program 14 9 Work Unit Assignments Work Unit Stroke Digit Length Program 15 Ground Loop
445. me or the line type for each line group e g local line Foreign Exchange FX to 818 LA WATS out of state etc 6 Refer to the Program 40 to restrict stations from incoming and outgoing access of lines including using LCR All stations that must use LCR to make outgoing calls must not be restricted in this program These restrictions do apply to LCR 7 Refer to Program 41 to restrict stations from accessing outgoing lines except through LCR All stations that must use LCR for outgoing calls must be restricted from line access in this program Bulnoy 3so45 see7 5 3 Least Cost Routing LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table Program 50 1 LCR Parameters Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Least Cost Routing Initialized Default A I LEDs Off 4 2 3 Spkr 5 0 Hold Spkr 1 fj Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 pue Press LED Buttons for each LCR parameter LED On Off 01 Enable System LCR No LCR 02 Not Used Not Used 03 555 LDI Route per Program 50 4 Per Area Code Table 04 Dial Tone After LCR Access Silent 05 Warning Tone Last Choice Route Number No Warning Tone 10 No CO Dial Tone After Line Access CO Dial Tone R4 15 Program 50 1 Overview This program defines general operating parameters for LCR software Program 40 denies CO line access via LCR but denies all other access methods
446. me memory is allocated to a station On direct incoming calls the ANI abandon call information is stored in the Abandon Call Memory of the PDN owner or PhDN owner LCD telephone depending on which DN rings when the call is received Do not assign ANI DNIS lines in Program 52 Abandoned Call forwarded calls will store Caller ID and or ANI information in the Abandon Call Memory of the first call forwarded from station The first call forwarded from station does not have to be assigned as the owner of the CO line in program 52 or as the owner of the PhDN in Program 33 but it must be assigned memory in this program Distributed Hunt Queue or DISA line Abandoned Calls store ANI Caller ID data in the Program 52 CO line owner station If a Caller ID CO line is programmed to direct ring more than one station 81 89 a station logical port must be assigned as owner of the ground and or loop start Caller ID line in Program 52 to be able to store Caller ID numbers on abandoned or unanswered calls on Direct Incoming calls If a Caller ID CO line is programmed 81 89 to ring only one station that station will store Caller ID abandoned call information regardless of Program 52 data the station must have storing memory assigned in Program 51 ANI abandoned call numbers will be stored in the telephone memory of the called Primary Directory Number PDN owner telephone or the called Phantom Directory
447. me that LCR sends them These output digits are determined by the settings for LEDs 01 and 02 In this example the user dials 9 code telephone number Program 45 4 LED 02 On LED 02 Off LED 01 On Code Pause F MDT number E MDT F MDT Code Pause number E MDT LED 01 Off Code F MDT number E MDT F MDT Code number E MDT F MDT Added digits in Front of number dialed Program 55 1 E MDT Added digits at the End of number dialed Program 55 2 Code Digits programmed in Program 45 3 Number Dialed telephone number 9 LCR access code Pause Pause time determined in Program 12 3 UO HILIS9Y IIOL 4 29 Toll Restriction Program 45 5 Overlap Area Code Program 45 5 Overlap Area Code Processor Type DK424 all RCTUs and BCUs Release 4 3 and higher Program Type Toll Restriction and LCR Initialized Default blank e H 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 5 L OAC 0 9 3 digits Press LED Button 01 to delete a digit Address 1 8 Overlap Area Codes 8 max SELECT 1 DATA 1 3 Digit Codes NIO on A O N Program 45 5 Overview This program enables registering Overlap Area Codes OAC Overlapping area codes are not c
448. ment devices digital announcers to standard telephone ports QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU RSTU2 PSTU PESU RDSU RSTS Use Program 23 to assign devices that deliver primary announcements dialing options and greetings heard when callers first call in also devices that deliver secondary announcements Use Program 24 to offer options to unanswered calls routed back to the Auto Attendant Up to eight devices can be connected to a system See Primary and secondary announcements below Primary Secondary Primary Secondary HEE oo Announcements Announcements pee Berea Announcements Announcements DK14 1 1 RCTUBA BB B1CU 4 4 DK40i 4 4 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 4 4 RCTUA RCTUB 4 4 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 4 4 Any combination is allowed within the maximum limitations For example three primary announcements and one secondary announcement are allowed Ports assigned in Programs 23 and 24 should never be assigned with External Auto Attendant voice mail options in other programs 30 31 81 89 etc To allow the built in Auto Attendant programs to function DK424 and DK424i the RKYS 1 2 3 or 4 and BRCS or RRCS must be installed on the RCTU or BCU PCB DK40i the KKYS 1 2 or 3 must be installed on the KSRCU DK14 the QKYS and QRCU3 must be installed in the DK14 KSU Overflow stations and delay ring operation is assigned in Programs 81 89 Program 25 1 Built in AA Incoming Call Overflow Time Processo
449. mpt to exit the ACD group s queue and route to the group s Overflow Point Destination set in Program 14 5 see ACD Flowchart 6 8 6 11 If that destination is busy the call remains in queue as shown below Only one destination can be assigned in Program 14 5 per ACD group Note The destination assigned in Program 14 5 will also be the RNA destination of the ACD group see ACD Flowchart 6 7 OP Destination is a system DN DH or attendant console port number Program 14 5 Is destination busy See Note Note If the station port is an RATU Attendant Console port the call overflows to the console idle or busy The call will remain in queue until an agent or an overflow destination assigned in Program 14 4 or 14 5 becomes idle Ring system DH DN or console port assigned in Program 14 5 Queue Timeout Overflow Destination is another ACD group Program 14 5 Queue Timeout Overflow Destination is DK built in AA Program 14 5 OP Destination is normal CO line ringing assignments Program 14 5 Is i Is an Is the line destination ground loop start or agent ACD Call busy Tie DID button idle in the DNIS ANI group Ground Loop Ground loop start ring system DN per programs 81 84 87 and 81 84 87 no delayed ring Ring idle agent ACD Call button if agent answers talk on ACD call If no answe
450. ms are located behind the program of the same name e g Program 09 follows Program 09 vii Introduction Conventions Conventions Conventions Description Elaborates specific items or references other information Within some Note tables general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to specific items Important Calls attention to important instructions or information CAUTION Advises you that hardware software applications or data could be i damaged if the instructions are not followed closely WARNING Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death DN Represents any Directory Number button also known as an extension or intercom number Represents any Primary Directory Number button the extension number PDN for the telephone SDN Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN A PDN which appears on another telephone is considered an SDN PhDN Represents any Phantom Directory Number button an additional DN BCU Represents all of the DK424i processors The DK424i processors are B1CU B2CAU B2CBU B3CAU B3CBU B5CAU BS5CBU B2CAU BU Abbreviation for the B2CAU B2CBU B3CAU BU Abbreviation for the BB3CAU B3CBU B5CAU BU Abbreviation for the BSCAU B2CBU Arial Bold Represents telephone buttons Courier Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display Type Indicates entry of a string of text P re Indicates en
451. n i override ring system DNs per agent ACD Call Tie DID Programs 81 84 87 and 81 button or an overflow DNIS ANI 84 87 no delayed ring destination assigned in Programs 14 4 or 14 5 becomes idle Is the destination in Program 14 5 an idle DH ACD group or system DN port system DN port assigned in Program 14 2 idle Tie DID DNIS ANI i Call connects to the DK Ring an idle agent in the Auto Attendant calls overflow group or idle system Ring the idle system DN routed per AA assignment Lie oa in assigned in Program 14 2 programs 6 42 Flowchart 6 4 Notes System DNs include Program 04 PDNs SDNs Program 04 PhDNs DH Distributed Hunt Group ACD Overflow Point Call enters ACD queue calls waiting in an ACD group s queue can Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones be sent to an overflow destination if they have received a specified number of announcement messages and music sequences overflow point determined by Program 14 5 see ACD Flowchart 6 8 6 11 Call remains in queue The Strata DK continuously monitors for an idle agent queue overflow timer timeout per Programs 11 1 and 14 4 or overflow point Per program 14 5 see ACD Flowchart 6 2 uOHNqHysIq 2D Wyewo ny Has the call received the number of announcements and music CO lines will atte
452. n 0 4 seconds off 0 2 seconds on 3 4 seconds off intercom ring is always 1 second on 3 seconds off This does not apply to VM Ports Program 31 LED 17 On which are always standard ring The line call ring pattern to standard telephones can be made distinct from the intercom ring pattern If Distinctive Ring is not enabled LED 07 Off the pattern is per Program 10 1 LED 06 Intercom Transferred Tie and DID calls with or without Distinctive Ring enabled ring with a 1 second on and 3 seconds off pattern LED 06 Voice Mail Identification Code Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF Signal Time DTMF digits automatically sent to RSTU RDSU RSTU2 RSTS PSTU PESU KSTU2 QSTU2 voice mail ports can be sent in either 80 or 160 millisecond bursts This applies to digits sent via the voice mail identification code 656 657 set at each station This also applies to manually dialed digits sent to voice mail ports from Toshiba telephones including 2000 series digital telephones LED 05 Music on hold or Ring Back Tone Prior to Release 3 2 transferred parties would either hear Music on hold MOH or silence With Release 3 2 and higher transferred parties can hear MOH or Ring Back Tone RBT Turn LED 05 On to play MOH for transferred parties turn LED 05 Off to send RBT If MOH is not installed and LED 05 has been turned on the transferred party will hear nothing uole S 9 We sis LED 04 Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via Dial 64 Automati
453. n Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 09 19 09 19 09 19 09 19 08 18 08 18 08 18 08 18 07 17 07 17 07 17 07 17 06 16 06 16 06 16 06 16 05 15 05 15 05 15 05 15 04 14 04 14 04 14 04 14 03 13 03 13 03 13 03 13 02 12 02 12 02 12 02 12 01 ti 01 11 01 11 01 11 UuO e S 9 Wa S S 3 115 System amp Station Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments 3 116 Program 39 Overview Program 39 assigns features to the flexible buttons for individual telephones in the system Several types of buttons can be assigned with this program including Feature PDNs SDNs and PhDNs Message Waiting buttons can be assigned to PhDNs Alert Signal Buzz key Feature Buttons Assignments You can assign commonly used telephone features to any flexible button see Table 3 1 Button assignments can be different for individual telephones Telephone users can also assign flexible buttons if their COS and or if programming permits the feature on their telephone Strata AirLink handsets interfaced to the Strata DK using the RWIU WWIS PCB have only six flexible buttons 4 9 available for programming Important DKi Admin programs a Pause on buttons 11 20 on 10 key telephones The Line button on the DKT2001 is flexible button 01 Only program a PDN onto this button Do not program CO lines or secondary line appearances onto button O1 or in any other posi
454. n Group 1 3 Each console has three groups of 20 LED buttons DKT LEDs 01 20 Press the DKT LED that is in the same position as the console button being assigned The LED lights and the LCD displays the console button s number Code Table and Legend CODE Assign Speed Dial trunk access or DSS access to this button chosen See code table below The Night Transfer and All Call Page buttons may be changed to DSS Line CO or SD buttons but they may not be reassigned to other button locations Initialized key assignments are shown following the Program 29 System Record Sheets Button Type Code Processor cee el Sapa CO Line Range a hai Numbers Numbers All Call 489 DK40i 10 49 60 99 001 012 000 027 Night Transfer 1 439 RCTUA 10 49 60 99 001 016 000 031 Night Transfer 2 440 B1CU 10 49 600 699 001 032 000 055 Night Transfer 3 441 RCTUBA BB 10 49 600 699 001 048 000 079 Night Transfer 4 442 B2CAU BU 10 130 600 711 001 120 000 111 B3CAU BU 10 130 600 791 001 120 000 191 RCTUC D 10 49 600 699 001 144 000 239 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 100 139 200 999 001 200 000 335 Console Number Group Number 1 Group Number 2 Group Number 3 Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code Button Code 10 20 10 20 10 20 09 19 09 19 09 19 08 18 08 18 08 18 07 17 07 17 07 17 06 16 06 16 06 16 05
455. nal digit of 1 from the calling station Voice First applies to called PDNs only PhDNs are always tone first regardless of LED 01 setting uole S 9 We sis 3 29 System amp Station Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 of 3 3 30 Program 10 2 System Assignments Part 2 of 3 Processor Type Program Type System DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default LEDs 02 14 15 and 16 are On 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below aati x LED On LED Off 20 Padded DTMF Tone Return When Dialing DTMF No DTMF Per Prog 10 2 LED 11 19 External Conference Amp Connected to PEKU No External Amplifier Connected 18 External Conference Amp Connected to PEKU No External Amplifier Connected 17 TRNS Soft Key Immediate TRNS Soft Key Normal 16 Executive Override Warning Tone On Executive Override Warning Tone Off 15 External Page included with All Call Page Not Included see Button LED 20 note 14 Privacy Override Attendant Supervised Loop Privacy Attendant Supervised Loop Override Warning Tone Warning Tone On Off 13 _ send auto Calback Camp on Tone Pee T 12 CO Line 3 min Beep Tone No Beep Ton
456. nction codes 41 42 43 set in Program 03 To activate changes made to this program system power must be turned off on or Program 91 2 must be run Communication Parameters SMDI MIS or SMIS TTY IMDU RMDS Caller ID OAT 7 bits even parity 1 stop bit SMDR 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit System amp Station Program 76 2 X Z WSIU TSIU and RSIU RSIS RMDS Transmission Rates Program 76 2 X Z WSIU TSIU and RSIU RSIS RMDS Transmission Rates Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default Ai ports 2400 bps k 1 2 3 Spkr 7 6 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 _ E Z Transmission Rate 1 4 X Port 1 4 1 9600 bps 2 4800 bps 3 2400 bps 4 1200 bps Port Number x Data Transmission Rate z 1 2 3 4 Total Note Total must be lt 9600 bps Program 76 2 Overview Assigns each installed WSIU DK14 only TSIU DK40i only or RSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate Where X identifies the WSIU TSIU port number 1 2 or RSIU RSIS RMDS port number 1 4 and Z identifies the WSIU TSIU or RSIU RSIS RMDS port data transmission rate in bits per second bps uole S 3 We sis Whenever uploading Program 76 with DKi Admin DKi Backup the bps rate of the DKi Backup
457. nd 20 Program Type illustrated in Program 7 Type of function the program Sequence on Page 1 13 i performs Can be Initialization 8 Test System Station Toll Record Sheet 7 Restriction or Least Cost Routing Provides a list of available o ee features The sheet is used to Initialized Default record the assignment of Default configuration set by features or the operation of each Program 91 9 System program Each sheet provides ee ee a Initialization when the system is space to record data This data first installed or re initialized will be referred to when programming the system Figure 1 1 System Record Sheet Sample Overview How to Program a Strata DK System Program Sequence Detailed data entry instructions are on the top of each record sheet see Figure 1 2 gt To use the program sequence on the record sheet 1 From the programming telephone enter the programming mode by pressing a series of shaded buttons The shaded buttons represent the entry sequence for all programs Enter the program number This sequence is unique for every program The buttons are white on every record sheet Enter the program data Again this sequence is unique for every program The buttons are white on every record sheet To make another entry repeat this step until ready to exit the current program Exit the current program This sequence never changes and the buttons are always shaded Upon exiting the current program
458. nd 555 into an exception table for area code 714 will allow 714 to be dialed only with office codes 530 and 555 Conversely if 714 is allowed in Program 46 then 714 530 or 714 555 will be restricted Each area code with exception office codes requires a table Each table may hold up to 800 exception office codes Enter the area code and required office codes on the record sheet For International Call Restriction by country codes enter 011 for the area code and Restricted country code s in the office table s To fully restrict a 2 digit country code also Restrict the imaginary third digit of that country code For example to Restrict country code 81 you must Restrict 10 country codes 810 to 819 Toll Restriction Program 48 Station Toll Restriction Classification Program 48 Station Toll Restriction Classification DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Toll Restriction Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default 100 for all ports Hold Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold HK 1 2 4 3 Spkr 4 8 Spkr SELECT Port Number s L Station Restriction Code 00 10 Enter the port number s of the 00 No Station Toll Restriction station s being defined 01 Area Code toll Restriction and
459. ndant console When the user dials 911 the INT button releases from the internal connection and seizes the CAMA trunk 911 plus the Attendant Console CESID is sent out the CAMA trunk Press CO Line Pooled Line or CAMA CO button and dial 911 attendant console When the user dials 911 from an outgoing line button the outgoing line button drops and the CAMA trunk is seized on the INT button 911 plus the Attendant Console CESID is sent out the CAMA trunk Two packets are sent out the SMDR port on each E911 call The first packet will be sent immediately at the start of the call and the second will be sent at the end of the call when the CAMA trunk releases See Figures 8 1 and 8 2 for E911 SMDR packet samples 11111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 s004 3710 3710 08 14 5833710 911 MARY M NO 200 L LCD User Name 65 80 Originating number Time of Day at start of call 19 21 always 911 61 63 Originating DN 12 15 Station ID 10D maximum characters 43 52 L PDN of originating station 7 10 Originating trunk number 2 4 S for start of call E for end of call 1 2997 Notes Figure 8 1 8 2 This record is similar to a normal OG record except that The first character S indicates Start of Call Time of Day shows start time There is no call duration Station ID is subs
460. ne or Pooled Line Grp button is programmed to appear on a telephone in Program 39 do not assign a DN to flash on that telephone with Programs 81 84 and 87 Important Jf CO lines direct ring voice mail VM ports in Programs 1 89 the data for those CO lines in Programs 81 84 and 87 must be blank Program 81 Assigns which DN flashes when the CO line rings during the system Day mode Program 84 Assigns which DN flashes when the CO line rings during the system Day2 mode Program 87 Assigns which DN flashes when the CO line rings during the system Night mode Programs 81 82 83 Assign Immediate Ring 12 second delay Ring 24 second delay Ring in the Day mode respectively to telephones with DNs assigned to flash in Program 81 uole S 9 We sis Programs 84 85 86 Assign Immediate Ring 12 second delay Ring 24 second delay Ring in the Day2 mode respectively to telephones with DNs assigned to flash in Program 84 Programs 87 88 89 Assign Immediate Ring in the Night mode 12 second delay Ring 24 second delay Ring respectively to telephones with DNs assigned to flash in Program 87 3 185 System amp Station Programs 81 84 and 87 Ground Loop Start CO Line to DN LED Flash Assignments Ground Loop Start CO Incoming Call Ringing Control EKT DKT DN Idle Program 81 N l Use or Red N DN 1 HZ Program 81 N Program 39 CO Line Button Program 81
461. ned to port number 1 4 digits see table below Press LED Button 01 to erase PhDNs and DH DNs Processor PhDN Port Range Initialized PhDN DH DN Port Range Initialized DH DN DK14 500 509 50 59 900 915 850 865 DK40i 500 527 50 77 900 915 850 865 RCTUA 500 531 500 531 900 915 850 865 RCTUBA BB B1CU 500 579 500 579 900 915 850 865 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 500 739 500 739 900 915 850 865 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 500 835 450 785 900 915 850 865 Initialized Initialized Initialized Pear toni PhDN or DH en SoN DN PhDN or DH Pah Beas DN PhDN or DH DN DN DN System amp Station Program 04 PhDN and Distributed Hunt DN Assignments For Internal and Tie Line Calls Program 04 Overview Program 04 assigns the system Phantom Directory Numbers PhDNs and Distributed Hunt DH Group DNs All DK systems provide 16 DH groups PhDNs and DH DNs can be one to four digits PhDNs and DH DNs cannot conflict with each other or be the same as Primary Directory Numbers assigned in Program 04 PhDNs can not conflict with or be the same as Distributed Hunt Directory Numbers assigned in this program Default PhDNs and DH DNs are shown in the legend above the record sheet Note e PhDNs and DH DNs cannot have 41 49 as the first two digits because 44 is the substitute code to rotary dial the
462. ng Option section For example enter 45 Hold Spkr 3 1 67_ _ Press LED Button 01 00 The Privacy Change option 0 4 enables the telephone user to override the setting for their own telephone For instance if Privacy Change is enabled then a user can press 67 to allow their Caller ID to be shown on the caller s LCD Example 1 If using LCR behind Centrex and you must dial Centrex speed dial numbers 700 799 enter 7 Button 02 Button 02 00 in Program 45 31 In this case Toll Restriction will not be applied after the Centrex speed dial number 7XX is sent to the Centrex because Option 0 is set Example 2 If you are dialing out and you wish to block the Caller ID feature you must dial 67 or the appropriate provider s code e g 82 85 In this case enter 6 7 Button 01 3 in Table 45 31 In this case if the user dials 67 telephone number then Toll Restriction and LCR is applied to the telephone number after 67 is dialed because Option 3 is set Also if you want to override Privacy Change for the fourth entry Option 4 enter a 1 In this case enter 6 7 Button 01 3 in Table 45 31 In this case if the user dials 67 telephone number then Toll Restriction and LCR is applied to the telephone number after 67 is dialed because Option 4 is set To allow or to be entered as a first digit a number must be entered in at least one table of Program 45 3X do not enter
463. ng Program 79 Overview This program assigns the door phone ringing feature to ports LED 20 Muted Ring to Busy Electronic and Digital Telephone If all electronic and digital telephones are busy and a door phone button is pressed a muted ring tone can be sent to selected digital and electronic telephones as defined with this program Only the lowest port in the appropriate ringing group will mute ring LEDs 01 12 Door Phone Ring When a door phone button is pressed selected digital and or electronic telephones will ring as assigned with this program See Program 77 2 for an explanation of the door phone A B and C numbering scheme Use Program 79 to assign DN button LEDs to flash on telephones that are assigned to ring Door phones will not ring attendant consoles or standard telephones Ringing door phones will flash on idle console s Answer buttons but will not alert a console that is in the busy mode See Program 77 1 for door phone box port assignments 3 176 System amp Station Program 79 Door Phone to DN Flashing Assignments Program 79 Door Phone to DN Flashing Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default No DNs assigned to ring for any door phone KIH 1 2 3 Spkr 7 9 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr
464. ng Reference Assignments Release 3 1 and earlier Program 42 1 Primary Timing Reference Assignments Release 3 1 and earlier Initialized Default Primary 1 Secondary 2 gt 1 2 3 Spkr 4 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 10r2 RDTU PCB Number 1 8 1 Primary Source Enter the RDTU PCB number that is connected to the primary reference T1 span line clock source Press LED Button 01 blank if the DK T1 is the master free run clock source 2 Secondary Source Select RDTU PCB Number Primary Secondary Program 42 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 2 See Program 42 Clock Source on Page 7 16 Program 42 1 Overview Release 3 1 and earlier Assign the Primary Timing Reference with this program RDTU No is the RDTU PCB installed in the lowest slot number of all RDTU PCBs RDTU No 2 is the RDTU PCB installed in the next highest slot number of all RDTUs and Central Office 42 1 1 gt Slot 13 Span tine RBOC CO lines Program Data i Secondary clock source 42 2 2 gt Slot25 1863 Note so on DK Span Line Primary clock source Program Data i 2 RDTU in 4 Primary PCB Primary Back Up Assignments Example Note A second RBOC T1 span line can also be used as the secondary clock so
465. niversal slots for station line and option PCBs The Base Cabinet also contains a power supply that provides power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the base cabinet PCBs Expansion Cabinet Optional unit that has six universal slots for station line and option PCBs The expansion cabinet has a power supply that furnishes power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the expansion cabinet PCBs As many as five expansion cabinets can be added to the system Strata DK40i Base Key Service Unit KSU with power supply and battery charger Equipped with eight digital telephone circuits built in and no CO line circuits Includes external page interface MOH BGM interface power failure transfer and miscellaneous relay control Directory Number Dialed Number Identification Service Telephone number of called party is sent to the Strata DK over incoming DID or tie lines This feature is provided by some long distance telephone companies Power Failure Emergency Transfer Unit An optional backup unit that provides emergency service during power failures by automatically connecting up to eight standard telephones to designated CO lines Direct Station Selection Feature which allows a telephone user as well as a DSS console and ADM user to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button Dual tone Multi frequency Push button tone dialing A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with
466. nments eeeeeeeeeeeereeseeresresresresresrrsrenrrrrssresesresresessresene 8 4 Program 11 1 CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments eeeeeeeeeeeeesresresresreerrsresresrrsresrerrssreses 8 6 Program 11 2 CAMA Trunk Group Hunting Assignments seseseeeeseeesseeeereerrsresresrrsresrrsrrsresre 8 7 Program 11 5 CAMA Digits Sent on 911 Calls eeeesecsseceseeeeeeeeeeseecsaeceaceeeeeseeeseesaaecaeesseeeees 8 8 Program 11 6 E911 Interdigital Timer eee ieee haiei ei iene 8 9 Program 11 8 911 Special DN Notification Assignment 0 0 0 0 cece esecsseeeeceeeeeseeeaeeeneeeneens 8 10 Program 12 CESID Station Information eee eeeesceeseceseceseceeeeeeesseeeaeeaeceaeesseeeeeeaeeenaeeneee 8 11 Program 13 Station To CAMA Trunk Group Assignment ec eeeesceseceeeeeeeeesecesecnaeceeeeeeeeenees 8 13 GIOSS ARV go isn teria hind ai neh lar tet cial ars eg 21S ada oe a a oy Sele GL 1 INdEX misses eat se ek pa a ate eh Sin Sat at aaa Sa E eat N eset IN 1 vi Introduction This manual provides for programming the following Strata DK digital business telephone systems Strata DK14 Release 3 1 Strata DK40i DK424 and DK4241 Release 4 3 It is intended for qualified service technicians and system programmers This manual uses simplified generic system record sheets that have legends that show you specific port configurations for Strata DK14 DK40i DK424 and DK424i systems After using the legends copy the g
467. nments delay ring after 12 seconds 72 assignments or delay ring after 24 seconds 73 assignments for each PDN or PhDN button that appears on the telephone The called PDN SDN or PhDN button must be programmed to appear Program 39 on all Telephones that should ring System amp Station Program 72 DNIS Number Network Table Assignments Program 72 DNIS Number Network Table Assignments Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Blank DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System KH 1x2 a 1 Spkr 7 2 Hold Spkr Hold Hold Hold Spkr Spkr Network Table Number a T E Line Access Code and Network Telephone Number 1 27 digits Any type line can be accessed ground loop Tie and or DID to send a DNIS call back out over the telephone network Press LED Button 02 to enter Press LED Button 03 to enter Press LED Button 04 to enter a pause DK14 NA NA RCTUBA BB B1CU 300 499 200 DK40i 300 399 100 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 300 599 300 RCTUA RCTUB 300 399 100 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 400 699 300 Network Table Number Ground Loop Tie DID Line Access Code and Network Telephone Number Network Table Number Ground Loop Tie DID Line Access Code and Network Telephone Number
468. nnouncements then continued music Start call enters queue from ACD Flowchart 6 1 The call will attempt to exit queue when an agent telephone goes idle the queue timer in Program 11 1 expires the call reaches the overflow point the caller hangs up the disconnect timer in Program 11 9 expires Caller continues to hear music source Caller continues to hear music source Caller is connected to first announcement port This Port Is Assigned In Program 14 3 After the first announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source assigned in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the time duration set in Program 11 51 Has the Program 11 51 music timer expired No Yes Caller is connected to second announcement port this port is assigned in Program 14 32 not Program 14 33 After the second announcement ends and hangs up the caller is connected to the music source assigned in Program 14 34 the caller will hear music from this source for the time duration set in Program 11 52 not Program 11 53 Continue Has the Program 11 52 music timer expired No Yes To continue to send music to the caller until the call exits queue 1 In Program 14 33 program a vacant station port as Announcement 3 A circuit card does not have to be installed for vacant port 2 In Program 14 5 set overflow point data to 0
469. not meet the established dialing plan number of digits When the sub address dialing timer is set to 00 subaddress dialing is not supported 7 24 ISDN Program 64 1 Direct Inward Dialing Parameters Program 64 1 Direct Inward Dialing Parameters Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default LED 01 On for DID or DNIS programming 1 2 3 Spkr 6 4 Hold Spkr 1 f Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 1 LED 01 On Use DID DNIS tables in Programs 09 or 71 Enter the trunk group s 9 To add a range of trunk Off Use direct ringing tables in groups enter XX XX low Programs 81 89 81 84 87 trunk group high trunk group LED LED On LED Off 01 Use DID DNIS for incoming calls Direct ring the called station NASI Trunk Ports LEDs Groups 01 1 N o of A O N o l ek Q N 14 15 16 Program 64 1 Overview Program 64 1 assigns each ISDN trunk group to use DID DNIS programming or provide Direct in Line DIL ringing for incoming calls 7 25 ISDN Program 64 2 Number of DID DNIS Digits for Trunk Groups Program 64 2 Number of DID DNIS Digits for
470. ns define the CO line group and modified digit tables used for each LCR Plan See the legend for the number of route definition numbers for your processor CO Line Group assigned in Program 16 Each line group represents a type of service e g special common carrier foreign exchange local line group etc Program 40 denies incoming and outgoing line access to stations including LCR access Program 41 allows line access to stations using LCR only for outgoing calls when enabled Modified Digits Table Refer to Programs 55 0 55 1 and 55 2 The system handles line groups differently according to which modified digits table was assigned in Program 54 HMIS Example The following table gives you an example of how you might set up Program 54 for the HMIS Route Program 16 Route Program 16 LCR Definition CO Line Programas LCR Definition CO Line Programme jan Modified Digits Plan Modified Digits 01 16 see legend Group see l dab 1 1 see legend Group see l dab above legend above pee legend spose Oise above legend above eciegendianoxa 01 1 01 01 lt q Local 02 1 01 01 4 911 08 1 01 01 lt q Long Distance Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 55 LCR Modified Digits Table Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default See each program in the Program 55 X series Program 55 Series Overview
471. nsferred call before the called party answers If not allowed the system will allow supervised transfers only the called station must answer before the transferring station releases If Ring Transfer is not allowed immediate recall occurs if blind transfer is attempted The system denies Ring Transfer to stations in the Do Not Disturb DND mode and immediate recall will occur if attempted LED 06 CO Line Repeat Ringing If selected the incoming ringing timing pattern at a station will be the same as the CO line ringing pattern This is used mainly with Centrex or PBX systems which may vary the ring pattern to distinguish between internal and external incoming calls etc If Standard Ringing is chosen CO line station ringing will cycle one second on three seconds off regardless of the incoming ring pattern This ringing option may be undesirable for some COs LED 05 Incoming Call Abandon Timing The amount of time between incoming CO line ring signals determines when the system will discontinue abandon sending ringing tones to stations The choice of six or eight seconds depends on the line ring pattern This assignment has no effect if the Line Repeat Ringing LED 06 option is used LED 04 Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF Signal Time DTMF signals sent out to CO lines can be either 80 or 160 msecs in length DTMF to QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU RSTU2 RDSU RSTS PSTU PESU ports including voice mail ports are not affected by this ass
472. ntaining and or UO HILIS9Y IIOL 4 25 Toll Restriction Program 45 3 1 9 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with 4 26 Program 45 3 1 9 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default A data blank 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 3 L OPTION 0 4 R4 15 0 Code is not valid in ISDN is valid in analog lin SELECT Sled 1 Privacy Change for ISDN valid analog line Bete ea ae 2 Privacy Change for ISDN not valid analog line aie are String 1 3 digits 3 No Privacy Change for ISDN valid analog line e Press LED Button 01 to end the digit string ie Naas Change fell SDN analog live not e Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work val Do not enter or L OPTION 0 3 0 No Toll Restriction after Special Code 1 Toll Restriction after Special Code 2 Special Code Restricted 3 LCR Toll Restriction after Special Code R3 2 SELEC TS DATA OPTION OPTION 1 9 O OIN oo BP WO yD Program 45 3 Overview Codes programmed in this record sheet are ignored by Toll Restric
473. o 1 8 Number No 1 8 Number No 1 8 Number No 1 8 Bunnoy 3so45 sea 5 23 Least Cost Routing Program 56 LCR Station Group Assignments 5 24 Program 56 Overview The purpose of this program is to assign all defined station ports to one of four or eight LCR Station Groups see Program 56 record sheet notes Station groups are completely independent of one another Therefore each station group must be defined separately Software does not automatically assign the highest all inclusive routing priority to Class 1 stations making all routes available to Class 2 8 stations available to Class 1 as well Instead stations are assigned partitioned to independent groups Flexible assignment of routing definitions to groups is allowed with no one group s definition affecting another s Each group s route definitions are specified to activate separately according to the time schedules set by Program 53 Enter the station group number next to the port number HMIS Example LCR Station Group Assignments for LCR Plans 01 02 and 08 16 LCR Group Allows 01 All calls to be dialed by rooms Guest Rooms 02 Local Calls 800 888 911 only 03 911 only Administration 04 As needed most likely will be the same as Group 01 Automatic Call Distribution 6 This chapter provides ACD programming infor
474. o VM Call Blocking When enabled LED 04 On prevents VM auto attendant ports from call forwarding to other VM ports during screened or supervised voice mail transfers Use this feature for all VM auto attendant ports if their transferred calls are screened or supervised Disable this feature LED 04 Off for all VM auto attendant ports if their calls are ring blind transferred uole S 9 We sis 3 87 System amp Station Program 31 Station Class of Service 3 88 LED 03 Off hook Call Announce OCA Enabled Receive Enable this option LED 03 On for any digital or electronic telephone requiring OCA Telephones must be equipped for OCA OCA is not available on standard telephones This feature does not affect the station s ability to originate OCA Digital telephones Speaker OCA requires a DVSU in the telephone Also the PDKU supporting OCA must have code 62 or 64 set in Program 03 Handset headset OCA does not require extra hardware only that Program 31 LED 03 and 14 be On Electronic telephones Speaker OCA requires a HVSU HVSI in the telephone and a third pair of wires from the PEKU Electronic telephones cannot receive Handset OCA LED 02 Handsfree No Warning As a default on Voice First systems Program 10 1 LED 1 a one second warning tone is sent to a handsfree digital or electronic telephone to inform its user that someone is calling and that they can be heard If the warning tone is not desired at the called
475. o lock system ringing mode DAY Tenant 1 Night Transfer A OL NTL eNight ocka 431 434 DAY2 NIGHT See Programs 74 and 36 Lock Tenant 4 for NT Lock Password assignments Simulates On hook Off hook operation to Release and Answer Release and Ans and RLS ANS 466 release an existing call and answer new incoming ringing call Save Last Dialed Number Save Last Number or SAVE 485 ia last number dialed Tortuture Speed Reserves button for station speed dial for the following processors Station Speed Dial Codes SD 10 49 RCTUBA BB B1CU 10 49 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 100 139 RCTUE F B5CAU BU Speed dial number is set by station port 000 System Speed Dial Codes SD 600 699 RCTUBA BB B1CU 600 699 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 200 999 RCTUE F B5CAU BU CO dial signals set to tone or pulse For ISDN applications after the user Tone Tone Dial Select or TONE 490 presses the Tone Dial Select button any digits dialed after it is will be sent using DTMF tones Notes116 e See Program 15 for Tenant Group assignments e Picks up calls to telephones in any call pickup group to which the telephone is assigned in Program 31 e Attendant consoles cannot be equipped with SDNs or PhDNs The console DN is assigned to the console port number in Program 04 The console s DN can have only one appearance e Attendant consoles cannot be equipped with PDNs SDNs or PhDNs The In DN button is th
476. o program another range Press the Page or Scroll button below the LCD For example to change from one range to another in Program 15 enter the program code then press Scroll to advance or Page to go back to another range If the programming telephone is a digital telephone all CO lines within a range can be activated or deactivated for a feature by pressing the Vol A Vol V buttons Press Vol A to turn all LEDs On press Vol V button to turn all LEDs Off Overview How to Program a Strata DK System gt To check the status of a CO line in Program 15 1 Press the Mode button below the LCD after entering the program code 2 Then enter the CO line number to be verified 3 Press to display the status of the CO line and to advance to the next CO line Programming LED Buttons Keystrip Template M JM AO You place a special buttonstrip template see Figure 1 3 over the 20 flexible feature buttons of the programming telephone The template assigns a series of numbers to each of the 20 buttons that correspond with tables found on the record sheets for programming purposes Since each button represents more than one CO line depending on the CO line range selected the template assigns more than one number to each button 30 50 70 90 110 130 150 170 190 29 49 69 89 109 129 149 169 189 28 48 68 88 108 128 148 168 188 27 47 67 87 107 127 147 167 187 26 46 66 86 106 126 146 166
477. o versions of the SMDI specification Contact your voice mail machine vendor to determine which specification to enable with this program TR TS Y 000283 Issue 1 July 1985 version or the TR NWT 000283 Issue 2 May 1991 version Toshiba VP and Stratagy SMDI products currently use the 1985 version In either case the VM station digit length must be set with LED 10 13 as shown above Also note that the 1985 and 1991 version Bellcore specifications use different space character parameters for some call types which means the DK will not operate properly if the correct version is not selected Select the 1985 version LED 09 Off for Toshiba VP and Stratagy products This selection is not needed with Toshiba Proprietary Interface 3 37 System amp Station Program 10 3 System Assignments Part 3 of 3 LEDs 01 04 Amplified Conference Assignments Light LEDs 01 04 to identify which PEKU ports should be connected to external amplifiers External Amplified Conference is provided by customer supplied two way amplifiers connected to system PEKU ports to amplify two line calls DK40i DK424 and DK424i Up to four amplifiers can be connected depending on the DK system type two PEKU ports per amplifier The number of simultaneous Two CO line conferencing three party calls varies according to the processor DK40i 4 calls 2 amplified RCTUA 4 calls 3 amplified RCTUB RCTUBA BB RCTUC D B2CAU B3CAU 10 calls 4 amplified RCT
478. ode digit length 4 20 Program 45 8 9 toll restriction override code 4 22 Program 46 10 80 toll restriction class parameters 4 34 Program 46 11 46 81 toll restriction class 1 8 parameters 4 36 Program 46 2 4 toll restriction allowed denied area codes assigned by class 4 31 Program 47 toll restriction exception office codes assigned by area codes tables 1 16 4 37 Program 48 station toll restriction classification 4 39 Program 50 1 LCR parameters 5 4 Program 50 2 LCR home area code 5 5 Program 50 3 1 5 LCR special codes 5 6 Program 50 4 LCR long distance information LDI plan number 5 7 Program 50 5 LCR local call plan number 5 8 Program 50 6 LCR dial 0 zero time out 5 9 Program 51 LCR area codes 5 10 Program 52 LCR office code exceptions for specified area code 5 12 Program 53 LCR schedule assignments for LCR plans 5 14 Program 54 LCR route definition tables 5 17 Program 55 0 LCR modified digits table 5 19 Program 55 1 LCR modified digits table add 5 21 Program 56 LCR station group assignments 5 23 Program 58 DK4 24 attendant console series part 1 3 137 Program 59 attendant console flexible button codes 3 140 Program 60 SMDR data output options 3 144 Program 60 2 7 SMDR output account code digit length 3 145 Program 60 8 call forward external remote change security ID code 3 147 Program 69 verified account codes 3 148 Program 70 verified account code toll restriction assignment
479. ogram 91 2 uole S 9 We sis 3 11 System amp Station Program 03 for DK424 Cabinet Type Identification Program 03 for DK424 Cabinet Type Identification RCTUE F or B5CAU B5CBU System Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default A cabinets 1 1 2 3 Spkr 0 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Cabinet No 1 7 Turn System Power Off 5 sec then On oa CABINET 1 or 2 type __ or Type 1 DK424 or DK424i Type 2 DK280 Run Program 91 2 SELECT Cabinet Type Expansion Cabinet Universal PCB Slot Availability Cabinet No 1 7 1 or 2 Case 1 RCTUE F in DK424 Base Cabinet with MBJU removed Base Expansion Cabinet max 6 Universal PCB Slots 2 1 st Expansion DK424 1 8 available DK280 1 6 available 3 2nd Expansion Note MBJU is not used with DK424i cabinets 4 3rd Expansion ates 5 4th Expansion RCTUE F in DK280 Base Cabinet 6 5th Expansion Expansion Cabinet max 5 Universal REE Slots DK424 1 6 available 7 6th Expansion 1 only DK280 1 6 available Program 03 Overview You must run this program when using the DK424 or DK280 RCTUEY F or DK424i BSCAU BU It identifies which type of cabinets are in
480. ogram from a terminal or the programming telephone use the Program Record Sheet following Program 14 1 gt To enter an Agent ID name or number 1 Enter Program 18 then select the desired Agent ID Number 2 Enter the Agent name eight characters maximum see dial pad callouts below uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny 6 13 Automatic Call Distribution Program 18 Agent Names for SMIS MIS Assignments gt To erase data Press LED button 01 Numeric Mode 0 to 9 are treated as numerals Note Dial pad starts out in Numeric Mode Press button to switch to Alpha Mode Moves cursor to right and starts special character entry when in the Alpha Mode Moves cursor to left Alpha Entry Example A 2 B 2 0 c m200 To 7 Alpha Entry Character Sequence Figure 6 1 Alpha Mode 6 14 Left Scrolls alpha and special characters 7 Changes from Numeric to Alpha Mode and vice versa Special Character Entry Q 10 Z 100 1000 m10000 m100000 m 1000000 me Entry Character Sequence Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 2 ACD Supervisor Passwords Program 14 2 ACD Supervisor Passwords uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny Initialized Default A blanks 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT
481. on Manual User Guides Digital Telephone Digital Single Line Telephone Electronic Telephone Standard Telephone DKT2004 CT Cordless Telephone DKT2104 CT Cordless Telephone Strata AirLink External Wireless Handset Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless Handset PC Data Interface System Administrator Guide PC Attendant Console Call Center Viewer ACD Agent Guide ACD Supervisor Guide Software MIS SMIS Supervisor Manual Keyprint 2000 Introduction Related Documents Media Quick Reference Guides Digital Telephone Electronic Telephone Strata AirLink Integrated Wireless PC Attendant Console CD ROMs Strata DK Library Strata DK HMIS StrataControl DKi Quote DKi Admin DKi Backup Strata DK424 Insight DK Insight works with the DK424i also For authorized users Internet site FYI http fyi tsd toshiba com contains all Strata DK documentation and enables you to view print and download current publications Overview Numerical Program Listing The following numerical listing gives you the Strata DK program numbers titles and program M JM AO types 3 2 5i 5 zZ Program Title E 21 z E FAE 2 3 Ea SIS jala 00 Part 1 Software Check Remote Maintenance Security Code x Assignments 00 Part 2 RCTU Random Access Memory RAM Test X 01 Station Logical Port
482. ond open of the CO line loop If the CO sends this signal after an external party hangs up and before the VM auto attendant transfers a call D tone will be sent to the voice mail port Program 30 LED 15 releasing and clearing that port for another call This feature is active on all voice calls When a station is disconnected from a CO line call by the AR CPC signal its LCD will display CO LINE HANG UP The line can be disconnected anytime by the AR CPC signal during the talk state of a call CO line calls disconnected by the AR CPC signal will be represented on the SMDR report by a next to the CO line number Code 0 does not apply to ground start lines which automatically disconnect when the external party hangs up The Voice Mail device must recognize the D tone as a disconnect signal Important This option cannot always be used because some COs may send unreliable AR CPC signaling or no AR CPC signaling for loop start lines Enable AR CPC Hold detect on loop start lines only after testing that the CO sends the AR CPC Hold signal Code 1 CO Outgoing Signal Each line can be independently assigned to have either Dial Pulse DP or Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF signaling on outgoing calls toward the Central Office Ifa line is set for DP operation the Tone Dial Select button must be programmed on stations that must send DTMF tones over the lines If Tie or DID lines are programmed for dial pulse turn
483. one lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate CPO1 Issue 8 Part I Section 14 2 Notice The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5 Copyright 2000 Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Telecommunication Systems Division All rights reserved No part of this manual covered by the copyrights hereon may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including recording taping photocopying or information retrieval systems without express written permission of the publisher of this material Strata is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Strata AirLink Call Center Viewer are trademarks of Toshiba America Information Systems Inc Trademarks registered trademarks and service marks are the property of their respective owners
484. one of the following attributes 00 Select 0 o RNAXNN Key X View the software version This attribute can not be edited Note NN The actual version number and letter See Program 00 record sheet for details X 1 2 0r3 or SOL 9 uo1ezIjeu 2 13 Initialization amp Test Program 00 Part 1 Software Check 2 14 Action press buttons LED Buttons LCD Response INNNN Define the Level 1 remote maintenance security code from the System Record Sheet four digits maximum Level 1 allows remote access to all programs and data Default Level 1 security code is 0000 Or 00 Select 1 Password 0000 2NNNN Define the Level 2 remote maintenance security code from the System Record Sheet four digits maximum Level 2 allows remote access to programs 30 39 and 77 89 only Default Level 2 security code is 0000 Or 00 Select 2 Password 0000 View the software RAM Checksum This attribute can not be edited The default checksum may change or 00 Select 8 Sum XXXXXXXXX 9 View the RPSU Power Cycle Counter This attribute can not be edited The counter indicates the number of times power is removed from the system after Program 00 was initialized via Program 90 or 91 9 00 Select 9 Counter XXXX 6 Hold 00 Select 0 1 2 8 or 9 Secure data in system programming Only works for 1 and 2 Data Progr
485. onsidered toll calls and do not require the caller to first dial a 1 If a telephone number requires the caller to first dial a 1 do not enter that area code in this program Up to eight OACs can be registered Example One city might have two different area codes however the telephone company considers calls between these two areas to be treated as local calls To register this information into the DK switch enter both area codes in this program The OAC information is applied to ISDN calls which require 10 digits ISDN Immediate Dialing is available for dialing OAC OC XXXX numbers See Program 35 Station Class of Service on Page 3 100 LED 15 for more information on ISDN Immediate Dialing 4 30 Toll Restriction Program 46 2 4 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Area Codes by Class Program 46 2 4 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Area Codes by Class Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Includes all area codes in all classes Spkr 4 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold 1 2 43 SELECT Toll Restriction Class DATA Area Codes see Legend below Enter or display area codes To add a range enter XXX XXX low area code Enter 2 3 4 high area code 2 add to memory Several ranges or in
486. ontrol boxes must be installed in lower slot numbers than Tie DID or Attendant Console PCBs DK40i and DK14 See port information on record sheet LED 15 RMDS Protocol This program sets the RMDS communications standard type to CCITT V 22bis 2400bps or Bell 212A 1200bps The standard set in this program must match the standard of the modem that will be used to communicate with the Strata DK RMDS If the RMDS modem standard should be 2400bps CCITT V 22bis turn LED 15 on if the RMDS standard is a 1200 bps Bell 212A turn LED 15 off Most Hayes compatible modems will function with either standard check with the modem manufacturer s documentation to verify which protocol should be used When the system is initialized the Bell 212A 1200 bps standard is set LED 15 off IMDU can be 1200 bps or 300 bps as set by SW2 on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB RMDS can be 1200 bps or 2400 bps as set in Program 76 2 and Program 77 1 LED 15 uole S 3 We sis 3 165 System amp Station Program 77 1 Peripheral Options Door Phones 3 166 LED 14 RMDS or IMDU Modem DK424 and DK424i This program enables the built in maintenance modem function RMDS or IMDU If LED 14 is off the RSIU Port 1 4 which is set for TTY operation Code 1 in Program 76 1 will operate as a local RS 232 maintenance port If RSIU is not configured as TTY then the PIOU PIOUS RSSU that has code 41 set in Program 03 will operate as a local TTY maintenance port
487. or PDN Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Program 01 enables you to enter a physical port to display the associated logical port You then have the option to assign a new logical port to the physical port To return ports to their initialized settings see Programs 90 and 91 Note Record port locations on Program 04 record sheet uolje S 9 We sis 3 1 System amp Station Program 02 Station Physical Port Display and or Change Program 02 Station Physical Port Display and or Change Processor Type Program Type Station DkK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default Logical port number physical port number Program 90 91 1 or 91 9 initializes Program 02 To Save existing Physical Port gt Spkr 1 2 3 Spkr 0 2 Hold Spkr SELECT Logical Port EPT The physical port number associated with the logical telephone port displays after the logical port number is entered E Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold A Enter new Physical Port to change existing Physical Port Processor PDN Port Range Processor PDN Port Range DK14
488. or the camped on to station can be set from 011 seconds to 999 seconds Ring No Answer call time to idle stations is fixed at 16 seconds unless Call Forward No Answer is set at the called station The destination that the call can be rerouted to depends on the Auto Attendant application In Auto Attendant applications that use just primary announcement devices the destination is set in Program 10 3 and can be either back to the primary announcement or the normal ringing pattern of the line that the call came in on Programs 81 84 or 87 for telephone ringing and 81 82 83 for DN flash Also see Program 10 3 LEDs 15 and 16 for disconnect time options In applications that use secondary announcement devices in addition to primary ones the rerouted calls are automatically sent to secondary announcement devices This program timer sets the time that Auto Attendant calls to a busy or ringing station will camp on before routing back to a primary announcement or to the calling CO line s normal ring pattern See Program 10 3 LED 3 for routing option after Camp on Busy The time set in this program applies to the called station If CF NA or CF B NA is set on a Telephone the CF N A ring timer will have priority over this 16 sec camp on busy timer so the telephone will ring for the duration of the CF NA timer Auto Attendant calls to a ring no answer or busy station will only forward to one destination if the CF destination station has
489. ormation etc When any of these codes are dialed LCR is flagged to treat the call as follows The call is sent over the local call route plan specified in Program 50 5 No additional digits need to be dialed They are not necessary Therefore the call is put through immediately 5 6 Least Cost Routing Program 50 2 LCR Home Area Code Program 50 4 LCR Long Distance Information LDI Plan Number Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Least Cost Routing Initialized Default See the legend below kK 1 2 3 Spkr 5 0 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 DATA LDI Route Plan see Legend below Processor LDI Route LDI Route Plans Processor LDI Route LDI Route Plans Plans Default Plans Default DK14 01 08 08 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 08 DK40i 01 08 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B8CAU BU 01 16 16 RCTUA 01 08 08 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 01 16 16 Program 50 4 Overview Enter the number of the LCR route plan over which long distance information calls will be routed Typically long distance information calls are routed over the local call route defined in Program 50 5 Ifyou choose the long distance information plan in Program 50 1 the call is routed as defined by this table Typically LDI Plan Number Lo
490. otal PDNs SDN NNNN 2 next highest YYY SDNs SDN NNNN 3 next highest YYY SDN NNNN 4 Lowest button YYY YYY the Program 04 station logical port number of the DN that should appear as a SDN YYY should not be the same port number as the port number XXX of the telephone on which the SDN is assigned NNNN is the actual DN assignment for Port YYY in Program 04 Phantom Directory Numbers PhDNs 8 Maximum unique ZZZ the Program 04 Port ref number of the PhDN NNNN is the actual DN assignment for Port ZZZ in Program 04 Each PhDN PhDNs PhDN NNNN ZZZ must have an owner telephone assigned in 1 Maximum of same Program 33 If an owner is not assigned the PhDN per PhDN can originate but cannot receive calls telephone Phantom Directory Number Message PhDN MW 1 Lowest PhDN 423 Message Waiting Key for PhDNs assigned to Waiting button PhDN MW 2 Next Highest 424 telephone Telephone must be assigned as PhDN PhDN MW 3 Next Highest 425 PhDN owner in Program 33 to allow it to be 4 maximum PhDN PhDN MW 4 Highest PhDN 426 equipped with a PhDN MW button MW per telephone Directory Number Programming Example Program 33 Assign Station Logical Port 000 as owner of PhDN 500 and 502 Assign Station Logical Port 001 as owner of PhDN 501 Program 04 i ss isd Directory ZZZ
491. ound Loop Tie DID Line Options Program 15 Ground Loop Tie DID Line Options If loop start lines are routed to ACD Groups set each line to automatically release when the CO sends the AR signal after the outside party hangs up Use Program 15 Code 1 and Code 3 to set auto release detection for each CO line See Page 3 47 for the programming record sheet Program 17 DID Tie Line Options If DID Tie lines must be routed to ACD Groups use Program 17 to set the appropriate options for each DID Tie line See Page 3 53 for the programming record sheet Program 35 Station Class of Service To allow Agent Help assistance calls to busy Supervisor telephones enable Busy Station Transfer LED 20 On on Agent telephones and Busy Station Ring LED 19 On on Supervisor telephones Supervisor telephones should have more than one PDN Program 39 to receive Agent Help calls when the Supervisor telephone is busy See Page 3 100 for the programming record sheets Program 71 DID Tie DNIS ANI Lines If DID Tie DNIS ANI lines route to ACD Groups and provide DNIS line features such as the DNIS name night day routing etc use Program 71 to assign the DID Tie DNIS digits or ANI lines to route the appropriate ACD Group see Program 17 LED 05 Also see Program 17 DID Tie Line Options on Page 3 53 uonnq 4siq 2D syewony 6 35 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones
492. oup in Program 32 and has a CO Line or Pooled Line buttons When the user goes off hook the station will seize the normal CO line on the appropriate CO Line Pooled Line button When the user dials 911 the normal CO line is dropped and an idle PDN or CAMA CO button connects to the CAMA trunk If an idle PDN or CAMA CO button is not available the 911 call will be sent out the originally selected line without the station s CESID information Press DN button and dial 9 911 no LCR 9 is line group access code station does not have CO Line Pooled Line or CAMA CO buttons When the user dials 9 the station will seize a dial 9 CO line on its PDN button When the user dials 911 the 911 call will be sent one of two ways Ifthe station does not have another idle PDN or CAMA CO button the 911 call will be sent out the normal CO line in the dial 9 line group without the station s CESID Ifthe telephone has another PDN or CAMA CO button and it is idle the first PDN will drop and the second PDN or CAMA CO button will be connected to the CAMA trunk 911 plus the station s CESID will be sent out the CAMA trunk L164 E911 SMDR SMDR Press DN button and dial 9 911 with LCR When the user dials 9 the station will seize LCR on its PDN when the user dials 911 the PDN will drop LCR and the same PDN will connect to the CAMA trunk 911 plus the station s CESID will be sent out the CAMA trunk Press INT button and dial 911 atte
493. ource is used the Music on Hold MOH source connected to an RCTU will continue to play for lines and stations that are on hold Important Jf the alternate BGM source is not connected to a PEKU PESU or PSTU RSTU RSTU2 or RDSU assign Slot 11 as data in Program 19 If BGM is connected to circuit 2 of QSTU2 or KSTU2 assign slot 13 as data in Program 19 This ensures that all PSTU or RSTU ports function normally Digital electronic telephones or RSIU PCBs installed in Slot 11 are not affected by this assignment uole S 9 We sis PEKU PESU If using a PEKU wire the BGM source to circuit 3 and turn LED 09 On Program 10 2 to enable the BGM connection If using a PESU wire the BGM source to circuit 8 and turn LED 10 On Program 10 2 to enable the BGM connection QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU RSTU2 RDSU or PSTU If using a QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU RSTU2 RDSU or PSTU wire the BGM source to circuit 2 and turn LED 09 and 10 Off Program 10 2 Also an isolation transformer may be required if connecting the source these PCBs See Chapter 10 Peripheral Installation in the Installation and Maintenance Manual for isolation transformer installation instructions PDKU BGM cannot be connected to the PDKU 3 57 System amp Station Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized
494. oute see Program 50 31 35 Important Always provide emergency service access for numbers such as 911 Standard telephones that are Toll Restricted should be required to use LCR to place outgoing calls This prevents Toll Restriction defeat when the K4RCU or RRCS times out LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table 1 Use Program 16 to assign CO lines in groups per the reference table below Least Cost Routing LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table Processor CO Line Group Processor CO Line Group Processor CO Line Group DK14 1 4 RCTUBA BB 1 8 B1CU 1 8 DK40i 1 8 RCTUC D 1 16 B2CAU BU 1 16 RCTUA 1 8 RCTUE F 1 16 B3CAU BU 1 16 B5CAU BU 1 16 Line Group 01 CO Line in Group CO Line Type Commenits 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 Use Program 40 to allow CO line access to stations using LCR for outgoing calls 3 Use Program 41 to deny outgoing CO line access except for LCR access Important 4 Use Program 45 1 to enable the dial plan that is appropriate for the area where the LCR calls for LCR to work properly will originate Area code and office code structure must be defined by Toll Restriction Dial Plan 5 Under the column labeled CO Line Type Comments enter the service type the common carrier na
495. ow port high port Enter 011 999 for 11 to 999 seconds Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port Hold Time Port Hold Time Port Hold Time Port Hold Time Program 37 Overview If a busy or ringing station does not answer a call sent to it via ring blind call transfer lines or DNs the station originating the ring blind transfer is recalled after an amount of time determined with this program This time 011 999 seconds is set independently for each originating station port Initialized data sets all stations for a 032 second recall time Ring Transfer must first be enabled for the system with Program 10 1 LED 07 On uole S 9 We sis 3 107 System amp Station Program 37 Park Recall Timing Program 37 Park Recall Timing DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Assigns Ring Transfer Recall Time of 32 seconds to all ports 1 2 4 3 Hold Hold Spkr 3 7 Spkr Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number Enter the port number having its Park
496. owing section ISDN Related Programs and make the appropriate programming assignments ISDN Related Programs Program 10 1 System Assignments LED 16 determines the initialization process for BRI lines connected to the ISDN network see Page 3 27 Program 10 4 ACD ISDN Parameters LEDs 11 and 12 set the T Wait ISDN PRI and BRI timers respectively T wait timers are used for reducting overloading ISDN terminals during concurrent initialization such as following a wide area power failure LED 09 enables Listed Directory Number LDN Registration for an unknown number in an unknown numbering plan LED 13 specifies whether or not 3 1 kHz audio calls can be received as speech calls LED 14 enables the ISDN Start code to be sent when the Speed Dial button is pressed see Page 6 6 Program 39 Telephone Feature Buttons and Program 59 Attendant Console Feature Buttons A new button is provided called the Start button in both Program 39 see Page 3 115 and 59 see Page 3 140 to defeat the timeout when dialing is complete Also a Sub button is provided for entering sub address information Programs 55 1 and 55 2 Least Cost Routing Modified Digits Enables a sub address separator see Page 5 21 Program 30 Station Class of Service LED 12 defines whether the button is used for dialing a sub address or as a dialing separator When LED 12 is On only the standard stations are affected The DKT and EKT ports are ignored see Pag
497. p 10 System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 90 10 Hold No N N Exit programming mode Jan 20 gun 06 43 The system will not allow the Spkr Speaker LED to light to re enter the programming mode 1 N N is the Program Telephone DN SOL 9 UO eZI eu 2 5 Initialization amp Test Program 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber 2 6 Program 91 1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Initialization Initialized Default None 1 2 3 Spkr 9 1 Hold Spkr 1 01 02 Hold Program Telephone Exits Program Mode Enter programming mode Press LED Buttons 01 and 02 Do not press DN button LEDs 01 and 02 must be On LCD Displays 91 SELECT 1 Renumber and Reset Program 91 1 Overview Program 91 1 makes slot code assignments to installed PCBs that do not have options such as a PDKU without a Data Interface Unit or Off hook Call Announce OCA the common control without a Dual tone Multi frequency Receiver RRCS KSRCU QRCU3 etc Program 91 1 also sets physical and logical ports to their initialized settings even if you previously relocated them See Program 01 and 02 for initialized settings Programs 04 04 05 05 09 or 71 are not affected CAUTION Running Program 91 1 drops all calls
498. plays MONITOR BY SUPRV when this option is enabled Queue Status PDN 404XX Agent Status PDN 405XX Program these speed dial buttons on the Supervisor s telephone to enable quick access to Queue Status Agent Status and one touch Supervisor log in XX ACD Group 01 16 Reset Queue Alarm 448 Used to reset a queue alarm that is sent to the Supervisor telephone when the number of calls in queue exceeds the limits of queue alarm parameters see Programs 14 71 73 14 8 11 6 and 11 7 for queue alarm parameters uOHNqHYsIg 2D dyewo ny 6 37 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones 6 38 B5CAU BU system Program Program on ATD Feature Button Feature Code on Agent Supervisor Notes Designation Telephone Telephone This is the PDN of the Supervisor telephone Supervisor telephones do not require a unique PhDN like Agent telephones Program Toshiba recommends programming more than one E g PDN onto Supervisor telephones to enable Agent Supervisor Call PDN in X Help assistance calls to ring busy Supervisor Program 39 telephones Also program Agents with Busy Station Transfer and Supervisors with Busy Station Ring see Program 35 BST and BSR Speed Dial Program on Program on Speed Dial Codes Pa Agent Supervisor Notes ode Telephone Telephone DK40i RCTUA All of the
499. precise location along with the basic information The Strata DK14 DK40i and DK424 accomplishes this through a special interface between the KSU and the CO This special interface takes the station number information and sends it through the public network in a format compatible with the central E911 database This special interface is required in addition to sending software within the Strata DK The required interface is an external device Telident or Proctor that interfaces to up to two standard analog station ports Central Tip Ring E911 CKT 1 Broctonor CAMA Trunk 1 Office Telident Tip Ring E911 CKT 2 E911 Interface CAMA Trunk 2 E911 Center E911 CKT 1 and 2 assigned in Program 10 Figure 3 1 Physical Connection of E911 Interface Programs 10 11 and 10 12 E911 Standard Telephone Ports Assignment Initialized Default Blank 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold First E911 Port 11 E911 RSTU KSTU2 Port Number Second E911 Port 12 E911 RSTU KSTU2 QSTU2 Port Number First Standard Port Second Standard Port System amp Station Program 10 Enhanced 911 Operation Programs 10 11 and 10 12 Overview Programs 10 11 and 10 12 assign which QSTU2 KSTU2 RSTU2 RSTU RDSU PSTU or PESU standard telephone ports
500. r Hold SELECT 6 SELECT ACD Group Number L DATA Destination Processor ACD Group Numbers PDN Port Range PhDN Port Range DK40i 01 08 000 027 500 527 RCTUA 01 078 000 031 500 531 RCTUBA BB 01 08 000 079 500 079 RCTUC D 01 16 000 239 500 739 RCTUE F 01 16 000 335 500 835 B1CU 01 08 000 055 500 579 B2CAU CU 01 16 000 111 500 739 B3CAU BU 01 16 000 191 500 739 B5CAU BU 01 16 000 335 450 785 Data After Shift Service Destination OPO OP1 OP2 OP3 Overflow Point OP Destination Incoming Port 000 Only one OP can be programmed For No Overflow select DATA 0 301 308 ACD Group DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 301 316 ACD Group RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 401 416 ACD Group RCTUE F BSCAU BU 320 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 420 RCTUE F B5CAU BU Auto Attendant DK Built in 321 DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB C D B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 421 RCTUE F B5CAU BU Normal CO line Ring assignments not including delayed ringing assignments See PhDN Port Range PhDN Program 04 Port Number 900 915 Distributed Hunt Group Program 04 Port Number ACD Group Numbers After Shift Destination uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny 6 27 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 6 After Shift Service Destination Program 14 6 Overvi
501. r ring another idle agent ACD Call button or go to RNA destination ACD Flowchart 6 3 Tie DID DNIS ANI RING System DN per Program 14 2 Is the line ground loop or Tie DID DNIS ANI Ground loop The call remains in queue Ground loop start busy until an agent ACD Call override ring system DN per Programs 81 84 87 and button or an overflow Tie DID DNIS ANI 81 84 87 no delayed destination assigned in i Program 14 4 or 14 5 ring Is the 9 becomes idle system DN DH assigned in Tie DID DNIS ANI Busy Program 14 2 busy or idle Call connects to the DK Ring the idle system DN DH AA call routed per AA or assigned in Program 14 2 assignment programs 0877 6 43 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 5 After Shift Operation End of ACD Shift Conditions Or Or Or All agents Supervisor presses End of All agents Unavailable and logged out ACD Shift Program 10 4 LED 4 OFF Notes System DNs include Program 04 PDNs SDNs Program 04 PhDNs DH Distributed Hunt Group CO lines that normally route to the ACD group will only route to the group s After Shift Destination set in Program 14 6 Only one destination per ACD group can be assigned in Program 14 6 After Shift Destination is a After Shift
502. r Circuit DID Line Digital Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB providing four DID line circuits in the Strata DK40i Terminal Equipment This refers to devices using ISDN service telephones faxes computers etc TE1 supports ISDN formats with S T or U type intefaces Telephony Service Provider Interface RS 232 Ports An optional PCB that provides up to two RS 232 interface ports modular jacks enabling the DK40i to connect to various hardware devices Flexible RS 232 port which can be used for maintenance SMDI and MIS ACD A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ 11 jack The wiring is identical to POTS with different signaling Only one U interface device can be attached per line Slots in a telephone KSU cabinet that are used for a variety of optional PCBs Serial Interface Board DK14 Provides two serial ports for either a Station Message Detail Recording SMDR device or a maintenance terminal or modem or Caller ID interface Index A alert signal button assignments 3 122 button programming example 3 123 alternate background music source slot assignment see Program 19 attendant console answer button priority assignments 3 138 display type 3 137 flexible button codes see Program 59 overflow destination assignments 3 139 overflow timer 3 137 series DK424 see Program 58 auto attendant built in prompt station assignments see Program 09 automatic PCB recognition and port renumber see
503. r DID line is Dial Pulse Program 15 1 LED On enable Dial Pulse DTMF Off LED 11 On for that Tie or DID station port number If the DID or Tie line is DTMF tone dial Program 15 1 LED Off disable Dial Pulse DTMF Off LED 11 Off and install an RRCS the RCTU K5RCU K5RCU2 K4RCU3 in the DK40i or BRCS on BICU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU and BSCAU BU LED 10 Change DISA Security Code When enabled LED 10 On allows a selected station to change the DISA security code by dialing PDN 658 Security Code Redial 3 78 System amp Station Program 30 Station Class of Service LED 09 Change Toll Restriction TR Override Code When enabled LED 09 On two TR Override codes are available When one of these codes is dialed from any station all Toll Restriction is bypassed Change TR Override codes by pressing PDN 654 for Code 1 or PDN 655 for Code 2 Press Redial to store LED 08 Forced Account Code When enabled LED 08 On a station or DISA CO line user using a line with a Forced Account requirement Program 15 7 must enter an Account Code before the outgoing CO Tie DID line call can be completed If Forced Account Codes should be verified enable Verified Account Code LED 14 On Program 60 4 defines the Forced Account Code digit length To force a verified account code entry on Two CO line DISA calls through the system Turn LEDs 08 and 14 On per the following table Port 10 DK14 Port 035 DK40i Port 039 RCT
504. r DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 1 Important See Program 17 for other Tie DID assignments see Program 17 and Program 09 for other DID assignments Notes e You must cycle system power or run Program 91 2 to transfer Program 41 2 data from temporary memory to working memory Turn system power Off five seconds and On after running Program 41 2 e Always install RDTU PCBs that have Tie or DID channels in slot numbers that are higher than station and Attendant Console PCB slot numbers whenever possible Each Tie or DID line installed uses a station port in software see the Configuration worksheets for Tie DID configuration in the Strata DK I amp M Manual Program 41 2 Overview RDTUs provide 8 16 or 24 channels as set in Program 03 Each channel can operate independently as CO lines ground start or loop start Tie lines Wink or Immediate Start or DID lines Wink or Immediate Start Assign the number of channels for each RDTU with Program 03 Important Program 91 2 must be run or System Power must be momentarily turned Off five seconds then On for Program 41 2 to take effect Program 41 3 T1 Span Transmit Level Pad Assignments Initialized Default 5 6dB 1 2 3 Spkr 4 1 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr
505. r Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default 20 seconds before overflow 1 2 3 Spkr 2 5 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 AATT TIME Seconds before overflowing Enter the number of seconds 12 24 Program 25 1 Overview This program sets the time it takes an unanswered incoming Auto Attendant call to overflow to a preassigned station s The time can be anywhere from 12 to 24 seconds the default is 20 seconds The overflow station or group of stations is assigned in Programs 81 89 This overflow time applies to the overflow of incoming Auto Attendant calls to normal CO line ringing if either a primary announcement device or KSRCU K5RCU2 K4RCU3 RRCS or BRCS DTMF circuit is not available Note Auto Attendant will not answer when all of the RRCS BRCS K5SRCU K5RCU2 K4RCU3 or QRCU 2 circuits or primary announcements are busy uolje S 9 We sis 3 65 System amp Station Program 26 Built in AA Camp on Busy Time Program 26 Built in AA Camp on Busy Time DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Station Processor Type Program Type Initialized Default Assigns an AA Camp on Busy Time of 016 seconds to all ports KIH K 1 2 43 Spkr 2 6 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold
506. ral Options Door Phones ceceeeeescesseceseceseceeeeeeeeeeeesaecsaecnseeseesseeesaes 3 164 Program 77 2 Door Phone Busy Signal Door Lock Assignment ceseeseeseeeseceteceeeeeneenees 3 168 Program 77 3 Night Ringing Over PIOU External Page Zones 00 eee eeeeeseceeceeeeeseeeeeeeneeensees 3 170 Program 77 4 RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI Data Output Assignments 0 0 3 171 Program 78 CO Line Special Ringing Assignment ce eeeesecsseeeeceseeeeeeeseecaeceaecsseeseeeeneesaes 3 173 Prosram 79 Door Phone Ringing ict tissbeutstihsteloges tecediesacaztoes eeens ieee aeeaiei eies 3 175 Program 79 Door Phone to DN Flashing Assignment 00 ceceeceseeeseecneceeeceseeeseeeneeeneeeseeees 3 177 Program 80 EKT and DKT Ringing Tones CO Line Calls ee eeeeeseeeneenseceseceeeeeeeeneeenes 3 178 Program 80 Call Forward Station Ring Assignment cei ceeceeeeeseeeneeeeecseceseceseeeseeeseeeaeeenaes 3 179 Programs 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Ringing eee eeceseceseeeseeeneceeeeeeeenes 3 180 Auto Atten dant senner enn ie a ciate ttn a ar a ea eaa a a cane ernie 3 181 CO lines to Ring Station PDN Ports and or Distributed Hunt DH Group Ports 00 3 181 Station Ringing Modessa nier ath resticateratenedeiuceeus bao Sotaseciv las tise thee eh a AES 3 181 Attendant Console DK424 only ccecccecsccessecececeseeeeseeeesaeseaaecececeeeeeeeeesaeseaae
507. ram 14 71 Queue Size for Alarm Immediate Assignments Program 14 71 Queue Size for Alarm Immediate uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny Initialized Default Queue Size 010 K 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 7 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 71 L DATA Queue Size SELECT ACD Group Number Processor ACD Group Numbers Queue Size DK40i 01 08 001 012 RCTUA 01 08 001 016 RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 001 048 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 01 16 001 144 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 01 16 001 200 ACD Group Number Queue Size Program 14 71 Overview The system causes the Supervisor Reset Queue Alarm button to flash and the Supervisor telephone sounds immediately a one second On one half Off beeping alarm when the number of calls in the ACD queue exceeds the number set in this program Program 14 8 DATA must be set to 1 if using this option see Program 14 8 for more information 6 29 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 72 Queue Size for Alarm 1 Program 14 72 Queue Size for Alarm 1 Initialized Default Queue Size 010 1 2 3 Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr 7 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 72 _ L DATA Queue Size SELECT ACD
508. ram 90 Integrated Systems Digital Networking ISDN 7 1 internal and tie line call assignments 3 18 ISDN ACD and ISDN parameters including BRI PRI T Wait and 3 1k audio see Program 10 4 analog trunk services see Program 61 assign CO line groups see Program 16 BRI line station operation see Program 60 BRI SPID parameters see Program 44 call types for ISDN trunk group see Programs 67 2 and 67 3 call types for ISDN trunk groups see Program 67 3 call by call trunk group codes and network ID see Programs 66 2 66 4 calling number ID presentation parameters see Program 68 1 channel group number parameters see Program 66 1 channel group trunk parameters see Program 66 3 channel groups see Program 65 clock source see Program 42 CNIS presentation parameters see Program 69 1 D channel control and NFAS see Program 43 1 3 dialing parameters see Program 63 DID DNIS digits for trunk groups see Program 64 2 LDN registrations see Program 66 5 trunk group see Program 66 7 trunk group to channel group see Program 66 6 line directory number see LDN network PRI interface see Program 43 3 non facility associated signaling see Program 43 2 non ISDN station bearer service see Program 62 outbound CNIS parameters see Program 68 2 related programs ACD ISDN parameters see Program 10 4 attendant console feature buttons see Program 59 least cost routing modified digits
509. ramming button 02 GRP EKO19 Telephone Port 019 is represented by programming button 20 Second Telephone Group In telephone group GRP 020 039 the relationship is as shown below GRP EK020 Telephone Port 020 is represented by programming button 01 GRP EK021 Telephone Port 021 is represented by programming button 02 GRP EK039 Telephone Port 039 is represented by programming button 20 Program 71 72 73 Overview Primary Phantom Directory Number and Telephone Ringing assignments This program assigns telephones to ring when a PDN or PhDN that appears on the telephone is dialed from another telephone direct or transferred call The PDN may appear as an SDN on other telephones that should ring This program assigns telephones to ring when a call is routed from a Tie DID DNIS DNIS ANI or ANI only line to a PDN or PhDN that appears on the telephone The PDN may appear as an SDN on other telephones that should ring Calls that Call Fwd Hunt or are transferred to a PDN or PhDN will ring on telephones per Program 71 72 and 73 ringing assignments The PDN or PhDN must appear on a flexible button as a PDN SDN or PhDN of telephones that should ring Important 720 Telephones maximum can be programmed to ring for any given PDN SDN or PhDN in Program 71 72 and 73 combined For the above case Telephones can be programmed to immediately Ring 71 assig
510. rase all program data and drop all calls Running Program 91 9 also runs Program 03 and assigns codes to all PCBs except options installed It also erases all Program 03 option codes for piggyback PCBs DSS consoles RRCS etc except the RCOS PCB Code 17 Program 91 9 erases all random or programmed data in all Strata DK software programs and sets all program data to the default value It automatically runs all other initialization Programs 90 00 99 91 1 and 92 1 9 It also brings back logical and physical ports to their initialized settings If you are installing the system processor s for the first time after initializing the system test the RAM run Program 00 Part 2 CAUTION Running Program 00 Part 2 drops all calls in progress and interrupts telephone service for 15 seconds This test will not erase programmed customer data Important Do not use Program 91 9 if you are only making minor programming changes and system programming is basically correct Note Run Program 03 after Program 91 9 for PCBs with options such as Dual tone Multi frequency Receivers KSRCU QRCU3 RRCS BRCS and DSS consoles etc or if entering a customer database into system RAM memory before other system PCBs stations lines options are installed Program 03 identifies which universal and option PCBs e g RRCS BRCS etc are to be installed in each cabinet slot Initialization amp Test Program 91 9 System Initialization
511. ration See the appropriate Configuration chapter and Chapter 8 T1 in the Strata DK I amp M Manual e When modems are connected to standard telephone ports PSTU RSTU RSTU2 PESU RDSU RSTS KSTU2 QSTU2 the Executive Privacy Override blocking feature Program 31 LED 18 should be enabled for the modem RSTU RSTU2 PSTU PESU RDSU KSTU2 and QSTU2 ports for data security The LED 18 feature should be disabled to enable callers to switch from voice to data or vice versa e Digital telephones with RCPI DIs or PDIU DIs that must access modems from a pool require a Modem button assigned in Program 39 e PDIU DS ports that are connected to modems in the modem pool should be set with LEDs 01 02 03 and 04 in Program 20 e Ifa modem connected to PDIU DS is connected to a telephone network line instead of a standard telephone station port Program 21 should not be used e Use Program 22 to assign modem PDIU DS stations to hunt sequences e DIUs can be connected to any ports associated with PDKU circuits except for ports associated with circuit 8 on a PDKU1 All PDKU2 KCDU and QCDU circuits can support DIUs DIUs can also be connected to any digital circuit in the DK14 or DK40i KSU e DIUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU1 circuits 1 7 only All PDKU2 circuits 1 8 can support RPCI DIUs RDSU circuits 5 8 can support RPCI DIUs 3 62 System amp Station Program 22 RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data Calls
512. rd telephone receives a transferred CO line call and when the busy standard receives a direct call from a station or CO line An optional Camp on busy tone burst can be sent to standard telephone handsets headsets LED 01 On Turn LED 01 Off for all standard telephone ports connected to voice mail and or auto attendant devices Camp on tone to a standard telephone handset is Two 160 ms bursts of 1209 Hz 3 seconds apart internal transferred or Tie line calls Two 1 second bursts of 1209 Hz interrupted by 160 ms 3 seconds apart external CO or DID line call If this option is disabled on Toshiba digital or electronic telephones LED 01 Off the telephone will not receive camp on tone on direct DID calls or transferred CO line calls if there is not an idle DN or Line button to receive the call but the telephone will continue to receive BOV tone on direct internal or CO line calls providing there is a DN or Line button available for the call to ring Also if a busy DKT or EKT receives any type of call and there is not an idle DN or Line button available for the call to ring the DKT or EKT will receive camp on tone if LED 01 is On or will not receive camp on or BOV tone LED 01 Off uolje S 9 We sis 3 99 System amp Station Program 35 Station Class of Service 3 100 Program 35 Station Class of Service DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Processor Type Program Type Station Initialized Def
513. rd sheets along with specific instructions for programming E911 CAMA trunks Enhanced 911 CAMA trunks apply to the DK40i DK424 DK4241 Release 4 3 and higher The RMCU RCMS PCBs provide up to four CAMA trunk circuits The RMCU RCMS eliminates the need for adjunct terminal adapter equipment for connecting to E911 CAMA trunks For more information on hardware refer to the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual Operation Overview The DK E911 feature provides flexible dialing of 911 emergency calls This allows users who are not familiar with DK424 and DK424i dialing sequences to make an emergency call regardless of how they dial 911 from Toshiba telephones In all of the sequences below the DK will seize an idle CAMA trunk and send 911 plus the dialing station s Caller Emergency Service Identification CESID over the CAMA trunk via MF tones Note Once a 911 call is started most other buttons keys on a telephone are disabled to prevent accidentally dropping the 911 call attempt This includes the Hold button so that the 911 call cannot be put on hold Press DN button and dial 911 When the user dials 911 the PDN releases from the internal connection and seizes the CAMA trunk Off Hook and dial 911 station has off hook selection of PDN in Program 32 When the user dials 911 the PDN releases from the internal connection and seizes the CAMA trunk Off Hook and dial 911 station has off hook selection of a CO line or line gr
514. rface box circuit number For information regarding the MLX 41 see Chapter 1 DK14 Installation in the Strata DK I amp M Manual This is necessary to allow Caller ID information to be recognized by the DK system processor Any RCIU RCIS or MLX 41 circuit can be assigned to any analog ground loop start CO line circuit Each RCIU slot will be allocated eight Caller ID circuits when assigned with Code 81 in Program 03 because of this you should always install RCIS on RCIU when more than four circuits are required TCIU2 allocates four Caller ID circuits to TCOU 3 132 Program 51 Station Memory Allocation for Storing Caller ID ANI Numbers on Abandoned Unanswered Calls Processor Type Program Type Station Initialized Default No memory for all ports DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System amp Station Program 51 Station Memory Allocation 1 2 3 Spkr 5 1 Hold Spkr g Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Processor Station Ports DK14 000 007 DK40i 000 027 RCTUA 000 031 RCTUBA BB 000 079 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 B1iCU 000 055 B2CAU BU 000 111 B3CAU BU 000 191 B5CAU BU 000 335 To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port 090 or 100 This is the number of telephone numbers that can BUF 000 010 020 030 040 060 070 080 be stored at the designated port s The maximum Caller ID ANI
515. ri Port Number Ringing Code Aeee Preference Code Preference Code System amp Station Program 32 Automatic Preference Program 32 Overview This program defines which PDN or CO line a digital cordless corded or Strata AirLink wireless and electronic telephone will be automatically connected to when the telephone handset is taken off hook or the Spkr button is used Note Strata AirLink wireless handsets do not have a Spkr button The lowest PDN lowest CO line or Line Group is selected only if the telephone is not ringing when it is taken off hook no Spkr pressed If a telephone is ringing the PDN Auto Preference or outgoing CO line is canceled In this case no selection is made if Ring Line Preference is disabled the ring line is selected if Ringing Line Preference is enabled Automatic Preference for digital electronic or Strata AirLink wireless telephones via handset off hook or the Spkr button is the automatic connection to lines or the PDN of a telephone under various conditions With Ringing Line Preference a digital electronic or Strata AirLink wireless telephone user by going off hook or by pressing the Spkr button may be automatically connected to the lowest line ringing in without having to press a CO Line button or dial an access code If no lines are ringing and an electronic or digital telephone goes off hook
516. riction Bypass 0 cecceecccessecessseceeeeceeneeceeeeeaeeeeaeneaaeceeneeeees 4 24 Program 45 3 1 9 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with 4 26 Program 45 4 Special Code Dialing Sequence with LCR o 0 cee ceeeeceeseeereeeseceeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeens 4 28 Program 45 5 Overlap Area Gode ni iiaia a a a aid E N E 4 30 Program 46 2 4 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Area Codes by Class seseeceeeeneeereereeseeee 4 31 Program 46 6 8 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Local Office Codes Assigned by Class 4 32 Programs 46 10 80 Toll Restriction Class Parameters 0 0 0 0 ccesceccesseeeseeeseceseceaeeeeceseeeaeeeneeeneens 4 34 Programs 46 11 46 81 Toll Restriction Class 1 8 Parameters 0 ccceccceceeeeesteceenteeeeeeeeeeeeses 4 36 Program 47 Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes Tables 1 16 4 37 Program 48 Station Toll Restriction Classification 0 0 0 ce ceeceseceenceneecnseceseceseeseeseeeeeaeeeaecnaeenaeens 4 39 Chapter 5 Least Cost Routing LGR Pe atures 3 2334 aa eae ede E leeds A aaa eaves ENEN e EEEE EEEE Ee EE AE EIVAS 5 1 Parameter Stoe e R TE oe Sates eE E AA O A OR AE OE 5 1 Home Ared Codes derinine a a a e tees e e E N dees 5 1 Special CodeS meee v e a AE e bs A a aE E A E R i e 5 1 Long Distance Information Plan Number ccc eecessecsseceseeseeeseeeseecseeceeceseeeseeeseesaeecaeesseenseeeaes 5 1 Local
517. rocessor If a RAM test error occurs during this test the processor causing the error should be replaced In the case of two PCB processors isolation of a RAM failure is indicated on the programming telephone X or Y see above If the DK14 or DK40i processor fails the RAM test the Base KSU must be replaced CAUTION Running each RAM test drops all calls and interrupts telephone service for 15 seconds Note Running Program 00 RAM tests do not change or erase any customer data 2 16 System amp Station This chapter gives you programming information for the Strata DK system and its stations Program 01 Station Logical Port Display and or Change Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default Logical port number physical port number Program 90 91 1 or 91 9 initializes Program 01 To Save existing Logical Port as Spkr KH 1 2 3 Spkr 0 1 Hold Spkr SELECT Physical Port Number The logical port number associated with the physical port displays after the physical port number is entered heme Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold A Enter new Logical Port to change existing Logical Port Program 01 Overview Processor PDN Port Range Process
518. rogram 17 DID Tie Line Options iscsi a aai a aaia 3 53 Program 17 DID Intercept Port Number Vacant or Wrong Number 0 0 0 0 eeeeseceseeereeeeeeeees 3 56 Program 19 Alternate Background Music Source Slot Assignment cceceseeseeseceneceteeeeeeenees 3 57 Program 20 Computer and Data Interface Unit Configuration eee ceeeeeseeeseceseceeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 58 Program 21 Modem Pool Port Assignments eeeseessesseceseceeceeeeeneeeseeeaeeaecsaeesseceaeeeaeesaaesaeees 3 61 Program 22 RPCI and DIU Station Hunting for Data Calls eee eee esceseceseeeseceseeeaeeeneeenaeeneeees 3 63 Program 23 Built in Auto Attendant AA Primary Announcement Assignment eee 3 64 Program 24 Built in AA Secondary Announcement Assignment ceeesseceeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 64 Program 25 1 Built in AA Incoming Call Overflow Time eeeeeeceseceneceseceseeeaeeeneecaeeaeeees 3 65 Program 26 Built in AA Camp on Busy Time 0 ccc eeeeseecneceseceeeceseeeaeecaaesaeenseeeseeeaeeenaeeneens 3 66 Program 27 DKT Handset Headset Receiver Volume Level 0 ee eeeeseeseceeeeeeeeeeeseceneeeeeeenees 3 68 Program 28 DSS Console Attendant Telephone Assignment c ccceccccescesteceeeeceeaeeceececeeeeses 3 69 Program 29 1 8 DSS Console and Number Button Assignment cc cescesesseeeereeereeereeeaeeeaeees 3 71 Program 29 Add on Modules Button Assignments cesce
519. rogram 46 and exception office code tables in 46 50 08 Class 6 Toll Restriction Class 6 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 60 09 Class 7 Toll Restriction Class 7 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 70 10 Class 8 Toll Restriction Class 8 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46 and exception office code tables in 46 80 Least Cost Routing 5 The following provides you an overview of the Least Cost Routing LCR feature and step by step instructions to fill in the Least Cost Routing System record sheets The quantities of LCR plans CO line groups etc vary between processors This chapter and the LCR record sheets note these differences when they exist LCR enables the system to automatically route each outgoing voice call over common carriers and selected lines The customer chooses these lines for the specific time of day and for system users with varying priorities If the system is programmed properly LCR can select the most economical route If the best routes are unavailable users with priority can access more expensive outgoing routes Several elements of LCR must be defined in programming For LCR to function properly line groups must be created in Program 16 line restrictions must be set in Programs 40 and 41 and the area dialing plan must be assigned in Program
520. rs after stations assigned in Program 81 and 82 stop ringing 24 seconds from start of call Use Program 39 to assign the DN button that should flash and ring before the AA answers The DN button or buttons for multiple PDNs must be assigned on all station ports assigned to ring in Programs 81 89 only if the stations that must ring before AA answers do not have the appropriate CO Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons Auto Attendant Program Example CO lines 1 5 should ring PhDN 500 on station 200 immediately for 24 seconds 6 rings CO lines 1 5 should delay ring PhDN 500 on station 208 after ringing PhDN on station 200 for 12 seconds The Auto Attendant should answer CO 1 5 24 seconds after station 200 started ringing and 12 seconds after station 208 started ringing Stations 200 and 208 stop ringing when auto attendant answers uole S 3 We sis gt To program the example 1 2 3 4 E SON a Assign lines 001 005 to AA in Program 78 61 Assign lines 001 005 to ring station 200 in Program 81 Assign lines 001 005 to ring station 208 in Program 82 Assign lines 001 005 to ring any installed RSTU PDKU or PEKU port that has a telephone or does not have a telephone connected in Program 83 Program 83 assignment is used only to enable Program 82 delay ring stations to ring Assign PhDN 500 button on this port using Program 39 Assign lines 001 005 to flash PhDN 500 in Program 81 Assign the PhDN 500 b
521. s 3 150 Program 71 DID tie DNIS ANI lines 6 35 DNIS 3 152 Program 72 DNIS number network table assignments 3 159 Program 74 system NT button lock password 3 161 Program 76 1 X Y TSIU and RSIU RSIS RMDS port assignments 3 162 Program 76 2 X Z TSIU and RSIU RSIS RMDS port assignments 3 163 Program 77 1 peripheral options door phones RSIU RSIS RMDS PIOU PIOUS IMDU PEPU 3 164 Index R R Program 77 2 door phone busy signal door lock assignments 3 168 Program 77 3 night ringing over PIOU external page zones 3 170 Program 77 4 RSIU open architecture OA data output assignments 3 171 Program 78 CO line special ringing assignments 3 173 Program 79 door phone ringing 3 175 Program 80 EKT and DKT ringing tones CO line calls 3 178 Program 90 initialize programs 00 99 2 4 Program 91 1 automatic PCB recognition and port renumber 2 6 Program 91 2 data transfer from temporary memory to working memory 2 8 Program 91 9 system initialization 2 2 Program 92 initializing misc backup RAM 2 9 program listing numerical 1 1 program sequence 1 11 programming data variations 1 12 first time 1 14 keystrip template 1 13 overview 1 1 section layout 1 10 programs system and station 3 1 Programs 66 2 and 66 4 call by call trunk group codes and network ID 7 29 R RAM test RCTU see Program 00 RDDU 6 1 RSIU open architecture OA data output assignments see Program 77 4 RSIU RSS
522. s 6 34 Program 15 ground loop tie DID line options 3 47 6 35 Program 16 assign CO line groups dial 9 or 801 816 3 51 Program 17 DID tie line options 3 53 6 35 Program 18 agent names for SMIS MIS assignments 6 13 Program 19 alternate background music source slot assignment 3 57 Program 20 computer and data interface unit configuration 3 58 Program 21 modem pool port assignments 3 61 Program 22 computer and DIU station hunting for data calls 3 63 Program 32 automatic preference 3 90 Program 33 PDN PhDN station hunting voice calls only 3 93 Program 34 hold recall timing 3 97 Program 35 station class of service 3 100 6 35 Program 36 fixed call forward 3 113 Program 37 CO DID and tie line ring transfer camp on recall time 3 107 Program 38 digital and electronic telephone keystrip type 3 109 Program 39 flexible button assignments 3 115 Program 40 station CO line access 4 4 Program 41 station outgoing call restriction 4 6 Program 42 0 CO line to PBX centrex connection amp access codes 4 8 Program 42 1 8 PBX centrex access codes 4 10 Program 43 0 credit card dialing 4 11 Program 44 1 8 toll restriction traveling class override codes 4 13 Program 44 91 93 emergency bypass of forced verified account codes 4 14 Program 45 1 LCR toll restriction dial plan 4 14 4 15 Program 45 2 toll restriction disable 4 19 Program 45 3 6 special common carrier numbers amp authorization c
523. s feature is one of the CLASS features offered by some local telephone companies Central Office The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone service CO lines E amp M tie lines DID lines Centrex lines etc for the immediate geographical area A term used to define the Strata DK system hardware circuits that connect to the Central Office network line pair Each CO line DID and tie line circuit is assigned a CO line number in system software Coder Decoder Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog to digital and digital to analog conversions Digital Add on Module Optional device that connects to 2000 series digital telephones to provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for Direct Station Selection System and Personal Speed Dial and CO line access Used in ISDN This channel transmits call control information out of band signaling for B channels The D channel is a logical not a physical channel Digital Door Phone Lock Control Unit A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones MDFBs and provides door lock control Digital Direct Station Selection Console A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone circuits and is associated with a digital telephone Direct In Lin
524. s 3 105 Program 36 System NT Button Lock Password Changing Station Assignment eee 3 106 Program 37 Ring Transfer Camp on Recall Time 20 0 eee ceseceseeseceeeeeeeeeeeecnaeceaecnseesneseneeeaes 3 107 Program 37 Park Recall Timm gis 200 ccs nena a a ea aE 3 108 Program 38 Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type eee eseesceseceeeeeneeeseceseceeeseeeees 3 109 Contents Toll Restriction Program 38 Standard Telephone Ring Down Destination ceeeeeeeseeseeceeeceseeseeeseeeeneeeaes 3 113 Program 39 Flexible Button Assignment 20 0 0 ese escesecsseceeeeeesseeseceaeceeessneeeaeesaecsaecsaeeseeseneesaes 3 115 Program 40 Distributed Hunt Group Member Assignmentt cescesceseeeeeeeeeeneeceseceseeeeeeses 3 124 Program 41 for DK424 T1 Assignment Series Part 1 oo cee eeecceesseceeeceeeeeeseeeeaeceeaeeeeaeeseeeeens 3 126 Program 42 1 Primary Timing Reference Assignments Release 3 1 and earlier 3 130 Program 42 1 Overview Release 3 1 and earlier cece cceesseceseeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeceeaeceeaeeceeeeees 3 130 Program 42 2 Overview Release 3 1 and earlier eee eeceesseceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeaeceeaeecneeeees 3 130 Program 50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBS 00 ee eeeeeseesecneceeceneeeeeeeneeeaes 3 131 Program 51 Station Memory Allocation 0 eee eescesecsseeseeeeeeeeseeseceseceeeseeeeeseesaecsaeceaeeseeseneesaes 3 133 Program 5
525. s a paging speaker and or Background Music BGM speaker A cable used to connect an HHEU equipped digital telephone or an HHEU equipped electronic telephone to the external speaker box HESB for the Loud Ringing Bell feature Headset Loud Ringing Bell Interface Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a 6500 series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box HESB to be connected to the telephone Optional Reserve Power Battery Charger DK14 One or two can be connected to the power supply to maintain normal operation during a power failure Subassembly that fits into a 6500 series electronic telephone enabling it to receive Off hook Call Announce OCA calls The telephone must be connected to an Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEKU or a Standard Telephone Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PESU equipped with an Off hook Call Announce Subassembly EOCU to receive OCA and must have three pair wiring Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly A subassembly installed on an Option Interface Unit PIOU or PIOUS that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration maintenance terminal or DKi Admin DKi Backup personal computer Integrated Services Digital Network Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Receiver ABR Tone Detector Unit An optional PCB installed on the TMAU motherboard The K4RCU3A must be installed to recognize Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF tones generated by a standard
526. s and external speakers Bits Per Second uUnit of measure that refers to the transmission speed baud rate of electronic signals It is used when describing data interface unit and modem operation Basic Rate Interface ISDN line with 2B 1D channel BRI lines can have a U interface with RJ 11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring or RJ 45 four pair S T interface wiring Centralized Automatic Message Accounting A special trunk provided by the phone company or the E911 Public Safety Answering Point Agency Aisesso 5 GL 1 Glossary CESID DKT GL 2 Term CESID CCVY CLASS CLID or CND co CO Line CODECs DADM D channel DDCB DDSS DIL DID Line DISA DK DKAdmin DKBackup DKT Definition Caller s Emergency Service Identification Telephone number for specific station or station location which is sent to the CAMA trunk Call Center Viewer Y Connector Enables two way transmissions between the Strata DK and a host PC or SMIS equipment and one way transmissions to other PCs There are four ports on the Call Center Viewer Connector for one Strata DK another master port and two additional ports Custom Local Area Signaling Services Defines a number of features offered by local telephone companies Calling Line Identification or Calling Number Delivery Telephone number or name of the calling party sent to the Strata DK system over incoming ground or loop start CO lines Thi
527. s the substitute code to rotary dial the in feature access codes Only the first digit of a feature code can be changed with Program 05 The system automatically assigns door phone station numbers if a door phone is specified in Program 77 1 PDN assignments are flexible so that each station can have up to four assigned digits All Strata DK telephone user guides are written using the standard default access codes and PDNs If desired a telephone accompanying a DSS console can have an PDN of 0 or 01 etc without conflict If you make no assignment in Program 04 the system upon powering up automatically assigns eight PDNs for each station PCB installed and four logical station ports for each PEMU REMU RDDU and RATU PCB RDTU Tie and DID channels are also assigned a station port This is done in sequence of ascending slot numbers for station port numbers 008 and up Attendant consoles ring on the ICI 0 button for Dial 0 calls and on the PDN when the PDN assigned to the console station port in this program is dialed Peripheral Devices other than telephones or DIUs can be connected to the ports listed below If a peripheral device is connected to a Physical Port the Logical Port must have the same port number as the Physical Port See the following table Logical amp A Physical Ports System Peripheral Device 00 DK40i Digital telephone associated with DSS con
528. se the 5 2 XXX pickup access code where XXX is the PDN or PhDN 3 89 System amp Station Program 32 Automatic Preference 3 90 Program 32 Automatic Preference Processor Type Program Type Station DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Initialized Default Assigns Ringing Code 1 and Automatic Off hook Preference Code 00 for all ports HK 1 2 43 Hold Spkr 3 2 Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Hold Spkr SELECT Station Logical Port Number Enter the port number of the station having preference defined To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port DATA Ringing Code 0 Disable Ringing Line Preference 1 Enable Ringing Line Preference fo pare Wout No selection PDN Automatic Preference Code Lowest CO Tie or DID line 11 26 01 16 Line groups See legend below for maximum line groups Processor Type Port Range Number of CO Line Groups Processor Type Port Range Number of CO Line Groups DK14 000 009 01 04 B1CU 000 055 01 08 DK40i 000 027 01 08 B2CAU BU 000 111 01 16 RCTUA 000 031 01 08 B3CAU BU 000 191 01 16 RCTUBA BB 000 079 01 08 B5CAU BU 000 335 01 16 RCTUC D 000 239 01 16 RCTUE F 000 335 01 16 Port Number Ringing Code Aie
529. second ring to Caller ID lines Day Delay Delay1 is a 12 second delay of ringing signal to a standard electronic or digital Day Delay2 Delay2 is a 24 second ring delay Day2 Immediate Same as Day Immediate except during Day2 NT mode Day2 Delay1 Same as Day Delay 1 except during Day 2 3 181 System amp Station Programs 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Ringing Ringing Mode Comments Day2 Delay2 Same as Day Delay 2 except during Day 2 Night Immediate Same as Day Immediate except during Day2 NT mode Night Delay1 Same as Day Delay 1 except during Day 2 NT mode Night Delay2 Same as Day Delay 1 except during Day 2 NT mode Day Day2 Night refer to the Night Transfer button s three modes Attendant Console DK424 only Programs 81 89 are used to ring individual attendant consoles and or to enable attendant console incoming CO line call load sharing See Auto Attendant Delay Ring and PC and Conventional Attendant Console Programming Overview in Chapter 11 Station Apparatus of the Strata DK I amp M Manual Attendant Console Load Sharing In Programs 81 84 and 87 assign all CO lines ground loop and DID that should alternately ring multiple attendant consoles to the respective Load Share console ports see Attendant Console Load Share Programming Example on Page 11 40 of the Strata DK I amp M Manual On DID lines when the digits assigned to console ports in Progra
530. send Calling Party Number on ISDN PRI 68 2 01 XXX XXX XXXX XXX XXX XXXX is the number you want the system to send out on an outbound call for Caller Number Identification This tells the system to send the number entered in Program 68 2 as the ao eee eae Calling Party Number Identification for all stations on outbound calls 09 000 344 100 444 Enter the DID number for the station port that is to receive a call to the dialed DID number NASI 7 7 ISDN Guidelines for Programming ISDN Calling Features Programming for ISDN PRI DNIS Type Call The following table shows the minimum programming needed to make DNIS type ISDN PRI calls work in the Strata DK System Table 7 3 ISDN PRI DNIS Type Call Programming Program Oar Number Program Data Description 03 XX 79 XX equals the slot in the DK system where the RPTU PCB is placed 10 4 LED 9 On aa registration will route the unknown number or call type in numbering 16 XX 2 This tells the system that trunk group XX is an ISDN PRI trunk group This tells the system to make the ISDN PRI Span the span the primary 42 1 XX 1 clocking source for the DK System XX stands for the DK slot where the RPTU PCB is placed and the final 1 refers to circuit 1 43 1124 This tells the system that the D Channel on the 1st ISDN PRI Span is the 24th channel on the PRI Span 63 2 04 This tells the system how long to wait to
531. signed DN assigned in Program 14 2 Route call to group s EOS or All Agents Call will enter the Unavailable destination back of the group s queue and follow the queue pattern and overflow assignments for the group Important f this destination is the same ACD Group from which the call originated from including back to itself the call will be routed as follows ground loop lines to Program 81 89 and 81 84 87 DNs and Note Calls that are already in queue when all agents go Unavailable are treated as any other call in queue A call remains in queue until it is answered by an idle agent it overflows the caller hangs up or the Strata DK disconnect timer set in Program 11 9 expires and releases the call DID Tie DNIS ANI lines to Program 14 2 system DN assigned to this group 6 45 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 7 Agent Telephone Ring No Answer Operation An ACD call routes to an idle agent telephone but it is not answered when it rings Notes e Iftwo consecutive ACD calls sent to an idle agent telephone are not Ring agent telephone for the answered the telephone will be placed time duration of the Ring in the Unavailable mode automatically Agent Timer Set in Program 11 2 see Notes e Ifthe agent presses a DN or another CO Line button while the ACD line is ringing the ACD call will mu
532. signed to a Voice Mail Group should also be assigned to a unique Distributed Hunt Group using Program 40 Each Program 31 Voice Mail Group must be associated with a unique Program 40 Distributed Hunt Group that hunts only to its own Voice Mail Group ports See above example of how to connect program two voice mail auto attendant machines and associate them with two different DH groups IfLED 15 or 19 is On turn LED 17 On If LED 20 is On turn LEDs 17 and 19 On For SMDI or DTMF integration turn On LEDs 04 16 17 and 18 and one of the following 05 06 07 or 08 for all standard telephone ports connected to a VM unit Turn LED 19 and 20 Off if the VM unit does not respond properly to transfer recall B Tone signals when using any type of Voice Mail Interface LED 09 see above comments in Program Overview IfCO lines direct ring VM ports via Program 81 89 the data in Programs 81 84 and 87 must be blank Important Do not assign Program 31 VM AA options to built in Auto Attendant digital announcer ports System amp Station Program 31 Station Class of Service LED 20 Toshiba Stratagy VP B Station Number Use with Toshiba Stratagy Stratagy DK VP systems connected to a standard telephone port PSTU RSTU RSTU2 PESU RDSU KSTU2 and QSTU2 Toshiba voice mail systems receiving DTMF B tone followed by the station number may not know where the call is coming from such as hold recall or blind ring
533. signed with Enter a PIOU external the zone entered in the preceding step page zone relay 1 4 These assignments apply to ground and loop start lines only they do not apply to DID and Tie lines Tenant Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Tenant 1 CO Lines Tenant 2 CO Lines Tenant 3 CO Lines Tenant 4 CO Lines Program 77 3 Overview Each tenant s CO lines can be assigned to ring over selected PIOU external page zones during the NIGHT mode Lines must be allowed to Night Ring over External Page in Program 78 or Program 71 1 3 Code 271 for this feature to work Tenant assignments are made in Program 15 3 170 System amp Station Program 77 4 RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI Data Output Assignments Program 77 4 RSIU Open Architecture Interface OAI Data Output Assignments Processor Type All RCTUs and BCUs Release 3 2 and above Program Type System Initialized Default A LEDs are Off 1 2 3 Spkr 7 7 Hold Spkr 4 Ei Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 4 asi pies Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below LED Button X LED On LED Off 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 uole S 9 We sis 09 08 07 06 05 04 03
534. software the type of display connected to each console It also enables you to set priorities for types of incoming calls You can also enable Call Waiting tones LED 01 Attendant Console Display Type Base units can connect to an Electroluminescent EL display LED 01 On or Extended Graphics Adapter EGA Display LED 01 Off LED 02 Answer Button Operation The attendant console Answer button can be programmed to answer calls on either a First in First out FIFO or a Priority basis With FIFO new calls or recalls are stacked in queue in the order in which they are received This is true regardless of the type of call recall CO line Intercom DN call or Hold Recall etc The queued calls ring to the Answer button in the order in which they are received With Priority operation each type of incoming call or recall CO line call DN call Hold Recall or Park Recall etc is assigned a specific answering priority ranging from 1 6 Call Priority is flexible and is assigned in Program 58 4 Calls will queue to the attendant in order of their predetermined priority levels For example Priority Level 1 calls ring to the attendant before Priority 2 calls Priority 2 calls ring before Priority 3 calls and so forth LED 03 Attendant Console Call Waiting Tone Each attendant console can be programmed individually to receive a muted ring signal that will alert the console that a new call is waiting while the console is busy on another c
535. sole 02 03 DK14 Digital Door phone lock control unit DDCB 04 12 20 DK40i Digital Door phone lock control unit DDCB 07 015 027 DK40i Digital Direct Station Selection Console DDSS 10 DK14 DISA port number used for Toll Restriction Class and Verified Forced 35 DK40i Account Code assignment 09 DK40i Separate background Music Source KSTU2 required in Base KSU Digital telephone associated with DSS console PDKU Expansion Unit required 00 08 020 DK40i Electronic telephone associated with DSS console PEKU Expansion Unit required 00 13 17 DK40i DK40i Separate Background Music Source PEKU PESU or PSTU 09 DK14 Expansion Unit required DK14 QSTU2 required 31 DK40i IMDU modem Program 04 Example System amp Station Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment Action press buttons LED buttons Use an LCD programming phone per Minimum Hardware Requirements in Chapter 1 Overview LCD Response No N Nt Jan 20 Sun 06 43 2 HKH1 K2 3 Program Mode Enter programming mode Do not press the DN button 3 Spkr Speaker 04 Hold Program 04 Access Program 04 The speaker beeps to indicate when to enter a Data Store program number 4 Spkr Speaker 04 Select Prepare the system for a selection 5 000 335 04 Select 000 Select a port number use three digits plus INT N N 6 XXXX 04 Select 000 239 Enter the port s station number up to four d
536. ssigned destination Call enters the back of the Important If this destination is the group s queue and follows same ACD Group from the queue pattern and which the call originated Note Calls that are already in queue when the overflow assignments for including back to shift is ended remain in queue until the group itself the call will be answered by an idle agent they overflow routed as follows the caller hangs up or the disconnect timer ground loop lines to Program 11 9 expires Programs 81 89 and 81 84 87 DNs and DID Tie DNIS ANI lines to Program 14 2 System DNs assigned to this Group 6 44 Automatic Call Distribution Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments for ACD Telephones Flowchart 6 6 All Agents Unavailable Operation All agents in ACD group are unavailable when a call is transferred to the group from a station or Auto Attendant or routed to the group directly by Programs 14 0 or 09 Notes System DNs include Do Call routes to the ACD S ff i group s After Shift Program 04 PDNs SDNs in Program 10 4 PER OFOEE Destination set in Program Program 04 PhDNs turned off or on 14 6 see ACD Flowchart DH Distributed Hunt Group 6 5 uonnq 4siq I9 dyewony LED 04 ON CO lines that normally route to the ACD group will route to the overflow point destination set in Program 14 5 see ACD Flowchart 6 4 Only one destination per ACD group can be assigned in
537. ssignments System amp Station Program 29 Initialized Default DSS Console Button Assignments Group 1 Group 2 DSS EE DSS EE aeo KEN prao RCTUA B2CAU BU B3CAU BU Spa DKO RCTUA B2CAU BU B3CAU BU B5CAU BU B5CAU BU 01 000 000 000 01 020 020 020 02 001 001 001 02 021 021 021 03 002 002 002 03 022 022 022 04 003 003 003 04 023 023 023 05 004 004 004 05 024 024 024 06 005 005 005 06 025 025 025 07 006 006 006 07 026 026 026 08 007 007 007 08 027 027 027 09 008 008 008 09 10 028 028 10 009 009 009 10 11 029 029 11 010 010 010 11 12 030 030 12 011 011 011 12 13 031 031 13 012 012 012 13 14 10 032 14 013 013 013 14 15 11 033 15 014 014 014 15 16 12 034 16 015 015 015 16 17 13 035 17 016 016 016 17 18 14 036 18 017 017 017 18 19 15 037 19 018 018 018 19 20 16 038 20 019 019 019 20 21 17 039 Group 3 DSS ETUE Bree Buton DKO RCTUA B2CAU BU B3CAU BU No B5CAU BU 01 22 18 040 02 23 19 041 03 24 20 042 04 25 21 043 05 26 22 044 06 27 23 045 07 28 24 046 08 29 25 047 09 30 26 048 10 31 27 049 11 32 28 050 12 33 29 051 13 34 30 052 14 35 31 053 15 36 32 054 16 37 33 055 17 38 34 056 18 39 35 057 19 i A i ie AC 489 20 ye pie NT 1 439
538. stalled DK424i DK424 or DK280 The RCTUE F processor can be installed in a DK424 or DK280 base cabinet The expansion cabinets can be any combination of DK424 and DK280 except the seventh expansion cabinet must be a DK424 The DK280 expansion cabinet can only support six universal PCB slots in any possible configuration The DK424 expansion cabinet supports eight universal PCB slots only if the RCTUE F is installed in a DK424 base cabinet and the MBJU jumper is removed from the DK424 base cabinet backplane MBJU does not apply with DK424i cabinets This programs exists on DK424i BSCAU BU processors It must always be set to Cabinet Type 1 allowing 10 slots for each DK424i Expansion Cabinet DK280 and DK424 Expansion Cabinets cannot be used with DK424i processors Important 3 12 System amp Station Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment Program 04 Station Logical Port PDN Assignment Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Station Initialized Default See PDNs in the record sheets DK14 Record Sheet 1 2 3 Spkr 0 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port Number s 4 PDN 1 4 digits see table below Port Type for Different Base Configurations
539. start lines and also Tie DID and DNIS lines assigned with Program 17 LED 05 On these lines will use Program 71 1 3 assignments Tie and DID lines assigned with Program 17 LED 05 Off cannot be routed to different destinations in the Day Day 2 Night modes LED 02 Call Forward Station Hunt Override From DSS Console DK424 and DK40i only If a station has activated Call Forwarding or Station Hunting all calls to that statton except for calls from the DSS console position will forward or hunt to another number You can Call Forward from the console itself or from the digital or electronic telephone assigned to it You cannot Call Forward from both it is an either or choice If the console calls using the DSS console station buttons are forwarded the telephone attached to the console will not be forwarded and vice versa This allows the console operator flexibility in reaching a station user that has Call Forward or Station Hunt telephone options activated Note This feature applies to both types of DSS consoles the DDSS and the HDSS LED 01 Tone First Voice First DSS Console The intercom call signal from a DSS console can be set for Tone First Signaling or Voice First Signaling This setting is independent of the system wide signal option in Program 10 1 Thus DSS consoles and their attendant stations can ring with different signaling modes Voice First applies to called PDNs only PhDNs are always tone first System amp S
540. stinations Ringing Destination see legend below Use LED Button 01 to blank out data DNIS Address see legend above For ANI only lines enter address only one assignment is provided for ANI lines without DNIS see legend above 3 152 Route to Ports PhDN DH DN ACD IMDU RMDS Network Table DK40i 0500 0527 0900 0915 036 043 031 300 399 RCTUA 0500 0531 0900 0915 040 047 035 300 399 RCTUBA BB B1CU 0500 0579 0900 0915 090 097 085 300 499 Berane 0500 0739 0900 0915 250 265 245 300 599 RCTUE F BSCAU BU 0500 0835 0900 0915 345 360 340 400 699 All Processors External Page 039 All processors except RCTUE F Night Ring Over External Page 271 Night Ring Over External Page for RCTUE F 366 Route to Ports PDN Route to Ports PDN DK40i 0000 0027 B1CU 0000 0055 RCTUA 0000 0031 B2CAU BU 0000 1111 RCTUBA BB 0000 0079 B3CAU BU 0000 0191 RCTUC D 0000 0239 B5CAU BU 0000 0335 RCTUE F 0000 0335 System amp Station Program 71 DNIS Program 71 4 DNIS and ANI Only Lines Voice Mail ID Assignments KIH KI 1 x 2 x 3 Hold Spkr 4 Spkr 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold DNIS Address see legend above Important DNIS VM ID codes operate with in band
541. stricted office codes are verified when a user dials a seven digit local call in home area code or a 1 plus ten digit long distance call in any area code Notes e Use this program with Program 45 Dial Plan 7 8 or 9 only This table applies to all stations with Program 48 TR Codes 03 10 only TR classes 1 8 not to stations with Program 48 TR Codes 00 01 or 02 UO HIL S9Y IIOL 4 23 Toll Restriction Program 45 2 1 6 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass 4 24 Program 45 2 1 6 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass for Special Numbers that Do Not Begin with Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default A data blank 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 2 L___ DATA 1 5 Digit Code SELECT 1 6 that are not subject to toll restriction First Digit 0 9 only Non first Digits 0 9 SELECT DATA 1 5 Digits 1 When editing 2 e Press LED Button 01 to delete or leave a blank 2 e Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work 4 5 6 Program 45 2 Overview Use this program to allow special CO Area Codes and Centrex feature access codes or extension numbers to bypass toll restriction and route over the local LCR route if using LCR Toll Restriction is always applied after dialing the special numbers assigned to this table
542. t CO line 001 to Delay 2 Ring station 203 Program 80 Set CO line 001 to CF during Delay 2 Ring assignment LED 03 On Set station 203 to CF to Voice Mail When CO line 001 rings the call will forward per station 203 s CF All Calls No Answer etc setting during the Delay 2 ring period Note that only station 203 can be set to ring in the Delay 2 Program 83 ring assignment to allow CF to operate VM will receive station 203 s VMID set via code 656 3 179 System amp Station Programs 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Ringing Programs 81 89 Ground Loop Start CO Line Station Ringing 3 180 Processor Type Program Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System Initialized Default A LEDs On for Port 000 81 Port 001 87 all other LEDs Off 1 2 3 Spkr 8 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 9 fo SELECT Station or DH port r type of ringing see legend below TE Selected trunks ring selected station ports as follows 81 Immediate 84 Immediate 87 Immediate LED Buttons CO line assigned to ring selected station port or DH Group number s Press Scroll to advance or Page to go back
543. t can be connected to the RSTU or RDSU to extend the loop length of standard telephone circuits including the resistance of the phone from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms Secondary Directory Number Super Frame Single line Telephone Simplified Message Desk Interface RS 232 link from PIOU PIOUS RSSU RSIS or RSIU modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata DK voice mail integration Software MIS for ACD Factory installed sub unit board that is piggy backed onto the PSTU or PSTU2 Reference interface points S or T of an ISDN network S T interfaces are RJ 45 8 wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment An NT 1 is needed to network U type BRI lines to S T type interfaces Telephone Application Programming Interface Aisesso 5 GL 9 Glossary TA WSIU GL 10 Term TA T1 DS 1 TCIU1 TCIU2 TCOU TDDU TE TSPI TSIU TTY U Interface Universal slot WSIU Definition Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal that works with ISDN Generally TAs support RJ 11 voice ports and RS 232C or V 35 or V 449 data interfaces See RDTU Caller ID An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK424 Caller ID An optional PCB that provides the Caller ID option in the Strata DK40i Four Circuit Loop Start CO Line Board An optional PCB providing four loop start CO line circuits in the Strata DK40i Fou
544. t verify for a user to successfully complete long distance calling The first five digits of the number dialed to access the long distance special common carrier SPCC The total number of digits allowed following the SPCC number Items 3 and 5 Enter the first five digits of the SPCC telephone number in the spaces labeled SPCC1 Telephone Number Item 3 or SPCC2 Telephone Number Item 5 on the record sheet The initialized state assigns 00000 to Items 3 and 5 Items 4 and 6 The allowed digit length is the total number of digits allowed to be dialed after the SPCC Number and before Toll Restriction Digit Restriction activates This can be 00 99 digits In most cases 99 digits should be allowed for voice mail applications Do not enter a digit length greater than necessary or users may be able to override Toll Restriction Initialized data assigns 00 to items 4 and 6 Enter two digits on the record sheet A restricted station is not able to place a toll call through a long distance carrier by dialing the SPCC1 or SPCC2 telephone number if the station is denied from that number in other toll restriction programs Upon recognizing the first five digits dialed Toll Restriction software is notified to allow the number of digits programmed in items 4 or 6 00 99 following the including the dialed SPCC1 or 2 number The system interprets data to be a seven digit local call or 1 800 number to an SPCC Only five digits are en
545. tation Program 10 3 System Assignments Part 3 of 3 Program 10 3 System Assignments Part 3 of 3 Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default LEDs 11 13 and 20 On all other LEDs Off e H 1 2 3 Spkr 1 0 Hold Spkr 3 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 3 Light the LED Buttons that are marked with an X in the table below uolje S 3 We sis Button LED X LED On LED Off 20 P Dask Number 001 is sent in SMDI CO line number is sent in SMDI packet 19 Speed Dial Entry Timeout 3 minutes Speed Dial Entry Timeout 1 minute 18 Ang Attendant Normal Ringing Pattern Afer Camp Auto Attendant Back to Announcement After Camp on 17 Auto Attendant Ring Before Disconnect time Auto Attendant Ring Before Disconnect time 16 Auto Attendant Ring Before Disconnect time Auto Attendant Ring Before Disconnect time 15 Auto Attendant Sends MOH to Caller Auto Attendant Sends RBT to Caller 14 SMDI Bellcore Standard VM Interface per LED 09 Not used Below 13 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 8 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 0 12 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 4 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 0 11 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 2 SMDI Station Number Digit Length HEX 0 1
546. tations must have LED 14 On in Program 30 to use Verified Account Codes If partially verified the first part of the Account Code is verified and the remainder is not For example if VAC 2734 is set in Program 69 but the digit length is set to eight in Program 60 4 then the user must dial 2734 plus any other four digits to enter a partially Verified Account Code There are many applications for partially VACs For instance using the code in the example above the numbers 2734 could be the user s dial restriction code and the remaining four digits could be a customer client code a sales order etc Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned with Program 70 to each of the 300 VACs This feature can be used to change a telephone s Class of Service to allow long distance calls from restricted telephones only when a verified account code is entered before dialing the long distance number These calls will be recorded with the account code on the system SMDR output uole S 9 We sis Verified Account Code Dial Requirement Assigned on a station by station basis in Program 30 LED 14 On All Account Codes dialed Forced or Voluntary from stations assigned in this program will be verified Code Change Stations selected in Program 30 LED 15 On can change VACs by dialing the following PDN 659 000 499 VAC Redial Verified Account Codes Forced Voluntary Program Options Any stat
547. te ring the Agent telephone e Ifthe call entered the ACD queue prior to Ring No Answer operation delay ringing assignments will not ring only immediate ring assignments Programs 81 84 87 and 81 84 87 will ring Does agent answer ACD Call button before ring agent timer expires Talk on ACD call CO lines that normally route to the ACD group will route to the group s overflow point destination set in Program 14 5 see ACD Flowchart 6 8 6 11 Only one destination per ACD group can be assigned in Program 14 5 Is another agent idle The destination assigned in Program 14 5 will also be the overflow point destination Ring no answer destination Ring No Answer Ring No Answer destination Ring No Answer is a system DN or DH destination is normal CO is another ACD group see destination is Strata DK attendant console or DH port line ringing assignments Program 14 5 built in AA see Program number see Program 14 5 see Program 14 5 14 5 Loop ground start ring or Ground loop start busy override ring the Is an connect to Strata DK AA Is system DN in normal agent ACD Call and route call per AA destination ringing assignments per button idle in the programming busy Programs 81 89 ant group DID Tie DNIS ANI line 84 oe see Notes ring or camp on to station DID Tie DNIS ANI LINE programmed in ring or camp on to system Program 14 2 DN assigned in Program 14 2 of original ACD group
548. te the interface This program assigns the initialization interface When ISDN service is ordered a SPID is issued from the carrier A SPID usually includes a 10 digit directory number along with additional digits which notify the switch as to the type of devices connected to the line and what services features the switch is to provide There are three possible initialization processes including a non initializing terminal one SPID or two SPID interfaces These numbers are entered into the system to allow the interface to automatically initialize the link The type of initialization needed depends on the type of PSTN equipment The basic procedure includes configuring a SPID then the TE performs the initialization identification process and sends the SPID to the network Once the SPID is confirmed from the CO the SPID does not have to be sent to the switch again 7 20 ISDN Program 60 BRI Line Station Operation Assignment Program 60 BRI Line Station Operation Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type System BRI Initialized Default A LEDs Off 1 2 3 Spkr 6 0 Hold Spkr a Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL Slot No LEDs 1 4 Circuits 1 4 see legend below LED RBSU Circuit LED On LED Off 1 1 CO L
549. ted to and rings a station the Caller ID data is stored in the abandon call memory of the station owner assigned to the Caller ID line assigned in this program e Tie DID ANI lines store abandoned call ANI numbers on the Primary and or Phantom Directory Number owner telephones if they are allocated memory in Program 51 Tie DID ANI line calls that are abandoned while Distributed Hunt Group queue will store ANI information on the station owner assigned in this program e ACD or Auto Attendant calls that are abandoned while the call is in queue or calls abandoned while connected to an Auto Attendant or VM device will register on the SMDR report as a call answered by the ACD announcement DN Auto Attendant DN or Voice Mail DN System amp Station Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series Part 1 Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series Part 1 Processor Type ARCTUBA BB RCTUC D and RCTUE F B1CU B2CAU BU B3CAU BU B5CAU BU Program Type Station Initialized Default See each program Program 58 1 Attendant Console Overflow Timer Initialized Default 32 seconds 1 2 3 Spkr 5 8 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 ei a DATA 011 999 seconds DATA Program 58 1 Overview Incoming Line Calls not recalls to attendant consoles wil
550. ter programming Programs to be initialized Add End Program 90 Exit programming mode mode a range of program numbers by entering XX XX or XX XX LEDs 01 and 02 must flash Press LED Buttons 01 and 02 LEDs 01 and 02 must be On Program 90 Overview Program 90 enables you to clear all customer data and initialize individual programs or range of programs Important When installing the system you must run Program 91 9 which runs Program 90 before running any other program if you do not the system could begin to operate erratically Notes Running Program 91 9 automatically runs Program 90 To initialize all programs without dropping calls or erasing user names speed dial numbers voice mail ID codes etc enter 00 99 as Programs to be initialized Each program record sheet immediately follows the program record sheet having the same number example 31 follows 31 record sheet However in system memory all programs follow Program 99 Therefore program ranges must be initialized separately from non star programs unless initializing all system Programs 00 99 For example to initialize Programs 30 30 31 31 and 32 initialize the range 30 32 for Programs 30 31 32 and the range 30 31 for Programs 30 and 31 If you are installing the system for the first time run Program 91 9 to erase random data from RAM caused by battery jumper movement to the internal battery You
551. tered therefore the last digits are wild card digits any number dialed that has the same first five digits as the carrier s SPCC number the system will assume the SPCC is being called UO NILS9Y IIOL 4 21 Toll Restriction Program 45 8 9 Toll Restriction Override Code Program 45 8 9 Toll Restriction Override Code Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Leaves code assignments blank KH 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Item 8 or 9 ai DATA Code Enter 8 to select Code 1 Enter 9 to select Code 2 Enter 1 to 4 digit code from the table below Press LED Button 01 to delete or leave a blank Press LED Button 02 to allow all digits to work SELECT Description DATA 1 to 4 Digits 8 Code 1 9 Code 2 Program 45 8 9 Overview This program enables selected stations in the system to alter the override code These stations are defined by their users specified in Program 30 Button LED 09 Two different codes can be dialed by any station user to override station specific restrictions These codes will not register on SMDR To change the codes from selected stations Code 1 PDN 654 code Redial Code 2 PDN 655 code Redial No
552. tes e Do not use the same four digit codes set in Program 44 1 8 Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override codes e Program 45 8 9 overrides Program 44 1 8 if the same codes are used e Electronic telephone users can use the button instead of the Redial button e Verified Account Codes Forced or Voluntary can also be used to override Toll Restriction on a call by call basis When used for this function the account code will register on the SMDR report see Programs 69 and 70 4 22 Toll Restriction Program 45 1 1 4 Toll Restriction for Office Codes Program 45 1 1 4 Toll Restriction for Office Codes Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Toll Restriction Initialized Default Assigns 976 to first office code blank for other three office codes KH 1 2 3 Spkr 4 5 Hold Spkr 1 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 1 I DATA Office Code 3 digits SELECT 1 4 Press LED Button 01 to delete a digit SELECT DATA Office Code 1 976 Program 45 1 Overview This program enables you assign up to four office codes to be restricted within all area codes This program only applies to telephone users which belong to toll restriction classes assigned via Program 48 If a telephone user does not belong to any class he she is not subject to any of the restricted office codes assigned in this program The re
553. the first dimension usually a CO line number a station port number or a range of ports must be specified Upon specifying this first dimension on the dial pad programming button LEDs 01 20 light in the default configuration The status of each LED can be changed by pressing its associated button Pressing the button while its LED is lit turns the LED Off pressing the button while its LED is Off turns the LED On An example of multidimensional programming is Program 30 Range Programming Data can be entered for a range of stations DN reference ports and CO lines with some programs gt To enter a range Enter a between the starting point of a range and the ending point of a range For example to program the station range of 001 010 for Program 35 press 001 010 When programming a range of station ports the station s programming LEDs indicate whether the data programmed matches for all items in the range LED On Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that lights the particular LED LED Off Indicates that all ports in the range are programmed with the data choice that does not light the particular LED LED Flashing Indicates that data is currently inconsistent for all ports in the range Some may be programmed with the LED On some with the LED Off CO Line Programming Since the programming telephone only has 20 buttons data can only be entered for 20 CO lines at a time gt T
554. tialized Default LED 01 On for all ports kK 1 2 3 Spkr 3 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Station Logical Port unborn p LED Select LEDs to light for the port specified in the last step Mark an X in the Enter the port number s being defined table below for all LEDs which should be lit To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Port Feature LED 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 Camp on Tone to standard telephone 01 DKT or EKT handset Spkr 3 98 System amp Station Program 34 Station Class Of Service Program 34 Overview Program 34 assigns Camp on tone to standard telephones A standard telephone can receive LED 01 On or be blocked LED 01 Off from receiving Camp on tone depending on how LED 01 is programmed for its standard station port When LED 01 is On for a standard telephone Camp on tone is sent when the busy standa
555. ting allows the data call to hunt to an alternate RPCI PDIU station assigned in this program If the hunted RPCI PDIU station is busy the system will ring the next hunt to station and so on If all RPCI PDIU stations in the hunt to sequence are busy then the data caller will receive a busy tone Toshiba recommends that all PDIU DS station ports grouped in a modem pooling or printer pooling server configuration be placed into a hunt sequence arrangement with Program 22 Notes e Program 22 applies to RCPI DI PDIU DI and PDIU DS data calls not telephone station voice calls If programming an RCPI DI or PDIU DI station use the associated DKT logical port number the PDIU DS is programmed using its own unique port number e When a PDIU DS is connected to a modem s assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21 modem hunting is automatic when the user presses the Data Call button to transfer a line call to a modem However if the user dials the modem s PDIU DS s station number modem hunting follows the hunt sequence specified in Program 22 3 63 System amp Station Program 23 Built in Auto Attendant AA Primary Announcement Assignments Program 23 Built in Auto Attendant AA Primary Announcement Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default No ports assigned B 1 2 43 Spkr 2 3 Hold Spkr
556. tion Program 58 DK424 Attendant Console Series Part 1 Notes e EMRG has first priority over the above key assignments e See Program 59 for the function of each button Program 58 5 Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments Initialized Default Blank HK HY 1 2 3 Spkr 5 8 Hold Spkr 5 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT 5 _ L Enter the overflow destination port number Console Number 1 4 Console overflow destination Processor Type Port Range Processor Type Port Range DK14 000 009 B1CU 000 055 DK40i 000 027 B2CAU BU 000 111 RCTUA 000 031 B3CAU BU 000 191 RCTUBA BB 000 079 B5CAU BU 000 335 RCTUC D 000 239 RCTUE F 000 335 Program 58 5 Overview When the attendant console has been placed in the Overflow mode via the Overflow button calls queue to be answered based on the predetermined FIFO or priority basis If a call remains in queue for a period longer than the time period set for the Overflow Timer set in Program 58 1 then the call will overflow to the destination assigned in this program The assigned destination can be either a station voice mail auto attendant or another attendant console e Calls that will overflow include ring transfer incoming CO Lin
557. tion Since the system assigns CO lines 01 17 by default be sure to remove any CO line appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons code Note Ifthe Speed Dial Select button is removed the key becomes the Speed Dial Select button While on an outside call the user must press then to activate the and DTMF tones for the duration of the call gt To assign features to flexible buttons 1 Complete Program 38 before Program 39 Initialized data assigns the keystrip pattern associated with Code 31 from Program 38 2 Use Program 39 Flexible Button Assignments on Page 3 115 to indicate feature buttons Use the programming sequence after this table to perform the following steps 3 Program the port number or enter a range of port numbers 4 Press the button that will be associated with the feature 5 Enter the feature code 6 Repeat this procedure until all feature buttons have been assigned Table 3 3 Feature Button Codes for Digital Electronic and Strata AirLink Wireless Telephones Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Account Code Account Code or ACCNT 450 Allows a Voluntary Account Code entry Alarm Alarm Reset or ALRM 477 Resets alarm condition system wide Alert Signaling see following pages Pages up to 120 idle electronic or digital telephones All Call Voice Page All Call Page or AC 489 over speaker Automatic Busy Redial Auto Busy R
558. tion amp Test Program 92 Initializing Misc Backup RAM Program 92 Initializing Misc Backup RAM Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type Initialization Includes Initializing Speed Dial Number VM ID Codes Character Message Memory Timed Reminders Digital Telephone Volume Called ID ANI and Call Forward Backup RAM Initialized Default See individual programs vy Clear more data 1 2 3 Spkr 9 2 Hold Spkr E Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Enter programming SELECT Press appropriate End Program 92 Exit programming mode buttons as shown below mode 1 101 03 Clears Station Speed Dial Voice Mail ID Codes and LCD memos assigned to Station Speed Dial numbers 2 01 04 Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to System Speed Dial numbers 3 02 03 Clears Character Message Memory Station and System and User Name Number Display 4 02 04 Clears Timed Reminders 1S 1 9 U0 1 2ZzIjeNlu 5 101 05 Resets digital telephone volume levels to initialized settings specifically speaker volume levels for Internal Calls DN Tone BGM Busy Override muted ring and Ring volume to approximately mid range on all DKTs Program 92 5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels Use Program
559. tion and sent to the appropriate route if using LCR Calls started with or are normally not allowed However in some special applications e g Caller ID blocking or might be the first digit before dialing the actual destination s telephone number This program assigns up to nine such codes for toll restriction bypass Digits dialed after the code starting with or are analyzed for toll restriction depending on the option 0 3 assigned following the digit code The option value 0 indicates that no Toll Restriction applies to the telephone number dialed after the code is entered The option value 1 indicates that Toll Restriction is applied as normal after the code entry The option value 2 indicates that the call is restricted when the code is entered The option value 3 applies LCR and TR after the code entry Use this program to allow special CO or Centrex access codes that begin with the or prefix Assign them in this table if it is required to bypass Toll Restriction and or route over the local LCR route if using LCR T R options 0 3 will be applied after dialing the special numbers assigned in this table Toll Restriction Program 45 3 1 9 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass For Special Numbers that Begin with In the Data Digit String part of the programming sequence note that for two digit codes such as 87 82 67 Key LED Button 01 must be pressed to get to the followi
560. tituted for the first ten characters of the outgoing dialed number field The account code field is used for Name Location data from the Table XXX SMDR Start of Call E911 Programming Overview 11111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 E004 3710 3710 08 14 00 05 32 5833710 911 MARY M NO 200 L LCD User Name 65 80 Call duration 23 30 Originating number Time of day at end of call 19 21 always 911 61 63 Originating DN 12 15 Station ID ae i 10D maximum characters 43 52 PDN of originating station 7 10 Originating trunk number 2 4 S for start of call 2998 E for end of call 1 Notes e This record is similar to a Start record except that e The first character E indicates End of Call e Call duration is provided e Time of day shows disconnect time Figure 8 2 SMDR End of Call Programming Overview The basic programming for the E911 CAMA trunks feature is accomplished using Programs 11 12 and 13 Program 10 is not used for RMCU RCMS CAMA trunks it is only used when E911 is provided using an adjunct E911 device LL64 Program 39 tips When a user presses a normal CO line button and dials 911 the telephone drops the normal line button and connects a CAMA trunk to an idle PDN or CAMA CO button on the telephone Then the DK sends 911 plus the telephone s CE
561. to determine how to handle the call Note In Release 4 15 DID DNIS digits must be registered in this program in order to route incoming calls on PRI Wild card entries are allowed for handling a larger number of LDNs For example a DID group using 583 3700 through 583 3799 can be entered as a single LDN entry 583 37 To handle a single number differently that falls within this range enter that number in a lower number index e g Index 01 5833769 and Index 02 58337 If a match occurs on Index 01 the call will be handled based upon Index 01 7 33 ISDN Program 66 6 LDN Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignments Program 66 6 LDN Trunk Group to Channel Group Assignments Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default Blank kK A 1 2 3 Spkr 6 6 Hold Spkr 6 I Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SEL 6 T L GPP Select ISDN trunk ports for each LDN index Enter the Channel Group Number Press Page or Scroll for the next CO line ports 0 BRI 1 8 PRI Enter the LDN Index 1 48 Channel 1 dex CO Line Ports Channel index CO Line Ports Channel dex CO Line Ports Group Group Group Program 66 6 Overview Th
562. to Release 3 2 Hold Display Scrolling was always enabled Hold Display Scrolling requires an LCD telephone LED 05 LCD Individual Message This option defines which ports can allows LCD digital and electronic telephones to store up to 10 personal messages It offers the option of entering alphanumeric memos for each of the LCD s station speed dial numbers See the record sheet legend for the maximum stations that can have this option A low port must be disabled LED 05 Off before adding a port above the initialized ports LED 04 Message Waiting RCV If the message waiting indication is not desired on an electronic digital or standard telephone this program can be used to deny it This does not affect that station s ability to send a message waiting indication to another station PDN or PhDN Do not use this option to enable disable MW lamps on standard telephones use LED 03 below for standard telephones LED 03 Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Enable This option is used to identify which station ports are connected to Standard Telephones 2500 or 500 type telephones that have Message Waiting Lamps LED 03 should be turned On for all Standard Telephones ports that should support Standard Telephone Message Waiting lamps LED 03 must be turned Off for all other station ports including digital and electronic telephone ports that support Message Waiting LEDs This also applies to Voice Mail ports Important Standard tel
563. to attendant DISA Call Forward External and DNIS and DTMF receiving decoding Code 1 Standard Telephone Ring Down Timer This feature is available for Release 4 0 and higher Code 1 assigns the number of seconds that a Hotline or Emergency standard telephone waits after going off hook before automatically ringing a preassigned directory number If a valid feature access code or DN is dialed prior to the ring down timer expiration then ring down does not occur Ring down applies only to standard telephone ports not electronic or digital telephone ports Ring down destination numbers are assigned in Program 38 3 44 System amp Station Program 12 System Assignments Basic Timing Code 3 Pause Timing Code 3 enables station users to program short and long pauses in Speed Dial numbers Applies to pauses inserted in Speed Dial numbers used for both telephone voice calls and data calls from data interface units The short pause length can be set system wide for either 1 5 or 3 seconds with this program The long pause is always 10 seconds Code 4 Flashing Timing When on a CO line a station user can press the Flash button or enter access code Cnf Trn 45 and the line opens flash for 2 seconds 0 2 seconds not used in the USA or 0 5 seconds depending on this assignment This choice reflects whether to disconnect and regain dial tone 2 seconds or to use PBX or Centrex features which require a flash signal 0 5 seconds It
564. tone first systems Callers on the far end Strata DK can answer Tie lines calls not DID lines from the Far End Key PBX in the hands free mode You must program the near end Strata DK as Voice First in Program 10 1 LED 01 or the far end caller must dial 1 to switch from ring to voice signaling uoleys 9 We sis 3 55 System amp Station Program 17 DID Intercept Port Number Vacant or Wrong Number Program 17 DID Intercept Port Number Vacant or Wrong Number Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default No data 1 2 3 Spkr 1 7 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT DID Line Number ______ c HUNT TO Enter Intercept Station Intercept does not apply to Tie line calls Logical Port No To add a port range enter XXX XXX low port high port LED Button 01 enters blanks A Intercept Port DID Line Intercept Port Processor Type DID Line Range Range Processor Type Range Range DK14 N A N A B1CU 001 032 000 055 DK40i 001 012 000 027 B2CAU BU 001 120 000 111 RCTUA RCTUB 001 016 000 031 B3CAU BU 001 120 000 191 RCTUBA BB 001 048 000 079 RCTUC D 001 144 000 239 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 001 200 000 335 Intercept Port Intercept Port Intercept
565. toring uole S 9 We sis You can use the Privacy Release Privacy Release button to disable Privacy on a call by call basis this button does not disable Executive Override Blocking Enable this feature if a modem is assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21 to provide data security for modem standard telephone ports Disable this feature LED 18 Off for the modem standard telephone ports assigned in Program 21 if using the system modem pool for data calls that must be switched between voice and data LED 17 End to end Signal RCV VM When enabled LED 17 On provides End to end Signaling of Dual tone Multi frequency DTMF tones through the system Required on all voice mail ports RSTU RSTU2 RDSU RSTS PSTU PESU RDSU QSTU2 and KSTU2 for proper signaling communication LED 16 Receive Voice Mail VM ID Code When a station is call forwarded to a VM system certain identification ID DTMF tones are automatically sent to direct the call to a specific mailbox VM ID Code 656 or DNIS VM ID Code The automatic ID is also sent to the VM device when electronic digital or standard telephone users retrieve messages via the Message Waiting buttons VM ID Code 657 The VM port must be programmed for this feature to allow the reception of VM ID DTMF digits 3 85 System amp Station Program 31 Station Class of Service 3 86 LED 15 Toshiba Stratagy Stratagy DK and or VP Integration A Tone D Tone When enabled LE
566. transfer recall When enabled LED 20 On allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts Use this feature for standard telephone ports connected to voice mail devices only not for station ports connected to telephones The station number is not returned it blind transfers to a DND station Note You must enable Toshiba Stratagy Stratagy DK VP B No Station with LED 19 to allow this function LED 19 Toshiba Stratagy Stratagy DK VP B No Station DTMF B tone is sent to Toshiba voice mail systems to signify a recall where Toshiba voice mail systems already knows the recalling station number Again this allows Toshiba voice mail systems to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts Use this feature for standard telephone ports PSTU RSTU RSTU2 PESU RDSU KSTU2 and QSTU2 connected to voice mail devices only not for station ports connected to telephones LED 18 Executive and Privacy Override Blocking Modem When enabled LED 18 On denies a station user the capability to break into a station connection with Executive or Privacy Override Use this feature for standard telephone ports PSTU RSTU RSTU2 PESU RDSU KSTU2 and QSTU2 connected to a modem voice mail auto attendant or ACD digital announcement device in order to ensure data and voice security Also use this feature to deny override of any station This feature does not block Attendant Supervised Loop Moni
567. trol and NFAS Assignments X 43 4 PRI Explicit Implicit Coding X 44 1 8 Toll Restriction Class 1 8 Traveling Class Override Codes X 44 91 93 Emergency Bypass of Forced Verified Account Codes X 44 BRI Service Profile Identifier SPID Parameters X 45 1 LCR Toll Restriction Dial Plan xX X 45 2 Toll Restriction Disable X 45 3 6 Special Common Carrier SPCC Numbers and Authorization Code Digit x Length 45 8 9 Toll Restriction Override Code X 45 1 Toll Restriction for Office Codes in Local and All Other Area Codes X 45 2 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass for Special Numbers That Do Not Being x x with or Digits 45 3 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass Special Numbers Beginning with or X X 45 4 LCR Toll Restriction Bypass X X 46 2 4 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Area Codes Assigned by Class X 46 6 8 Toll Restriction Allowed Denied Office Codes Assigned by Class for x Local Calls M JM AO Overview Numerical Program Listing 5 5 E w S 2 3 c F Program Title 2 z 3 S SSe a Zla lg la gels a Ello l lala e 46 10 80 Toll Restriction Class Parameters X 46 11 81 Toll Restriction Class Parameters X 46 21 46 31 46 41 oe Toll Restriction Classes 2 8 X 46 71 46 81 47 Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes X 48 Station Toll Restriction Classification X 50 1 Least Cost Routing Parameters
568. try of a single key For example Type prog then press Press Enter Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry Entries without Plus spaces between them show a simultaneous entry Example Esc Enter Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry Example 5 Tilde Means through Example 350 640 Hz frequency range Denotes the step in a one step procedure gt Denotes a procedure Used in a programming sequence to denote a variable LED button A 03 number on the black button represents a specific LED button eee Indicates continuation of a series of numbers entered Grey words within the printed text denote cross references In the See Figure 10 electronic version of this document Library CD ROM or FYI Internet download cross references appear in blue hypertext viii Introduction Related Documents Media Related Documents Media Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD ROM FYI or in print To find the most current version check the version date in the Publication Information on the back of the document s title page General Descriptions Strata DK General Description Strata DK Call Center Solutions General Description Installation and Programming Strata DK Installation amp Maintenance Manual Strata DK Programming Manual Strata AirLink Wireless Systems Installation Guide Feature Description Strata DK Feature Descripti
569. tside party can listen to a message together R3 2 and above In DK release 3 2 software VM ports are allowed to set up tandem calls with two CO lines and then hook flash and hang up to exit the call allowing the two CO lines to remain connected For this feature LED 09 must be Off for VM ports LED 05 08 Voice Mail VM Groups 1 4 The system allows the following VM station port groups to be configured for support of VM auto attendant devices One group is intended for each different device System Number of VM Groups LEDs DK14 1 2 05 06 DK40i DK424 DK424i 1 4 05 08 All standard telephone ports RSTU RSTU2 PSTU PESU RDSU RSTS KSTU2 and QSTU2 connected to a particular VM machine should be assigned to the same VM group SMDI or DTMF Integration The purpose of VM grouping is to allow efficient use of the message waiting MW set and cancel operations from the VM machine Since each digital electronic and standard telephone can only have a maximum of four messages waiting the VM device should set MW only once regardless of how many messages there are Assign all ports of each Program 31 VM Group to a unique Program 40 Distributed Hunt DH Group Telephones should Call and or Call Forward to the DH Group DN to connect to VM In Programs 13 and 32 assign the lowest port in the Program 31 VM group as the message center Do not assign the VM DH Group port as the message center LED 04 Voice Mail VM t
570. u use RSIU RSIS or TSIU for MIS output you must set the appropriate port for MIS operation speed using Program 76 6 2 Automatic Call Distribution Program 09 Auto Attendant Prompt ACD Group Assignments Program 09 Auto Attendant Prompt ACD Group uOHNqHysiq 12D dyewo ny Assignments Initialized Default n a 1 2 3 Spkr 0 9 Hold Spkr 4 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold SELECT Dialed Digit s h AUTO ATT DIAL ACD Group Number Menu prompts offered to Enter the ACD Group numbers which will receive caller 1 or 2 digits Auto Attendant calls Press if establishing the first digit of a two digit dialing format Processor ACD Group Numbers DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU BU 01 16 RCTUE F B5CAU BU 01 16 Dialed Digit EIN g ACD Group Number Department Division Etc Menu Prompts 0 1 21 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Do not use digits 2 3 and 4 unless the station numbering plan is changed These numbers conflict with the default station PDNs of the system Program 09 Overview Program 09 enables you to assign Auto Attendant AA prompt numbers that will route calls to specific ACD Groups Important Jfusing DK Built in AA program call flow assignment of D
571. uit and two digital telephone circuits on each PCB The QCDU2 interfaces with digital telephones PDIU DIs PDIU DI2s RPCI DI ADMs connected to the telephones and PDIU DSs but does not support a DDSS or DDCB console Auto Attendant Feature Key DK14 Provides built in Auto Attendant software without Program 03 assignments and installs directly onto the QRCU3 PCB Standard Telephone Interface Unit DK14 Provides two standard telephone circuits ports and interfaces with standard telephones Auto Attendant devices separate BGM source connections voice mail machines and facsimile machines Term QRCU2 RAM RATU RBDB RBSU RBSS RBTC1A 2M RBUU RBUS RCMS RMCU RCCB RCIU2 RCIS RCOS Glossary QRCU2 RCOS Definition DTMF Receiver ABR Tone Detector Unit DK14 Provides three circuits to receive DTMF tones required for DISA and devices connected to QSTU2s and three circuits to detect busy tone required for the ABR feature Random Access Memory Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system configuration and feature programming RAM is read write memory and can be easily revised in programming Attendant Console Interface Unit Optional PCB that can support up to four attendant consoles and or PC attendant consoles Battery Distribution Box lInterface used to connect reserve power batteries to systems with three or more cabinets also provides six RBTC1A 1 5M cables to
572. upervisor Reset Queue Alarm button to flash and the Supervisor telephone to sound a continuous beeping alarm when the number of calls in the ACD queue exceeds the number of calls set in this program for a time duration set in Program 11 7 Program 14 8 DATA must be set to 2 if using this option see Program 11 7 and Program 14 8 for more information 6 31 Automatic Call Distribution Program 14 8 Alarm Pattern Assignments Program 14 8 Alarm Pattern Assignments Initialized Default 0 for each group Hold 8 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Spkr 1 4 Hold Spkr HH 1 2 3 DATA Pattern 0 1 or 2 SELECT 8 0 None SELECT ACD Group No 1 Immediate Alarm Program 14 71 2 Alarm Timer 1 and 2 Program 14 72 11 6 and Program 14 73 11 7 Processor ACD Group Numbers DK40i RCTUA RCTUBA BB B1CU 01 08 RCTUC D B2CAU BU B3CAU CU 01 16 RCTUE F BSCAU CU 01 16 ACD Group Number Alarm Pattern Program 14 8 Overview This program selects the type of queue alarm that is sent to the Supervisor telephone for each ACD Group Only one alarm type is allowed for a given ACD Group The Supervisor can reset the alarm by pressing the flashing Reset Queue Alarm button DATA 0 No Alarm This s
573. urce DK Master free run Assignment Example DK Span Line DK424 clock source Other DK Slot 13 T1 PCB or PBX etc Program Data blank button Button 01 1864 for 42 1and 42 2 Program 42 2 Overview Release 3 1 and earlier Assign the Secondary Backup Timing Reference with this program To assign RDTUs as the Master Clock Reference free run leave Programs 42 1 and Note 42 2 blank Press button LED 01 to enter blanks 3 130 System amp Station Program 50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs Program 50 Caller ID Circuit Assignments to CO Line PCBs Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs Program Type System Initialized Default No RCIU RCIS circuits assigned 1 2 3 Spkr 5 0 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Run Program 91 2 a Processor CO Line Range DK14 001 004 System power must be cycled or Program 91 2 must DK40i 001 012 an eva completing 50 a eny to transfer RCTUA 001 016 ata from temporary memory to working memory RCTUBA BB 001 048 CIUNO RCIU RCISU Caller ID circuit number 001 200 or use LED Button 01 to erase data For RETUC D 0012144 DK14 enter the Caller ID interface box line number RCTUE F 001 200 001 004 BICU Redes Any Caller ID circuit can
574. urce The RPSB provides outlets for three power supplies One RSPS is required for systems with three or four cabinets two or three RSPSs for five or six cabinet systems Cabinet Power Supply Furnishes power to all of the stations and peripherals connected to the cabinet PCBs Each Base and optional expansion cabinet has a separate power supply Term RRCS RSIS RSIU RSTU RSTU2 RWBF1 RWIU WWIS RFMF R48S SDN SF SLT SMDI SMIS SSTU S T Interface TAPI Glossary RRCS TAPI Definition Dual tone Multi frequency Receiver An optional upgrade to the system common control unit RCTU that provides Dual tone Multi Frequency DTMF receivers for system Direct Inward System Access DISA CO lines E amp M tie lines DID DNIS and ANI lines Auto attendant announcement devices remote change of call forward external destination DNIS external call routing and stations and other peripherals that connect to standard telephone circuits The RRCS comes in three models the RRCS 4 provides four DTMF receivers the RRCS 8 eight DTMF receivers and the RRCS 12 12 DTMF receivers Optional RS 232 Serial Interface Unit A subassembly installed on the RSIU optional interface unit that allows the system to be connected to any of the following features voice mail SMDI MIS for ACD SMDR local DK Admin DK Backup personal computer external maintenance modem Open Architecture personal computer Optional RS 23
575. usy standard telephone receives a transferred CO line call and when the busy standard telephone receives a direct call from a station or CO line System amp Station Program 31 Station Class of Service BOV and Camp on muted ring tone frequency for standard telephone BOV tone is a 160ms burst of 1209Hz unmodulated twice three seconds apart Camp on tone is two one second bursts of 1209Hz interrupted by 160ms bursts three seconds apart LED 10 All Call Page Allowed Digital and Electronic Telephones When enabled LED 10 On any station can be allowed to receive an All Call Page and still have the ability to initiate an All Call Page Up to 120 stations can be can be assigned and paged at one time All Call Page is treated as any other page group See Program 30 for telephone page group assignments and Program 10 2 LED 15 for External Page with All Call Page option see Program 34 LED 09 No Station plus CO Line Conference Origination by VM When enabled LED 09 On prohibits VM ports from setting up conference calls with a station and the outside line party and tandem calls with two outside lines Use this feature for VM RSTU RSTU2 PSTU PESU RDSU RSTS KSTU2 QSTU2 ports This LED should be On when VM Auto Attendant does screened or supervised transfers and Off if only doing blind transfers If LED 09 is Off or On station can still set up a conference call with an outside line and a VM port so the station user and ou
576. utton to station 200 and 208 using Program 39 Make sure PhDN is assigned to an owner telephone 200 or 208 in Program 33 Using Program 39 assign PhDN button 500 on stations 200 and 208 3 183 System amp Station Programs 81 84 and 87 Ground Loop Start CO Line to DN LED Flash Assignments Programs 81 84 and 87 Ground Loop Start CO Line to DN LED Flash Assignments Processor Type DK14 DK40i all RCTUs and BCUs System Initialized Default CO 018 200 flashes Port 000 81 and Port 001 87 Program Type CO line number see table below To add a CO line range enter XXX XXX low CO line high CO line 1 2 3 Spkr 8 Hold Spkr Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Ringing Assignments pail ess Station Logical Port Number 1 Day Ring 4 Day 2 Ring Enter the PDN or PhDN that should flash 7 Night Ring LED Button 01 enters blank data Processor CO Line ees Na ai Processor CO Line eak Eon a DK14 001 004 000 009 500 509 B1CU 001 032 000 055 500 579 DK40i 001 012 000 027 500 527 B2CAU BU 001 120 000 111 500 739 RCTUA 001 016 000 031 500 531 B3CAU BU 001 120 000
577. vides the system with four loop start CO lines Supports Caller ID when used with RCIU RCIS circuits Integrated Data Interface Unit Replaces the normal digital telephone base so that the telephone can be used for the transmission and reception of data between a terminal personal computer connected to the telephone and devices connected to other PDIU DIs or to modems printers and computers which are in turn connected to PDIU DSs The PDIU DI is also used to provide personal computer auto dialing of voice calls without a modem and access to outside dial up data services and or bulletin boards via modem pooling Note Replaced by RPCI DI Stand alone Data Interface Unit Used for modem pooling printer sharing and accessing host mainframe computer Digital Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides the system with eight digital telephone circuits In addition to digital telephones the PDKU can support data interface units stand alone and integrated a digital DSS console DDSS RPCI ADM and a digital door phone lock control unit DDCB Primary Directory Number Electronic Telephone Interface Unit An optional PCB that provides the system with eight electronic telephone circuits which can support electronic telephones a Background Music source a door phone lock control unit HDCB an electronic DSS console HDSS and amplifiers for two CO line conference calls The PEKU is also used with older Strata systems
578. view This program defaults all ports to the 00 index which means that outgoing calls will present the Directory Number entered in Program 68 2 as the Calling Number for outbound calls Each station on the Strata DK can send a unique number based on the station making the call assigning an index other than 00 and entering the number as Type 2 to be used in Program 69 2 or send a Type 1 DID number by entering a prefix code to create a complete number Note If the PSTN is to use this number for billing the call the number sent must match those provided by the PSTN 7 43 ISDN Program 69 2 Special Number Assignment 7 44 Program 69 2 Special Number Assignment Processor Type DK40i all RCTUs Release 4 0 or higher and BCUs Program Type Trunk PRI and BRI Initialized Default None 4 2 3 Spkr 6 9 Hold Spkr 2 Hold Spkr Hold Spkr Hold Index SEL 2 Enter Calling Party Numbers 11 digits Enter Index Number 1 32 DATA Type 1 2 or enter 00 for the ISDN 1 Prefix plus 09 DID digits service default number 2 Fixed Number Type Calling Party Number Index Type Calling Party Number Index Type Calling Party Number Program 69 2 Overview This program defines the parameters for the Calling Party Number CPN to be presented for a call depending upon whether the ISDN trun
579. view Use Program 51 to define which area code calls are placed over which LCR Plan Number 01 08 or 01 16 Therefore calls made to all area codes are routed over route definitions defined in Program 54 for Plan 08 or 16 following the time schedule specified by Program 53 for Plan 08 or 16 unless other assignments are made in plans 1 15 Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of area codes and or office codes 011 can be entered as an Area Code into any LCR plan to route direct dial international calls via LCR Example Any area code entered in a Program 51 LCR area code table for plans 1 15 is subtracted from Plan 16 An area code cannot be lost If it is subsequently deleted from Plans 01 07 or Plans 01 15 LCR software automatically adds it to Plan 08 or 16 Remember that LCR matches the home area code entered in Program 50 2 with the LCR route plan containing the home area code in its Area Code Table The home area code must be entered into one of the 16 available LCR route plans through Program 51 Thus LCR is informed of how to handle local calls Typically systems are configured to have the LCR route plan containing the home area code as the same as the local route plan defined in Program 50 5 This usually is programmed by the installer to be Route Plan Number 1 rather than the default Plan 08 or 16 HMIS Example Plan 01 includes home area code 800 888 Plan 08 includes long distance area codes Plan 16 is used
580. y Forwards calls to selected station if Call Forward No Answer Call Frwd No Answer or CFNA 458 station doses nolanswor Call Park Park in Orbit or PARK 464 Call Park Only CP Display Button and Mode 64 can be Call Park LCD Display Park Orbit Display or CPD 465 used interchangeably Displays call parked via telephone LCD System amp Station Program 59 Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes Table 3 8 Additional Feature Button Codes continued Button Function Button Labels Code Notes Call Park and Page Call Park Page or CP PG 463 Parking and Paging Park Pickup Picks up ringing or held intercom trunk Call Pickup Directed Directed Pickup or PKUP 484 calls and page Call Pickup Group 4 Group Pickup 480 Picks up a call to anyigroup to which station is assigned in 31 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb or DND 498 Prevents calls to station Separates the called party s ISDN sub 7 i address from the called party number ISDN Sub ddrass Sub agdigs oer The digit performs this function on standard telephones Initiates DK to send dialed digits to the ISDN network when this button is pressed from a digital or electronic telephone ISDN Start Start A99 Program 63 2 invokes the same function when the Dial Timer expires Also see Tone Button in this table LCD Message Select LCD Msg Select or LCD M 481 Begins LCD message selection Night Transfer Lock aT Used t
581. y Option ANI or DNIS Telephone LCDs can display ANI or DNIS information as a priority when Tie DID lines or ISDN channels receive both ANI and DNIS digits This system wide option determines if ANI or DNIS information should display on telephone LCDs when Tie DID lines provide both ANI and DNIS information together on incoming calls It is not possible to display both ANI and DNIS information simultaneously on the same call but the Page button on the LCD telephone can be used to toggle between the ANI and DNIS information when an ANI DNIS line is ringing the telephone After answering the call it is not possible to toggle the LCD display between ANI and DNIS LED 05 DNIS Line Non DNIS Line This option assigns Tie and or DID lines to follow Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS Program assignments Turn LED 05 On for DNIS only or ANI with DNIS lines Turn LED 05 Off and LED 07 and 08 On for ANI only lines which should route per the last address assignment in Program 71 Important Any Tie or DID line can be assigned to use the features of Program 71 and 72 If normal Tie DID lines are assigned Name Tags External Routing selective Day Day2 Night Routing In Program 17 Turn LED 05 On and turn LED 06 07 and 08 Off for those lines then program the lines as required in Program 71 and 72 In this case Program 09 DID and Program 04 Tie do not apply to these lines LED 04 DID Tie Second Dial Tone Option If the second dial ton
582. y either once every 30 seconds or once every minute Turn LED 11 On for 30 seconds turn Off for one minute LED 10 System Speed Dial Override Toll Restriction System Speed Dial can be chosen to override Toll Restriction if LED 10 is turned On LED 09 Exclusive Hold Exclusive Hold allows electronic and digital telephones to place calls on hold by pressing the Hold button twice so that other stations cannot pick up the held call with a CO Line button This feature can be disabled on a system wide basis Any station can pick up an Exclusive Hold call by using the call pickup code LED 08 Alternate Point Answer Transfer Privacy If Transfer Privacy is selected a ring blind transferred call can only be answered at the called station upon transfer of that call after the transferring party releases the call With Alternate Point Answer any electronic or digital telephone with the appropriate CO line or DN button can pick up a call transferred to another telephone In either case Call Pickup will function from any station Station DN and CO line transferred calls that occur on DN buttons are always Private System amp Station Program 10 1 System Assignments Part 1 of 3 LED 07 Ring Transfer of CO Line Allowed This option defines station operation for transferring DN and CO line calls If Ring Transfer is allowed the system will allow blind transfers to busy or idle stations The transferring station may release a tra
583. y tone when transferring a call to a busy BSR station e Do not assign BST BSR to built in Auto Attendant announcement ports e BST LED 20 On should be assigned to all ACD agent telephones and BSR LED 19 On should be assigned to all ACD supervisor telephones to allow agent assistance calls to supervisor telephones that are busy e LEDs 01 02 and 04 must be On to allow the Telephone s Message Waiting LED to function with voice mail even if the Telephone is not an LCD type uole S 9 We sis e Dial out with or without Toll Restriction must be allowed to use Speed Dial Buttons after answering incoming calls If a CO line is put on hold Toll Restriction is applied to stations that are restricted when the held line is picked up by a toll restricted station If Dial out with T R is enabled the CO line will drop if a station dials a restricted number after answering an incoming call or if any digit is dialed with dial out not allowed LED 18 Automatic Hold When enabled LED 18 On station users with CO Line buttons can place a CO line or DN call on hold then call another line or station just by pressing another CO Line or DN button and dialing the number If Automatic Hold is not allowed LED 18 Off users can put calls on hold and place calls but they must press the Hold button before accessing another line or DN Notes e COline or internal calls that appear on the DN buttons will automatically hold when
584. ype TCOU Common Control 91 None rune DKY TDDU or IUE TALE Common Control w K4RCU3 92 4 DTMF ABR TBUU Common Control w K5RCU or 98 5 DTMF ABR Slot Number 00 11 12 13 14 EROU PIOU PIOUS RSSU PEPU 41 None 91 92 or 62 or 00 11 16 00 or 00 or PEKU 21 8 EKT PCB Code E of hae 31 af PEKU with EOCU 22 8EKT PCB Type PEKU with DSS 23 8 EKT nit PEKU with EOCU DSS 24 8 EKT iii PESU 25 2SLT 4 EKT ponte PESU with EOCU 26 SAAS KSTU2 RSTU2 Stratagy DK 31 4 SLT 8 SLT 8VM A TCOU PCOU RCOU RGLU2 11 4 CO panels RCOU RCOS 17 8LoopCO A Base Unit DKT CKTs PDKU DK40i Expansion KSU and RWIU Ot JELK Cabinet Label 4 7 Base Unit DKT CKTs Sonra 2 i o9 p amp PDKU w DIU or SP oca 6 8 DKT Slot Number 15 16 17 18 Base Unit DKT CKTs and PDKU with DSS w or w o 64 8 DKT PCB Code DIU or SP OCA PCB Type KCDU 65 2 CO 4 DKT KCDU SP OCA or DIU 66 2 CO 4 DKT Options RDSU RSTS 27 4 DKT 4 SLT Station BRI Port Numbers RDSU RSTS with DIU or SP OCA 28 4 DKT 4 SLT CO Tie DID BRIT1 RDDU TDDU 16 4DID Lines Ane Numae 71 T1 Lines 8 ch R4 3 RDTU TET Notes 72 T1 Lines 12 ch R4 3 e For systems containing ISDN PCBs immediately after running REMU 13 ene En Program 03 make sure to run Program 60 to identify all RCIU2 RCIS TCIU2 81 40r8 Caller ID station NT LT and CO TE BRI circuits for each BRI circuit TBSU or RBSU 77 2 BRI S T installed Program 60 causes station port and CO line shifting on PCBs installed in higher slots th
585. ystem amp Station Program 71 DNIS 3 156 when the DNIS Tie DNIS extension or ANI call forwards to VM This program can also be used with non DNIS Tie and or DID lines to assign VMID digits to normal Tie or DID numbers The last address in Program 71 4 can be used to assign a VMID code to ANI only lines see Table 3 9 All ANI only lines will be directed to the same Voice Mailbox To assign an ANI only Tie DID line to Program 71 4 assignments Program 17 LED 05 must be turned Off and LED 07 and 08 must be On for lines that receive ANI digits only Program 71 5 Overview This program is used to assign names to each DNIS number The names for each DNIS Tie DID extension number is normally supplied by the customer Each DNIS name can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters The DNIS Tie DID extension name will display on a telephone s LCD when the DNIS Tie DID extension number rings the telephone directly or is transferred Call Forwarded or Hunted to the telephone To assign a Tie DID line to Program 71 5 assignments Program 17 LED 05 must be turned On for lines that should display DNIS Tie DID extension name tags When a Tie DID line receives both DNIS and ANI digits on the same call Program 17 LED 06 determines what information DNIS extension name or ANI number will display as a priority when the line rings incoming to the system This program can also be used with non DNIS or ANI Tie and or DID lines to display names associate

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

IBM Multi-Burner - Guia do Usuário  Philips HAIRCLIPPER Series 3000 hair clipper HC3420  SGH-E200 Mode d`emploi  Oster TSSTTV0000 Instruction Manual  SWE ENG DE - Exotek Instruments  TRENDnet TPL306E2K Network Hardware User Manual  08-page (4 sheet) web template.qxd  Geneious User Manual  Advantech iCDManager SDK_Windows  User Manual - INSEAD CALT  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file